aaa as

mrse beth th YA

Bian

Cop eee
Aieneise

fiom tie
abe acta ts

" - ASA wt
: retaraes
bute hated OF 0 va

LOE LOE LL OH TEL ate pt K $4 ME
Oe PE = Puitantie BWR Son Bn th, Os PA
Lorde
ibagage.b

AN A 6 Mh

wane} et 08
= rey -«

WF Be Fe SRE fe MP Te a He
RRL Me ot Oe OYE 6 er ae
BEE AA RE. He int
For be oe

3355 De iedct tee

Dinh meet eth

oF A nee Meter eR anes PB TR i DA oy oe
OE LBA BRIA NMED fort F AM My 28

4, we she
he ~ ral
Sotatens, Be RM ina NR

POEM ED Be ROEES Nee
(tO He EE Bod ace
rors

MLD NRE eA
eee Seed

eB Ae Se Oh Rete
a et ee ee
ete

So an Ne dO tted
BE Oh.
ee ea ot eee
Rae ot ree ee
Cae cat or ray

Dene
st Ne athe ee
Botte, Seat

eee

1S AA et act MLSE He tae Ro een a
men “

rs

See ty

oGreactcenipig eo
20 a Rael be O be Sp Ty Oe Bi ek
ERA Ace eae Dee KPa BM fa dw

ee
‘ow

BoP hen FP once
erg 0? a eee :
Ni itt Oe Ai Air AG Hoe oR gods cta te

OA 1 BWR MR PRAM oh EB ow
POT we ob 2 6

at ihe 6
eS eh LF.

Coen ar
eae eee

er et a ae
Late

—. = Ww pa ¥ =, BVA ai) MS) ay a Tito ——
a1 < =i z < z
_ a z * = = =
) . Es S NS ca 4 O
| SA S = ‘SS Fs) “2 3
ORS 2 Ee ww 2 = ce
| dln: = aN > = =
) = ” : PA ” =
NOILOLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3SIYVYEIT LIBRARIES INSTITI
) Py Aes ” > (7p) >
| bs oe ” o a
; Ce fea G foes cS
| O S = O pay )
z oI 2 at =z
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI S3tYv
= Ber z a -
: ° APES 2) = fo)
— wo _ w =.
S 9) as Po] ke
> = 4 »
in.& as = re
| ae a : a =
| Zz o Zz im g
NOILALILSNI SAIYVUSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTIT
=z w P= eee op) z be
| Mi. Ss ee XS \ = <= K
| dir IN. oer = .
| fe ‘ 5 2 p oO QW : FS Sic.
fife * g ERK 2 2 N&
. 5 ape = 3

LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31¥YY

n” = 2) - no
us & Ww & ul
x. a ra oa o
< 3 pa) < rs <x
pe 5 oc & oc
faa) = a — oO
Za re) ies oO se
ner ze ps Fe Nyce
S3SIY¥VYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTIT!
— Fs i= Zz i re
: = c = :
> = > I 5 >
is E q eo a
” uw” rm
o cs x z a
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS
” Fac no. a w
= < = <= =
x 6 ms . & =
Z Z 8 oe
= is ee am =
S > = ~ >" = Sen. atk
i a ” vay Fe 77) Z
SNORNLLSNI _NVINOSHLINS (Sa 1YVvug i Ve BRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITI
: é ul 2 ae
a ce ot a EE.
4 ae 5 e 2
: Cc
| 2 é si are =
: ie) E aE ro) aa} Oo
j Zz —) = pa =a
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI S31uV
= ay z iS =
} — . 0 ea ow °
[2 Pe) LER x» =
z = ne > 2 > =)
J — 4% 9] = 8] esis |

NVINOSHLIW

s saluvagly
2 = “
z = :
(@) aaah
22) YO xy
s a O %
Yj = =
lie = S
ee ” Pad,
-RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
Mf 2p) > se)
7 ul | B ls
= a ae ie —
i Pip 3 :
a YW a
a UG = 2
rv : eee a
NVINOSHLINS S3IuVvualT
os = fa
jee) 2 ies)
a . = 8)
> ASK
> ONE .
sie SS a a
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
wn aoe « n
e = < =
; 4
WY : E WE
aes Past ate
INLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S31YVUdII
4 > ” =
wo a w
: : :
S E E
: : :
f pas |
S SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
S ~ S
pos “oO —
: 2 :
E : > =
= 8) —

PURE ees eae Qn
= = <
: = Na :
z 8 NAG
2 = AL 2
= = S\S =,
= eos

NVINOSHLINS S3IY¥VvVygi
_ ‘ w” —
6 uu 5
= pee =
ae -
a S
— foal ~_
oO — (@)
ae aS | =z
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
5 Pale 5
aoe eo] bent
= 2 5
Es 5
- - E
z D z

SMITHSONIAN

SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS

LIBRARIES SMITHSON INSTITUTIO!

* AS
uu a
a 5 =
< &
e <
s 5
a z=
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IuVHRI
Ti aS =
: :
8)
> ‘ ra
-
oD Zz
LIBRARIES
Ron Y z
. = <
> rs
. 3 a
» 2 e
etree S
*. rg Uv) a,
NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS S3IYVYd
= ml m
77) ei
a oc
ond <x
c a
a2, y om
O oa
z Soy veoh
LIBRARI ESS cESOR ian INS Thor
= y -
- GY ®
a Oy >
= 4 2
z ie
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS Sa IYVvVuadl
: a
z =
EE © a
ey wm
ope re)
4 = =
= >
w Zz
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTIO

NOILNLILSNI

NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31u¥Vvu dg

uvugiT LIBRARIES

ITUTION

ae ¢e ue PANY

; te ;

We <
Coden ar

7
J \s fs
Ni nT
f
' i
A el “), i
et Must .
.
f
; i
Ae! @
Bee ht ie vA
(A it f?
Hl
X
n

BOs. 3
ee 7

See AN VAN COCK FOUN DATION
PUBL TOA LEON S

i, oe: CVOE
THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA

First SERIES

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS ,

VOLUME 3
1936-1944

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES 7, CALIFORNIA
1944

ALLAN!) HANCOCK FOUNDA T LO
PUBL Vet TOn’s

ALLAN. HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3
1936-1944

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES 7, CALIFORNIA
1944

3

10.

CONTENTS

PAGES
Mosses of the G. Allan Hancock Expedition of 1934, Collected by Wm.
R. Taylor, by William Campbell Steere. (Plate 1)..........--..-.------------------ 1- 14
Myxophyceae of the G. Allan Hancock Expedition of 1934, Collected
by VWinkendhaylor, by, Prancis) Drouet. (Plates) 2-3) eee eee 15- 32
Lichens of the G. Allan Hancock Expeditions of 1934, Collected by
Winskewbaylor by7Carrolll Walliam) Dodgens ee eee 33- 46
Plankton Diatoms of the Gulf of California Obtained by the G. Allan
Hancock Expedition of 1936, by W. E. Allen. (1 figure).....................- 47- 60
Plankton Diatoms of the Gulf of California Obtained by Allan Han-
cock Pacific Expedition of 1937, by E. E. Cupp and W. E. Allen. (1
MMapwanGs blatesic4=I5)) ek elect cee eee eee ce nc aha ct an diinas Secasececetccceseacwene 61-100
Phycomycetes Recovered from Soil Samples Collected by W. R. Taylor
on the Allan Hancock 1939 Expedition, by F. K. Sparrow, Jr. (Plates
CURT) a IETS Oa a nea oe UU ee Gr eG atts 101-114
Field Observations on the Algae of the Gulf of California, by Elmer
NVeal elelO) ayy SO Tet ete eee ee UY Le acc Pt ee alte ec 115-120
A Review of the Genus Rhodymenia with Descriptions of New
Species, by Elmer Yale Dawson. (Plates 18-30)....-.....-------------------20------ 121-182
Some Lichens from the American Tropics Collected by Wm. R. Taylor,
Dy OV Geared rick sess. 8 oe ee eh ee 183-188
The Marine Algae of the Gulf of California, by Elmer Yale Dawson.
(ORV tes 3 77h) eee teens eel ara SE Ee cee ee ee 189-454
ID nrc exo er eea ero ACEC ie die aE te ge pee bre Ee Ra eee 455-464

BMITHSUL MAR & 4 1990

TNSTITUTIO

<P See eee

130.
131.
135.
136.
USife
138.
139,
141.
iSite

Corrections

under (5) for 1923 read “1922”

under (7) after Pugill. Alg. Yemens, read “(1850)”

under (18) for pls. 50-51 read ‘‘pl. 50”

under (22) for Plate 23 read “Plate 22”

under (24) for Plate 26 read “Plate 25”

under (25) for 1884 read “1885”

under (31) for Plate 25 read “Plate 24”

under (34) for Plate 24 read “Plate 23”

under Agardh, J. G., for historia read “historiam”; after De Algis Novae
Zelandiae marinis, read “Lunds Univ. Arsskrift VIII’; for 1884 read
“1885”; for 1896 read “1894”; for continuata read “continuatio”; under
Kuetzing, F. T., for 1849-1869 read “1845-1871.”

. THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBER |

MOSSES
OF THE G. ALLAN: HANCOCK. EXBEDIFION
OF 1934, COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

(Wits One PLiatTe)

by
WILLIAM CAMPBELL STEERE

OF THE
DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY
AND THE HERBARIUM
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
; 1936

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA, AND
GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, 1n 1933, 1n 1934, anv in 1935.

MOSSES
OF THE G. ALLAN: /HANCOCK) EXPEDITION
OF 1954, COLLECTED BY WM: R. TAYLOR

By WILLIAM CAMPBELL STEERE

Tue University oF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
Tue Hancock Paciric ExprepiTions
VotuME 3, NuMBER 1

Issuep Fespruary, 1936

Tue University oF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PREss

Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

Copyricut 1936
BY
Tue University oF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA

MOSSES OF THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION
OF 1934, COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

(Wir One Pirate)

By WILLIAM CAMPBELL STEERE
Department of Botany and the Herbarium of the University of Michigan

Considering the fact that most of Dr. Taylor’s collecting was done
in the immediate vicinity of the seashore, since he was engaged
primarily in the collection of marine algae, it is not surprising that
his series of bryophytes is not a large one. However, the smallness
of the collection is well compensated for by the unusual significance
and interest of the material. Among the thirty-three species here
reported, two, Fissidens Hancockiana from Colombia and Barbula
Taylorii from the Galapagos Islands, are proposed as new, whereas
many others represent new records for the areas considered, and
consequently add much to our knowledge of their geographical
distribution. Since six of the nine mosses from the Galapagos Islands
represent new reports for the area, it is obvious, as already pointed
out by Mr. Bartram (1933), that a full bryological exploration of
these Islands will appreciably extend the list of moss species, and
probably reveal new and interesting forms, as well.

FIssIDENTACEAE

Fissiens MO.Luis Mitt., Jour. Linn. Soc., Bot. 12:600. 1869.

On red sandstone at the bottom of a forest stream, in rather less
than two feet of water. Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); Febru-
ary 21, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. rroo.

Since this material was growing eighteen to twenty-four inches
below the surface of the water during the dry season, and must
consequently be much more deeply submerged during the rainy
season, it seems to represent a completely aquatic phase of the
species. Such a habitat is all the more noteworthy, because of the
relative scarcity of aquatic species in the section Bryoidium.

Distribution: Cuba; Jamaica; Trinidad; Panama; western South
America.

ae

2 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS voL. 3

Fissidens (Semilimbidium) Hancockiana, sp. nov.
Plate 1, figures 1-3.

Planta 5-10 mm. alta, erecta, atro-vel pallido-viridis, vetustate
fuscescens; folia 13-25 juga (pares 2-5 infima valde minores),
lanceolata, apicibus acutis serrulatis; vaginarum laminae marginatae,
foliis 2/5 breviores; costa crassa tenuiter vel haud flexuosa, percur-
rens; marginis cellulae perlongae angustaeque, hyalinae sed aetate
decolorantes; cellulae ceterae parvae, 5-7 » diametro, mamillosae
papilla centrali singulari, ita ut marginem crenulato-denticulatum
simulans et areolas obscurans; cellulae apicium ultimae laevigatae
et valde maiores, haud papillosae; lamina inferior haud decurrens.
Autoica; antheridia sub perichaetio; archegonia in cauli primo ter-
minalia, vel in gemmis axillaribus, vel in ramosis axillaribus perbre-
vibus aut elongatis; fructus singularis vel nonnunquam duplex; seta
vetustate rubra, 2-4 mm. longa, flexuosa; capsula subobliqua vel
horizontalis; urnula 0.6-0.7 mm. longa; cervix stomatosa; operculum
rostratum urnulam aequilongum.

Plants of small to medium size, 5-10 mm. high, erect, somewhat
caespitose, stiff, increasing in size each year by a resumption of
growth at the apex of the stem, or through the development of
axillary, dorsal, easily separated innovations, or both, the old stems
finally becoming prostrate, bearing several erect secondary branches;
dark to yellowish-green, turning reddish-brown with age, the stem
and costa becoming red even in rather young plants; leaves in 13-25
pairs, the lowest 2-5 pairs smaller than the others, 1.0-1.5 mm. long,
0.2-0.3 mm. wide, oblong-lanceolate, tapering rather gradually to
a straight or very slightly falcate acute and serrulate apex, with a
conspicuous border on the sheathing laminae, extending slightly
beyond their juncture, the sheath reaching about three fifths of the
way to the apex; terminal leaves only slightly or not at all larger
than the others, all with a stout, rarely slightly flexuous costa which
is percurrent or very nearly so; the cells of the border are very
long and narrow, hyaline or pale yellow, becoming colored in old
leaves; the remaining cells small, 5-7 » in diameter, each cell mamil-
lose, with a single high, central papilla, so that the unbordered leaf-
margin is crenulate-denticulate and the areolation somewhat obscure,
except at the serrulate apex where the cells are about twice as large
and not papillose; inferior lamina ceasing abruptly at the base, not
at all decurrent. Autoicous; the antheridia in a very short, bud-like

no. 1 STEERE: MOSSES 3

branch immediately below the perichaetium; archegonia numerous,
their position exceedingly variable, terminal on the main stem, or in
axillary buds on the dorsal side of the stem, or on very short to
elongated axillary branches which bear rhizoids at their base and
are easily detached, all types often on the same plant; sporophytes
single or not infrequently 2 from each perichaetium, stages of widely
differing ages often occurring on the same plant, or even from the
same perichaetium; seta yellow, becoming red shortly after matu-
ration of the capsule, 2-4 mm. long, quite variable in length, flexuose;
capsule inclined, slightly asymmetric, the urn 0.6-0.7 mm. long, its
cells mamillose and projecting, their angles strongly thickened, the
neck stomatose; lower half of the peristome teeth red and conspicu-
ously incurved, the upper half pale and suddenly erect; operculum
conic and long rostrate, as long as the urn; calyptra small, shed
very early; spores smooth, small, 12 » in diameter.

On clay soil, Port Utria, Choco, Colombia; February 14, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. 1081 (type specimen, in the U. S. N. Herbarium).

This species possesses a combination of characters which serves
to distinguish it rather easily from the species most closely related
to it. The principal diagnostic characters are the long stems, with
an unusually large number of leaf-pairs, the red stem and costa,
the serrulate leaf-apex consisting of enlarged, smooth cells, the
peculiar growth-habit, and the character of the inflorescence, in-
cluding the variable position of the archegonia.

DIcRANACEAE

CAMPYLOPUS INTROFLEXUs (Hedw.) Brid., Bryol. Univ. 1:472. 1826.

On thin soil, near Wedemann place, inland on Santa Maria
(Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. root.

Distribution: An exceedingly widely distributed species, reported
from the southern United States, Mexico, West Indies, Central and
South America, the Galapagos Islands, Africa, and Australasia.

LEUCOBRYACEAE

LeucospryuM Martianum (Hornsch.) Hampe; C. Miill., Linnaea
17:317. 1843.
‘ On trunk of palm, Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); Febru-
ary 21, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1003.

4 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS voL. 3

Distribution: West Indies; northern South America.
This is apparently the first record for Central America.

OcToBLEPHARUM ALBIDUM Hedw., Descr. Musc. Frond. 3:15. 1792.

On humus and rotting wood, Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast) ;
February 21, 1934; W. R. Taylor Nos. 1108, 1122.

Distribution: Widely distributed throughout tropical regions;
Galapagos Islands.

OcTOBLEPHARUM PULVINATUM (Dozy et Molk.) Mitt. Journ. Linn.
Soc., Bot. 12:109. 1869.

On trunk of tree, Gorgona Island (off Narino), Colombia; Feb-
ruary 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1020.

Distribution: West Indies; Central and South America.

CALYMPERACEAE

Catymperes DiscirorME C. Miill., Linnaea 21:183. 1848.

On trees, in forest, Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); Febru-
ary 21, 1934; W. R. Taylor Nos. 1107,r11%21.

Distribution: Santo Domingo; northern South America.

This seems to be one of the first reports of this species from
Central America.

CatymMpPeEREs Donne ui Aust., Bot. Gaz. 4:151. 1879.

On trunk of tree in dense forest, Gorgona Island (off Narino),
Colombia; February 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1023.

Distribution: Florida; West Indies; Guatemala; Panama.

This collection apparently represents a southern extension to the
known geographical range of the species.

SYRRHOPODON INCOMPLETUs Schwaegr. Suppl. 2(2):119. 1824.

On trees in forest, Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); February
21, 1934; W. R. Taylor Nos. 1109, 1111.

Distribution: Florida; West Indies; Central and South America;
Galapagos Islands.

POoTTIACEAE
Barbula (Hydrogonium) Taylorii Bartram et Steere sp., nov.
Plate 1, figures 6-8
Planta sterilis, perennis, aquatica, simplex vel leviter ramosa;
caules 2-4 cm. longi, paralleli, debiles, supra frondosi, infra nudi;
folia triseriata, acyclica, madidata squarroso-patentia, exsiccata pa-

no. 1 STEERE: MOSSES 5

tentia et languide crispa, concava, lineali-lanceolata, 2 mm. longa,
0.2-0.3 mm. lata, apice acuta, valde concava; folii margo aequus,
integer; costa robusta, percurrens, superficiei dorsalis parte superiori
papillosa; cellularum basalium saepta aliquantulum crassa, elongata
vel rectangularia; cellulae superiores quadrangulares, saeptis crassis,
tenuiter papillosae, 7-8 x 9-10 » longae margine, costam versus
maiores; antheridia, archegonia et fructus ignota.

Sterile; plants dark green, perennial, simple to sparsely branching,
in deep tufts, aquatic; stems 2-4 cm. long, closely approximated,
parallel, lax, green and leafy above, becoming reddish-brown and
leafless below, more or less covered with a thin felt of tangled white
radicles, which become reddish with age; leaves in three ranks which
are spirally arranged on the stem, disappearing below or with only
the stout costa remaining, squarrose-spreading when moist, spread-
ing and slightly crispate when dry, especially the apical leaves, con-
cave, linear-lanceolate, about 2 mm. long and 0.2-0.3 mm. wide at
the broadest part, tapering gradually to an acute, very concave apex;
leaf-margin plane to slightly recurved, entire except for the papillae
borne by the marginal cells; costa stout, up to 50 » in diameter half
way up the leaf, consisting of greatly elongated cells in the basal
portion and of rectangular cells in the upper half, distinctly papil-
lose on the dorsal side above and less conspicuously so on the ventral
surface above, percurrent or nearly so, in cross-section showing
mostly 4-6 guide cells, with a broad dorsal stereid band and a nar-
rower ventral one, the outermost cells on both sides differentiated,
but not as large as the guide cells; basal cells with somewhat
thickened walls, without papillae, those at the extreme basal margin
linear, the others somewhat elongated to rectangular, passing very
gradually in the upper part of the leaf into thick-walled, finely papil-
lose, four-angled or rounded cells which are smaller and wider than
long at the margin, 7-8 » X 9-10 », but become progressively some-
what larger and occasionally longer than wide toward the costa.
Antheridia, archegonia and fruit unknown.

In the spring at “Baroness von Wagner’s” place, associated with
Callicostella pallida (Hornsch.) Jaeg., Santa Maria (Charles or
Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R.
Taylor No. rorg (type specimen, in the U. S. N. Herbarium).

The only other American species of Barbula in this section is B.
Ehrenbergi (Lor.) Fleisch. var. mexicana Thér., which has been

6 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS voL. 3

reported from Mexico and British Honduras. B. Taylori differs
from this species in the following respects: the leaf is of quite dif-
ferent form, being much narrower, the basal cells are more con-
spicuously differentiated, the upper cells and costa are papillose,
and the apex is more acute (PI. 1, fig. 9).

BaRBULA REPLICATA Tayl., Hook. Jour. Bot. 15(C):49. 1846.

On shallow soil, near Wedemann place; inland on Santa Maria
(Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934;
W. R. Taylor No. 1002.

Distribution: Ecuador; Peru; Bolivia.

This is a new record for the Galapagos Islands.

HyYMENOSTOMUM sp.

On shallow soil, inland on Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana)
Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No.
1000.

These specimens, although sterile, have the characteristic leaf shape
and structure of the genus Hymenostomum, of which no members
have yet been reported from the Galapagos Islands.

BRYACEAE

BryYUM ARGENTIUM Hedw. var. LaNATUM B. et S., Bry. eur. 6(9):7.
pl. 41. 1839.

On shallow soil, associated with Campylopus introflexus (Hedw.)
Brid., near Wedemann place, inland on Santa Maria (Charles or
Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R.
Taylor No. roro.

Distribution: Cosmopolitan in the warmer parts of the earth.

This species has apparently never before been reported from the
Galapagos Islands.

BARTRAMIACEAE

PHILONOTIS TENELLA (C. Miill.) Besch., Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot. VI.
Ser. 32207. 1876,

On tree in dense, wet forest, Gorgona Island (off Narino), Colom-
bia; February 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1024.

Distribution: Florida; West Indies; Central and South America.

no. 1 STEERE!: MOSSES 7

OrTHOTRICHACEAE

MacroMITRIUM MUCRONIFOLIUM (Hook. et Grev.) Schwaegr.,
Suppl. 2(2):61. pl. 170. 1826.

On the trunk of a tree, inland on Santa Maria (Charles or Flore-
ana) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor
No. 1003; on tree in dense, wet forest, Gorgona Island (off Narino),
Colombia; February 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1022.

Distribution: Florida; West Indies; Central and South America.

MiIcRoMITRIUM FRAGILE (Mitt.) Jaeg., Ber. St. Gall. Nat. Ges.
1872-73:157. 1874.

On tree in forest, Jicarita Island, Panama (west coast); February
20, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1088-a.

Distribution: Mexico; Central America; Guadalupe; tropical South
America; Galapagos Islands.

HELICOPHYLLACEAE

HELICOPHYLLUM ToRQUATUM (Hook.) Brid., Bryol. Univ. 2:771.
1827.

On humus and decaying roots, Jicarita Island, Panama (west
coast); February 20, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1088.

Distribution: Throughout the American tropics.

RHACOPILACEAE

RHACOPILUM TOMENTOSUM (Sw.) Brid., Bryol. Univ. 2:719. 1827.

On tree trunk, among hepatics, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana)
Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1007.

Distribution: Throughout tropic and subtropic America.

This is a new record for the Galapagos Islands.

PTEROBRYACEAE

ORTHOSTICHOPSIS TETRAGONA (Sw.) Broth., Engl.-Prantl, Pflanzen-
fam. 1(3):805. 1906.

On tree in forest, Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); February
21, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1098.

Distribution: Mexico; West Indies; Central and tropical South
America.

8 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VoL. 3

METEORIACEAE

MerTeorropsis PATULA (Sw.) Broth., Engl.-Prantl, Pflanzenfam.
1(3):825. 1906.

On tree in forest, Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); February
21, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1104: on tree, mixed with hepatics, near
Wedemann area, inland on Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana)
Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. rorz.

Distribution: Mexico; West Indies; Central and South America.

This is the first record of the species from the Galapagos Islands.
Mr. Bartram (1. c.) has suggested that Meteoriopsis Anderssoniu
(C. Mill.) Broth., which has long been known from the Galapagos
Islands, probably represents this species or a form of it.

NECKERACEAE

NEcKEROPSIS DISTICHA (Hedw.) Fleisch., Laubmfl. Java 3:879.
1907.

On trees in forest, Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco, Colombia;
February 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1026.

Distribution: Florida; Mexico; West Indies; Central and South
America.

NECKEROPSIS UNDULATA (Palis.) Broth., Engl.-Prantl, Pflanzenfam.
Bd 0h 112187) 1925,

On trees, Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco, Colombia; Febru-
ary 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1056: Bahia Honda, Panama (west
coast); February 21, 1934; W. R. Taylor Nos. 1113, 11109.

Distribution: Florida; West Indies; Central and South America.

PILOTRICHACEAE

Pi,otrRicHUM AMAzonuM Mitt., Jour. Linn. Soc., Bot. 12:387.
1869.

On tree in forest, Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); February
21, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1112.

These specimens, which bear antheridia, are noteworthy for the
large numbers of peculiar green propagula produced on the ultimate
branches.

Distribution: Guatemala; South America.

no. 1 STEERE!: MOSSES 9

PILOTRICHUM BIPINNATUM (Schwaegr.) Brid., Bryol. Univ. 2:263.
1827.

On tree in dense forest, Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco,
Colombia; February 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1030.

Distribution: West Indies; South America.

HooKERIACEAE

CALLICOSTELLA PALLIDA (Hornsch.) Jaeg., Ber. St. Gall. Nat. Ges.
1875-76:353. 1877.

On dead wood, associated with Taxithelium planum (Brid.) Mitt.;
Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); February 21, 1934; W. R.
Taylor No. 1102.

Distribution: West Indies; Central and South America.

CycLopicTyon ALBicAns (Sw.) Broth., Engl.-Prantl, Pflanzenfam.
Mi 3))12935., 1907.

In the spring at “Baroness von Wagner’s” place, intermixed with
Barbula Tayloru; Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galap-
agos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. rort.

Distribution: Mexico; West Indies; Central and South America.

Hooxertiopsis pirFusA (Wils.) Jaeg., Adumb. 2:253. 1874-75.

On moist clayey soil, associated with Taxithelium planum (Brid.)
Mitt.; Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco, Colombia; February 13,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1075-a.

Distribution: Panama; Cocos Island.

LEPIDOPILUM FLEXIFOLIUM (C, Mill.) Mitt., Jour. Linn. Soc., Bot.
12-375. 1869.

A few isolated plants of this species were found in a tuft of Acro-
portum pungens (Hedw.) Broth.; Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes,
Choco, Colombia; February 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1037.

Distribution: Trinidad; South America.

SEMATOPHYLLACEAE

AcROPORIUM PUNGENS (Hedw.) Broth., Engl.-Prantl, Pflanzenfam.
Hid! IT) 11343621925:

On decaying wood in forest, Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco,
Colombia; February 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1036.

Distribution: Antilles; Panama; tropical South America.

10 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VoL. 3

TAXITHELIUM PLANUM (Brid.) Mitt., Jour. Linn. Soc., Bot. 12:496.
1869.

On decaying wood and moist soil, Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes,
Choco, Colombia; February 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1075-b:
Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); February 21, 1934; W. R.
Taylor No. 1101.

Distribution: Widespread throughout the American tropics.

SEMATOPHYLLUM CAESPITOsUM (Sw.) Mitt., Jour. Linn. Soc., Bot.
12:479. 1869.

On moist soil, Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco, Colombia;
February 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 1074.

Distribution: Florida; Mexico; West Indies; Central and South
America; Africa.

HyYPNACEAE

VESICULARIA AMPHIBOLA (Spruce) Broth., Engl.-Prantl, Pflanzen-
fam. 1(3):1094. 1908.

On soil, Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco, Colombia; February
13, 1934; W. R. Taylor Nos. 1030, 1044.

Distribution: Florida; West Indies; Central and South America.

RHACOPILOPSIS TRINITENSIS (C. Miill.) E. G. Britt. et Dixon,
Jour. Bot. 60:88. 1922. [R. Pechuelu (C. Mill.) Card. Rev. Bryol.
40:19. 1913].

On tree in forest, Bahia Honda, Panama (west coast); February
21, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. rr1o. (Pl. 1, figs. 4-5)

Dr. Taylor’s specimens of this species, which is as unusual in its
appearance as in its geographical distribution, differ rather sharply
from the several collections in the Herbarium of the New York
Botanical Garden. Although the serrate, dimorphic, asymmetric
leaves with well-marked and frequently inflated alar cells allow it to
be placed in no other genus, these plants are smaller and more
lax than the others examined, and possess, in addition, attenuate
branches. Both dorsal and ventral leaves are narrower than the
descriptions and illustrations would indicate (for instance, those of
Brotherus, 1925), and the ventral leaves have conspicuously recurved
margins, instead of plane margins (figs. 4 and 5). Rhacopilopsis
trinitensis is known to vary widely, however, as demonstrated by its
ample synonymy. It seems advisable to wait until more American

MO ly - STEERE: MOSSES 11

material becomes available for comparison before considering the
creation of a new species to fit these specimens.

The rather constant presence of a row of two or three suddenly
inflated hyaline or occasionally colored alar cells in this genus sug-
gests that its affinities may be with the Sematophyllaceae rather
than with the Hypnaceae.

Distribution: Trinidad; French and British Guiana; Angola,
Congo; Madagascar.

12 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

LITERATURE CITED

Bartram, FE. B.
1933. Mosses of the Templeton Crocker Expedition collected by John Thomas
Howell and lists of the mosses known from the Galapagos Islands and from
Cocos Island. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. IV. Ser. 21:75-86.

Broruerus, V. F.
1925. Musci. In Engler und Prantl, Die natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien. Ed II.
11:473, fig. 757.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE

Figs. 1-3. Fissidens Hancockiana sp. nov.
Fig. 1. Fruiting plant, x 20.
Fig. 2. Whole leaf, x 63.
Fig. 3. Detail of leaf-apex, showing areolation, x 450.

Figs. 4-5. Rhacopilopsis trinitensis.
Fig. 4. Dorsal side of stem, x 40.
Fig. 5. Ventral side of stem, x 40.

Figs. 6-8. Barbula Taylorii sp. nov.
Fig. 6. Upper part of plant, x 18.
Figs. 7-8. Leaves, x 40.

Fig. 9. Barbula Ehrenbergti var. mexicana.
Fig. 9. Leaf, x 40.

STEERE: MOSSES

STEERE: HANCOCK EXPEDITION MOSSES

:
BA ATA
serrate
y
iS wy

‘THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBER Z

MY XOPHYCEAE
OF THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION
OF 1934, COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

(Wirn Two Puates)

by
FRANCIS DROUET

OF THE
DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY
UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
ey. : ‘ 1936

~~

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA, AND
GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, 1n 1933, in 1934, anv in 1935.

MYXOPHYCEAE
OF THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION
OF 1954, COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

By FRANCIS DROUET

Tue UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
Tue Hancock Paciric ExpepiTions
VotumE 3, NuMBER 2

Issuep Novemser, 1936

Tue UNIversiry oF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA Press

Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

CoryricuT 1936
BY

Tue UNIVERSITY OF SouTHERN CALIFORNIA

MYXOPHYCEAE
OF THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION OF 1934,
COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

(Witu Two Prates)

By FRANCIS DROUET

Department of Botany, University of Missouri

The Myxophyceae listed here were found in thirteen samples of
marine algae collected by Dr. William Randolph Taylor on the
Galapagos Islands (Archipelago de Colon) and the Revilla Gigedo
Islands, and on the Pacific coast of Mexico and Costa Rica, during
the G. Allan Hancock Expedition of 1934. These samples consist
principally or entirely of blue-green algae; as the other marine plants
collected are examined, it is expected that more epiphytic Myxo-
phyceae will be found and reported. The phycological literature of
the general region has been listed or summarized by Robinson (Proc.
Amer. Acad. 38(4): 79-82. 1902), Howe (Mem. Torr. Bot. Club
15: 4-7. 1914), and Setchell and Gardner (Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci.,
ser. 4, 19(11). 1930). The myxophycean flora has not been ex-
haustively treated by any one author; the largest number of species
(22) reported for any one area is listed by Setchell and Gardner
(ibid.) for Guadalupe Island, Baja California, and for the Revilla Gi-
gedo Islands, Colima. Original material cited in the list below is to be
distributed, on behalf of Captain G. Allan Hancock, to The Uni-
versity of Southern California, the United States National Herbari-
um, the Herbarium of the University of Michigan, my personal
collection, and possibly other depositories. Professor Taylor has been
most generous in allowing me to study this material and in offering
numerous welcome suggestions during the writing of this report.

CHROOCOCCACEAE

CHrRoococcus TurGipus (Kiitzing) Nageli, Gattungen einzelligen
Algen, p. 46, 1849; Geitler, Rabenh. Kryptogamenfl. 14: 228. 1930.

Forma cellulis praecipue 8» ad 12, crassis, tegumentis evidenter
lamellosis. Fig. 16.

16 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VoL. 3

ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands, in an inland salt pool, north
end of Isabela (Albemarle) Id., near Albemarle Point, No. 123, Jan-
uary 12.

var. SUBMARINUS Hansgirg, Oesterr. bot. Zeitschr. 39: 6. 1889;
Geitler, Rabenh. Kryptogamenfl. 14: 230. 1930.

Forma cellulis sine tegumentis 154 ad 30 crassis, aerugineis vel
luteolis vel violaceis; tegumentis crassis, haud evidenter lamellosis.

ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands, with Calothrix pilosa Harv.
about the edge of a brackish lagoon near high water level, Albemarle
Point, Isabela Id., No. 96, January 12.

GoMPHOSPHAERIA APONINA Kiitzing, Algae exsiccatae, Dec. XVI,
No. 151. 1836; Geitler, Rabenh. Kryptogamenfl. 14: 245. 1930.
Forma cellulis vulgo 3 ad 6p latis, 6% ad 10 longis. Fig. zo.
ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands, salt pool at north end of
Isabela Id., near Albemarle Point, No. 123, January 12; and in an
inland salt lagoon, Fernandina (Narborough) Id., No. 155, Jan-
uary 14.

MerismMopepiA GLAucA (Ehrenberg) Nageli forma MEDITERRANEA
(Nageli) Collins, Phycotheca Boreali-Americana No. 1651; Geitler,
Rabenh. Kryptogamenfl. 14: 264. 1930.

Cellulae 6m latae. Fig. r.

COSTA RICA: Port Culebra, tide pools, No. 535, February 24.

Individuals were rare and intermingled with other algae. Geitler
(ibid.) suggests that this form and M. Gardneri Setchell (Univ.
Calif. Publ. Bot. 2: 239. 1906) are morphologically identical.

JoHANNESBAPTISTIA PRIMARIA (Gardner) J. deToni, Noterelle di
nomenclatura algologica. I. Alcuni casi di omonimia (Missoficee),
p. 6. 1934.

Cyanothrix primaria Gardner, Mem. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 7: 31.
1927:

Cyanothrix Willei Gardner, loc. cit.

Nodularia ? fusca W. R. Taylor, Papers from Tortugas Lab.
Carnegie Inst. Washington 25: 48. 1928.

Johannesbaptistia Willei (Gardner) J. deToni, loc. cit.

Johannesbaptistia Gardneri Frémy, Bull. Soc. Hist. nat. Afr. Nord
26(4): 95. 1935.

ERRATA

_ - P. 17, insert following line 35 —
maria is described as having cells 10 to 154 wide and C. Willei as

P. 23, line 7 —trato should be strato

P. 25, line second from bottom of page — monile should be monilis

NO. 2 DROUET: MYXOPHYCEAE 17

Filamenta uniseriata, recta aut flexuosa, 8 ad 23, crassa, vel
variis algis permixta vel in stratum aerugineum mucosumque ag-
gregantia; cellulis discoideis, 44 ad 17.5 latis, 24 ad 6p longis;
protoplasmate pallide aerugineo-caeruleo, saepe olivaceo aut brunneo
aut etiam aureo-brunneo, homogeneo aut paulum granuloso; cellula
apicali saepius depresso-conica; tegumento homogeneo aut rarius
circum cellulis binas adjacentes tenui lamelloso, 1.54 ad 6p crasso,
conspicua delimitato, chlorozincico iodurato non caerulescente. Fig.
3 et 4.

FLORIDA: Dry Tortugas, among other filamentous algae, Long
Key, W. R. Taylor, July 1925 (original material of Nodularia ? fusca
W. R. Taylor, in the private collection of Professor Taylor).
PORTO RICO: San Juan, Lake Tortuguero, N. Wille No. 830b
(type of Cyanothrix primaria Gardner, in Herb. N. Y. Bot. Gard.),
830e (type of C. Willei Gardner, in Herb. N. Y. Bot. Gard.), 844e,
849c, February 5, 1915. ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands, bottom
muck in the center of an inland salt pool, north end of Isabela Id.
near Albemarle Point, No. 123, January 12; bottom sample from
an inland salt lagoon, Fernandina Id., No. 155, January 14. Profes-
sor l’Abbe Frémy reports collections also from DUTCH WEST
INDIES: Buen Ayre, Oranjepan, Hummelink, and from ALGERIA:
Southern Oran, Ain Ouarka, Mme. Gauthier-Liévre.

This puzzling and recently discovered alga appears to be widely
distributed in saline and subsaline pools along tropical coasts.
Originally described from Porto Rico by Professor Gardner in 1927,
the species has already within a space of eight years accumulated
the astonishing array of synonymy displayed above. Professor Frémy
(ibid.) has reviewed this synonymy in his excellent article. There
is no adequate reason to discard the binomial /Johannesbaptistia
primaria (Gardner) J. deToni.4

As Professor Frémy has already pointed out, Professor Gardner
separated his two species of Cyanothrix primarily on the basis of size
of cells and filaments. The original publication gives us to understand,
however, that Professor Gardner felt at the time of writing that he
may have been dealing with a single variable species. Cyanothrix pri-
having cells 6 to 6.54 wide. The macroscopic appearance of the type

.11I am indebted to Professor W. R. Taylor and Dr. M. A. Howe for the use of
the various specimens of Johannesbaptistia cited here, and to Professor N. L.
Gardner and Professor l’Abbe P. Frémy for the use of certain literature otherwise
unavailable to me.

18 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

specimens in the Herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden and
the fact that they are both numbered 83o indicate that these original
specimens were made up from the same sample, and it was to be
expected that the two species described should be found mixed
together.

During examination of the material from the Galapagos Islands,
it early became evident that many individuals fall between the limits
of measurement originally ascribed to the two species. Though fila-
ments were none too abundant in either No. 123 or No. 155, I
measured the width of cells of one hundred filaments in the former
sample to ascertain to what extent the size of cells might vary.
Since the shapes of cells in all filaments were essentially similar—
all disc-shaped, and circular in end-view and narrowly rectangular
or ellipsoidal in optical side-view—I assumed the linear measurement
of width to be a fair index of size for such a comparative study. A
similar plan was proposed for the type material from Porto Rico,
but here the filaments were so much more rarely encountered than in

Number of filaments in Number of filaments in

Width of cells2 our No. 123 from the Wille No. 830b and 830e
im microns Galapagos Islands from Porto Rico
4.0-4.5p 3
G5 a, 9 2
Bash 10 6
aie 42 10
FAisiah A 17 12
Risso) 5 7 10
Os 10.54. 9 10

105-115. 3 7
fs 12.5 6
12513 op 5
Hea Se 4
14 515.5 3
eats 3
16.5175. 2

Total 100 80

2 Filaments in which the width of cells varied measurably are listed in the table
above according to the width of the largest cells.

No. 2 DROUET: MYXOPHYCEAE 19

our own material that in the end I was forced to be satisfied with
observing only eighty individual filaments. The table above shows
the distribution of these measurements of cell-width in the material
from both the Galapagos Islands and Porto Rico.

It is readily to be seen from the above table that there can be no
distinction between Cyanothrix primaria and C. Willei as described
by Professor Gardner on the basis of cell-width; and in neither the
type specimens nor in our own material can I find other morphologi-
cal differences. I therefore follow Professor Frémy in considering
that we are dealing here with a single species in which cell-size
varies within wide limits. That the range in size is not the same in
different habitats, as shown in the table above, is to be expected,
since the size of the individual so often depends upon the nature
of the environment. Professor Frémy has found the range in width
of cells in the collections from Algeria and Buen Ayre to extend
from 5.44 to 16.3. In Professor Taylor’s material of Nodularia ?
fusca from the Dry Tortugas, the range is from 6.5» to 10.3p.

Variation in size of cells within the same filaments also occurs
in all the collections seen, as shown in Fig. 4, drawn from the type
material of Cyanothrix primaria, where the cells range from 94 wide
at one end of the filament to 13 at the other end. Such gradation
in size of cells from one end of the filament to the other is especially
noticeable in those filaments which contain the largest cells. Fila-
ments with large cells in the middle and small cells at the ends
have also been observed. Obtusely conical apical cells as shown in
Fig. 3 and 4 are found in all of the material seen and are well de-
picted in Professor Frémy’s figures.

Professor Frémy suggested (ibid.) that Nodularia ? fusca W. R.
Taylor should be placed in the genus Johannesbaptistia. Professor
Taylor obligingly sent me a part of his original material from Long
Key, Dry Tortugas, for comparison with our material from the
Galapagos Islands and with the type of C. primaria from Porto
Rico. The collection agrees in every respect with the type and the
Galapagos specimens, even to the brown-colored protoplasm in many
filaments and the rare occurrence, as noted in Professor Taylor’s
diagnosis (loc. cit.), of evident sheaths about pairs of adjacent cells
(see Fig. 3.). In this material the filaments are more abundant and
as a rule of greater length than in the Galapagos or Porto Rico
collections.

20 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS vou. 3

Professor Frémy recorded some excellent observations, well il-
lustrated, and duplicated in our material, on the fragmentation of
filaments of Johannesbaptistia by the death and disintegration of
cells within the filaments. This mode of vegetative reproduction
reminds one forcibly of production of hormogonia among the Oscil-
latoriaceae. It, together with the uniseriate arrangement of cells in
the filament, leads Professor Frémy to suggest that Johannesbaptistia
is closely related to the genus Oscillatoria and should be placed at
least tentatively between that genus and Lyngbya in a _ natural
scheme of classification. Professor Frémy also compares filaments
of Johannesbaptistia with filaments of a species of Lyngbya in
which the cells are separated from each other. It has been my ex-
perience that separation of cells in any filaments of the Homo-
cysteae is also accompanied by other pathological characteristics—
loss of pigment, change in shape of cells, and production or loss of
protoplasmic granules. In filaments of Oscillatoria or Lyngbya with
separated cells, the cylindrical sheath about the trichome is always,
as I have observed it, distinctly limited from and of a firmer con-
sistency than the more recently formed jelly between the cells—
if indeed such jelly can be demonstrated. We may as rightfully
transfer at once to the Hormogoneales any of the Entophysalidaceae
or Pleurocapsaceae as soon as a filament has been seen to break
into segments because of death and disintegration of a cell within
a filament. It is to be remembered that as yet Johannesbaptistia
primaria is known in only the few bits of preserved material listed
above and that the complete life-history of the organism is possibly
not represented in any of these. Observation of one tiny aggrega-
tion of filaments in our No. 123 from the Galapagos Islands leads
me to suppose it wholly probable that when more favorable material
presents itself in the future—perhaps a collection containing an
abundance of filaments aggregated into a gelatinous stratum—divi-
sions of the cells in planes other than at right angles with the axis
of the filament may be observed. The above I suggest as a possibility,
as likely to be found correct as the impossibility of division of cells
in several planes implied when the genus Johannesbaptistia is placed
in a taxonomic scheme between Oscillatoria and Lyngbya. I suggest
that Johannesbaptistia primaria (Gardner) J. deToni be allowed to
stand appended to the Chroococcaceae until further and more eluci-
dating studies have been made.

NO. 2 DROUET: MYXOPHYCEAE |

RIVULARIACEAE

CaLorurix piLosA Harvey ex Bornet & Flahault, Ann. Sci. nat.
Vil, Bot, 3; 363. 1886,

Forma trichomatibus 10» ad 20 (etiam ad 26y) crassis; filis
10p ad 40p crassis. Fig. 17.

PORTO RICO: On rocks, etc., littoral, M. 4. Howe, May
1903 (Phyc. Bor.-Amer. No. 1167, in Herb. Missouri Bot. Gard.).
MEXICO: Revilla Gigedo Islands, ‘drifted ashore,’ Sulphur Bay,
Clarion Id., No. 57, January 5. ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands,
about the edge of a brackish lagoon near high water level, Albe-
marle Point, Isabela Id., No. 96, January 12; about the edges of
an inland salt lagoon, Fernandina Id., No. 154, January 14.

This species, characterized by intercalary heterocysts, attenuate
ends of the trichomes, hemispherical terminal cells, and symplocoid
habit, was first described and figured by Harvey (Smiths. Contrib.
Knowl. 10: 106. 1858) from Key West, Florida. Bornet and Flahault
(ibid.), with whose Révision des Nostocacées hétérocystées nomen-
clature in this group of Myxophyceae begins, cite specimens in
European herbaria from Tortola (Leeward Islands), Guadeloupe,
the Red Sea, the Friendly Islands, and Mauritius. Geitler (Rabenh.
Kryptogamenfl. 14: 612. 1931) cites Dr. Howe’s specimen from
Porto Rico (Phyc. Bor.-Amer. No. 1167) as typical of this species.
Our material agrees in every respect with this specimen, with the
exception in the Mexican material (No. 57) of the greater breadth
of some of the trichomes.*

2In the Phycotheca there is a specimen, No. 859 (specimen examined in the
Herbarium of the Missouri Botanical Garden), from Point Carmel, Monterey County,
California, W. A. Setchell, June 10, 1901, distributed under the name C. pilosa
Harv. The trichomes end in distinct colorless hairs; the heterocysts are basal and
often multiseriate; and the mode of branching is usually quite Dichothrix-like,
though scytonemataceous branching is by no means rare. I have not had the op-
portunity to examine the type of Dichothrix seriata Setchell & Gardner (Univ.
Calif. Pub. Bot. 6: 473. 1918), but from the description and figures I gather that
Phyc. Bor.-Amer. No. 859 might well be placed in that species. The habit of the
mass of filaments is reminiscent of Scytonema fuliginosa ‘Vilden, American Algae
No. 629 (specimen examined in the Herbarium of the Missouri Botanical Garden)
from Hawaii, recently redescribed as the type of the scytonemataceous genus Tildenia
Kossinskaja (Not. Syst. Inst. Crypt. Hort. Bot. Princip. U. S. S. R. 4: 85. 1926);
but the absence of colorless terminal hairs in the Hawaiian material prevents our
placing Phyc. Bor.-Amer, No. 859 here. Poljansky (Bull. Jard. Bot. Princip. de
PU. S. S. R. 1928: 17) places No. 859 in Calothrix dura Harv., a species according
to Bornet and Flahault (ibid.) synonymous with C. pilosa Harv. The same Russian
author transfers C. pilosa Harv. to the genus Tildenia. This latter transfer appears
to me unjustifiable, inasmuch as the button-like terminal cells of Phyc. Bor-Amer.
No. 1167 and of our own material appear in rare instances to be true heterocysts.
I am indebted to Dr. J. M. Greenman for the privilege of examining the specimens
cited above.

22 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

OSCILLATORIACEAE

Schizothrix Hancockii‘ sp. nov.

Stratum expansum, pulvinatum, subaeriale, carneo-durum, non
calce impregnatum, ad tria centimetra altum, externe luteo-olivascens
vel luteo-aerugineum, interne griseo- ad luteoli-aerugineum, super-
ficie planum; filamentis internis tortuosis, praecipuius dense intricatis,
parce pseudoramosis, vulgo 54 ad 7p crassis, superne caespitosis,
saepe parallelis, plus minusve tortuosis; vaginis cylindraceis, tenuibus,
firmis aut ad superficiem pulvini plus minusve diffluentibus et cras-
sioribus, hyalinis, non lamellosis, chlorozincico iodurato caerules-
centibus; trichomatibus dilute aerugineis, intra vaginam singulis aut
rarissime binis, 34 ad 4m crassis, ad genicula paullo constrictis;
articulis diametro trichomatis 1- ad 2-plo longioribus, 3u ad 8y longis;
dissepimentis haud conspicuis, non granulatis; protoplasmate homo-
geneo aut subtiliter granuloso; cellula apicali rotundata; calyptra
nulla (v. in form.). Fig. 15.

Hab.: ad lapides planes littorales, MEXICO: Revilla Gigedo
Islands, Braithwaite Bay, Socorro Id., No. 4, January 2-4. (Type
in the U. S. National Herbarium).

This alga is placed in the section Hypeothrix near H. cyanea
Nageli (in Kiitzing, Species Algarum, p. 269. 1849), to which it
appears to be most closely allied. Unfortunately H. cyanea is an
ill-described form for which we are not at present certain of the
original specimens or the type locality. According to Professor
Taylor’s notes, our alga was found in great abundance on ‘smooth
littoral rocks,’ forming rounded or extended cushions often several
centimeters in breadth. These cushions were ‘firm-fleshy, nearly as
tough as a Laminaria stipe,’ the ‘surface soft but particularly
smooth.’ The toughness of the mass appears to be due to the fact
that the filaments in the interior are very compactly intertwined.
On the surface the filaments are somewhat less tortuous, often
parallel, and always either caespitose or repent, never forming
symplocoid fascicles. False branching is more common than can be
demonstrated with facility because the filaments are so contorted
that the branching is as a rule obscured by the presence of other
filaments. The sheaths are thin and well-defined, especially in the

4 Named in honor of Captain G. Allan Hancock, through whose generosity this
expedition was made possible.

No. 2 DROUET: MYXOPHYCEAE 23

interior of the mass where few healthy trichomes are to be found;
on the surface, the sheaths are often definitely diffluent. More than
one trichome within a sheath are rarely observed. In careful dis-
sections of material preserved in formalin, the closed ends of the
sheaths may be seen.

jf. submersa, forma nov.

Forma typica similis sed trato subsphaerico vel depresso-sphaerico,
submerso, gelatinoso; filamentis phormidioideis, vaginis totum dif-
fluentibus.

Hab.: lapidibus in aquam subsalsam submersis affixa, MEXICO:
Oaxaca, tide pools, Tangola-Tangola Bay, No. 557, February 28-
March 1. (Type in U. S. National Herbarium).

The specimen cited consists of filaments which exhibit the same
tortuous habit of growth encountered in the typical subaerial S. Han-
cocku, but here the sheaths are always entirely diffuent into an
amorphous hyaline mucus which becomes bright blue when treated
with chlor-zinc-iodine. The trichomes are morphologically identical
with those of the type of S. Hancocki. I interpret the f. submersa as
an ecological form which can be distinguished taxonomically only
when the plant mass is produced beneath the surface of the water.

Hyprocoteum comorpes (Harvey) Gomont, Ann. Sci. nat. VII,
bot: 359. 1892:

Forma trichomatibus 15 ad 20m crassis, ad genicula constrictis,
intra vaginam praecipue singulis, ad apices attenuatis et truncatis,
dissepimentis evidenter granulatis. Fig. 7.

MEXICO: Revilla Gigedo Islands, abundant in certain tide
pools, Braithwaite Bay, Socorro Id., No. 22, January 2-4; high warm
tide pools, Sulphur Bay, Clarion Id., No. 65, January 5. ECUADOR:
Galapagos Islands, in higher tide pools, Wenman Id., No. 85, Jan-
uary 11.

Our material is somewhat reminiscent of Lyngbya aestuarit
(Liebm.) Gom., especially since most of the filaments contain single
trichomes. The trichomes are all distinctly constricted at the dis-
sepiments, however, and the sheaths are conspicuously mucous; here
and there a filament is found containing more than one trichome, and
frequent false branching occurs. The material at hand exhibits the
characteristic form of the colony: caespitose mats bearing short
‘erect glutinous tufts.

24 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

HyprocoLeuM CANTHARIDOSMuM (Montagne) Gomont, ex Ann.
Sci. nat. VII, Bot. 15: 336. 1892.

Forma trichomatibus 19» ad 24u, etiam ad 27» crassis, apicibus
attenuatis et fere truncato-capitatis; dissepimentis non granulatis.
Fig. 0.

MEXICO: Oaxaca, in intertidal pools, Tangola-Tangola Bay,
No. 556, February 28 - March 1. COSTA RICA: Port Culebra, tide
pools, No. 535, February 24.

Setchell and Gardner (Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., ser. 4, 19: 123.
1930) reported this alga previously from Guadalupe Island, Baja
California.

MrcrocoLeus TENERRIMUs Gomont, Ann. Sci. nat. VII, Bot. 15:
35541892;

Forma trichomatibus 1.5m ad 1.8u crassis, ad genicula constrictis,
ad apices tenuibus et acuto-conicis; cellulis diametro 2- ad 5-plo
longioribus, etiam cellula apicali ad 8-plo longiori; vaginis amplis,
chlorozincico iodurato non caerulescentibus. Fig. rr and 12.

ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands, bottom of an inland salt la-
goon, Fernandina Id., No. 755, January 14.

This sample does not contain the species in abundance, yet
typically developed filaments were seen in sufficient numbers to make
certain their identity. For geographic distribution of this species, see
Frémy, Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie ser. 7, 7: 181-184. 1924.

LyncByaA EpIPpHyTICA Hieronymus im Kirchner, Schizophyceae, p.
67, in Engler & Prantl, Natiirl. Pflanzenfam. 1(1a). 1898; Lemmer-
mann, Ark. f. Bot. 2(2): 103. 1904; Geitler, Rabenh. Kryptogamenfl.
14: 1038. 1932.

Forma filamentis epiphyticis, tenuibus; trichomatibus lp ad
1.5 crassis, ad genicula non constrictis; cellulis pallide aerugineis,
diametro 1- ad 2-plo longioribus; vaginis tenuissimis, hyalinis, chlo-
rozincico iodurato non caerulescentibus. Fig. 8.

ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands, on Hydrocoleum in higher tide
pools, Wenman Id., No. 85, January 11.

A similar but apparently colorless form which is possibly of
bacterial nature is epiphytic on the larger blue-green algae of several
other samples. It is equally possible that the lack of color is due to

No. 2 DROUET: MYXOPHYCEAE 25

the method of drying the specimens. Morphologically the plants
referred to Lyngbya epiphytica here cannot be separated from speci-
mens from both fresh and salt water collected at Woods Hole, Massa-
chusetts. Setchell and Gardner (zbid.) have reported the species from
Guadalupe Island, Baja California.

LyncBya cracitis Rabenhorst var. monilis (Setchell & Gardner),
comb. nov.

Phormidium monile Setchell & Gardner, Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci.
ger. #, 1920119. 1930.

Caespites ad sesquicentimetra alti, floccosi, lubrici, siccitate sordide
aeruginei aut lutei, variis algis affixi, filis elongatis saepe parallelis,
rectis aut flexuosis, 74 ad 8 crassis; vaginis conspicuis, arctis, non
diffluentibus, chlorozincico iodurato caerulescentibus; trichomatibus
dilute aerugineis, torulosis, etiam moniliformibus, 2.54 ad 6u (vulgo
3.54 ad 4) crassis, apice non attenuata; articulis quadratis vel
diametro ad duplo brevioribus, 1.254 ad 6y longis, protoplasmate
tenui granuloso farcti; cellula apicali rotundata, diametro saepe cras-
siore quam trichomate, membranam superne paululum incrassatam
praebente. Fig. 2.

MEXICO: Baja California, Guadalupe Island, Herbert L.
Mason No. 95, [April 1925] (Type in Herb. Calif. Acad. Sci.) ;
Revilla Gigedo Islands, on Hydrocoleum comoides in tide pools above
high water, Braithwaite Bay, Socorro Id., No. 22, January 2-4; high
warm tide pools, Sulphur Bay, Clarion Id., No. 65, January 5.
COSTA RICA: on H. cantharidosmum in tide pools, Port Culebra,
No. 535, February 24.

After a thorough examination of the original material from
Guadalupe Island upon which Professors Setchell and Gardner based
Phormidium monile,> I do not have the slightest doubt as to the
identity of our own specimens. I propose here to establish this form
as a variety of the more widely distributed Lyngbya gracilis Rabenh.,
with which Professor Geitler (Rabenh. Kryptogamenfl. 14: 1040.
1932) considers L. Menegheniana (Kiitz.) Gom. synonymous. Mor-
phologically the var. monile is separated from the typical variety by
the smaller size of the trichomes and the reaction of the sheaths to

. 51 am under obligation to Dr. J. T. Howell of the California Academy of Sciences
at San Francisco for permission to examine the type specimen of this interesting alga.

26 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

chlor-zinc-iodine. Like the typical variety, it is epiphytic on other
algae, and at least in early stages of growth can be seen attached
to the substratum otherwise than by a basal cell. The sheaths, as
the authors of P. monile assert, are “conspicuous, . . . distinct, not
diffuent.” Such characteristics are so pronounced in our material
and in the type specimen that we cannot find justification for retain-
ing in the genus Phormidium this form so closely related morpho-
logically to Lyngbya gracilis. Phormidioid layers of parallel filaments
of many long-established species of Lyngbya are often encountered
where the filaments are numerous or where the plant mass is ex-
posed at times to the atmosphere.

LyNcGBYA SEMIPLENA (C. Agardh) J. Agardh ex Gomont, Ann.
pci nat. Vil) Bot 162) 56s) 192:
Forma trichomatibus 7p ad 7.5 crassis. Fig. 13.
MEXICO: Revilla Gigedo Islands, rare and mixed with Hydro-
coleum comoides, etc., in high warm tide pools, Sulphur Bay, Clarion

Idi; No..065, January 5.

LyYNGBYA VERSICOLOR (Wartmann) Gomont, Ann. Sci. nat. VII,
Bot. 16: 147. 1892.

Forma filis intricatis tortuosisque; trichomatibus ad genicula haud
aut non constrictis, dissepimentis pellucidis, non granulatis; articulis
plus minusve 3» crassis, ad 6y longis; vaginis hyalinis, chlorozincico
iodurato caerulescentibus, ad 2 crassis. Fig. 6.

ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands, bottom muck in the center of
an inland salt pool, north end of Isabela Id., near Albemarle Point,
No. 123, January 12.

OscILLATORIA LAETEVIRENS Crouan ex Gomont, Ann. Sci. nat. VII,
Bot. 16:°226,' 1892:
A forma typica protoplasmate haud luteolo sed pallide aerugineo-
caeruleo differt. Fig. 5.
MEXICO: Revilla Gigedo Islands, forming blue-geen strata
on Calothrix pilosa ‘drifted ashore,’ Sulphur Bay, Clarion Id., No. 57,
January 5.
The lack of the characteristic yellowish-green color of the proto-
plasm is due probably to the method of drying the material; however,
the shapes of the cells are beautifully preserved.

No. 2 DROUET: MYXOPHYCEAE 27

SPIRULINA TENERRIMA Kiitzing ex Gomont, Ann. Sci. nat. VII, Bot.,
162252. 1892.

Forma trichomatibus haud 0.4u crassis, spiris 1.44 ad 1.5 crassis,
anfractibus regulariter 1p distantibus. Fig. r4.

ECUADOR: Galapagos Islands, abundant in bottom muck of
an in inland salt pool, north end of Isabela Id., near Albemarle
Point, No. 123, January 12.

The exact taxonomic relationship between this species and S.
socialis Gardner (N. Y. Acad. Sci., Sci. Surv. Porto Rico 8(2): 272.
1932) and between S. socialis and S. subtilissima Kiitzing (Phyco-
logia generalis, p. 183. 1843) has not been too clearly defined.

28 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

EXPLANATION OF PLATE

PLaTE 2.
Fig. 1. Merismopedia glauca {. mediterranea. x 1000.
Fig. 2. Lyngbya gracilis var. monilis. x 1500.
Fig. 3. Johannesbaptistia primaria, a typical filament. x 1000.
Fig. 4. J. primaria, a filament showing gradation in width of cells. x 1000.
Fig. 5. Oscillatoria laetevirens. x 800.
Fig. 6. Lyngbya versicolor. x 800.
Fig. 7. Hydrocoleum comoides, showing two trichomes within a sheath. x 600.
Fig. 8. Lyngbya epiphytica on a filament of Hydrocoleum comoides. x 2500.
Fig. 9. Hydrecoleum cantharidosmum. x 600.

PL.

DROUET: MYXOPHYCEAE

NO.

|

OOD

aceeae

ol SSeS ©
Aeeaiace
Se 2D
JS eecee
C9 | Ses ee)

30

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

10.
A,
12:
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

EXPLANATION OF PLATE
PLate 3

Gomphosphaeria aponina. x 1000.

Microcoleus tenerrimus, end of a single trichome. x 2000.
M. tenerrimus, end of a typical filament. x 1000.
Lyngbya semiplena. x 1500.

Spirulina tenerrima. x 2000.

Schizothrix Hancockii, a filament showing false branching. x 1500.

Chroococcus turgidus. x 1000.
Calothrix pilosa. x 900.

VOL. 3

Od

THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBER 3

LICHENS
OF THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION
OF 1934, COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

by
CARROLL WILLIAM DODGE

MYCOLOGIST TO THE MISSOURI
BOTANICAL GARDEN AND
PROFESSOR IN THE HENRY SHAW
SCHOOL OF BOTANY OF
WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
; 1936

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA, AND
GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, 1n 1933, in 1934, anv in 1935.

LICHENS
OF THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION
OF 1934, COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

By CARROLL WILLIAM DODGE

Tue UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
Tue Hancock Paciric ExPepITIONS

Votume 3, NumBErR 3

Tue UNIversiry oF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS

Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

Coryricut 1936
BY
Tue University oF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA

LICHENS OF THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION OF
1934, COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

By CARROLL WILLIAM DODGE
Mycologist to the Missouri Botanical Garden

Professor in the Henry Shaw School of Botany of Washington University

Our knowledge of the geographical distribution of the lichens of
tropical America is very fragmentary, usually depending upon col-
lectors who were primarily interested in other groups, frequently
flowering plants, and described by persons with little or no field
experience in the American tropics. Our knowledge of the lichen flora
of the Galapagos Archipelago and of the coastal regions of the Pacific,
south of California, is even more fragmentary. Since Darwin collected
a few lichens in the Galapagos a century ago, collectors have occa-
sionally visited the islands and returned with lichens collected in-
cidentally in connection with other work. The collections of Snodgrass
and Heller (Robinson, 1902) and of Stewart (1912), both identified
by Farlow, were the most extensive. Stewart gives brief ecological
notes on the commoner species. Svenson, on the Astor expedition of
1930, brought back six specimens from Santa Cruz (Indefatigable)
Island and one from Tower Island, studied by the writer and pub-
lished in Svenson (1935). J. T. Howell of the Templeton Crocker
expedition 1932 (cf. Linder, 1934) returned with one species (pre-
viously reported from Chatham Island) and Dictyonema sericeum
from Santa Cruz (Indefatigable) Island. The present collection adds
about a score to the Galapagos list of 51, and five new stations in
the archipelago.

Linder (1934) has summarized the previous collections of lichens
in the Revilla Gigedo Archipelago, listing 18 species, exclusive of
Roccellaceae. The present expedition added seven new species and
one new locality to this list. Except for Barro Colorado Island in
Gatun Lake where one specimen was taken, all the other localities
have probably never been visited by a botanist.

No novelties are reported at this time, as the groups which the
author has studied intensively are poorly represented and in some
of the larger more difficult genera the material is inadequate, a

C 33 ]

34 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

species being represented by a fragment unintentionally collected with
another species. Some of the fragments of rock have half a dozen
species in various stages of development, intimately intermingled.
Some of these seem to be species recently and excellently described
by Malme, but material has not been available for comparison. Only
more field experience and careful monographing of these difficult
genera can show whether some of the specimens cited below are
correctly referred.
DERMATOCARPACEAE

PsorocLaENA cuBENSIs Miill. Arg., Flora 74:381. 1891.

On rock, Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island) near Espafola
(Hood) Island (cf. Stewart, 1912), Galapagos Islands; January 31,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 872.

This microthalline species might be easily overlooked as very
young thalli since the thallus is scarcely larger than apothecia of
some saxicolous lichens.

Distribution: previously reported only from Cuba.

GRAPHIDACEAE

Three sterile fragments evidently belong to this family but more
certain determination is impossible at present.

On shrub (?) near Black Beach Anchorage, Santa Maria (Charles
or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 17, 18, 30, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. 856; (2 fragments) Port Utria, Choco, west coast
of Colombia; February 15, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 880.

CHIODECTONACEAE

CHIODECTON SANGUINEUM (Sw.) Vainio, Acta Soc. pro Fauna Flora
Fenn. 7 (2):143. 1890 [often cited Etude Lich. Brésil. Thése Univ.
Helsingfors 2:143. 1890].

Inland trail, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 1934; W. R. Taylor No. got.

Distribution: ubiquitous in the lower elevations in the American
tropics.

RoccELLACEAE

Roccetta Bapinctoni Mont., Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. III. 18:305.
1852.

On trees, Black Beach Anchorage, and inland near Wittmer place,
Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands; Jan-

no. 3 DODGE: LICHENS 35

uary 17, 18, 30, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 875h; Bartholomew Island
near San Salvador (James) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 23,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 862; Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island)
near Espafiola (Hood) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. 870; Tangola-Tangola Bay, Oaxaca, west coast of
Mexico; February 28—March 1, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 892.

The thallus becomes a very bright red with calcium hypochlorite
and the soralia remain uncolored. The specimen from Bartholomew
Island is smaller, rather more yellowish in color, and the soralia be-
come red, while the thallus is unchanged. Until more material is
available from the Pacific coast of tropical America and an opportu-
nity is afforded to compare material critically with the types of
species and varieties usually referred to R. Babingtonii, it seems
wiser not to describe it as new.

Distribution: Darbishire reports this species from Valparaiso,
Chile, to California, and from Santo Domingo, Aruba and Curagao,
in the Caribbean.

RocceEtia pDeEciPIENS Darb., Biblioth. Bot. 9:42. pl. 20, f. 92, 93,
1898.

On rocks, Isabel Island, west coast of Mexico; March 3, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. 806.

Distribution: previously reported only from southern California.

Roccetia pirFicitis Darb., Biblioth. Bot. 9:49-50, pl. ro, f. 80.
1898.

On rocks, high ground near shore, Albemarle Pt., Isabela (Albe-
marle) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor
No. 854.

Distribution: reported from Pt. Loma, California, to Isla San
Lorenzo and Payta, Pert.

RoccE.iaA porTENTOSA (Mont.) Darb., Biblioth. Bot. 9:29-31. pi.
7-11, f. 27-41. 1898.

On rocks, Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island) near Espafiola
(Hood) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor
No. 871; Bartholomew Island near San Salvador (James) Island,
Galapagos Islands; January 23, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 862a.

_ Distribution: Chiloe and Coquimbo, Chile, to the Galapagos
Islands.

36 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

RoccELLa sp.

On trees, Tenacatita Bay, Jalisco, west coast of Mexico; March 2,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. go2.

This sterile fragment may be referable to R. Babingtonii. It ap-
pears to be a broken thallus which is regenerating.

'THELOTREMACEAE

LEPTOTREMA MASTOIDEUM Miill. Arg., Flora 70:400. 1887.

Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands;
January 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 903.

Distribution: Originally described from Paraguay.

LEPTOTREMA sp.

On rock with Caloplaca Muelleri (Vainio) Zahlbr., Islet, Gardner
Bay (Gardner Island) near Espafiola (Hood) Island, Galapagos Is-
lands; January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 874f.

Too immature for certain determination.

CoENOGONIACEAE

CoENoconium suBvirescEens Nyl., Flora 57:72. 1874.
Trunks of living trees in forest, Barro Colorado Island, Gatun
Lake, Canal Zone; February 17, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 881.
Distribution: common at low elevations in the rain forests of trop-
ical America.
CoLLEMACEAE

LEPTOGIUM AZUREUM (Sw.) Mont. ap. Webb., Hist. Nat. Iles
Canaries 3 (1):129. 1840.

Gorgona Island off Marino, west coast of Colombia; February 12,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 876; Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco,
west coast of Colombia; February 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 904.

Distribution: common in rain forest at lower elevations throughout
tropical America.

LEPTOGIUM DENTICULATUM Nyl., Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. V. 7:302.
1867.

Growing over hepatics, Cabita Bay, Cape Corrientes, Choco, west
coast of Colombia; February 13, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 878.

Distribution: this or closely related species and varieties are com-
mon in the rain forest at lower elevations throughout tropical Amer-
ica.

No. 3 DODGE: LICHENS 37.

? LEPTOGIUM MARGINELLUM (Sw.) S. F. Gray, Nat. Arrang. Brit.
Pll 40b. 121,
Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands, W.
R. Taylor No. 865.
A few fragments with tiny coralloid immature apothecia suggest
this species.
STICTACEAE

Pseudocyphellaria xantholoma (Del.) Dodge, n. comb.

Sticta Mougeotiana var. xantholoma Del., Hist. Lich. Gen. Sticta
63-69, Dl..t, f: T4. 1822.

Type: not stated, specimens from Réunion (ile Bourbon) and
Mauritius (ile de France), Bory de St. Vincent and Cayenne, French
Guiana, mentioned. The following description is based on Costa
Rican material as it is more fully developed.

Thallus 4 cm. high, irregularly pinnately lobed, ultimate divisions
more or less dichotomous and truncate, sinuses deep and rounded but
not excised, margins elevated, slightly sorediate, shining rugose or
slightly scrobiculate, Brussels brown to bister, glaucescent toward
the base; below densely rhizinose, clove brown or darker with abun-
dant minute yellow pseudocyphellae. Upper cortex 60-70 p, appar-
ently the highly gelified remains of a tomentogenous layer, dark
brown; the rest a pseudoparenchyma of hyaline cells with highly geli-
fied walls, the protoplast nearly spherical, 2-3 w in diameter; the
algal layer about 30 p» thick, of compact colonies of Nostoc up to 20 p
in diameter; the medulla variable in thickness, 60-100 p, of compact
periclinal hyphae about 4-5 ,» in diameter, thickwalled; lower cortex
about 30 p, consisting of an inner zone of thickwalled brown periclinal
hyphae about 10 uw thick, a hyaline zone of very gelified pseudoparen-
chyma with very small protoplasts, and an outer tomentogenous
zone about 10 » thick which gives rise to a very dense branched mass
of rhizinae, uniformly distributed not in tufts as other species.

As I have been unable to see the types, I am not sure of the iden-
tity of this species although the material fits Delise’s description and
figures. It is the species commonly but erroneously referred to
Sticta Mougeotiana and S. aurigera, also described by Delise from
Réunion, Mauritius, and Madagascar.

Costa Rica: San Jose; Quebradillas, 7 km. n. of Santa Maria de
Dota; Standley 42950; ? Cartago; Pejivalle, 900 m., Standley and J.
Valerio (fragments unnumbered).

38 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Ecuador: Galapagos Islands, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana)
Island; January 1934; W. R. Taylor No. gos.

PsEUDOCYPHELLARIA AURATA (Ach.) Vainio, Acta Soc. pro Fauna
Flora Fenn. 7(1):183. 1890 [often cited Etude Lich. Brésil, Thése
Univ. Helsingfors 1:183. 1890].

Inland trail, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 906.

Distribution: widespread in American tropics.

Stictina WEIGEL! var. Beauvorsir (Mill. Arg.) Hue, Nouv. Arch.
Mus. IV. 3:96. 1901.
Bahia Honda, south coast of Panama; February 22, 1934; W. R.
Taylor No. 887.
Distribution: widespread at lower levels in the tropics and sub-
tropics.
ACAROSPORACEAE +

AcarosporA PELTASTICA Zahlbr., Beih. Bot. Centralbl. 13:161. 1902.

On rock, Islas Secas, south coast of Panama; February 22, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. 889.

Distribution: previously reported from California and Arizona.

? ACAROSPORA NIGROMARGINATA Bouly de Lesdain, Lich. Mexique
16. 1914.

On rock, Gorgona Island off Marino, west coast of Colombia;
February 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 877.

Distribution: previously reported from Mexico.

LECANORACEAE

HaEMATOMMA PUNICEA (Ach.) Mass., Atti. I. R. Ist. Veneto III.
5:253. 1860.

On bark, Bahia Honda, south coast of Panama; February 21,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 885.

Distribution: common in American tropics.

PERTUSARIACEAE
PERTUSARIA Sp.
On bark, Bahia Honda, south coast of Panama; February 21, 1934;
W. R. Taylor No. 885a.
Fragment sterile.

No. 3 DODGE! LICHENS 39

PARMELIACEAE

PARMELIA CRISTIFERA Tayl., London Jour. Bot. 6:165. 1847.
Inland trail, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 868.

Distribution: common in American tropics.

PARMELIA LATISSIMA Fée, Suppl. Essai Cryptog. Ecorc. Officin.
119). 183:7.

Port Utria, Choco, west coast of Colombia; February 14, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. 8709.

Distribution: common in American tropics.

PaRMELIA TINCTORUM Despr. ap. Nyl., Flora 55:547 note. 1872.
Near Wittmer place, inland, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana)
Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 907.

Distribution: common in American tropics.

? Parmetia Soyauxu Mill. Arg., Linnaea 63:32. 1880.

On rock, Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island) near Espanola
(Hood) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor
No. 874a.

Distribution: previously reported from Brazil.

ParRMELIA sp. [perhaps near P. crinita Ach.].

Near Wittmer place, inland, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana)
Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Tayor No. 908.

Too fragmentary for certain determination.

PaRMELIA sp. [suggesting P. tinctorum Despr. but no reaction with
calcium hypochlorite].

On slopes of ridge above Braithwaite Bay, Socorro Island, Revilla
Gigedo Islands; January 2-4, 1934; John Garth, com. W. R. Taylor
No. 909.

Too fragmentary for certain determination.

UsNEACEAE

RaMALINA ALLUDENS Nyl., Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie II. 4:130.
1870.

Jicarita Island south of Coiba Island, south coast of Panama; Feb-
ruary 20, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 883.
_ Distribution: usually at 1000-1500 m., Mexico and Central Amer-
ica.

40 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

RaMa.ina compLanata (Sw.) Ach., Lichenogr. Univ. 599. 1810.

On slopes of ridge above Braithwaite Bay, Socorro Island, Revilla
Gigedo Islands; January 2-4, 1934; John Garth, com. W. R. Taylor
No. 910.

Distribution: originally described from Jamaica, this species has
been reported frequently from Mexico and the West Indies south-
ward.

RamaAtina pasypoca Tuck., Am. Jour. Arts & Sci. II. 28:203. 1859.

Near Wittmer place, and inland trail, Santa Maria (Charles or
Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R.
Taylor No. oft.

Distribution: Cuba.

This may be the “Alectoria sarmentosa” of earlier reports, as it
resembles it in habit and both species are usually found sterile. 4lec-
toria is a subarctic genus coming southward along the mountains to
Mexico.

Distribution: Cuba and Costa Rica, probably more widespread
but mistaken for the coarser R. Usnea or even Alectoria or Usnea.

RAMALINA SUBASPERATA Nyl., Flora 59:411. 1876.

Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island) near Espafola (Hood) Is-
land, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 3.

Distribution: Cuba.

RaMALINA suBcALICARIS Nyl., Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie II.
4:138. 1870.

On slopes of ridge above Braithwaite Bay, Socorro Island, Revilla
Gigedo Islands, west coast of Mexico; January 2-4, 1934; W. R.
Taylor 851; Islas Secas near Bahia Honda, south coast of Panama;
February 22, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 888.

Distribution: previously reported from Mexico.

RAMALINA SUBFRAXINEA Nyl., Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie II.
4:139. 1870.

Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island) near Espanola (Hood)
Island, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 860;
on trees, Tenacatita Bay, west coast of Mexico; March 2, 1934; W.
R. Taylor No. 893.

Distribution: previously reported from Colombia.

No. 3 DODGE: LICHENS 41

Ramatina Usnea (L.) Howe, var. usNgEomwetita (Nyl.) Howe,
Bryologist 17:81. 1914.

Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands;
January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 897.

Distribution: from Mexico and West Indies southward, widespread
but not common.

Ramatina Purccaru Mill. Arg., Flora 64:83. 1881.

Black Beach Anchorage and near Wittmer place, inland, Santa
Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 17,
18, 30, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 858 and 912; Academy Bay, Santa
Cruz (Indefatigable) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 20, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. 861.

Distribution: previously reported from Brazil and the Galapagos

Islands.

RAMALINA INTERPONENS Nyl., Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie II.

4:141. 1870.

Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island) near Espafiola (Hood) Is-
land, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 873.

Distribution: previously reported from Colombia.

RAMALINA sp.

On rock, Albemarle Pt., Isabela (Albemarle) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 855b.

Too immature for determination.

UsNEAa sp.

On slopes of ridge above Braithwaite Bay. Socorro Island, Revilla
Gigedo Islands, west coast of Mexico; January 2-4, 1934; John
Garth, com. W. R. Taylor.

CALOPLACACEAE

? Catoptaca Matmeana Zahlbr., Cat. Lich. Univ. 7:156. 1930.
Caloplaca brachysporum Malme, Ark. f. Bot. 20(9) :34. 1926.

Sulphur Bay, Clarion Island, Revilla Gigedo Islands; January 5,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 852.

Distribution: previously reported from Minas Geraes, Brazil.

42 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Catopiaca pisstmitis (Malme) Zahlbr., Cat. Lich. Univ. 7:115.
1930.

On rocks, Tangola-Tangola Bay, Oaxaca, west coast of Mexico;
February 28-March 1, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 800a.

Distribution: previously reported from Brazil.

CaLopLaca ELEGANS (Link) Th. M. Fr., Lichenogr. Scand. 168.
1871.

On rocks, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 17, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 850; Petatlan Bay,
Guerrero, west coast of Mexico; March 2, 3, 1934; W. R. Taylor
No. 895.

Distribution: reported from many regions in the temperate and
tropical zones.

CatopLaca FERNANDEZIANUM Zahlbr., K. Svensk Vetensk. Akad.
Handl. 57(6):46. 1917.

On rock, Sulphur Bay, Clarion Island, Revilla Gigedo Islands;
January 5, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 852a.

Distribution: Juan Fernandez and Valparaiso, Chile.

Catoptaca Muetueri (Vainio) Zahlbr., Cat. Lich. Univ. 7:248.
193i.

On rock with other lichens, Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island)
near Espafiola (Hood) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934;
W.R. Taylor No. 874b.

Distribution: Brazil and Argentina.

Catopiaca RuGULOSA (Nyl.) Zahlbr., Cat. Lich. Univ. 7:263. 1931.

On rock, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 17, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 850a.

Distribution: Chile and Argentina.

Catop.aca sp. sterile thallus.
Sulphur Bay, Clarion Island, Revilla Gigedo Islands; January 5,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 852b.

'TELOSCHISTACEAE

TrELoscuIsTEs ExILIs (Michx.) Vainio, Acta Soc. pro Fauna Flora
Fenn. 7(1): 115. 1890 [also cited Etude Lich. Brésil, Thése Univ.
Helsingfors 1:115. 1890].

No. 3 DODGE: LICHENS 43

Inland trail, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 865.

Distribution: widespread in tropical America.

TELOSCHISTES FLAvICANS (Sw.) Norm., Nyt Mag. Naturvidensk.
ieee. 1853.

Inland trail, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor, No. 913; Academy Bay,
Santa Cruz (Indefatigable) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 20,
1934; W. R. Taylor, No. 914.

Distribution: widespread in tropical America.

BUuELLIACEAE

? BUELLIA MONTEVIDENSIS Malme, Ark. f. Bot. 21(14):31. 1927.

On rock, Sulphur Bay, Clarion Island, Revilla Gigedo Islands,
west coast of Mexico; January 5, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 852a, 915.

?BUELLIA UMBRINA Malme, Ark. f. Bot. 21(14):37-38. 1927.

On rock, Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island) near Espanola
(Hood) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor
No. 8748.

Distribution: reported previously from southern Brazil.

BuELLIA XANTHINULA (Miill. Arg.) Malme, Ark. f. Bot. 21(14) :25.
1927.

On rock, Islet, Gardner Bay (Gardner Island) near Espanola
(Hood) Island, Galapagos Islands; January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor
874d; on rock, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 17, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 859a.

Distribution: previously reported from Brazil and Paraguay.

PHYSCIACEAE

Pyxine Bracuyosa Miill. Arg., Bull. Soc. Bot. Belgique 32:131.
1893,

On rocks, Tangola-Tangola Bay, Oaxaca, west coast of Mexico;
February 28-March 1, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 890.

Distribution: previously reported from Costa Rica.

44 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Puyscia apGLuTinaTa (Flke.) Nyl., Mem. Soc. Imp. Sci. Nat.
Cherbourg 5:107. 1857.

On rock, Albemarle Pt., Isabela (Albemarle) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 853.

Distribution: widespread in tropical America.

Puyscia AcciLata (Ach.) Nyl., Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. IV. 15:43. 1862.

On rock, Albemarle Pt., Isabela (Albemarle) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 12, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 855; near Wittmer
place, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos Islands;
January 28, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 867.

Distribution: widespread in tropical America.

Puyscia ALBA (Fée) Miill. Arg., Rev. Myc. 9:23. 1887.

Jicarita Island south of Coiba Island, south coast of Panama;
February 20, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 884; Islet, Gardner Bay
(Gardner Island) near Espafiola (Hood) Island, Galapagos Islands;
January 31, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 874e.

Distribution: widespread in tropical America.

Puyscia Minor (Fée) Vainio, Acta Soc. pro Fauna Flora Fenn.
7(1):149. 1890 [also cited Etude Lich. Brésil, Thése Univ. Helsing-
fors 1:149. 1890].

On bark, Jicarita Island, south of Coiba Island, south coast of
Panama; February 20, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 884a.

Distribution: previously reported from Brazil.

Puyscia picta (Sw.) Nyl., Syn. Meth. Lich. 1:430. 1860.
On rock, Gorgona Island off Marino, Colombia; February 12,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 877).

Distribution: common at lower levels in American tropics.

PuysciA sorEDIosA (Vainio) Lynge, Vidensk.-Selsk. Kristiania Skr.
Math. Naturv. KI. 1924(16):27. 1925.

On rock, Gorgona Island off Marino, Colombia, February 12,
1934; W. R. Taylor No. 877a; on trees called “white birches” near
Black Beach Anchorage, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island,
Galapagos Islands; January 17, 18, 30, 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 858.

Distribution: widely distributed in tropical America.

No. 3 DODGE: LICHENS 45

AnaptycHia popocarPA (Bel.) Trev. var. conFERTA Vainio, Ann.
Nead. Sci. Fenn. A 6(7):61. 1915.

Inland trail, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 916.

Distribution: previously reported from Guadeloupe.

ANAPTYCHIA sp.

Inland trail, Santa Maria (Charles or Floreana) Island, Galapagos
Islands; January 1934; W. R. Taylor No. 917.

This sterile fragment, evidently not one of the common species, is
too small for certain determination.

46 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

LITERATURE CITED
Linder, D. H.

1934. The Templeton Crocker Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences
1932. No. 18. Lichens, Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. IV. Ser. 21:211-222. pl. 8.

Robinson, B. L.

1902. Flora of the Galapagos Islands. Proc, Am. Acad. Sci. 38:77-269. pl. 1-3.
Lichens by W. G. Farlow, p. 83-89.

Stewart, Alban
1911. Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences to the Galapagos Islands.
1905-1906. II. A botanical survey of the Galapagos Islands. Proc. Calif.
Acad. Sci. IV. Ser. 1:7-288. pl. 1-19. Bibliography by M. A. Day with
additions by Alban Stewart, p. 246-248.
1912. Notes on the lichens of the Galapagos Islands, Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. IV.
Ser. 1:431-446.

Svenson, H. K.

1935. Plants of the Astor Expedition. 1930 (Galapagos and Cocos Islands). Am.
Jour. Bot. 22:208-277. pl. 1-9. Lichens by C. W. Dodge, p. 221.

THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBER 4

PLANKTON DIATOMS
OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA OBTAINED BY
THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION OF 1936

(WitH One Ficure)

by
W. E. ALLEN

SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
LA JOLLA, CALIFORNIA

as

gs oN
fe SEP 1997 #

y,

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
1937

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA, AND
GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, 1n 1933, 1n 1934, mv 1935, anv 1n 1936.

PLANKTON DIATOMS
OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA OBTAINED BY
THE G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION OF 1936

By W. E. ALLEN

Tue University oF SouTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
Tue Hancock Paciric ExpepITIoNs
Voiume 3, NuMBER 4
Issuep May, 1937

Price 75 cENTS

Tue University ofr SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS

Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

PLANKTON DIATOMS
OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA OBTAINED BY THE
G. ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION OF 1936

By W. E, ALLEN

Scripps Institution of Oceanography
University of California
La Jolla, California

INTRODUCTION

The Gulf of California has attracted the attention of seafaring
people, oceanographers, geographers, and geologists for a long time.
Its peculiarities of form and its situation are alone sufficient to de-
mand notice. In addition, its connective relation between the outlet of
one of the large drainage systems of North America and the ocean,
through an arid region for hundreds of miles, suggests many prob-
lems in numerous fields. Furthermore, some observers say that the
resemblance of certain organisms in the Gulf to some of those char-
acteristic of Atlantic seas suggests important problems in its geo-
logical history.

Notwithstanding such stimuli to attention and interest, very little
authentic information about the Gulf is in existence. We know that
its general dimensions are over seven hundred miles in length, about
sixty miles in width, and that its depth exceeds a thousand meters
in more than one half of its length, but we do not know details of
differences (cyclical or noncyclical) in physical, chemical, and bio-
logical conditions which exist within its extent.

Many people have known about the opportunities for investigators
in these waters, but few have tried to do anything about it. Captain
G. Allan Hancock is one of those who has really done something
about it. In February and March of 1936 he added the surface col-
lecting of microscopic plankton organisms (mainly diatoms in this
case) to his other scientific observations and investigations. This
report gives the more important results of study of the collections
obtained at that time.

Diatoms are microscopic plants which may be found in water or in
wet spots almost anywhere. Sometimes they appear as brown, slimy
masses of velvety material under the drip from a leaky hydrant.

f 47]

48 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Whether in sea water or fresh water, those living attached to a solid
surface of any kind are called sedentary forms. Other kinds live
afloat in sea water or fresh water, and are called plankton forms.
The plankton kinds collected in this series were all obtained by dip-
ping six gallons of water from the surface of the Gulf and filtering it
through fine-meshed (200 meshes to an inch) bolting silk. The speci-
mens caught on the silk were preserved in ordinary formaldehyde.

These 1936 catches were especially important because it was the
first time that any had been made in the Gulf in late winter or early
spring, the season at which microscopic plants as well as other plants
are likely to show increased growth and abundance in nature. In the
ocean off southern California there is a wide range of differences in
times of greatest abundance of plankton diatoms in different years,
but there are more years in which largest abundance occurs in spring
than there are showing largest abundance at some other season.
Therefore, it is reasonable to suppose that the Gulf of California
tends to yield in large abundance at that season.

Taking Cape San Lucas as the outer limit, eighty catches were
made in the Gulf, thirty-seven while northbound, forty-three south-
bound. The round trip occupied a little more than a month, involving
important time differences in the sampling of different sections and
localities. For convenience in discussion, three sections may be desig-
nated, i.e., southern, south of 25°N; middle, from 25°N to 27°N; and
northern, north of 27°. In respect to time, each of these three sections |
differs from the others, not only as to the dates of sampling, but also
in the total time elapsed between the taking of the first and last
samples in the section. All of the catches in the northern section
were taken within two weeks of each other, while those in the south-
ern section were taken in two periods three weeks apart. Further-
more, the two weeks of operation in the northern section were mid-
way between the periods of operation in the southern section, and
there is no means of knowing how conditions in the one compared
with those in the other at that time. This point of time difference is
stressed, not because of any unusual deficiency in the series, but
because it cannot be ignored when catches are repeated at certain
stations at intervals no longer than these.

If collections had been made only on a continuous trip in one direc-
tion, this particular kind of comparison of the localities would not be
suggested by the records, at least not strongly. If collections in all

No. 4 ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 49

three sections had been taken at exactly the same time, one might
think that the differences in abundance of diatoms were due to the
northern section being a relatively shallow part of the Gulf from
which depths were progressively greater to and through the southern
section. Or he might think that differences in abundance were related
to increasing distance southward from the influence of the Colorado
River drainage. With time differences so prominent as they are in
this series it is easy to see that direct comparison of productivity in
different sections of the Gulf may lead to wrong conclusions as read-
ily as to right conclusions. It is also evident that production in the
southern section over the four and one-half weeks’ period may be
badly represented by catches taken only at the beginning and end.
Not a little of the importance of the evidence of this series lies in the
fact that it helps to direct attention to the hazards of assuming the
constancy of conditions in nature in periods for which direct observa-
tions are lacking. Still, it should be understood that rare or discontin-
uous observations of natural phenomena are better than none at all,
provided they are not used to reach or support conclusions tran-
scending the range of their evidence.

Tue NortTHerRN SECTION

In lack of information from a detailed survey of the Gulf of Cali-
fornia it is possible to make only roughly suggestive comments on
certain features of its topography and their significance. The evi-
dence at hand indicates that the northern section in this series is a
rather steeply descending trough extending from the region of rela-
tively level floor (depth 250 meters or less) above Angel de la Guar-
dia Island (or from about Lat. 29° 30’) to the twenty-seventh paral-
lel of latitude where a considerable unevenness in bottom topography
indicates a southern termination of at least part of the trough. In this
section there is not much evidence of land drainage of water from
the side of the trough and there seems to be no great extent of shoals
or marginal lagoons or swamps. Superficially, there seems to be little
opportunity for Pacific Ocean waters to exert direct influence on the
conditions of organic productivity of the section. Presumably, the
direct influence of the Colorado River drainage should be much
greater (although probably greatly changed in the future as a result
of diversion projects). Apparently, there is no dependable basis upon

50 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

which to attempt to evaluate or to describe the influences of air
drainage in the region, although there must be considerable impor-
tance in transportation of dust or soil particles alone. Therefore, the
hydrographic and biologic conditions of the northern section should
be essentially resultants of the combined influence of the river, the
ocean, and atmospheric phenomena. Although the gradient in the
upper sixty miles of the section is well established, the trough is
partly filled by Angel de la Guardia, Tiburon, and other islands, and
it lacks the appearance of a broad, open, south tilted basin
characteristic of the remainder of the Gulf.

Twenty-five stations were occupied in the northern section, more
than one catch being made at several of them. The total of catches
was thirty-eight. (See Figure 1 for route and location of stations in
the section.) Of these catches only seventeen were too small to be
significant, and seven of them were at six stations fairly near shore
in the southwest part of the section. The other ten were at stations
irregularly distributed up to and in the neighborhood of Angel de la
Guardia Island. Five stations yielded six large catches, two between
Angel de la Guardia Island and the west shore of the Gulf, three
just south of Tiburon Island, and one in mid-Gulf about seventy
miles to the southeast of the latter. The first five were taken in rela-
tively shallow water, the last at a point where the depth was more
than a thousand meters. Such a distribution of large catches suggests
that the northern section as a whole has a tendency to good produc-
tiveness. Nine of the catches of moderate significance were scattered
along the route in the section. Six others were obtained at two sta-
tions at the north end of Angel de la Guardia Island.

While the locations of these catches of moderate importance were
such as to support the suggestion from larger catches that the section
as a whole is productive, at least on certain occasions, consideration
of the three large catches at Tiburon Island leads to the idea that the
region of these islands is more than ordinarily favorable for produc-
tion of plankton diatoms as far as the Gulf is concerned. Perhaps
the islands mark the most favorable point of mixing of river, Gulf,
and ocean influence. In 1921 (Allen, 1923) this section was visited
in April and again in June by the expedition of the California
Academy of Sciences. On both occasions large catches were found
not only near Angel de la Guardia Island but also at points much
farther up in the Gulf, one (at Georges Island) being only about ten

No. 4 ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 51

miles from Georges Bay at the northeast end of the Gulf. As far as
series taken at different seasons and in different years may be regard-
ed as comparable, the 1921 series supports the 1936 evidence that the
upper third of the Gulf is a productive region for plankton diatoms.
In addition, it points to a strong influence of the Colorado River in
favor of productivity. No other collections from this section are on
record.

Mippte SEcTION

Twelve stations were occupied in the middle section. From them
eighteen catches were taken. Only four of these were so small as to be
negligible. Since they were taken more than two weeks earlier than
the other fourteen, it is not certain that their insignificance indicated
real differences. In fact, the probability is to the contrary, because
later catches of larger size were taken so nearly at the same locations
that they suggest a time difference rather than a locality difference.

However, no catch was really large. Of the seven showing moder-
ate size (10,000 cells or more per liter), one was in Concepcion Bay
and five at two stations in mid-Gulf a little north of the latitude of
Topolobampo Bay. The remaining catches, showing only thousands
of cells per liter, were all near the western shore of the Gulf, two in
Concepcion Bay. The one fairly large catch in Concepcion Bay
suggests favorable influence of land and shallow water, but the five
in mid-Gulf were larger than that, and two others nearly equal.
Apparently, the favorable condition in mid-Gulf may be due to ocean
influence to an appreciable extent. At any rate, it is true that these
better catches of moderate size were made south of the low cross-
ridge which interrupts the continuity of outward slope of the floor of
the Gulf, and it was almost at the point of beginning of the part of
the Gulf which appears to slope continuously to the ocean. In 1921,
some large catches were made by the expedition of the California
Academy of Sciences in this section in April and June, notably near
Carmen Island (Allen, 1923). In November, 1935, only four months
before the 1936 catches were taken in mid-Gulf, the Templeton
Crocker Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences obtained
a large catch near Topolobampo Bay (Allen, in press). Although ob-
tained in different years, the fact that large abundance has been
found at three different seasons of the year in this section of the
Gulf indicates that it tends to be productive of ocean pasturage.

52 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

SOUTHERN SECTION

Twenty-four catches were obtained at eighteen stations in the
southern section, all but two of them being taken near shore. Ten
were from the vicinity of Espiritu Santo Island, six near San Josef
Island, two near Ceralbo Island, and the others around the shore
toward Cape San Lucas. None were large and only three showed
numbers of thousands per liter. At the station about fifteen miles
east of Ceralbo Island two catches were taken, one of small size, the
other nearly 20,000 diatom cells per liter. No series of collections
known to the Scripps Institution has yet shown large abundance of
plankton diatoms in this section, sometimes called the “Cape Region”
by former observers.

Ocrean CaTCHES

After leaving the Gulf, twelve catches were taken on the northward
run in the Pacific Ocean near the west shore of the peninsula of lower
California. Except for one catch of moderate size about forty miles
northwest of Magdalena Bay, all were too small to have much
statistical significance, although one catch of the six taken near
Cerros Island showed nearly 10,000 cells per liter, a number sug-
gesting the possibility of good production in the locality at times.

GENERA AND SPECIES

Fifty species belonging to twenty-six genera were recorded for the
Gulf. A number of other species were present, but their exact identi-
fication was not possible within the time available for study of the
material, even when the specimens bore enough distinguishing char-
acters. Inasmuch as these totals are about the same as those usually
found along the coasts of southern California and Lower California
in series of catches of similar extent, it may be supposed that such
representation is about normal. In the preceding November the Tem-
pleton Crocker Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences
of 1935 (Allen, in press) had found a like representation of genera
and species along the ocean coast of Lower California. As a matter
of interest rather than a matter of recognizable significance the fol-
lowing lists (Table I) of species on the two sides of the peninsula are
arranged in opposite columns for comparison.

No. 4 ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 53

Comparison of lists from the two coasts taken by the same ex-
pedition cannot be made because the November cruise had too few
stations in the Gulf and the February-March cruise had too few
stations in the ocean. However, the accompanying table helps to
show that no essential difference in representation of genera and
species of plankton diatoms is observable as yet between Gulf waters
and ocean waters. A long series of collections from each would prob-
ably show complete identity as to names listed. Indeed, one of the
striking features of phytoplankton occurrence in the Gulf as exhibit-
ed so far is the likeness of the catches to those obtained in the neigh-
boring ocean. This likeness goes so far as to show the same scanty
representation of certain species commonly occurring in small num-
bers in widely different regions of the ocean. Excellent examples of
species commonly noticed but never in large numbers are Plankton-
iella sol (Wall.) and Rhizosolenia setigera Btw.

TABLE I

PLANKTON DIATOMS OF LowER CALIFORNIA PENINSULA

Ocean Coast, November, 1935

Asterionella japonica Cl.

Bacteriastrum sp
Biddulphia SE abilieneie (Bail.)

Chaetoceros affinis Laud.
atlanticus (Schiitt)

compressus Laud.

concavicornis Mangin.

constrictus Gran
curvisetus Cl.

debilis Cl.
decipiens Cl.
didymus Fhr.
eibenii (Grunow)
laciniosus Schiitt
laeve Leud-Fort.
lorenzianus Grun.
messanensis Castr.
peruvianus Btw.
radicans Schiitt

socialis Laud.

spp.
tetrastichon Cl.

Gulf Coast, February-March, 1936

Achnanthes sp.

Actinoptychus undulatus (Bail.)
Asterionella japonica Cl.
Asteromphalus heptactis (Breb.)
Bacteriastrum sp.

Cerataulina bergonii Perag.

Chaetoceros affinis Laud.
atlanticus (Schiitt)
coarctatus Laud.
compressus Laud.
concavicornis Mangin.
constrictus Gran
curvisetus Cl.
danicus Cl.
debilis Cl.
decipiens Cl.
didymus Ehr.

laciniosus Schiitt
lorenzianus Grun.

peruvianus Btw.
radicans Schiitt
simplex Ost.
socialis Laud,

spp.

54 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

Corethron criophilum Castr.

Coscinodiscus spp.

Dactyliosolen sp.

Ditylum brightwelli (West)

Eucampia zoodiacus Ehr.

Guinardia flaccida (Castr.) Perag.

Hemiaulus hauckii Grun.

Leptocylindrus danicus Cl.

Lithodesmium undulatum Ehr,

Navicula spp.

Nitzschia longissima (Breb.) Ralfs.
seriata Cl.

Planktoniella sol (Wallich)

Rhizosolenia alata Btw.
calcar avis Schultz
delicatula Cl.
fragillisima Berg.
semispina (Hensen) Gran
Rhizosolenia setigera Btw.
stolterfothii H. Perag.
styliformis Btw.
Skeletonema costatum (Grev.)
Stephanopyxis sp.
Thalassionema nitzscioides Grun.
Thalassiosira condensata Cl.
decipiens (Grun.)
rotula Meunier
Thalassiothrix frauenfeldii (Grun.)

heteromorpha (?) Karst.

longissima Cl, & Grun.

VOL. 3

Corethron criophilum Castr.
Coscinodiscus spp.
Dactyliosolen sp.

Eucampia zoodiacus Ehr.
Guinardia flaccida (Castr.) Perag.
Hemiaulus hauckii Grun.
Leptocylindrus danicus Cl.
Lithodesmium undulatum Ehr,
Navicula spp.
Nitzschia longissima (Breb.) Ralfs.
seriata Cl.
Planktoniella sol (Wallich)
Pleurosigma sp.
Pseudoeunotia doliolus (Wall.)
Rhizosolenia alata Btw.
calear avis Schultz
delicatula Cl.
fragillisima Berg.
semispina (Hensen) Gran
Rhizosolenia setigera Btw.
stolterfothii H. Perag.
styliformis Btw.
Skeletonema costatum (Grev.)
Stephanopyxis sp.
Thalassionema nitzscioides Grun.
Thalassiosira condensata Cl.
decipiens (Grun.)
rotula Meunier
Thalassiothrix frauenfeldii (Grun.)
heteromorpha (?) Karst.
longissima Cl, & Grun.

An interesting point in respect to occurrence of species is the rela-
tively high abundance of a species not yet satisfactorily named at
the Scripps Institution, although it has been seen often in Institution
collections for nearly twenty years. For some years it was recorded
in Institution lists as Thalassiothrix acuta Karst, on the assumption
that it was enough like that species to carry the name without confu-
sion. More recently it has been decided to list it as T. heteromorpha
Karst. because its characteristics are more nearly those of the latter
species. On a few occasions the form has reached large abundance
in oceanic catches, mostly in the Gulf of Santa Catalina off southern
California. But in all of those instances it was associated with other
forms showing larger numbers. In mid-Gulf in this series, at a point
a little south of the latitude of Guaymas, a large catch (143,000 cells
per liter) was taken which consisted almost entirely of this species.
A moderately large catch (12,000 cells per liter) was obtained three
days later in Concepcion Bay and it was also nearly exclusive of

No. 4 ALLEN! PLANKTON DIATOMS 55

other forms. Of course, the evidence is too little to support an explana-
tion of the peculiarities involved in these occurrences, but there is
a suggestion that the Gulf may be more favorable to this species at
“certain times and places. Possibly a different form of statement is
preferable, i.e., that this species may have been better able than
others to meet the obligatory conditions. A good explanation of the
peculiarities of occurrence of this form there and then would surely
contribute largely to solution of the perennial problem of why abun-
dance of plankton diatoms increases at a particular time and of why
any certain species leads in abundance at that particular time. For
the catch in mid-Gulf one might be content to suppose that the
sample merely chanced to be taken from a center of propagation of
this species. For the catch taken under much different conditions in
the narrow, shallow bay, this supposition may not appear so accept-
able, especially when one considers the possibility of explaining both
of them in the same way. My own belief is that causes of change in
abundance or in lead of abundance in nature do not operate uniform-
ly or steadily, and that the results of their operation are not predict-
able in detail. In a case like this, the population in mid-Gulf may
have been preponderant because of its physiological readiness to take
advantage of the first favorable opportunity, while the population of
the bay may have been holding its leading place merely because of
greater tolerance, or greater capacity for endurance for bay condi-
tions. But it is still true that in both cases T. heteromorpha may have
had more representatives on the ground ready to meet prosperity
when it approached. It seems probable that the Gulf offers good
opportunities for solving certain parts of the general problem of oc-
currence of abundance and changes in abundance.

ConpDITION OF SPECIMENS

Following the Scripps Institution practice of the last several years,
records were kept of numbers in poor and in good condition. This
series in the Gulf of California was remarkable for the relatively
small numbers of specimens in poor condition. In some series studied
at the Institution many catches (some very large) have shown
much more than half of the specimens to be in poor condition (the
frustules empty or the contents disintegrating), but in this series no
catch of significant size showed as many as ten per cent of the speci-

56 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

mens to be in poor condition. Apparently, no great numbers were be-
ing devoured by copepods or other diatom feeders. The good condi-
tion of the diatom populations at so many stations also indicates that
the plants were physiologically ready to take advantage of favorable
external influences. Therefore, it is probable that very large abun-
dance might have been found a little later in numerous localities
where combinations of environmental conditions encouraged in-
crease of population.

TEMPERATURE

In general, it appears that the temperature tended to be progres-
sively lower toward the head of the Gulf, a large number of the mod-
erately large and large catches being taken at about 15°C. Still, the
largest catch was made in a moderately high temperature of 19.4°C
just south of Tiburon Island. In 1921 (Allen, 1923) most of the large
catches were taken at temperatures near 20°C, but some were made
in water showing about 29°C. There can be no reasonable doubt
that temperatures have great influence on welfare and productivity
of plankton diatoms, but the relationships are too obscure to appear
as direct correlations in series of this kind. For one thing, it ought
to be more generally understood and recognized that a temperature
taken at the time of sampling a population of micro-organisms bears
no necessary relation to the immediate characteristics exhibited by
it. The temperature having most significant influence in causing the
visible condition of the sample must have appeared at some time
(possibly some place) preceding that of the sampling. The tempera-
ture taken at the time and place of sampling should be regarded only
as an aid to understanding the general status of the environment. It
should not be used for attempts to establish direct correlations.

SUMMARY

1. There is ample indication that the Gulf of California provides
excellent opportunities for different kinds of phytoplankton investi-
gations.

2. It appears probable that the more productive areas of the
Gulf lie between 25°N and 30°N, and that conditions are more
favorable for phytoplankton production and maintenance toward
the north in that territory.

No. 4 - ALLEN! PLANKTON DIATOMS 57

3. The Gulf of California supports essentially the same forms of
phytoplankton as are found in the neighboring ocean.

4. There is some indication that production is better near islands
in the Gulf of California, but there was one notable exception.

5. The occurrence of one species in nearly pure culture in mid-
Gulf suggests the possibility of influences especially favorable to it.

6. Satisfactory explanations of some of the phenomena of occur-
rence of plankton diatoms in the Gulf of California can not be given
until thorough studies are made of physical, chemical, meteorologi-
cal, and general biological conditions there.

58 THE HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

LITERATURE CITED
Auten, W. E.

1923. Observations on surface distribution of marine diatoms of Lower California
in 1921. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., vol. 12, pp. 435-45.

1937. The Templeton Crocker Expedition to the Gulf of California in 1935—the
phytoplankton. In press.

FIGURE 1

Map to show route followed in making the collections and order of magnitude of
catches (by symbols).

No. 4 ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 59

‘ae 72a 116° WS “4 M3 Ne 70 HO 109° 108° 107" i
! ! ' if ' ! J 4 ) 2 ,

' U N I T E D t
_ u

- Ss i cA i E ) -33°h
i San biego..--—- e - /00 '
1) ees tah al a + £000 \
y Descanso P? ~ x « /0000 i
b32 \ e - /00,000 ~32°
4 P? Banda i
{ 5 Georges Bay 0
As/* -3/"h

To eae Sa z Gueymas - 28°

ze _—- - 279
os Pr 5

by nace y

A i?

‘ ‘ 8

Bes *

5 Sines J

" WX Cera/do |/

h24 * C

U

)

f2J *

AN idl
Va NHR A
Aue Hit

fal

bent

} Tae
Hay it
yt
Wi
rey.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBER 5

PLANKTON DIATOMS OF THE GULF OF
CALIFORNIA OBTAINED BY ALLAN
HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITION OF 1937

(WitH 12 PLaATEs)

BY

E. E. CUPP and W. E. ALLEN

SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
LA JOLLA, CALIFORNIA

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
; 1938

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA, AND GALA-
PAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, IN 1933, IN 1934, IN 1935, IN 1936, IN 1937, AND IN 1938.

PLANKTON DIATOMS OF THE GULF OF
CALIFORNIA OBTAINED BY ALLAN
maNCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITION OF 1937

=,

By E. E. CUPP and W. E. ALLEN

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
ALLAN Hancock PAciFIC EXPEDITIONS
VOLUME 3, NUMBER 5

IssUED AUGUST, 1938

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS

Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

PLANKTON DIATOMS OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA
OBTAINED BY
ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITION OF 1937*

(WITH 12 PLATES)

E. E. Cupp and W. E. ALLEN

Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California
La Jolla, California

Our knowledge of biological conditions in the Gulf of California,
although still very limited, is being increased from time to time. Until
1937, only three series of phytoplankton samples had been collected in
the Gulf, one in 1921, between April 7 and July 11, by the Expedition
of the California Academy of Sciences (Allen, 1923); a second in
November, 1935, by the Templeton Crocker Expedition on the Zaca
(Allen, in press); and a third by the Allan Hancock Expedition of
1936, from February 8 to March 26 (Allen, 1937). A fourth series
of collections, to be discussed in the present paper, was made by the
Allan Hancock Expedition of 1937, between March 1 and April 4.

In 1937, seventy-three phytoplankton samples were collected, seven
on the southward run in the open ocean from Point San Eugenio to
Cape San Lucas, sixty-six in the Gulf. (Map 1) Several catches were
collected farther north in the Gulf than any previous samples and more
were collected on the eastern side of the Gulf. Most of the collecting
was done on the northward run along the west side of the Gulf. In
1921, samples were collected as far north as Georges Bay; in 1936, to
the north end of Angel de la Guardia Island; and in 1935, only as
far as Topolobampo Bay.

The method of collecting was the same as that used in 1936. A
measured quantity of water (13 liters for catches 1 to 35, 8 liters for
catches 36 to 73) was simply dipped from the surface and filtered
through a net of No. 25 silk bolting cloth (200 meshes to the inch).
A small quantity of formalin was used as the preservative. In the labora-
tory counting was done by use of a Sedgwick-Rafter counting cell.
Records were kept of cells in good condition and of cells in poor con-
dition. The designation ‘poor condition” was used to indicate cells
in which no chromatophores or chromatophore material remained.

* Contributions of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography. New Series, No. 14.
[ 61 ]
SEP

62 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VoL. 3

For convenience in making comparisons, the same geographical divi-
sion of the Gulf into three sections has been used as in the discussion
of the 1936 series, namely, the southern section, south of 25°N. lati-
tude; the middle section, between 25°N. and 27°N. latitude; and the
northern section, north of 27°N. latitude.

Toward the preparation of this report Professor Allen contributed
the microscopic examination and Dr. Cupp contributed the general
discussion, the taxonomic discussion, and the illustrations of prominent
species.

TopoGRAPHY OF THE GULF

Certain features of the topography of the Gulf were discussed in
the paper by the junior author dealing with the 1936 series. Only a
brief review of the salient points need be repeated here. The northern
section, according to available information, appears to be a more or
less steeply descending trough extending from the comparatively level
floor (250 meters deep or less) above Angel de la Guardia Island to
27°N. latitude. Here the bottom is uneven and at least part of the
trough seems to terminate. There is little evidence of land drainage
from the side of the trough and probably there is little direct influence
exerted by ocean waters on the productivity of this section. The Colo-
rado River drainage should have considerable influence. The trough is
partly filled by Angel de la Guardia, Tiburon, and other islands. The
remainder of the Gulf, south of 27°N., is characterized by a broad,
open, south tilted basin. Ocean waters would naturally be expected
to have considerable influence upon productivity in the middle section
of the Gulf, and to be of major importance in the southern section.

NuMERICAL ABUNDANCE OF DIATOMS

Far larger numbers of diatoms were present in the samples collected
during the present Expedition than in the 1921 or 1936 series. Sixteen
of the sixty-four catches (25%) in the Gulf had. over 100,000 cells
per liter, ten of these over 1,000,000 cells. The largest catch was
recorded as having over 5,000,000 cells per liter. In 1921, nineteen
catches out of a total of 117 (16+-%) had over 100,000 cells per liter
but none reached 1,000,000 cells. The largest abundance recorded in
the series was 592,720 cells per liter. In the 1936 Hancock Expedition

No. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 63

only five catches out of eighty (6.3%) had over 100,000 cells per
liter, with the largest catch estimated at 217,476 cells. Fourteen catches
in 1937, three in 1921, and eleven in 1936, yielded no cells.

NorTHERN SECTION

Three regions in the northern section were particularly noteworthy
for their high diatom productivity. The first and largest of these three
was found on the west side of the Gulf to the north of Angel de la
Guardia Island, between 29°30’N. and 30°N. latitude; the second
region off the southeastern part of Tiburon Island on the east side of
the Gulf in 28°49’N. latitude, 112°16’W. longitude; and the third
region on the east side of the Gulf from 27°56’N. (off Guaymas)
south to 27°31’N. latitude. (Shaded areas on Map 1)

Nine catches in the first named region to the north of Angel de la
Guardia contained over 100,000 cells to the liter with five of these
having over one million cells. ‘The largest catch in the entire series
was taken a few miles northwest of the Island on March 22. It was
estimated that the yield from this one catch was 5,058,800 cells per liter.
Of this number, 4,945,000 cells (4,460,000 in good condition, 485,000
in poor condition) belonged to the one species, Chaetoceros radicans.
This species predominated in all of the nine large catches.

In the three catches off Tiburon Island, one gave nearly 2,000,000
cells per liter, one nearly 3,000,000 cells, and the third 408,000 cells.
Chaetoceros species was most abundant in the two largest, Chaetoceros
socialis in the third. A catch to the south of the Island (28°41/N. lati-
tude, 112°27’W. longitude) had 12,125 cells per liter.

In the third region, two catches off Point Doble contained 1,021,750
and 1,950,140 cells with Chaetoceros compressus and C. species predomi-
nating, respectively. The third large catch in this region was estimated
to have 3,300,500 cells per liter, with 2,465,000 of these Chaetoceros
radicans.

Table 1 (pp. 66 and 67) gives the data for all the catches over
100,000 cells per liter taken in the northern section of the Gulf.

No large catches were taken in the Gulf north of 30°N. One
sample had 7,875 cells per liter, four between 1,000 and 3,000, two
between 125 and 250, and one had no cells. ‘wo other catches on the
east side of the Gulf opposite the Angel de la Guardia region of
abundance showed no cells. Three catches taken near the west side of

64 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

the Gulf around 27°30’N. contained fewer than 1,000 cells per liter.
One catch of 50,375 cells was taken southeast of Las Animas Point
(28°49’N. latitude, 113°13’W. longitude), a catch of 27,951 cells
a little south of the San Lorenzo Islands, and one of 19,375 cells on
the east side of the Gulf in latitude 27°8’N., longitude 110°27’W.
All other catches contained fewer than 10,000 cells per liter and most
of them fewer than 1,000 cells.

No other Expedition has gone so far north in the Gulf as did the
1937 one. In 1921 (April 26), two catches were taken on the eastern
side of the Gulf about ten miles southwest of Georges Bay. One of
these contained 4,428 cells, the other 196,621 (Chaetoceros species
66,976 cells, Leptocylindrus danicus 63,700 cells) showing that a large
production does occur in this region at times. North of San Luis Island,
near the western side of the Gulf just south of 30°N. latitude, two
catches were made on April 28, one containing 207,284, the other
220,078 cells per liter. Again Chaetoceros species predominated.

In 1921, as in 1937, the region around Angel de la Guardia Island
was highly productive. On that Expedition a number of catches were
taken near the southern end of the Island as well as to the north. In
the latter part of April, early May, and again toward the last of June
large catches were taken near the southern end or south of the Island.
The largest of these, estimated to contain 572,317 cells per liter, was
collected on June 25. Chaetoceros species, C. compressus, and C. radicans
were abundant. In the larger catches of April and May Thalassionema
nitzschioides was the leading species in number of cells. toward the
north of the Island a catch of 592,720 cells (Chaetoceros debilis and
Thalassionema nitzschioides) was taken on May 1 and one of 118,152
cells (Chaetoceros species and C. didymus) on June 29. Near the south-
eastern point of Tiburon Island two catches of over 100,000 cells per
liter were collected on July 4. This region would appear to be a pro-
ductive one in 1921 as well as in 1937 although the catches were taken
three months later in 1921. Chaetoceros species, C. curvisetus, and
Cerataulina bergonii were most numerous. The third region mentioned
as being highly productive in 1937 was represented by only two very
small catches taken on July 10 and 11 in 1921.

In the 1936 series two catches, one of 205,296 cells per liter, the
other of 115,484 cells, were taken between Angel de la Guardia and
the coast of Lower California on March 2. Chaetoceros debilis,
Nitzschia seriata, and Chaetoceros curvisetus predominated. ‘Three

No. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 65

catches of 217,476 cells, 118,860 cells, and 95,577 cells per liter were
collected just south of Tiburon on March 10 and 11. Chaetoceros
species, C. debilis, C. compressus, C. curvisetus, and C. constrictus were
present in largest numbers. One large catch (143,724 cells) was taken
in mid-Gulf about seventy miles southeast of Tiburon on March 12.
Almost the entire catch was made up of Thalassiothrix heteromorpha( ?).

Middle Section

With two exceptions, the middle section of the Gulf (25°N. to
27°N. latitude) was a region of very low diatom productivity in 1937.
One catch of 29,337 cells per liter was made in Concepcion Bay on
March 15. Nitzschia seriata, Chaetoceros species, and C. curvisetus
were most abundant. The other large catch, taken off “Copolobampo
Bay on March 31, contained 512,000 cells per liter. Here Skeletonema
costatum, Nitzschia seriata, and Eucampia zoodiacus were most numer-
ous. Nine of the seventeen catches in this section yielded no cells. The
remaining six were all very small.

In 1921, large catches were found in the Carmen Island region on
May 19 and 23 (480,610 cells and 264,385 cells) and on June 13 and
14 (338,156 cells and 450,740 cells). Chaetoceros species and C. com-
pressus were most abundant. One catch of 85,645 cells (Rhizosolenia
stolterfothii, Chaetoceros debilis, and C. decipiens) was taken in San
Nicolas Bay on May 17, and one of 142,920 cells (Chaetoceros species,
Bacteriastrum elongatum, and Thalassionema nitzschioides) on April
13 in mid-Gulf off San Nicolas Bay.

Four catches at two stations in mid-Gulf a little north of the lati-
tude of Topolobampo Bay and one in Concepcion Bay were the only
catches of moderate size in the middle section during 1936. Of these
the largest was only 39,396 cells per liter, the smallest 11,970 cells.
Chaetoceros species Was most prominent in the mid-Gulf catches,
Thalassiothrix heteromorpha (?) in the Concepcion Bay catch. These
catches were all taken between March 14 and March 19.

The Templeton Crocker Expedition of the California Academy of
Sciences of November, 1935, collected six plankton samples in the
middle section of the Gulf. One of these, taken a short distance south-
west of Topolobampo Bay on November 16, was a large catch of
106,019 cells per liter. Of these, 82,316 cells belonged to the one
species, Chaetoceros curvisetus. The other five catches were small.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Numerical Abundance and Predominant |
Cells per Liter in the Northern

Numerical Abundance

Catch Cells per Liter

Date Region
No. Good Poor Total
Condition Condition e
March Angel de la
20 37 Guardia 171,250 30,250 201,500
Island
27 57 Tiburon 2,905,500 84,750 2,990,250
Island aed ’ 770,
Off Guaymas
29 and south to 933,500 88,250 1,021,750
Die at ING

1

f the Gulf of California in 1937

No. 5

CUPP AND ALLEN:

PLANKTON DIATOMS

Diatoms in Catches Greater than 100,000

67

Predominant Spectes

Cells per Liter

Name

Chaetoceros radicans
curvisetus

Chaetoceros radicans
debilis

Chaetoceros radicans
Nitzschia seriata

Chaetoceros radicans
species
Pseudoeunotia doliolus

Chaetoceros radicans
Pseudoeunotia doliolus

Chaetoceros radicans
debilis

Chaetoceros radicans
debilis

Chaetoceros radicans
debilis

Chaetoceros radicans
debilis

Chaetoceros species
socialis

Skeletonema costatum

Chaetoceros compressus

Chaetoceros socialis
Skeletonema costatum
Chaetoceros species

Chaetoceros species

Skeletonema costatum

Chaetoceros compressus
socialis

Chaetoceros compressus
species
radicans

Chaetoceros species
debilis

Asterionella japonica

Skeletonema costatum

Chaetoceros radicans
species
compressus

Condition Condition
146,250 19,250
16,750 4,250
446,875 8,125
3,625 375

847,500 97,500
2,625 0
1,188,750 62,500
4,750 375
5,125 0

4,460,000 485,000
21,500 0

2,580,000 130,000
41,500 29,500

2,652,500 277,500
108,500 10,750
1,103,750 148,750
27,875 3,625
64,500
750

711,000
709,500
480,000
394,500

104,500
110,500
54,000

439,500
451,500
307,500
292,500

361,250 0
161,250 6,250
127,500 28,500

817,500
223,500
201,000
146,250

1,645,000
241,000
190,000

35,750
3,250

820,000
112,000
30,000

Total

165,500
21,000

455,000
4,000

945,000
2,625

1,251,250
5,125
5,125

4,945,000
21,500

2,710,000
71,000

2,930,000
119,250

1,252,500
31,500

100,250
4,000

741,000
709,500
480,000
409,500

112,750
110,500
70,000

457,500
451,500
307,500
303,000

361,250
167,500
156,000

892,500
252,000
205,550
161,250

2,465,000
353,000
220,000

[FIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3 .
cocK PAC no. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTO
“ ALLAN HAN N DIATOMS 67

Numerical Abundance and Pre TapLe 1

domi
Cells per Liter in the ming Spies of
er

Sejon of the Gu

Diatoms in Catches Greater than 100,000
lf of California in 1937

Numerical Abung : :
o, auce dominant Species
Cells per Liter i “re per Liter

Good Poor
As it Good P
Condition Condition L | os Condition lates Total

S
a

™
x

no
o
a
“
>
c—

456,375

ee
Angel de la

March Guardia 7 15280 ae Chaetoceros radicans 146,250 19,250 165,500

20 Island az curvisetus 16,750 4,250 21000

10,750 Chaetoceros radicans 446,875 8,125 455.000
= (eel 3,625 375 4,000

860,750 97,875 958.695 | Chaetoceros radicans 847,500 97,500 945,000
21 na) Nitzschia seriata 2,625 0 2,625
Chaetoceros radicans 1,188,750 62,500 1,251,250 :
46 1,211,250 63,250 species 4,750 375 $125
Pseudoeunotia doliolus 5,125 0 5,125
4,570,800 488,000 Chaetoceros radicans 4,460,000 485,000 4,945,000
0 174,000 Chaetoceros radicans 2,580,000 130,000 2,710,000
Chaetoceros radicans 2,652,500 277,500 2,930,000
Chaetoceros radicans 1,103,750 148,750 1,252,500
Chaetoceros radicans 64,500 35,750 100,250
Chaetoceros species 711,000 741,000
. socialis 709,500 709,500
27 57 ae 2,905,500 84,750 2,990,250 Skeletonema costatum 480,000 480,000
Chaetoceros compressus 394,500 409,500
’ tins socialis 104,500 112,750
46,750 408,000 keletonema costatum 110,500 110,500
28 361,250 : Chaetoceros species 54,000 70,000
Chaetoceros species 439,500 457,500
1,864,550 Skeletonema costatum 451,500 451,500
59 1,800,050 64,500 oy Chaetoceros compressus 307,500 307,500
socialis 292,500 303,000
eer: Chaetoceros compressus 361,250 ones
uaymas species 161,250 ’
29 23 and south to 933,500 88,250 radicans 127,500 156,000
27° 31'N. Chaetoceros species 817,500 892,500
45.550 1,950,140 a’ debilis 223,500 pa
30 1,804,590 145, Asterionella japonica 201,000 205,550
keletonema costatum 146,250 161,250
Chaetoceros radicans 1,645,000 820,000 a
: 3,300,500 species 241,000 112,000 pale
2,271,500 1,029,00 compressus 190,000 30,000 , .

68 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

SOUTHERN SECTION

The southern section (south of 25°N. latitude) is a region of low
diatom productivity at least in the seasons during which samples have
been collected in four different years. In 1937, one catch of 20,713
cells per liter was collected on March 4 off Gorda Point (23°2’N.
latitude, 109°3014’W. longitude-Gorda Banks), and one of 14,707
cells on March 8 southeast of San Josef Island. Chaetoceros compressus
predominated in the first, C. radicans in the second. No other catch of
the thirteen made in this section had as many as 10,000 cells. —I'wo
contained no cells. One catch made farther south along the coast of
Mexico (22°16’N. latitude, 106°W. longitude) on April 2 yielded
55,125 cells per liter (47,250 cells Nitzschia seriata).

In 1921, two catches in this section yielded over 100,000 cells per
liter. One of these was taken on April 12 southwest of Espiritu Santo
Island. Chaetoceros species was listed as predominating. The other was
collected on June 9 northwest of the same Island. Thalassionema
nitzschioides and Chaetoceros species were most abundant. One catch,
taken south of Espiritu Santo on April 11, had 22,656 cells per liter.
No other sample yielded as many as 10,000 cells per liter. ‘Three of
the twenty-five contained no cells.

Fifteen of the twenty-five samples collected by the ‘Templeton
Crocker 1935 Expedition in this section during November contained no
cells. The largest catch was one of 532 cells.

None of the twenty-four catches of the 1936 series was large. Only
one sample had over 3,000 cells per liter, six had none. The largest
catch, 19,824 cells per liter, was taken about fifteen miles east of
Ceralbo Island. Chaetoceros compressus was the important species nu-
merically in this sample.

OcEAN CATCHES

Seven catches were made on the southward run to the Gulf. The
largest, 919,962 cells per liter, was collected off Point San Juanico
(26°14’N. latitude, 112°28’W. longitude). A second large catch was
taken north of Cape San Lazaro (25°10’N. latitude, 112°19’W. longi-
tude). The estimated number of diatoms was 331,297 cells per liter.
In both cases Chaetoceros costatus was the leading species (855,128
cells in the first sample, 211,584 cells in the second) with C. curvisetus
second in abundance. The other five catches were small, one nearly

No. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 69

10,000 cells, the others less than 1,500 cells per liter. Allen (1934)
mentions Chaetoceros costatus as a prominent species south of Point
Abreojos in April, 1931. About 2,000,000 cells per liter were recorded
for one catch.

GENERA AND SPECIES OF DIATOMS

Sixty-seven species of diatoms distributed among thirty-one genera
were found in the samples from the Gulf during the routine counting.
In the entire series sixty-nine species in thirty-two genera were recorded.
Of this number, fourteen species were of considerable importance, seven
reached sufficiently large numbers to be given rank as of major im-
portance. The one most abundant species, Chaetoceros radicans, was
more than five and one-half times more numerous than any other species.

Forty-one of the sixty-seven diatoms found in the Gulf were neritic
species. Five were tychopelagic (semibottom living littoral diatoms that
have been broken away from their substratum), fifteen were oceanic, and
six were unclassified. Northerly and southerly temperate neritic species
were present in equal numbers. Table 2 lists all species of diatoms
according to their habitat groups and indicates the most important
species.

TABLE 2

SPECIES OF DIATOMS

OCEANIC
ARCTIC
1. Chaetoceros atlanticus Cl. (and boreal) (Fig. 22)
2: decipiens Cl. (and boreal)
3. Thalassiothrix longissima Cl. and Grun. (Fig. 40)
TEMPERATE

1. Asteromphalus heptactis (Bréb.) Ralfs (Fig. 6)
*2, Bacteriastrum elongatum Cl. (southerly) (Fig. 21)

3. Chaetoceros peruvianus Brightw. (and tropical)
4, Corethron hystrix Cl. (Fig. 7)
5. Hemiaulus hauckii Grun. (and tropical)
6. Rhizosolenia alata Brightw. (Fig. 18)
7h alata f. indica (Perag.) Osten.
(south temperate or subtropical) (Fig. 19)
8. bergonii Perag. (Fig. 11)
o styliformis var. longispina Hust. (northerly) (Fig. 15)

10. Thalassiothrix frauenfeldii Grun. (Fig. 41)

70 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

TROPICAL
1. Rhizosolenia acuminata (Perag.) Gran (and substropical) (Fig. 20)
Pee calcar avis Schultze (perhaps neritic) (Fig. 17)
NERITIC
ARCTIC
1. Biddulphia aurita (Lyng.) Bréb. and God. (also littoral) (Fig. 37)
‘TEMPERATE
Northerly
*1. Chaetoceros approximatus Gran and Angst
£2: compressus Laud. (Fig. 25)
3. concavicornis Mang. (or oceanic arctic) (Fig. 23)
T4. constrictus Gran (Fig. 27)
aby, debilis Cl. (Fig. 31)
+6. radicans Schiitt (Fig. 32)
E72 socialis Laud. (Fig. 33)
8. subsecundus (Grun.) Hust.

9. Lauderia borealis Gran (Fig. 8)
*10. Leptocylindrus danicus Cl. (Fig. 9)
11. Nitzchia longissima (Bréb.) Ralfs

12. pungens var. atlantica Cl. (or southerly) (Fig. 45)
pee seriata Cl. (or oceanic arctic) (Fig. 44)

14. Rhizosolenia fragilissima Bergon

15; imbricata var. shrubsolei (Cl.) Schréd. (Fig. 14)
*16, setigera Brightw. (Fig. 16)

17 stolterfothii Perag. (Fig. 13)

$18. Skeletonema costatum (Grev.) Cl. (Fig. 2)
*19. ‘Thalassionema nitzschioides Grun. (Fig. 39)
20. ‘Thalassiosira decipiens (Grun.) Jorg. (Fig. 3)

Southerly

t1. Asterionella japonica Cl. (Fig. 42)
2. Cerataulina bergonii Perag. (Fig. 38)
3. Chaetoceros affnis Laud. (Fig. 28)

$4. costatus Pav. (Tif in Gulf only) (Fig. 29)
spe curvisetus Cl. (Fig. 30)

*6. didymus Ehr. (Fig. 26)

+7. laciniosus Schiitt

#8) lorenzianus Grun. (Fig. 24)

Gy simplex Osten.

10. Dactyliosolen mediterraneus Perag.

11. Ditylum brightwellii (West) Grun. (Fig. 35)

+12. Eucampia zoodiacus Ehr. (Fig. 34)

13. Guinardia flaccida (Castr.) Perag. (Fig. 10)

*14. Lithodesmium undulatum Ehr. (Fig. 36)

15. Planktoniella sol (Wall.) Schiitt (Fig. 5)

*16. Pseudoeunotia doliolus (Wall.) Grun. (and littoral) (Fig. 43)

No. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 71

17. Rhizosolenia delicatula Cl. (Fig. 12)
18. Schréderella delicatula (Perag.) Pav. (ocean only)
19. Stephanopyxis turris (Grev. and Arn.) Ralfs
(and subtropical) (Fig. 1)
20. Thalassiosira rotula Meun. (Fig. 4)

*21. Thalassiothrix mediterranea Pav. (given as T. heteromorpha Karst.
by Allen, 1937)

TYCHOPELAGIC

1. Actinoptychus undulatus (Bail.) Ralfs
2. Licmophora abbreviata Agardh

Je species

4, Pleurosigma species

5. Surirella species

UNCLASSIFIED

1. Bacteriastrum species
2. Biddulphia species (ocean only)
+3. Chaetoceros species
*4, Coscinodiscus species
5. Navicula species
6. Rhizosolenia species
7. Triceratium species
* Moderately abundant in at least some catches
+ Abundant species
+ Species of major importance

In comparing the diatom species with the list published for the 1936
Expedition to the Gulf, we find nine species present in 1936 not listed
in 1937, twenty-three species present in 1937 that were not listed in
1936. (Table 3)

TABLE 3

Species Present in 1936, Absent in 1937:

Achnanthes species
Chaetoceros coarctatus Laud.
danicus Cl.
Corethron criophilum Castr.
Dactyliosolen species
Rhizosolenia semispina Hensen
styliformis Brightw.
Stephanopyxis species
Thalassiosira condensata Cl.

Species Present in 1937, Absent in 1936:

1. Bacteriastrum elongatum Cl.
Biddulphia aurita (Lyng.) Bréb. and God.
ae species (ocean only)

Beeson GORE SS IGA be

72 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

4. Chaetoceros approximatus Gran and Angst
Be costatus Pav.

6. subsecundus (Grun.) Hust.
7. Corethron hystrix Cl.

8. Dactyliosolen mediterraneus Perag.

9. Ditylum brightwellii (West) Grun.
10. Lauderia borealis Gran

11. Licmophora abbreviata Agardh

12. species

13. Nitzschia pungens var. atlantica Cl.
14. Rhizosolenia acuminata (Perag.) Gran

15. alata f. indica (Perag.) Osten.

16. bergonii Perag.

V7 imbricata var. shrubsolei (Cl.) Schréd.
18. species

19. styliformis var. longispina Hust.

20. Schréderella delicatula (Perag.) Pav. (ocean only)
21. Stephanopyxis turris (Grev. and Arn.) Ralfs

22. Surirella species

23. Triceratium species

The species of diatoms found in the Gulf are not notably different
from those found in the ocean outside the Gulf off Lower California
or particularly different from those found at La Jolla.

CONDITION OF SPECIMENS

As customary with all phytoplankton collections studied at the
Scripps Institution, record was kept of cells in good condition and of
cells in poor condition. In 1936, the Gulf series was notable for the
relatively small number of cells in poor condition. Allen reported that
no catch of significant size showed as many as 10 per cent of the speci-
mens in poor condition. While the same statement cannot be made for
the 1937 series, in most cases the number of cells in poor condition was
low for the major catches. Half of the catches of over 10,000 cells
per liter had more than 10 per cent of the cells in poor condition, half
less than 10 per cent. One catch, taken south of Guaymas, with a total
of 3,300,500 cells had 1,029,000 in poor condition. The large catches
taken north of Angel de la Guardia Island all had fewer than 10 per
cent of the cells in poor condition.

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

1. Seventy-three surface samples of phytoplankton were collected
between March 1 and April 4, 1937, by the Allan Hancock Expedition

NO. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS 73

to the Gulf of California. Seven of these were taken in the open ocean
off Lower California, sixty-six in the Gulf.

2. In the northern section of the Gulf (north of 27°N. latitude)
three regions were notably productive of diatom growth:

a. the west side of the Gulf to the north of Angel de la
Guardia Island, between 29°30’ and 30°N. latitude;

b. the east side of the Gulf off the southeastern part of Ti-
buron Island;

c. the east side of the Gulf between 27°56’ and 27°31’N.
latitude.

3. Regions a and 4 were also highly productive in 1921 and 1936,
indicating that these localities may be peculiarly favorable for diatoms.

4. The high productivity of the upper third of the Gulf may very
probably be due, in large part, to the influence of the Colorado River.

5. The middle section of the Gulf (between 25° and 27°N. lati-
tude), except for one catch in Concepcion Bay and one off Topolobampo
Bay, was poor in diatom growth. The favorable influence of land and
shallow water may account, at least in part, for the higher catch in
Concepcion Bay. Productivity around Carmen Island, unlike that in
1921, was poor in 1937.

6. The southern section of the Gulf (south of 25°N. latitude)
is a region of low diatom productivity according to results from four
Expeditions.

7. Sixty-seven species of diatoms distributed among thirty-one
genera were present in the samples from the Gulf.

8. Neritic species of northerly and southerly temperate habitats
predominated.

9. Chaetoceros radicans, C. species, Skeletonema costatum, Chaeto-
ceros compressus, C. socialis, and C. debilis were the most prominent
species. Chaetoceros radicans occurred in very large numbers in nine
catches taken off Angel de la Guardia Island.

10. The species of diatoms found in the Gulf vary little from
those in the open ocean off Lower California or at La Jolla.

11. While the percentage of cells in good condition was not so
high as in 1936, a remarkably large percentage were in good condition.

12. Much more information as to physical, chemical, and meteoro-
logical conditions in the Gulf is needed before we can properly interpret
the results of these diatom studies.

74 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

LITERATURE CITED

ALLEN, W. E.
1923. Observations on surface distribution of marine diatoms of Lower
California in 1921. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., vol. 12, pp. 437-42.
1937. Plankton diatoms of the Gulf of California obtained by the G. Allan
Hancock Expedition of 1936. The Hancock Pacific Expeditions, The
Univ. So. Calif. Publ., vol. 3, pp. 47-59.
The Templeton Crocker Expedition to the Gulf of California in

1935—the Phytoplankton.
Hancock Expedition of 1936. Hancock Pacific Expeditions, The

In Press.

No. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS MAP 1

Nene Sa ew er ea ee en 7 |

Tames er pilske lige 3 (2esemalie mao nNOTtmIOS:
| | | | | |
U 7 ] T En) sD
Ss Te AN) ST E Ss
°
a LA JOLLA
SAN DIEGO _..—..—-— 2
oe. a
; VAR Se
Oe ot
322_H

—¢ SAN pe)
30° Ue ANGEL DE LA GUARDIA I.

eee SAN LORENZO |S,
fe eer TIBURON I.
e MOE aa ee Cree
29°
~
ERROS |.
= Me
BT. SAN [EUGENIO
©
—
21
a ASG OHO: PT
r PT. SAN JUANICO RS 2
26° =
oN
5° oe q|
CAPE| SAN LAZ|ARO
° MAGDALENA BAY [NS
aay
©
;. = DA PT. MAZATLAN®
= daPE SAN|LUCAS bs
_ Hii mW IMSS 114° ses m0 2° lite a 110% 109°. 108°
MAP 1

Region visited by the Allan Hancock Expedition of 1937.
© = Locations of Phytoplankton samples.

Shaded areas — Regions of greatest abundance of diatoms.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 4

Stephanopyxts turris (Grey. and Arn.) Ralfs. Part of a chain.

. Mantle structure.

Skeletonema costatum (Grev.) Cl. Part of a chain.

. Part of a more slender chain.

Sketch to show arrangement of connecting threads between cells.
Thalassiosira decipiens (Grun.) Jorg. Part of a chain.

. Valve view indicating arrangement of sculpturing.

Thalassiosira rotula Meun. Part of a chain.

Planktoniella sol (Wall.) Schiitt. Valve view of cell with old wing-
like expansion.

. Valve view of cell developing new wing-like expansion.

Normal cell with arrangement of sculpturing on valve indicated.
Girdle view of a normal cell.

Asteromphalus heptactis (Bréb.) Ralfs. Valve view with arrangement
of areoles indicated in one sector.

PL. +

PLANKTON DIATOMS

CUPP AND ALLEN :

ra
a
ees!

ee
{)
ee

CALI ES
ORY

Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

7.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

Je) CyaN IDE 5)

Corethron hystrix Cl.

7a. A cell in process of division.

8.
De
10.

Lauderta borealis Gran. (Possibly L. annulata Cl.)

Leptocylindrus danicus Cl. Part of a chain.

Guinardia flaccida (Castr.) Perag.

VOL. 3

CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS PL. D

80

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 6

11. Rhizosolenta bergoni Perag.
lia. Apex of cell.

. 12. Rhizosolenia delicatula Cl.

. 13. Rhizosolenia stolterfothi Perag.

g. 14, 14a. Rhizosolenia imbricata var. shrubsolet (Cl.) Schréd.
ig. 15, 15a. Rhizosolenia styliformis var. longispina Hust.

. 16. Rhizosolenia setigera Brightw.

No.5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS PL. 6

82 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

JUNIO, 7/

Fig. 17. Rhizosolenia calcar avis Schultze.
17a. A more slender cell.
17b. Apex of cell more highly magnified.

Fig. 18. Rhizosolenia alata Brightw. Entire cell.
18a. End of another cell.

Fig. 19. Rhizosolenia alata f. indica (Perag.) Osten.

Fig. 20. Rhizosolenia acuminata (Perag.) Gran.

Qa. Apex of cell more highly magnified.

84 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 8

Fig. 21. Bactertastrum elongatum Cl.
Fig. 22. Chaetoceros atlanticus Cl. (var.?)

Fig. 23. Chaetoceros concavicornis Mang.

CUPP AND ALLEN:

PLANKTON DIATOMS

86 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PGA AS

Fig. 24. Chaetoceros lorenzianus Grun.
Fig. 25. Chaetoceros -compressus Laud.

Fig. 26. Chaetoceros didymus Ehr.

PL.9

CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS

88 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS
RAVE 10
Fig. 27. Chaetoceros constrictus Gran.
Fig. 28. Chaetoceros affinis Laud.
Fig. 29. Chaetoceros costatus Pay.

. Enlarged view.

Vor

NO.

5

CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS PL. 10

——

\\

\\
miei
Ly

\N
ig

ZA
ee

90) ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

ALINE, ail

Fig. 30. Chaetoceros curvisetus Cl. Broad girdle view of chain.
30a. Narrow girdle view of chain.
30b. Broad girdle view of chain with two resting spores.

Fig. 31. Chaetoceros debilis Cl.

~ Pr. li

CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS

S
Zz

\

—

Ya

igs

~}
ot 1m

j

Dh
a

Shs

|

a

N\

92 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

AL ANID: WZ

Fig. 32. Chaetoceros radicans Schiitt.
32a. Part of chain more highly magnified. Upper part, narrow girdle
view; lower part, broad girdle view.
32b. Valve view of a cell.

Fig. 33. Chaetoceros socialis Laud.

NO. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN:

\

a

:

li

Ra

i

/
LD fealty

i

|

\ é

PLANKTON DIATOMS

GL
aS L(
a
XY

33 \

—

pi. l2

94

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PAE 18

. 34, 34a, 34b. Eucampia zoodiacus Ehr. Parts of three different chains.

Broad girdle view.

x, 35. Ditylum brightwelli (West) Grun.
. 36, 36a. Lithodesmium undulatum Ehr. ‘Two views of the same chain.
. 37. Biddulphia aurita (Lyng.) Bréb. and God. Broad girdle view.

. 38, 38a. Cerataulina bergoni Perag. Two views of the same chain.

NO. 5 CUPP AND ALLEN: PLANKTON DIATOMS PIs

96 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 14

Fig. 39. Thalassionema nitzschiotides Grun. Chain.
39a. Girdle view of a cell.

Fig. 40. Thalassiothrix longissima Cl. and Grun. Entire cell.
40a. Part of the cell more highly magnified. Girdle view.

Fig. 41. Thalassiothrix frauenfeldi Grun. Girdle view.
41a. Colony.
41b. Another colony.

pL. 14

PLANKTON DIATOMS

CUPP AND ALLEN:

No. 5

98

Fig.

42.

. 43.

. 43a.

. 44,
44a,
44h.

ig. 45.

45a.
45b.
45c.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 15

Astertonella japonica Cl.
Pseudoeunotia doliolus (Wall.) Grun. Colony.

Part of colony more highly magnified. End cell in valve view, others
in girdle view.

Nitzschia seriata Cl. Four-celled chain.
Valve view of a cell.
Girdle view of a cell.

Nitzschia pungens var. atlantica Cl. Girdle view of a chain.
Valve view of a chain.

Valve view of a cell.

Girdle view of a cell.

CUPP AND ALLEN :

PLANKTON DIATOMS °

Hiei

cA

POT

]

Hit

SS 7777 FF EE =

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBER 6

PHYCOMYCETES RECOVERED FROM SOIL
SAMPLES COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR ON
THE ALLAN HANCOCK 1939 EXPEDITION

(WitH Two PLatTEs)

BY

F. K. SPARROW, Jr.

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
1940

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA, AND
GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, IN 1933, IN 1934, IN 1935, IN 1936,

IN 1937, IN 1938, AND IN 1939.

PHYCOMYCETES RECOVERED FROM SOIL

SAMPLES COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR ON

THE ALLAN HANCOCK 1939 EXPEDITION
(WitH Two PLaATEs)

By F. K. SPARROW, Jr.

Tue UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS
VoLUME 3, NUMBER 6
IssUED OCTOBER 8, 1940

Tue UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

PHYCOMYCETES RECOVERED FROM SOIL SAMPLES
COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR ON THE ALLAN
HANCOCK 1939 EXPEDITION*

(WirH Two PLATES)

F. K. Sparrow, JR.

Through the kindness of Professor W. R. Taylor soil samples were
obtained from certain Central and South American localities visited by
him during the 1939 Allan Hancock Expedition. Water cultures were
prepared from each of these samples and “baited”? with appropriate sub-
strata. Although the extreme dryness of the soil samples when received
undoubtedly restricted greatly the variety and number of fungi still in
a viable condition, they nonetheless yielded species of exceptional interest.
Indeed, one of these, Monoblepharella Taylori, was found to be unique
among plants in the behavior of the egg after fertilization.

All the fungi recovered are known to possess a resting spore stage
resistant to unfavorable environmental conditions, such as drought,
which would be fatal to the vegetative parts. It is easy, therefore, to
understand how they survived the vicissitudes to which they were neces-
sarily exposed from the time of their collection until they reached—
some months later—the more congenial habitat of a battery jar of
sterile water provided with bits of substrata.

The samples were collected into clean new boxes by careful methods,
using ordinary precautions against the possibility of mixture. They were
not, however, collected or stored under strictly aseptic conditions. The
collection boxes were taped shut immediately after collection and re-
mained unopened until they reached the laboratory. Pieces of soil were
then cut out with a sterile scalpel from the middle of each sample and
placed in jars of sterile water containing bits of “bait.”

The following fungi were recovered:

* Paper from the Botany Department, University of Michigan, No. 720.

[101]

102 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3
Chytridiales

1. Rhizophidium carpophilum (Zopf) Fischer

Parasitic on oospores of Achlya sp.1 Sandy bank of a stream (“Site
I”). Caledonia Bay, Panama; April 26, 1939.

A species hitherto known only from the Eastern United States, West-
ern Europe, and Japan.

Blastocladiales

2. Allomyces javanicus Kniep

Mud from a roadside watering trough on the road from Curacas to
La Guaira, Venezuela; April 11, 1939.

According to F. T. Wolf (1939), no epigynous species of Allomyces
have been reported from the Western Hemisphere. In connection with
the present record, it might be mentioned that this species has also been
isolated from soil from Texas, where it was found associated with
Blastocladiella simplex Matthews.

The gametophyte differs from that formed by subcultures of Kniep’s
Javanese material in the occasional formation in water cultures of extraor-
dinarily long, cylindrical female gametangia.

3. Allomyces moniliformis Coker and Braxton

Soil from a paddy field on the road to Pitch Lake from Port of. Spain,
Trinidad, B.W.I.; April 18, 1939.

This rare species has hitherto been known only from the Eastern
United States (two collections) and Mexico (Wolf, 1939).

4. Allomyces sp. indet.

Soil from a spring on a hillside above the village of Bahia Honda,
Panama; March 28, 1939.

So far, this isolate, which resembles in its sporophyte phase 4. java-
nicus and A. arbuscula, has failed to produce a gametophyte. It is pos-
sibly 4. anomala Emerson, inedit., an unpublished species which, accord-
ing to Wolf (1939), is to include short-cycled species lacking both a
gametophyte and ‘‘Cystogenes”’ phase.

1 Attempts are being made to obtain normal material of this fungus for pur-
poses of identification.

No. 6 PHYCOMYCETES COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR 103

Monoblepharidales

5. Monoblepharella n. gen.

Mycelium, contents, zoosporangia, zoospores, oogonia, antheridia, and
antherozoids as in Monoblepharis, the egg after fertilization emerging
from the oogonium and by means of the persistent flagellum of the male
gamete undergoing a period of swarming, after which it encysts and
becomes a thick-walled oospore; the oospore upon germination forming
the vegetative mycelium.

Mycelium, sporangia, zoosporis, oogonium, antheridia, antherozo-
oideis simuli Monoblepharis ; ova inseminata postice uniciliata, natantia;
oosporis in aqua liberis, germinatio formati mycelio.

Monoblepharella Taylori comb. nov.

Monoblepharis Taylori Sparrow,2 in Mycologia 31: 737. 1939.

Mycelium well developed, consisting of tenuous, flexuous branched
hyphae 2—5, in diameter, the contents reticulately vacuolated ; sporan-
gia narrowly siliquiform with a tenuous wall, variable in size, 35—65pu
long by 5—9yp in diameter, with a very narrow (2.5—4y) base, occur-
ring singly or in pairs at the tips of the hyphae or after sympodial branch-
ing of the hypha appearing lateral; zoospores ovoid or somewhat cylin-
drical, 7—9u long by 4.5—5y wide, the posterior cilium 2—3 times the
length of the body; oogonium at first terminal or after sympodial branch-
ing of the supporting hypha often appearing lateral, clavate or obpyri-
form with rounded apex and narrow cylindrical base, 15—17 long by
8—10 wide, tapering to 2—3y at the base, the contents at maturity
forming one or occasionally up to 6 eggs containing numerous large re-
fractive globules; antheridium usually hypogenous, several often devel-
oped in basipetal succession, consisting of a cylindrical segment of the
suboogonial hypha and a beaklike lateral outgrowth 8—10y long by
45 wide, antherozoids two to five, strongly amoeboid, posteriorly
uniciliate, ovoid when swimming and about 5p long by 3p wide, escaping
through a pore formed at the tip of the beak; zygote broadly ovoid to
nearly spherical, 10—13 long by 8—10y wide, posteriorly uniciliate,
free swimming, the contents bearing numerous large refractive globules;
oospore formed free in the water, spherical, 8—11, in diameter, with a
slightly thickened, light brown, smooth wall, contents bearing globules,
upon germination forming a mycelium.

2 A Latin, but not an English, description has been previously published in
Mycologia.

104 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

In soil, from a paddy field on the road from Port of Spain to Pitch
Lake, Trinidad, B.W.I., April 18, 1939; from sandy soil on the bank
of a stream (“Site I’’), Caledonia Bay, Panama, April 26, 1939; dry bed
below waterfall, 9 miles from Madden Dam, Panama, Canal Zone,

March 31, 1939.

After a careful consideration and study of the genus Monoblepharis
it has seemed advisable to segregate M. Taylori in a genus of its own.
The remarkable behavior of the zygote is unlike anything observed in
Monoblepharis, or, indeed, in the Fungi or Algae, and well warrants
generic distinction. It is possible that /. ovigera and M. regignens may
in the future be found to possess this same type of sexual reproduction,
in which case they too might be included in Monoblepharella. While
Monoblephariopsis already exists for their accommodation, this genus is
founded on fungi known only from the imperfect stage. Since Monoble-
pharella is based on a species with both perfect and imperfect stages, it
would, rightly, take precedence.

The thallus and sporangia of JZ. Taylori resemble in superficial as-
pect those of Monoblepharis regignens and M. ovigera. ‘The mycelium,
which forms a lustrous, pearly gray halo around the substrate, is com-
posed of delicate, moderately branched hyphae 2—3, in diameter. Near
the base, where the plant is anchored by a system of holdfasts to the
substrate, the hyphal axes may attain a diameter of 5. Catenulate series
of swellings are formed on the hyphae of some, but not all, isolates. It is
suspected that these are due to an extraneous parasitic organism. How-
ever, no reproductive phase has ever been observed which would sub-
stantiate this idea. The contents of the hyphae are characteristically dis-
posed in a rich network, or reticulum, within which may be seen moving
along the long axis somewhat coarse refractive granules of irregular size.
A preliminary cytological examination of these hyphae shows the minute
nuclei to be disposed at more or less regular intervals.

Occasionally both nonsexual and sexual reproductive organs may be
formed simultaneously on the same plant (pl. 17, fig. 10). However,
at room temperature (20-21°C.) a preponderance of zoosporangia is
produced, whereas at 30°C. the formation of sexual organs occurs in
abundance.

The zoosporangia are ordinarily produced at the periphery of the
colony at the tips of delicate, sparingly branched hyphae. By subsequent
sympodial branching of the hypha they come to appear lateral. The dif-

NO. 6 PHYCOMYCETES COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR 105

ference in width of the sporangium and its attendant hypha is so striking
that the former frequently appears as though it were a long, slender
fusiform or siliquiform highly refractive conidium lying free in the
tangled mycelial complex. The sporangia vary from 35—65p long by
5—9. wide, the base generally tapering to 2.5—4y. The zoospores are
fully matured before discharge and emerge (pl. 17, fig. 9) through a
small pore formed upon the deliquescence of the sporangial apex, in the
same manner as in species of Monoblepharis (Sparrow, 1933). They
are ovoid or somewhat cylindrical, 7—9u long by 4.5—5y» wide, and
possess a single long posterior cilium. The internal organization is exactly
like that found in Monoblepharis.

Oogonia and antheridia are frequently formed on somewhat shorter
branches of the thallus than are the zoosporangia. The clavate or
obpyriform oogonium, 15—17 long by 8—10p wide, with a narrow
base 2—3, in diameter, may, like the sporangium, be at first terminal
but, after sympodial branching of the hypha, appears lateral. Both
oogonium and antheridium develop in the same manner as do those of
Monoblepharis sphaerica (Sparrow, 1933), i.e., the rudiment of the
terminal oogonium is formed first. After this is delimited, another, more
proximal segment is separated from the supporting hypha by a cross wall.
In most cases this basal segment before its delimitation has formed a
short branch beneath the oogonium which continues to increase in size
as maturation proceeds. ‘The mature oogonium is thin walled and ap-
parently without a prominent receptive papilla, although further obser-
vations are needed on this point. The contents of the large, broadly
ellipsoidal egg are made highly characteristic and conspicuous by the
possession of numerous large, colorless, refractive globules (pl. 16, fig.
1), embedded in the clear cytoplasm. Although in most cases only a
single egg is formed in the oogonium, 2—6 have occasionally been found
(pl. 17, fig. 8). The mature antheridium, which may be formed singly
or in basipetal series beneath the oogonium, consists of a cylindrical
portion and a large, lateral, beaklike outgrowth, 8—10p long by 4—5z
wide, formed from the previously mentioned branch. About 2—5 strongly
amoeboid, posteriorly uniciliated antherozoids, 54 long by 3u wide, are
produced which escape through a pore formed at the tip of the beak.
‘These may creep about after discharge or, like the zoospores which they
resemble in all but size, swim about in the medium. The early stages in
the process of fertilization are like those found in Monoblepharis. ‘The
antherozoid after reaching the apex of the fully mature oogonium be-

106 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

comes strongly amoeboid. Its contents become watery and spread over
the oogonial apex (pl. 16, figs. 1-4). Numerous small vacuoles appear
and disappear so rapidly as to give an appearance of cytoplasmic “‘boil-
ing.” The cilium waves feebly above the body of the sperm and, as the
cytoplasm of the male gamete gradually sinks into the ooplasm, becomes
more hyaline in appearance. During absorption of the male gamete the
ooplasm expands and for a short time fills the oogonium (pl. 16, figs. 5,
6). In none of the many cases of fertilization observed was the body of
the male gamete completely engulfed by the ooplasm. There always re-
mained a small, papillalike part at the apex, from which protruded the
cilium of the antherozoid (pl. 16, fig. 6). The remainder of the male
gamete could be detected for a time as a more slightly granular material in
the anterior part of the egg, but it was soon lost to view. Almost instantly
after the absorption of the major part of the antherozoid, the papillalike
residue of this structure on the surface of the egg started to increase in
size (pl. 16, fig. 7). This marked the initiation of evacuation of the
zygote from the oogonium. More definite evidence of emergence could
then be seen in the migration of the large, conspicuous globules into the
enlarging papilla (pl. 16, figs. 8-10). These continued to flow out with
the cytoplasm of the zygote. Meanwhile, the cilium remained passive
and, as the zygote continued to ooze out, slowly assumed a lateral posi-
tion with respect to the orifice of the oogonium. The completely emerged
zygote was at first somewhat pyriform, with the cilium nearly basal and
extending at a right angle or more to the long axis of the body (pl. 16,
fig. 11). It then rounded off (pl. 16, fig. 12), remained quiescent for a
few seconds, and then began to rock gently. A trembling movement of
increasing intensity was soon initiated, which frequently carried it away
somewhat from the oogonial orifice (pl. 17, fig. 1). Lateral vibration of
the hitherto quiescent cilium then occurred, and vacuoles appeared in the
anterior part of the now more ovoid body (pl. 17, fig. 2). After a few
violent tugs, accompanied by rapid vibration of the dark-appearing
cilium, rotation of the zygote on its long axis as well as forward pro-
gression was initiated, and it slowly swam off. Under poor environmental
conditions the zygote may fail to emerge, and the oospore is formed in
the oogonium (pl. 17, fig. 7).

After a period of motility of unknown duration, frequently punctu-
ated by periods of quiescence and strong amoeboid crawling (pl. 17, fig.
3), the zygote comes to rest. Its cilium is apparently absorbed (pl. 17,
fig. 4), and the body becomes surrounded by a thickened wall (pl. 17,

NO. 6 PHYCOMYCETES COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR 107

fig. 5). The globules persist for a time, but eventually these are absorbed
and the oospore undergoes a period of rest, far removed from the oogo-
nium. The precise duration of encystment is not known. Fully mature
oospores dried for three weeks on cover slips have germinated when
placed in water. It will also be recalled that the soil samples from which
the fungus was isolated had been dry at least two months before they
were obtained for study. It is probable, therefore, that the oospore can
remain viable in the soil during ordinary periods of tropical drought.

Upon germination, a single small pore is formed in the oospore wall,
through which a hypha emerges (pl. 17, fig. 6). The latter elongates
indefinitely, branches, makes contact with bits of organic material, and
re-establishes the fungus. Reproductive organs of either type may be
formed, or the mycelium may continue its vegetative growth.

Monoblepharella Taylori presents among other features a type of
sexual reproduction of unusual interest. So far as now known, sexuality
in those uniciliated Phycomycetes where one or both the gametes are
free swimming may be isogamous (Olpidium, Synchytrium, Blastocladi-
ella variablis), anisogamous (Allomyces javanicus, A. arbuscula), or
oogamous (Monoblepharis). In this series one type of sexual reproduction
has not as yet been found, namely, that in which a free-swimming egg is
fertilized out in the water by a motile sperm. When M. Taylori was first
discovered, it was thought that it might possess this sort of reproduction.
A close examination, however, revealed otherwise, for it is not the egg
that is ciliated and motile, but the zygote. It seems highly probable,
therefore, that there exists in nature an oogamous organism of this group
in which both gametes are motile.

6. Phycomycete of unknown affinities.

Sandy bank of a stream (“Site I’), Caledonia Bay, Panama; April
Bowl 39.

Only a few thalli and mature sporangia of this fungus were found.
All attempts to multiply it failed, and hence little is known of its life
history or affinities.

The plant consists at maturity of two well-defined parts: a distal,
more or less spherical body, 70—200, in diameter with a broad discharge
tube 15—30 x 50—60y long, and, continuous with it, a trunklike basal
stalk, 50-—220p long x 25 wide, from the tip of which emerges a series
of sparsely or richly branched holdfasts. Occasionally the stalk is lack-
ing and the holdfasts arise directly from the body. ‘he two parts are

108 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

separated by a cross wall. The contents of the swollen apex and tube be-
come segmented—apparently by successive division—into an extremely
large number of roundish or somewhat angular spores about 10y in di-
ameter. The cytoplasm of these bodies consists of a granulated matrix,
within which are embedded a few bright granules. No spore discharge was
ever witnessed. The frequent finding of columns of motionless spores in
the medium seemed to indicate that they were set free upon the disintegra-
tion of the wall of the discharge tube.

In its superficial aspect the fungus resembles a species of Blastocladi-
ella. An even closer resemblance to the recently described Rhizidiomyces
bivellatus (Nabel, 1939) is found not only in the presence of a discharge
tube but in the occasional lack of a stalk. Nabel’s fungus was discovered
in soils collected in Haiti, Venezuela, Mexico, and Yugoslavia.

NO. 6 PHYCOMYCETES COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR 109

LITERATURE CITED

NABEL, K.
1939. Uber die Membran niederer Pilze, besonders von Rhizidiomyces bi-

vellatus nov. spez. Archiv f. Mikrobiol. 10 (4): 515-541.

Sparrow, F. K., Jr.
1933. The Monoblepharidales. Ann. Bot. London. 47: 517-542.

Wotr, F. T.
1939. A study of some aquatic Phycomycetes isolated from Mexican soil.

Mycologia 31:376-387.

110 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

All figures were drawn from living material with the aid of the camera lucida.
The absolute scale is given on each plate.

PLATE 16
Stages in the fertilization of the egg of Monoblepharella Taylori
and the emergence of the zygote.

Fics. 1,2. Emergence of the last of four antherozoids from the
antheridium.

Fics. 3-6. Absorption of the antherozoid by the egg. In Fig. 6
all but a small portion of the male gamete and its
cilium has sunk into the ooplasm. The cilium has as-
sumed a lateral position.

Fic. 7. Beginning of emergence of the zygote.
Fics. 8-10. Further stages in emergence.

Fic. 11. Completely emerged, somewhat ellipsoidal zygote
resting at the mouth of the oogonium.

Fic. 12. Zygote assumes a more spherical shape and moves
away from the orifice of the oogonium.

Errata: Plates 16 and 17 are transposed.
With this correction, all references to both
plates are accurate.

PL. 16

PHYCOMYCETES COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR

nae

at

%

2

£2

Fics. 1, 2.

Fic. 3.

Fic. 4.

Fic. 5.
FIG. 6.

FIc. 7.
Fic. 8.

Fic. 9.

Fic. 10.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

PLATE 17

Final stages in the escape of the zygote. In Fig. 2 the
body has started to rotate on its long axis, and the
cilium is in motion.

Amoeboid changes of shape undergone by the zygote
during temporary periods of rest.

Zygote at rest. The body has become rounded and the
cilium condensed into a small droplet.

Mature oospore free in the water.

Germinated oospore. The full length of the hypha is
not shown.

Two oospores formed within the oogonium. Occur-
ring commonly under poor environmental conditions.

Unusually large oogonium containing six eggs.

Discharging zoosporangium. A mature zoospore with
the typical internal structure assumed during motility
is shown in the upper right figure.

Portion of a hyphal tip bearing an immature zoo-
sporangium and an empty oogonium beneath which
are several antheridia.

Figures inked in by Richard Higgins.

VOL. 3

NO. 6 PHYCOMYCETES COLLECTED BY W. R. TAYLOR PL. 17

Dar

i Se Te

he ne
gl: Ne

htt Ue
Mao Lp
OLR han ty

Mn hay
Riek MK,

ANT

Shel ER

sy

iii
FP AMET te
Hee ude?

OMS ti

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBERS 7, 8

FIELD OBSERVATIONS ON THE ALGAE OF
THE GULF: OF CALIFORNIA

A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA
WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

(THIRTEEN PLATES)

BY

ELMER YALE DAWSON

DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

Z NITE 48 OARS ~
i 17 oN
\\ AUG 24 q952_

Of£
pa

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
1941

++

: -
Corn a,

Rig soe
Rete Bee:

ey ame 6

REPORTS OF THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA,
AND GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, IN 1933, IN 1934, In 1935,
IN 1936, IN 1937, IN 1938, IN 1939, AND IN 1940.

FIELD OBSERVATIONS ON THE ALGAE OF
ihe THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA

By ELMER YALE DAWSON

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS
VOLUME 3, NUMBERS 7, 8
IssUED APRIL 21, 1941

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

FIELD OBSERVATIONS ON THE ALGAE OF THE
GULF OF CALIFORNIA

ELMER YALE DAWSON

Department of Botany, University of California

It was during the Allan Hancock Expedition of 1940 that the author
had an opportunity to obtain information on the condition of the winter
algal flora of the Gulf of California.

Our collections were made between January 18 and February 16, and
ranged between Gorda Banks, off the Cape of Baja California, and
Rocky Point, Sonora. In July, exactly six months after the Expedition
visited Turner’s Island, near Tiburon Island in the upper Gulf, a return
trip was carried out by automobile and fishing dory to the same location
to observe the seasonal change in the marine flora of that particular
station.

Before entering upon detailed observations on the flora of the Gulf
of California, conspicuous general differences from that of the California
coast should be stressed. Some of the factors controlling these differences
will be discussed.

Taking the Gulf as a whole, as observed at fully twenty-five different
shore stations, the most conspicuous feature was the paucity of seaweeds
as compared to the abundance on the rocky shores of California. In many
of the more southern localities in the Gulf, the fine rocky places one
would expect to find covered with plant life are almost sterile. In the
places which do have an abundant rock cover, a great difference exists in
the size of the plants. In the Gulf, though many species may occur in a
given area, the impression of paucity is due mostly to the absence of the
genera of large and conspicuous brown algae, the Kelps and the Fucoids.
In short, the marine flora of the Gulf is rich in species but is largely a
flora of miniature plants, the great bulk being made up of species of
Sargassum.

As might be expected, the contrast in abundance is less conspicuous in
the upper Gulf. The richest algal flora was found among the northern
islands from San Esteban to Angel de la Guardia. The greatest number
of species collected occurred at Puerto Refugio and at Turner’s Island.
The abundance of both species and individuals in these regions of the

[115]

116 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOLS

northern island group may be controlled by two principal sets of condi-
tions: (1) those of substratum, and (2) those of water movement.

It was observed throughout the upper two thirds of the Gulf, as in
other marine areas, that shallow, sandy, or muddy bays and shores are
relatively poor in algae as compared to rocky shores, which provide firm
bases for holdfast development. Regions of abundant sedimentation are
unsatisfactory, as shown by the decreasing richness of development both
toward the mouth of the Colorado River and along the coastal plains at
Bahia Gonzaga and Bahia Tepoca, where alluvial sedimentation occurs
during the rainy season. (The former yielded only 34 species on shore
and 8 by dredge, the latter 22 species on shore and 22 by dredge.)

As to the effect of water movement, one may best note the way in
which the northern island group blocks the Gulf to general mass move-
ment, leaving only narrow channels for the passage of the tremendous
volume of tidal water. The daily rise and fall of tides in the upper Gulf
is spectacular, as much as 32 feet in some places. The continuous move-
ment of water through the channels is very rapid, and thorough aeration
of the relatively sediment-free water apparently takes place. This greater
purity of the flowing water seems favorable to algal growth, and we find,
as compared to the above figures, the striking totals of some 80 species
collected at Turner’s Island and 130 from Puerto Refugio. On the other
hand, in the quiet water of the sandy or mucky bays and harbor lagoons
around Guaymas, where renewal is minor and sediment accumulation
continuous, the number of species is low. Across the Gulf from Guaymas
and to the south, little could be determined except that the winter flora is
very inconspicuous and the summer flora, according to accounts by the
natives, relatively abundant.

In the perennially warm, tropical waters around La Paz, the algal
flora is of a very different type from that found farther up the Gulf,
where the water is subject to periodic heating and cooling of a much
greater degree. The tropical algae are smallest in quantity and species;
the rocky shores in most places are almost completely bare of plant life.
The tropical water of the Gulf is not calcareous in nature, such as is that
of the Caribbean region, and, though corals are plentiful in the lagoons,
they are of an individual rather than of a reef-building nature. Thus,
under conditions which in other such warm localities might yield an
abundance of calcareous green algae, almost none are found. Only a few
emaciated specimens of Halimeda turned up in the dredge.

In order to secure midsummer data on the algal situation in the Gulf
to compare with the midwinter data already on hand, the author decided

No. 7 DAWSON: ALGAE OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA aly

to revisit, in July, one of the richest algal habitats known there, the reef
at Turner’s Island. Without the Velero III at this time marine collecting
in Mexico from a land approach presented quite a different problem.

Bahia Kino is a broad bay of almost continuous beach. For a marine
botanist it yields little to excite enthusiasm, but on this occasion it con-
tributed to one problem in particular, that of the development of Sargas-
sum in the Gulf.

The first Sargassum material found in fresh, wet condition on the
beach at Kino Bay could easily be separated into two forms. Both had
been capable of continued life and growth while floating and drifting in
the open sea. One clearly gave evidence of morphological modification
under these free-floating conditions; the other, less strikingly.

Sargassum was again encountered on the south of Tiburon Island,
where a species approaching fertility was found to be abundant on a
cobble shore, attached firmly to rocks by broad, discoid holdfasts.

On Turner’s Island, where in January great masses of Sargassum 3-6
feet long covered large areas of the lower littoral shore, a striking change
had taken place. These had all disappeared, and there remained only occa-
sional remnants of disintegrating fronds, below which were numerous
young shoots springing from the spreading holdfast region and just
beginning a new season’s development. Two species of young Sargassum
were found, both in about the same stage of development and indicating
that a complete seasonal cycle occurs annually at that locality. In one of
these, destruction of the mature plants is accomplished most probably by
gradual disintegration in accordance with increasing water temperatures.
‘The other seemed to be one which breaks off to take on the floating habit.
These detached pieces may live and grow actively for a considerable time
before being cast up on the beaches, where they are destroyed by myriads
of beach isopeds which consume them completely at each low-tide period.

The observations thus far have shown the Sargassum flora to be
largely annual in development, either entirely from sporelings or from
perennial bases. However, the various species follow through their devel-
opmental cycles in different seasonal order. Thus, in January at Guaymas
two species were in full reproductive condition; at Tepoca Bay to the
north another species had reached only the earlier stages, and maturity
was not due for some months. ‘The same conditions were found to the
south at Agua Verde Bay, though the stages were still younger at that
time. In July, on the other hand, Turner’s Island specimens were just
beginning a new cycle, and those on the south of ‘Tiburon Island were

118 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

very near to the end of one. Beach-drift specimens at the same time must
be considered separately, for it seems that the suspended state may prolong
the life of such plants after they have left the original habitat, and thus
create an overlap in the cycle whereby one generation continues to linger
as a floater, while the succeeding one proceeds in its development.

Aside from the interesting changes in the Sargassum vegetation of
Turner’s Island as observed at the two seasonal extremes, there were
other changes of an equally pronounced nature. In January about fifty
species were collected on the reef, and in July about the same number was
found. However, the expression of the flora of the reef was strikingly
different at the two seasons. During the winter, Colpomenia had been
dominant over a great part of the cobble shore, associated with an abun-
dance of Padina and Codium. All of these were gone by summer, together
with Gigartina, the greater part of the jointed corallines, and many small
rock-cover types. Over everything grew clumps of Dictyota, a large
species six to ten inches high, forming the great bulk of the plant life.
Some species which had been encountered in mature stages in January
were recognizable in July in their juvenile stages, but others were appar-
ently absent or greatly reduced in number.

It seems certain that this great change is due primarily to the widely
contrasting seasonal temperature relations. A comparison with the situa-
tion on our California coast reveals no such temperature extremes. In
January the open sea at Turner’s Island measured between 60 and 64
degrees F., while in July this same water had warmed to 88 degrees.
Insolation in the summer is exceedingly severe and, no doubt, produces
much higher temperatures on the surfaces of exposed plants at low tide
and in small pools. On Tiburon Island, in the bays along the shore,
temperature figures as high as 92 were common.

Some mention may be made of the deepwater collections secured by
the Hancock Expedition, since they far exceed all previous ones from the
region. The immediately sublittoral dredging yielded a great number of
species not found in any of the shore stations; indeed, the hauls from 6-16
fathom depths were among the most productive collections made. In
deeper water, 11-22 fathoms, a number of genera of membranaceous red
algae were secured, and even in a 30-40 fathom haul several species came
up, though it was suspected that a part of these may have been detached
pieces from lesser depths. Conspicuous among the deepwater specimens
were certain crustaceous corallines which were usually the only represen-
tatives of the plant kingdom. On the Gorda Banks off the Cape of Baja

No. 7 DAWSON: ALGAE OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA 119

California a great number of a single species of Lithothamnium were
secured from between 53 and 75 fathoms. Besides the corallines, one
species of Schizymenia was brought up from a 55-76 fathom haul off Isla
Partida in the upper Gulf. This record is surprising in view of the fact
that abundant phytoplankton through most of the upper Gulf greatly
diminishes the penetration of light to these depths.

Entirely aside from the preceding considerations, two algal discoveries
merit particular mention here. Iwo species of brown algae turned up
most unexpectedly and serve very well to initiate a consideration of distri-
butional problems in the Gulf. One, Zanardinia, is a member of the
Cutleriales. Zanardinia prototypus (Nardo) Nardo (commonly known
as Zanardinia collaris (Ag.) Crouan) is the single species of the Medi-
terranean genus which has had, until the present, no unquestionable
records of a distribution far outside that general region. Beautifully
fringed, actively growing specimens, which were collected in several
localities from Turner’s Island north, show exceedingly close resemblance
to the Mediterranean species and may prove to be identical. The species in
the Gulf is probably ephemeral, with a short period of vegetative growth
during the cooler seasons. It was found nowhere during the summer.

The other very peculiar species is an [shige, one which is at present
best referred to Ishige foliacea Okam. This has been known until now to
have a purely eastern Asiatic distribution. The two forms, J. Okamurae
Yendo and I. foliacea Okam., are very abundant along the coasts of China
and Japan but have not been recorded elsewhere, in so far as the author
knows. Reproductive stages are unknown in spite of the abundance of the
plant. The Gulf material also is quite sterile. The finding of this Japanese
element in the flora of the Gulf is somewhat less startling than the dis-
covery of Zanardinia but is nevertheless remarkable. It is plentiful on
most of the rocky reefs in the northern part of the Gulf, where it had
attained a size of about two inches in January. It was encountered in
July on Tiburon Island in greater luxuriance and thus would seem to be
long lived, quite unlike Zanardinia. Only the flattened form is present;
whereas in the far eastern habitat both the flat and cylindrical forms are
found in close association. This one form is, however, widespread in the
Gulf area and apparently of broad ecologic tolerance.

Other species of similar interest and importance are being found from
time to time as the investigations proceed. These will receive appropriate
mention with the accounts which are to follow of various algal genera
and families as they occur in the Gulf of California.

OR SAPS Nae ret

oH Pte

Mm

Datlaske
‘ 14 go

‘

. ra | i ‘utes
we} ( ; \ j oe, a) }
Heth i Aare Y A Ay 1 i ee \tuing ; A

ite sag A i) ii ie

Ww
Cac Bt * Lay

ee:

any mee A) ats fun } ace | Ba '
A A OO Mle ok LER MIP eam Gut He baat: Ny eel aay ft yy jn Sen

ty
Lf
dy

Wed A)
“ +5 rn ity by van Bani

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA,
AND GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, IN 1933, IN 1934, IN 1935,
IN 1936, IN 1937, IN 1938, IN 1939, AND IN 1940.

A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA
WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

(THIRTEEN PLATES)

By ELMER YALE DAWSON

ae

y
,

Mi 2 « an ‘i i ‘ ve

A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA
WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

(THIRTEEN PLATES)

ELMER YALE Dawson

Department of Botany, University of California

In attempting to determine the species of Rhodymenia collected on
the Allan Hancock Expedition of the Velero III to the Gulf of California
in January, 1940, it was found that the Rhodymenias of the Pacific Coast
of North America were very imperfectly known, specimens having been
referred to species such as Rhodymenia palmetta and R. corallina on little
more basis than a general resemblance in size and shape. In working over
the very considerable variety of specimens available in the Herbarium of
the University of California, it soon became clear that a review and re-
assembling of the species of the whole genus were necessary in order to
proceed with any certainty in the study of the species of the Gulf of
California. The following is a summary of the work as carried on thus
far, both in assigning described species to places in a systematic scheme
and in proposing new ones.

Acknowledgment is due Dr. W. A. Setchell for his generous help
in the research and for preparing the Latin diagnoses of this paper; also
to Captain Allan Hancock and to Dr. T. Harper Goodspeed, through
whose expeditions material has been made available.

The genus Rhodomenia was founded by Greville in 1830 and illus-
trated by a series of drawings of Rhodomenia palmetta (Greville, Alg.
Brit., 84, pl. XII (1830)). He apparently regarded R. palmetta as
typical of his genus, and we may consider it the type, although no actual
specimen was designated. Greville places some 10 species in his genus,
several of which are now segregated into other genera such as Gigartina,
Kallymenia, and Calliblepharis. Kuetzing (Sp. Alg., 778 (1849) in-
cluded Rhodomenia, Gracilaria, and the members of some other genera
under Sphaerococcus.

J. G. Agardh reconstituted the genus (Sp. Alg. II, 375 (1851)),
revising the spelling to Rhodymenia as suggested by Montagne (Cryp.
Brasil., 42-55 (1839) ). This spelling was adopted as preferred in 1912
in the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature of the Congress

of Vienna (1905) and of Brussels (1910), and the generic name Pal-
[123]

124 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

maria Stack. (Tent. mar. crypt., 54 (1809) ) was rejected. The genus as
Agardh understood it has been accepted almost to date. A modification of
his arrangement of species (J. G. Agardh, Epicr., 328-332 (1876) ) has
not been attempted since his time, even though a very considerable num-
ber of new species have been described (cf., e.g., De Toni, Syl. Alg. IV,
IZ:509 (1900) ,—Kylin, Die Florideenord. Rhodymen., 1-48 (1931) ,—
efiale):

After an investigation, both macroscopical and microscopical, of all
the immediately available specimens referable to the genus Rhodymenia,
it has seemed best to follow Agardh, but to institute further a new section
Pertusae and to reduce the genus Dendrymenia Skottsb. (Bot. Ergeb.
schwed. Exped. nach Patagon. IX Rhodophyceae, p. 16 (1923)) to
subgeneric status. Agardh’s method of separating the sections on tetra-
sporic characters has been carried a little further and, based on the oc-
currence of tetraspores, scattered or in sori; and, under the latter, whether
the cortex is nemathecioid or nonnemathecioid, the new section Pertusae
is established as equivalent with Agardh’s sections Palmatae, Palmettae,
and Clinophora.

In establishing Dendrymenia as a subgenus account has been taken
of the branching habit of the stipe and of the occurrence of stolons. ‘The
specimens included are those which show a sympodial branching of the
erect stipe in addition to the production of decumbent branches. In sec-
tions Palmettae and Clinophora branching of the stipe frequently occurs
to produce stolons, and in cases in which the stoloniferous region of the
stipe gives rise to blades through the branching of these stolons, the dis-
tinction from Dendrymenia may be very difficult to interpret. ‘This con-
dition seems to make a generic separation undesirable but does allow the
suggestion of a fifth section for the genus—Dendrymeniae.

The genus embraces about 54 species, of which 14 are described in
this article. Of the total number, the occurrence of tetraspores, which are
highly important in distinguishing the members from one another and in
arranging them in the sections, is unknown for about 26 species. Cysto-
carps are unknown in even a larger number, and thus the arrangements
proposed here are only suggestive and are subject to change at any time
upon the discovery of new and pertinent facts. Several new species are
provisionally described from sterile material ; others, from a single speci-
men. These, like many of the already described species, are incomplete,
and their determination even as to the genus may be regarded at present
as no more than tentative.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 125

Of the 54 species listed here, 27 have been studied from actual, pre-
served material. The rest are interpreted from the literature, but it is
hoped that additional, authentic specimens may be available as the work
on this genus continues.

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF RHODYMENIA

A. Plants sessile, or with unbranched stipes, or with only stoloniferous
branching from the base . . . . . . subgenus Eurhodymenia

I. ‘Tetraspores never in sori, dispersed over surface of frond in un-
modined cortical layer. 26 (o 2. See]. PERTUSAE
Frond simple or branched from near base of stipe, without
marginal proliferations; blade undivided or with few, ir-
regular, broad lobes
Frond up to 60 cm. high, perforated, 150-200 wu thick;
type:—Kamchatka ... . . R. pertusa
Frond up to 25 cm. high, i ea 250-300 pu thick;
types—- Washington) |) 2002) 2a eso Re séipitata
Frond dichotomously divided into more or less cuneate seg-
ments
Apex of the segments rather broad, blunt, notched ; mar-
gins entire
Fronds gelatinous, adhering to paper; type:—Peru
ah yak Neth he Bal) Cola DEAN sy Clie eta. MERE VEE
Fronds not gelatinous; type:—Japan . R. cuneifolia
Apex of segments attenuated ; margins entire or foliifer-
ous; type:—New Zealand . .. . . R. sanguinea
(R. lanceolata)
Of doubtful affinity; apex of segments often multifid;
fronds coriaceous; margins entire, denticulate, or pro-
liferating; type:—Red Sea .... = » Reerythraea

II. Tetraspores in irregularly shaped sori, often slightly raised and
in cross section showing modification of the cortical layers to

produce a nemathecioid structure . . Sec. 2. PALMATAE
Fronds dichotomous, not showing a palmatifid branching

form
‘Tetraspores in vermicular sori; margins entire or pro-
liferous; type:—Borneo . . BDC ic Wish Ree TEI CO

‘Tetraspores arranged in pecaaiy anastomosing, hiero-

126 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

glyphic sori; margins i nN Indies:c0 Auk «
rnpical ty ios ou « Ro Seteheie
F inde pian alesis or sflabeltatatys not strictly di-
chotomous, sometimes various in R. palmata and R. palmati-
formis
Frond-margins more or less undulate-crisped or folded
Frond-margins bearing spinules; type :—Japan
wh Yai eER ip hues) pach Sige wt at hy lace gute an
Frond-margins entire
Fronds broadly membranaceous, erect; type:—
H eto) ) cu a Ree PR lei
Fronds linear, COT a lobed, crenulated, de-
cumbent; type:—Japan . . . . . R. coacta
Fronds plane throughout
Blade in cross section showing a distinct line between
cortex and medulla; type:—Patagonia Hi the
ah tis ‘ R. palmatiformis
Blade ; in cross section showing a more gradual change
in cell size from cortex to medulla; type :—Atlantic
coast of, Europe, (s)!3!) 003) 0 ind Ree

III. ‘Tetraspores in rounded sori usually confined to frond-apices or
proliferations; cortical layer not distinctly modified by tetra-
Spates eos wee hoo See. 3. PALME aia

Atlantic and Wfciterenean species
Fronds dichotomo-flabellate
Fronds with prominent stipe; type:—England
: eva R. palmetta
F otis eee wig ine :—Mediterranean
hee R. corallicola
F aoe alent re not flabellate, the segments
linear, not spreading; type:—Mediterranean R. ligulata
Eastern Pacific species
Plants large, 10-25 cm. high; segments 3-6 mm. broad;

type:—Peru ) .))) oe a eR oaeere
Plants smaller, 4-12 cm. Leb: segments 2-3 mm. broad;
type Ano ennes Soe eh el 0 a a IRE Sera errno

Western Pacific species
Segments very narrow; type:—Japan . R. liniformis
Segments not strikingly narrow

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 127

Blades mostly as broad at apex or broader than be-

low. type :—Australia (2))3. és « Re folufera
Blades attenuated toward apex; type:—New Zea-
Pane SS a Re mopaxelandica

IV. ‘Tetraspores in rounded sori as in Sec. Palmettae; cortical layers
modified in tetrasporic areas to give a more or less nemathecioid
structure ; some modification is present, though it may be obscure
Ry a Re tae’ ann cr, ay 1) SCS: a2 toa INCE EL Cep Rees

Stipes prominent, long
Tetraspores in sori below apices of fronds; type:—‘“in
AACN AUISECANE (ven Cee joe) ce eEN Gigs) anus eR EE RERTES
Tetraspores largely covering lobulate proliferations of
the upper frond-segments; type:—California . . . .
Mae cite aray lee Ae, Gh Se Metocttiel Lia /N Kiveingist wis (lies uLOOULELETE
Stipes neither long nor absent
Habit erect; segments narrow, little branched, not
spreading; type:—Australia . . . . R. stenoglossa
Habit spreading; branches variously dichotomous
Branches adhering to each other at places of contact
by rootlike disks or by fusion; type :—Japan
STAB cAMe Nay iee Met karen Mey Bhehh! oe whee ju iee: oS IREY SCRE LE
Branches not adhering or fusing
Foliations, when present, submarginal, often al-
most superficial ; type:—So. Africa R. capensis
Foliations, when present, marginal
Segments with blunt apices
Frond-apices proliferating again and
again; type:—Tasmania__R. prolificans
Frond-apices nonproliferous
Segments 2-3 cm. broad ; base of blade
broad, cuneate; type:—Falkland Isl.
Lay phe bMcaN ance a). ORR Sicha iti
Segments usually less than 1 cm.
broad ; base of blade narrow; type :—
East Indies . . . . R. australis
Segments narrowed at apices and acute ex-
cept in cases of lobing of tetrasporic blades;
type:—California . . . . R. attenuata

128 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

rola ta)

SPECIES STERILES

. divaricata....Gulf of California R. pacifica.........-..---------- California
SOSEE os ate Gulf of California R. palmettiformis.......... California
. occidentalis..........-- West Indies

Species INQUIRENDAE

R. dichotoma............ New Zealand R. anastomosans.........----- E. Indies
ead get Ce Ae TR Japan. .R. rhizoidifera.... E. Indies
FR fomamica, ee Java R. epimenioides...........- N. Zealand
R. cinnabarina.......... Indian Ocean R. mamillaris.........---.--- Martinique
R. cuneifolia (Hook. f. & Harv.) Taylor

(Phyllophora cuneifolia Hook. £. & Harv.) .....-.-.2.-0------- Falkland Islands
B. Stipes truly sympodially branched in addition to basal stoloniferous

branching; tetraspores as far as known confined to sori below frond-
APICES 1) 6 Wella Rae (WARE OR) 2. 8 SUD SENS ie nenapmme mes

Ve eee so) IO she NICE ull Sees 5s SSI, INU TOR ean a pean
Plants low, 3-5 cm. high
Blades mainly dichotomous, usually ending in a bilobed
apex; type:—New Zealand . . . . . R. leptophylla
Blades showing a tendency toward palmate, often ending in
a 4-6 lobed flabellum ; type:—Hawaii . R. leptophylloides
Plants longer than 5 cm.
Blades conspicuously flabellate, broadly cuneate from the
stipe, or lower segments spreading almost at right angles

Flabella each with an individual stalk, branching from

the main stipe
Basal parts possessing numerous, branched stolons;
stipes proliferous below; blades not over 150 wu thick;
type:—California . . ~ » oe Rivehezetdes
Basal parts imperfectly eau blades 150-400 uw
thick; type:—Gulf of California . R. Hancockii

Blades sessile
Blades developing at point of union with the stipe so
as to form an amplexicaul structure at each branch;
types —-Chille) ong yee eons RE paras
Blades merely sessile or somewhat decurrent, not
amplexicaul; type:—Chile . . . R. flabellifolia

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 129

Fronds not conspicuously flabellate, mainly dichotomous,
narrowly cuneate from the stipes
Stipes from a discoid holdfast without stolons; type :—

Calarornialy s)\ aaah Rule daa Kes keen SoA Ee. Geb OT escems
Stipes with branched stolons augmenting the simple
holdfast

Segments blunt at apices; ultimate segments long
Fronds and stipes lobulate-proliferous ; tetraspor-
ic apices usually expanded into short, broad lobes;

type:—-Calitornia’ 2051 '6 2. WOR lebata
Fronds and stipes nonproliferous; tetraspores un-
known; types:—Chile’ -° ) Ri“ earallina

Segments with palmate, polydigitate apices, the ulti-
mate segments very short, acute; type:—New Zea-
Farr ee We PN Cae Neh RO. ial map edana

Subgenus KURHODYMENIA nom. nov.

Section 1. Pertusae nom. nov.

Tetrasporic material of only one species was available as a basis for
organizing this section, but as far as the descriptions can be interpreted,
7 species can pretty definitely be assigned to it. The even distribution of
tetraspores over the frond is reasonably distinctive, since members of Sec.
Palmatae which have large tetrasporic areas bear them in broken, irregu-
lar arrangement. In any case, if Rhodymenia pertusa can be taken as at
all representative of this type of tetraspore production, a definite differ-
ence can be realized in the cross-sectional appearance of tetrasporic fronds
between sections Pertusae and Palmatae. This difference is best shown
by the illustrations (figs. 1-4) but may be expressed briefly as: showing an
essentially unmodified cortex in Sec. Pertusae; showing a nemathecially
modified cortex in Sec. Palmatae.

(1) RHODYMENIA PERTUSA (Post. et Rupr.) J. Ag., Sp. II
(1851), p. 376; Epicr., p. 329; Porphyra pertusa Post. et Rupr.,
Illust. Alg. (1840), p. 20, tab. XXXVI.
Plate 18, Figs. 1-2
Distribution—The type specimen from Kamchatka; in the Arctic
Ocean; Greenland; Spitzbergen; North Japan; Bering Sea; Coast of
North America south to Puget Sound, Washington.

130 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

(2) RHODYMENIA STIPITATA Kylin, Mar. Red Algae of Fri-
day Harbor (1925), p. 41, fig. 23.

“This species is nearly related to Rhodymenia pertusa, but it differs
in having a thicker, non-perforated blade. The cystocarps are somewhat
larger, but not so densely scattered in R. stipitata as in R. pertusa.’—
Kylin.

Distribution.—The type specimen from San Juan Island, Washing-
ton, on piles of Friday Harbor docks; British Columbia.

(3) RHODYMENIA PERUVIANA J. Ag., Sp. II (1851), p. 378,
Epic., p. 329; Howe, Mar. Alg. Peru (1914), p. 126, fig. 40.
Distribution—The type specimen “‘ex oris Peruviae meridionalis.”
According to Howe, not since collected and probably not occurring
within the present limits of Peru.

(4) RHODYMENIA CUNEIFOLIA Okam., Notes on Algae from
Pac. Coast of Tiba Pref. (1934), p. 17, pl. VII (1).

“The nearest ally of the present plant is R. peruviana Howe from
which it differs in its more widely cuneate segments, by not having deeply
lobed apical segments and in not being gelatinous.’”” Okamura quoted the
authority of R. peruviana as Howe instead of J. Agardh.

As Taylor recently suggested, Phyllophora cuneifolia may prove to be
a Rhodymenia, in which case Okamura’s species will have to yield to
priority.

Distribution—Provs. Kadusa, Bosyu (Bay of Tateyama) ‘iba
Pref., Japan.

(5) RHODYMENIA SANGUINEA Harv., in Hook., FI. N. Zeal.,
vol. II (1855), p. 248; De Toni et Forti, Alghe di Australia,
Tasmania, e Nuova Zelanda (1923), p. 30, tab. IV (VII),
figs. 1-3.

“This is a large species, to 14 inches high, fronds deeply divided. The
tetraspores are scattered over the laciniae, not in irregular sori as in
R. palmata.”—Harvey.

Distribution—The type specimen from Foveaux Strait, New Zea-
land.

(6) RHODYMENIA LANCEOLATA Harv., in Hook., Flor. N.
Zeal., vol. II (1855), p. 248.

“Possibly a form of the preceding but is softer in substance and has a

more highly developed cortex. The tetraspores as in R. sanguinea.” —

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 131

Harvey. Both this and the preceding species are said to have acute, at-
tenuated apices which distinguish them from all others.

Distribution —The type specimen from Port Cooper, Bank’s Penin-
sula, New Zealand.

(7) RHODYMENIA ERYTHRAEA Zanard., Plant. Mar. Rubr.
enum. (1858), p. 276; Piccone, Algol. Eritrea (1884), p. 328;
Rhodymenia palmata Mont., Pugill. Alg. Yemens, p. 8 (excl.
synon.) non aliorum.

Of this species we have only a description. The best we can do is to
interpret it according to the two suggestive statements it contains: “Ap-
pearance wholly like R. palmata. Tetraspores scattered over the whole
surface.” More material from the Red Sea may eventually establish this
species as a definite entity.

Distribution—The type specimen from the Red Sea at Hodeida;
also on the coast of Yemen.

Section 2. Palmatae J. Ag. p. p. (Epicr., 329 (1876) ; Palmaria
Stackh., Tent. mar. crypt., 69 (1809) )

Of this section the tetrasporic material available of R. palmata and
the descriptions and illustrations of fertile specimens of other species
within the group establish fairly well certain morphological relationships
among the 7 species at present included. Two features of tetrasporic
plants are distinctive: the sorus, present as an irregular, cloudlike, dis-
connected, or convoluted body, definitely limited and distinct from the
portions of the frond in which tetraspores are not being produced; the
frond, somewhat thickened in the soral regions because of extra cell
division and growth stimulated by the tetrasporic development in the
cortical layers. At the maturity of spores, their enlargement and conse-
quent displacement of the surrounding cells cause an irregularity in the
otherwise smooth outline of the frond-surface. The cortical layer, which
in sterile fronds may be only 2 or 3 cells thick, increases by periclinal
divisions to from 4 to 7 in tetrasporic fronds. This increase in the cortex
causes the cells to appear more or less in strings or anticlinal rows, but the
displacement or pushing aside of these by the enlarging spores destroys
much of the regularity. The appearance of the spore, however, imbedded
in the thickened cortex, surrounded by these rows or strings of cells gives
the impression of a nemathecium (plate 18, figs. 3-4), and in both section
Palmatae and section Clinophora the term ‘‘nemathecial”’ will be used to
describe this condition.

132 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

(8) RHODYMENIA INDICA Web. v. Bosse, Liste des Algues du
Siboga (1928), p. 460, fig. 196.

No specimens have been seen, but the tetrasporic sori described as
“worm like’ would seem sufficiently distinctive for identification. Mme.
Weber found it near to certain forms of R. palmata and thought it to be
a connecting type between the northern forms and the southern ones now
known under the name R. palmatiformis Skottsb.

Distribution.—The type from the coast of Borneo at a depth of 40-
50 m.

(9) RHODYMENIA SPINULOSA Okam., Icones Jap. Algae
(1934), vol. VII, no. IV, p. 33, pl. 318, figs. 1-6.
“The present plant shows a close affinity with R. punctata Okam.
from which it differs in having marginal spinules.”—-Okamura.
Distribution —The type from Tainan, Taiwan (Aoki), Japan.

(10) RHODYMENIA PUNCTATA Okam., Icones Jap. Algae
(1929) sveloVE nos2)p: 13,pl. 258:

Okamura gives ample description and illustration of this Japanese
species. His figure of the tetraspores shows the characteristics of this
section very well.

Distribution —The type from Prov. Tosa, Japan.

(11) RHODYMENIA COACTA Okam. et Segawa, in Segawa,
Mar. Alg. Susaki (1935), p. 84, pl. 20.
This plant is easily distinguished from its allies by the decumbent,
matted habit of the crisped fronds.
Distribution —The type from Shikineshima, Prov. Idsu, Japan.

(12) RHODYMENIA PALMATIFORMIS Skottsb., in Kylin &
Skottsberg, Subant. und Antarkt. Meeresalgen (1919), p. 21,
figs. 11, 12; R. palmata (L.) Grev. quoad plantam australem;
R. palmata et palmetta, Reinsch, Meeresalg. Sudgeorg. (1890),
p. 379; R. georgica Reinsch, l.c.?

This species was established to embrace all the southern forms of a
somewhat heterogeneous assemblage which had previously been identified
with the northern species R. palmata. Skottsberg says: “These are simi-
lar to certain forms of the variable R. palmata; I have, however, found
no southern forms which can be identified with a northern form.”

Skottsberg figures a cross section of the frond to illustrate his idea of
the sharp line of demarcation between the medulla and the cortex. In our

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 133

sections made from one of Skottsberg’s specimens this distinction is not so
prominent as he indicates. However, were material available other than
the single specimen which is very difficult to expand after drying, this
point might be verified.

Distribution.—Subantarctic; coast of Chile; Patagonia; Falkland
Islands; South Georgia.

(13) RHODYMENIA PALMATA (L.) Grev., Alg. Brit. (1830),
p. 93; Harv., Phyc. Brit. tab. 217; J. Ag., Sp. II (1851), p. 376,

Epic., p. 329.
smh Plate 18, Figs. 3-4

This species shows the greatest morphological variation to be found
within the genus. Compared to other more sharply defined species of
less widespread distribution, it must be considered a heteromorphic
“macrospecies” of broad ecologic tolerance. The tetrasporic arrangement
seems, however, to place it conclusively within the section J. G. Agardh
named for it, and within that the species is distinct except for similarities
to R. palmatiformis of the Southern Hemisphere, whose forms have only
recently been distinguished from R. palmata.

Distribution —Cooler waters of the coasts of the North Pacific and
North Atlantic.

(14) RHODYMENIA SETCHELLII Web. v. Bosse, Liste des
Algues du Siboga (1928), p. 462, pl. XI, figs. 6-8.

It is now to be questioned whether this species is really a Rhodymenia,
for Mme. Weber states that she sees great resemblance between this
species and Fauchea Gardneri, which has been more recently placed as
Fryella Gardneri (Setch.) Kylin. Certain morphological characters mark
the genus Fryella as distinct ; but, since we cannot be certain as to whether
Mme. Weber may have overlooked these or not, we can only leave the
species for further inquiry. Cystocarps were lacking in her specimens, and
these will, no doubt, prove decisive when found. Mme. Weber states also
that in structure Fauchea Mortensenii W. v. B. resembles very closely
both Rhodymenia setchellit and Fauchea Gardneri.

Distribution —The type from Taruna, East Indies.

Section 3. Palmettae J. Ag. (Epicr., 330 (1876) )

J. G. Agardh defined this section as containing those species in which
the tetraspores are located in distinct sori in the frond-apices, and in
which the cortical layer is scarcely modified by the presence of sori. This

134 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

analysis has been verified by cross sections of tetrasporic sori in European
material of R. palmetta (figs. 5-6) which showed the soriferous frond
only slightly thicker than the sterile, and the cortical layer of small, oval
cells entirely unmodified except through displacements by the enlarging
tetraspores. There is apparently no stimulation to extra cell division in
the cortex and hence no strings or rows of cells in which the tetraspores
are imbedded as in Sec. Palmatae (figs. 3-4). Tetraspores may also be
borne on lateral lobules proliferating from the upper segments.

(15) RHODYMENIA PALMETTA (Esp.) Grev., Alg. Brit.
(1830), p. 88, pl. XII; Fucus palmetta Esper, Icon. Fuc. (1800),
p. 84, pl. XL.
Plate 18, Figs. 5-6

This assemblage is another one which has caused considerable con-
fusion in the treatment of the Pacific Coast species of Rhodymenia.
Numerous specimens with only superficial resemblance have been re-
ferred to this species. In the type locality it is rather polymorphic, a fact
which has allowed a broad basis for the interpretation of forms. Fertile
material is rare; not only in this species but throughout the section cysto-
carps are largely unknown. We must depend then upon gross morphology
for specific taxonomic characters; and, since this section contains so many
forms of similar habit, separation is difficult.

When more complete collections are available and the extent of vari-
ation in Rhodymenia in response to the environment is more fully under-
stood, rearrangements will undoubtedly be necessary. The section Pal-
mettae is the most difficult section of the genus to interpret because it
seems to be a center of variation in which the variants are distinguished
with difficulty and about which the morphological differentiation into
other sections of the genus radiates. It is a fortunate coincidence that this
median species was illustrated by Greville as the type of the genus.

Distribution.—Coasts of England and France; the Mediterranean.

(146) RHODYMENIA CORALLICOLA Ardiss., Florid. Ital., II
(1868-1878), p. 55, pl. IX (ex synon.).
Distribution—The Mediterranean.

(17) RHODYMENIA LIGULATA Zanard., Saggio (1843), p.
46; J. Ag., Sp. IL (1851), p. 382; Sphaerococcus ligulatus
Kuetz., Tab. Phyc. XVIII, t. 96.

Distribution —The Mediterranean.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 135

(18) RHODYMENIA HOWEANA pp. nov.
R. corallina Howe, Mar. Alg. Peru (1914), p. 124, pls. 50-51;
?Sphaerococcus palmettoides Bory, Voy. Coquille, Bot. Crypt.

1829), ps 173.
( )P Plate 19, Fig. 9

Frons usque ad 15 cm. alta, e disco simplici, stolonibus paucis; stipitibus
brevissimis 0.4-0.5 cm., gracilibus superne in laminis copiose dichotomis expansis,
membranaceo-gelatinosis; segmentis laminarum 1-1.5 cm. longis, 3-5 mm. latis,
plus minusve 100 w crassis, laesis proliferationes angustas apicibus rotundis
frequenter emarginatis emittentibus; marginibus integris; tetrasporangiis in sori
orbicularibus in partes apicales segmentorum sitis et transformationes negligentes
stratorum corticalium efficientibus, cruciatis, elongato-ovoideis; cystocarpiis super
superficies medias partes laminarum sparsis, hemisphericis, non-rostratis.

Fronds membranous-gelatinous, to 15 cm. high from a simple hold-
fast with few accessory stolons; subterete portion of stipe very short, 0.4-
0.5 cm., slender, expanding into an abundantly dichotomous frond; seg-
ments 1-114 cm. long, 3-5 mm. broad, about 100 p thick, when injured
producing narrow proliferations, with rounded apices often conspicuously
notched ; margins entire; tetraspores in rounded sori in apices of ultimate
segments, causing little modification of the cortical layers, cruciate, long-
oval; cystocarps scattered over mid-portions of the fronds, hemispherical,
not beaked.

Sterile and Tetrasporic Types—In beach drift, La Punta, near Cal-
lao, Peru, R. E. Coker + 29 & 30, Jan. 25, 1907.

Cystocarpic Type.—lIn the surf, Lobos de Tierra, Peru, R. E. Coker
+ 149a, April 2, 1907. In Herb. Univ. Calif.: ster. 198881, tetr. 199622,
cyst. 199608. All specimens received from Marshall A. Howe.

Now that the true identity of Rhodymenia corallina is established and
that species is arranged under Sec. Dendrymeniae, it is not at all difficult
to distinguish R. Howeana in which, according to Howe, the subterete
stipe is only 0.4-0.5 cm. long. The habit of this species is very distinct
from R. corallina in the manner of segmentation of the frond as well as
in the nature of the stipe.

(19) RHODYMENIA CALIFORNICA Kylin, Die Florideenord.
Rhodymen. (1931), p. 21, fig. 22.

This is apparently one of the commoner and more variable species
along the Californian coast. Kylin describes it very briefly from material
collected at Monterey. In the Herbarium of the University of Cali-
fornia there are, however, specimens from several localities which indicate
something of the variations of the species and allow a fuller account.

136 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Rhodymenia californica is easily distinguished from R. palmettiformis
by the very short or almost absent stipe. It shows little tendency toward a
palmate type of division, and the dichotomous segments are conspicuously
of a uniform width, 2.5-4 mm. Plants do not average so small as Kylin’s
types, but more commonly are 6-8 cm. high. The thickness of the blades
averages between 125 and 150 u.

Distribution—Specimens have been seen from San Diego, Laguna
Beach, Anaheim Landing, San Pedro, Carmel Bay, and Monterey, Cali-
fornia.

(20) RHODYMENIA LINIFORMIS Okam., Icon. of Jap. Algae,
vol. VII (1934), no. IV, p. 34, pl. 318, figs. 7-14.
“Plant belonging under the section Palmettae De Toni in the vicinity
of R. palmetta or R. ligulata.’—Okamura.
Distribution—The type from Enoshima, Japan.

(21) RHODYMENIA FOLIIFERA Harv., Phyc. Austr. (1863)
V: Syn. p. xl, n. 508; J. Ag., Epic., p. 331; Kylin, Die Flori-
deenord. Rhodymen. (1931), p. 21, Taf. 7, fig. 17.

‘The type was not figured with the description of the species, but Kylin
gives a photograph of ‘‘one of Harvey’s original specimens.” There is a
remarkable resemblance between this illustration and some specimens of
R. californica. Harvey says, “Near R. palmetta but remarkably different
when in fruit.”

Distribution.—Australia; Tasmania; New Zealand.

(22) RHODYMENIA NOVAZELANDICA spp. nov.
Plate 23, Fig. 30

Frons e disco simplici, 6-10 cm. alta, stipitata, ramos proxime usque ad 1.5 cm.
super discum emittentibus, iis mox decumbentibus aut laminas producentibus;
laminis anguste cuneatis, dichotomis, segmentis angustis, 1.5-2.5 mm. latis, apicibus
attenuatis obtusis rotundatis, 100-160 w crassis, cellulis corticalibus superficie
elongatis; sori tetrasporangiiferis parvis, apicalibus in segmentis ultimis trans-
formationes negligentes corticales efficientibus. Cystocarpiis nondum visis.

Fronds from a simple, discoid holdfast 6-10 cm. high, stipitate, pro-
ducing stoloniferous branches from immediately above the holdfast to
144 cm. above, these turning down or developing blades; blades dichoto-
mous, narrowly cuneate, the segments narrow, 1.5-2.5 mm. broad, with
attenuated, rounded apices, 100-160 wu thick with elongated cortical cells;
tetrasporic sori small, in apices of ultimate segments, causing only minor
modification of cortex. Cystocarps unknown.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA |

Type.—Littleton, New Zealand, R.M. Laing # 1113; Herb. Univ.
Calif. 96238.

Section 4. Clinophora J. Ag. (Epicr., 331 (1876) )

This section is maintained as founded by J. G. Agardh to embrace
those species having rounded tetrasporic sori located below the apices of
the frond-segments and having nemathecially modified cortical layers
(figs. 7-8). The sori may also occur in lobulate proliferations as in R.
lobulifera, but their position and appearance are essentially the same.

The nemathecial condition may be less conspicuous than in Sec. Pal-
matae or even somewhat obscure, but wherever there is more than a sim-
ple displacement of the cortical cells by the developing spores, the species
has been assigned to this group. Where specimens are not available, the
arrangement and interpretation are according to J. G. Agardh.

(23) RHODYMENIA LINEARIS J. Ag., Symb. I (1841), p. 13;
Sp. II, p. 379; Epicr., p. 331; Sphaerococcus linearis Kuetz., Tab.
Phyc. XVIII, tab. 91, figs. c-d (ex oras chilensibus ?); Kylin,
Die Florideenord. Rhodymen., p. 20, tab. 6.

Distribution.—Coast of “New Holland”; Tasmania; New Zealand.

(24) RHODYMENIA LOBULIFERA sp. nov.
Plate 26, Fig. 36

Frons usque ad 20 cm. alta, e disco simplici, stolonifera; stipitibus conspicuis,
2-7 cm. longis, compressis, in laminis dichotomis, aliquando, primo palmatis,
flabellato divisis; segmentis 1.5-3.5 cm. longis, 3-5 mm. latis, vulgo leviter ad
apicem attenuatis; tetrasporangiis cruciatis, in lobulis parvis, lateralibus, pedi-
cellatis productis, nemathecioidibus (cellulis corticalibus in parte sterili sphericis,
in tetrasporangiifera elongatis in ordinibus anticlinis) ; cystocarpiis in prolifera-
tionibus segmentorum terminalium gracilibus, ramosis sitis.

Fronds to 20 cm. high from a simple holdfast, with stolons; stipes
conspicuous, 2-7 cm. long, compressed, expanding cuneately into dichoto-
mous, sometimes at first palmate, flabellately divided blades; segments
114-3% cm. long, 3-5 mm. broad, usually slightly attenuated to apex;
tetraspores produced in small, lateral, pedicellate lobules, causing nema-
thecial modification of the cortex, the cortical cells spherical in sterile
material, anticlinally elongated in tetrasporic; cystocarps produced on
slender, branched proliferations of the terminal segments.

138 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Sterile Type.—San Pedro Harbor, Calif., cast ashore, May 27, 1911,
N. L. Gardner 2442; Herb. Univ. Calif. 274155.

Tetrasporic and Cystocarpic Types.——San Pedro, Calif., Dec. 20,
1907, N. L. Gardner 1847; Herb. Univ. Calif. 372021.

This species may be distinguished by its very prominent, long, gradu-
ally tapering stipes and the development of both types of reproductive
bodies on lobules proliferating from the ultimate segments.

Other specimens from Carmel Bay and Bolinas, California, are
referred here.

(25) RHODYMENIA STENOGLOSSA J. Ag., ‘Till. Alg. System.
VII (1884), p. 50; Kylin, Die Florideenord. Rhodymen. (1931),
D2 tape.

Distribution—Australia and the southern coasts of the East Indies.

(26) RHODYMENIA INTRICATA (Okam.) Okam., Icon. of
Jap. Algae, vol. VI, no. 4 (1930), p. 23, pl. 267; Phyllophora
intricata Okam., Icon. of Jap. Algae, vol. IV, no. 7, p. 129, pl.
182.

According to Okamura’s illustrations, this species is best referred to
Sec. Clinophora. His figure of the tetrasporic cross section clearly indi-
cates long, anticlinal rows of cells surrounding the tetraspores.

Distribution —Prov. of Iyo, Kii, Idzu, Sagami, Iwaki, and Echigo,
Japan.

(27) RHODYMENIA CAPENSIS J. Ag., Anal. Algol. II (1894),
p. 58; Kylin, Die Florideenord. Rhodymen., p. 21, tab. 8.

De Toni lists this species under Agardh’s Sec. Palmettae, whereas the
description clearly indicates the arrangement of the tetraspores in a
nemathecial, cortical layer. On the basis of the description of this feature
it is best to refer R. capensis to Sec. Clinophora.

Distribution—Cape of Good Hope, South Africa.

(28) RHODYMENIA PROLIFICANS Zanard., Phyc. Austral.
nov. (1874), p. 499, n. 21.
This species has not been seen but for the present may be retained in
Agardh’s Sec. Clinophora, to which it was referred by De Toni.
Distribution —The type from ‘‘Georgetown,” Tasmania.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 139

(29) RHODYMENIA AUSTRALIS (Sond.) Harv., Phyc. Aus-
tral. (1860), tab. 146; J. Ag., Epicr., p. 332; Rhodymenia aus-
tralis Sond., in Botan. Zeitung. (1845), p. 56; Acropeltis australis
J. Ag., Sp. II, p. 609; Kuetz., Tab. Phyc., vol. XIX, t. 34, figs.

(6
Plate 18, Figs. 7-8

Distribution—Southern East Indies; Australia; New Zealand.

(30) RHODYMENIA SCHMITTII Taylor, Mar. Alg. from
Southeast. South America (1939), p. 148, pl. II, fig. 2.
Distribution.—The type from Port Stanley, Falkland Islands.

(31) RHODYMENIA ATTENUATA pp. nov.
Plate 19, Figs. 10-11; Plate 25, Fig. 35

Frons brevi-stipitata, super basem stolonifera superne (1 cm. super discum)
expansa; segmentis divaricatis, laminam linearem exteriorem rotundatam prae-
bentibus, angustis, 1.5-2.5 mm. latis, ultimis frequenter longioribus, in plantis
sterilibus ad apices acutos attenuatis, in plantis tetrasporangiiferis iterum ad apices
latiores expansis; soris tetrasporangiiferis rotundatis, parvis in partibus apicalibus
aut in prolificationibus eorum parvis, in nematheciis; plantis cystocarpiiferis
conspicuore stipitatis stoloniferentibusque usque ad 1-1.5 cm. super basem, stipites
secundarias laminarum expansarum praebentibus; cystocarpiis in segmentis ter-
minalibus aut in proliferationibus angustis eorum, laxe sparsis, vulgo urceolatis.

Fronds short-stipitate, with stolons branching from above base, ex-
panding usually about 1 cm. above holdfast; segments spreading, giving
the plant a rounded outline, narrow, 1.5-2.5 mm. broad, the ultimate
ones often longer, attenuated to acute apices in sterile plants, in tetra-
sporic plants again expanded to broader apices; tetraspores in small
rounded sori in the expanded apices of the ultimate segments or on small
proliferations from these, causing a nemathecioid modification of the
cortex; cystocarpic plants more conspicuously stipitate, with stoloniferous
branches 1-114 cm. above the base, providing secondary stipes for the
expanded blades; cystocarps borne on the terminal segments or on narrow
proliferations from these, rather sparse, mostly urn shaped.

Tetrasporic Type.—On rocks in sheltered places in the lower littoral
zone, Whites Point, west of San Pedro, Calif., Dec. 23, 1912, N. L.
Gardner 2534; Herb. Univ. Calif. 276284.

Cystocarpic Type.—Cast ashore, Pebble Beach, Carmel Bay, Calif.,
Jan., 1917, N. L. Gardner 3611; Herb. Univ. Calif. 372081.

Sterile Type.—San Pedro, Calif., Oct. 21, 1896, A. J. McClatchie
1264; Herb. Univ. Calif. 96226.

140 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

The following species of the subgenus EFURHODYMENIA are un-
certain of placement because of sterile material or inadequate descriptions
of the types.

(32) RHODYMENIA PALMETTIFORMIS sp. nov.
Plate 22, Fig. 29

Frons 4-10 cm. alta, e disco simplici pauca, valde stipitata, stipitibus aliquando
paulum super discum ramiferis aliquando stoloniferis; laminis variabilibus, e
stipite supero complanata gradatim expansis, dichotomis, interdum in segmentis
ultimis angustis, sed vulgo in apicibus late-lobatis 1.5-3 cm. latis expansis, fre-
quenter paululum palmatis, 100-150 pw crassis. Tetrasporangiis cystocarpiisque
nondum visis.

Fronds 4-10 cm. high, several from a simple, discoid holdfast, prom-
inently stipitate; stipe sometimes branching just above holdfast, some-
times stoloniferous; blades variable, expanding gradually from the flat-
tened upper stipe into dichotomies, sometimes ending in narrow ultimate
segments but commonly tending to expand into a broad-lobed apex, 1.5-3
cm. across, often somewhat palmate, 100-150 uw thick. Tetraspores and
cystocarps unknown.

Type——Washed ashore, La Jolla, San Diego Co., Calif., Mrs. E.
Snyder No. 692 in Collins, Holden, and Setchell, Phycotheca Boreali-
Americana (1900) Fasc. XIV, sub. R. corallina (Bory) Grev. (from
set in Herb. W. A. Setchell).

Cast ashore, Carmel Bay, Monterey Co., Calif., W. A. Setchell 1572,
Dec. 31, 1896.

There is some overlapping of R. palmettiformis and R. californica
with respect to the external morphology of the stipe; this may be some-
what shorter in the former and longer in the latter, causing confusion in
the distinction. The frequently expanded terminal segments seem, how-
ever, to be a feature of R. palmettiformis alone.

Like Rhodymenia palmetta, R. palmettiformis is a conspicuously stip-
itate species in which the stipe may even superficially resemble that of
some members of Sec. Dendrymeniae. However, upon comparison of
many forms of Dendrymenia with those of the other subgenus, Eurhody-
menia, it is seen that the branching may occur in the latter a short dis-
tance up from the holdfast, on account of the development of potential
blade-producing stolons at that point. In Mrs. Snyder’s specimen men-
tioned above there is a distinct branching of the stipe just above the hold-
fast, indicating that branching is stoloniferous rather than truly sym-
podial. In one collection from San Pedro, California specimens which

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 141

are tentatively placed under R. palmettiformis do show occasional branch-
ing of the stipe in its upper parts, a feature which would seem to place
them in Dendrymenia. The aspect of the plants, however, is not dendry-
menioid in the sense herein interpreted.

(33) RHODYMENIA DIVARICATA spp. nov.
Plate 23, Fig. 31

Frons 4-5 cm. alta, estipitata, e basi in dichotomiis irregularibus expansis,
segmentis late divaricatis, angulis latis; segmentis vulgo 2-3 mm. latis, brevibus,
ultimis brevissimis, lobiformibus, apicibus rotundatis, plus minusve 250 w crassis,
superficie corticis cellulis parietibus tenuibus leviter angulatis composita; tetra-
sporangiis cystocarpiisque nondum visis.

Fronds 4-5 cm. high, essentially stipeless, expanding from the base
into irregular dichotomies, the divisions spreading, with wide axillary
angles ; segments mostly 2-3 mm. broad, short, the ultimate segments very
short, lobelike, with rounded apices, about 250 u thick, with a cortex of
thin-walled, slightly angular cells as seen in surface view. Tetraspores
and cystocarps unknown.

Morphologically this species is nearest to R. californica, from which
it is distinguished by its strongly divaricate nature, by the less regular
dichotomies, and by the irregularly lobed appearance of the ultimate
segments.

Type—Dredged in 2-3 fms., mud bottom, Guaymas Bay, Sonora,
Mex., January 22, 1940, E. Y. Dawson 53 of Allan Hancock Expedition
to the Gulf of California—1940; Herb. Allan Hancock Foundation,
AHF no. 1.

Other specimens from sand and coralline bottom in 6-11 fms. off
Mejia Isl., Puerto Refugio, Angel de la Guardia Island, Gulf of Calif.,
E. Y. Dawson 257, Jan. 28, 1940.

(34) RHODYMENIA ROSEA pp. nov.
Plate 24, Figs. 32-33
Frons erecta usque ad 7 cm. alta, sessilis, e disco simplici oriens, e basi directe
expansa, laete rosea; ramificatione primaria irregulariter dichotoma, marginibus
laminarum sparse denticulatis et in segmentis prolificantibus, iisdem basim angustis
et frequenter dichotomis; segmentis 2-3 mm. latis, apicibus rotundatis, plus
minusve 100 wp crassis, corticibus acute delimitatis; cellulis corticalibus superficie
parietibus tenuibus et acute angulatis. Tetrasporangiis cystocarpiisque nondum
Visis.
Fronds bright rose, erect to 7 cm. high, nonstipitate, from a simple
holdfast, expanding directly from the base; primary branching irregularly

142 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

dichotomous, the margins of the blades sparsely denticulate and prolifer-
ating into segments which are narrowed at the base and frequently di-
chotomous ; segments 2-3 mm. broad, with rounded apices, about 100 u
thick, with a sharply delimited cortex; cortical cells in surface view thin
walled and sharply angular. Tetraspores and cystocarps unknown.

Type.—Dredged off Mejia Isl. in 6-11 fms., Puerto Refugio, Angel
de la Guardia Island, Gulf of Calif., Mexico, Jan. 22, 1940, E. Y. Daw-
son 266 of Allan Hancock Expedition to the Gulf of California, 1940;
Herb. Allan Hancock Foundation, AHF no. 2.

This species is distinguished from all East-Pacific species of Rhody-
menia by the following combination of characters: angular-celled cortex;
denticulate, proliferating margins; lack of stipe; and brilliant color. The
morphological habit resembles that of the West Indian species R. occiden-
talis.

(35) RHODYMENIA OCCIDENTALIS Boerg., Mar. Alg. Dan.
West Indies, II (1920), p. 387, figs. 371-372.
Distribution —West Indies.

(36) RHODYMENIA PACIFICA Kylin, Die Florideenord. Rho-
dymen. (1931), p. 21, tab. 9.
Plate 20, Fig. 14
Kylin describes this species very briefly, but the photograph of the
type shows sufficiently well the typical characters of the species as it
occurs in California. Fertile material has not yet been found.
Distribution.—Coast of California.

Species Inquirendae

RHODYMENIA DICHOTOMA Harv., in Hook., Fl. Antarct. vol.
I (1845), p. 186, tab. LX XII, fig. 1; Laing, Mar. Alg. Subant-
arct. N. Zeal. (1909), p. 510, pl. XXIV, fig. 3; Laing, Trans. of
N.Z. Inst., vol. 57 (1926), p. 157.

In 1909 Laing expressed the opinion that he had specimens which
seemed to agree with Harvey’s type in the British Museum. In 1926,
however, he says, concerning this species, ‘“A doubtful species.”

Distribution —New Zealand.

RHODYMENIA ADNATA Okam., Icon. Jap. Alg., vol. VII: 4
(1934), p. 35, pl. 318.

Distribution.—Gulf of Tateyama, Japan.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 143

RHODYMENIA JAVANICA Sond., in Zollinger, Syst. Verzeichniss
I (1854-55), p. 4.

Distribution.—Java, East Indies.

RHODYMENIA CINNABARINA (Dies.) J. Ag., Symb. Cont. I
(1841), p. 447; Sp. II, p. 382; Halymenia cinnabarina Dies. ms.
Distribution —Indian Ocean, Herb. Diesing.

RHODYMENIA ANASTOMOSANS Web. v. Bosse, Alg. de I’Exp.
dan. aux fles Kei (1926), p. 150, fig. 39.

Distribution —Kei Islands, East Indies.

RHODYMENIA RHIZOIDIFERA Web. v. Bosse, idid., p. 151,
figs. 40-43.

Distribution —Kei Islands, East Indies.

RHODYMENIA EPIMENIOIDES Harv., in Hooker, Bot. of Ant.
Voyage II: 2 (1855), p. 248.
Distribution —“Otago Harbor,” New Zealand.

RHODYMENIA MAMILLARIS Mont., Pl. Cell. exot., cent. III
(1838-45), n. 58; J. Ag., Sp. II, p. 381.
Distribution —On the coast of the Island of Martinique.

Subgenus DENDRYMENIA (Skottsb.) comb. nov.
Section 5. Dendrymeniae nom. nov.

In consequence of the results of the investigations into Rhodymenia
flabellifolia (Bory) Mont. and Dendrymenia flabellifolia (Bory)
Skottsb., which are discussed and illustrated under R. flabellifolia and R.
Skottsbergii, it has seemed best to regard Dendrymenia of Skottsberg as
a subgenus of Rhodymenia. This subgenus and section embrace those
species which show typically a multiple-branched stipe-system in addi-
tion to the stoloniferous branching of the bases and lower stipes. Other-
wise the morphology corresponds roughly to either Sec. Palmettae or Sec.
Clinophora.

(37) RHODYMENIA LEPTOPHYLLA J. Ag., De. Alg. Nov.
Zeal. marinis (1877), p. 20, n. 167; Rhodymenia linearis Harv.,
in Hooker, Bot. of Ant. Voyage II: 2 (1855), p. 248 partim;
Kylin, Die Florideenord. Rhodymen. (1931), p. 20, tab. 6, fig. 15.

Distribution —New Zealand.

144 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

(38) RHODYMENIA LEPTOPHYLLOIDES sp. nov.
Plate 20, Fig. 18; Plate 27, Fig. 39

Frons gregaria, 3-5 cm. alta e disco simplici, stipitibus sympodiale ramosis,
1-2.5 cm. longis et laminis parvis composita; laminis e stipite cuneatis, semel atque
iterumque furcatis nonnumquam leviter flabellatis, segmentis 2-3 mm. latis, apic-
ibus rotundatis; stipitibus aliquando ramos deflexos in stolonibus transformantes
producentibus et ex iis invicem ramis laminiferentibus fortasse orientis; segmentis
120-160 crassis, medullis cellulis magnis tenuiparietalibus, 2-3 stratosis, corticibus
cellulis parvioribus et inter medullis et corticibus stratis cellularum magnitudinis
intermediarum; superficie cellulis ovatis, approxime in seriebus longitudinalibus;
tetrasporangiis cystocarpiisque nondum visis.

Plants gregarious, 3-5 cm. high, from a simple, discoid holdfast ; frond
composed of a sympodially branched stipe, 1-2.5 cm. long, and a small
blade; blades cuneate from the stipe, once or twice forked, sometimes
slightly flabellate, the segments 2-3 mm. broad with rounded apices ; stipes
sometimes producing deflexed branches which form semiprostrate, stolon-
iferous structures from which blade-bearing branches may arise ; segments
120-160 thick, composed of a medulla of 2-3 layers of large, thin-walled
cells and a cortical region of much smaller cells between which there is a
gradation in cell size; surface cells ovate, somewhat longitudinally ar-
ranged. Tetraspores and cystocarps unknown.

Type.—Black Point, off Diamond Head, Oahu, Hawaiian Islands,
March 24, 1910, Miss Minnie Reed 1152; Herb. Univ. Calif. 622237.

This species is very closely related to R. leptophylla, with which it
forms a very distinct group within the subgenus Dendrymenia. Future
investigations may reveal a less broken distribution of these forms, and
they may possibly prove identical. At present, however, since this species
shows a tendency toward a flabellate form of the blades while those of
R. leptophylla are no more than once forked, and since they are found in
such widely separated geographical areas, a specific distinction is probably
justified.

(39) RHODYMENIA SKOTTSBERGII sp. nov.

Dendrymenia flabellifolia Skottsb. p.p., in Bot. Ergeb. schwed. Exped.
nach Patagon. 1X. Rhodophyceae (1923), p. 16, fig. 3 d-f, non Sphaero-
coccus flabellifolius Bory.

Plate 21, Figs. 21-23; Plate 27, Fig. 40
Frons e disco simplici, 7 cm. alta, supra basem implicata et ramoso stolonifera ;

laminis irregulariter dichotomo-flabellatis, nodos quosque stipitum ramosorum ter-
minantibus internodio quoque stipitum e lamina succedente oriente, per augmen-

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 145

tum basium laminarum amplexicaulibus; segmentis patentibus, flabella lata for-
mantibus, apicibus rotundatis, 4-5 mm. latis; tetrasporangiis cystocarpiisque
nondum visis.

Frond 7 cm. high from a simple discoid holdfast above which branched
stolons grow down to form a loose tangle around the base of the stipe;
blades irregularly dichotomo-flabellate, terminating each joint of the
sympodially branched stipe which arises by branching successively from
the surface of the base of each previously developed blade, forming by
continued growth an amplexicaul structure in the region of each branch
(figs. 21-23) ; segments spreading almost at right angles to the stipe,
forming a broad flabellum; apices rounded, 4-5 mm. broad. Tetraspores
and cystocarps unknown.

Type.—Chile, Prov. Concepcion, west shore of Concepcion Bay; 10
km. north of Talcahuana; rocks at upper low tide level, Jan. 4, 1936,
James West 5078d of Univ. of Calif. Bot. Gard. Exped. to the Andes,
1935-1936; Herb. Univ. Calif. 543963. This specimen is apparently
identical with Skottsberg’s less mature specimens from Valparaiso (St.
41, 2.9.08).

It was the best of good fortune that the specimen collected by James
West in Chile was available in the Herbarium of the University of Cali-
fornia. Without this specimen the confusion which has long surrounded
Rhodymenia flabellifolia would undoubtedly have continued. Skottsberg
in 1923, working on the Patagonian Rhodophyceae, attempted to clarify
the situation, but the material he used for comparison was very young,
and his specimens were referred to R. flabellifolia (Bory) Mont. His
synonymy is correct in that Howe’s specimen, named R. flabellifolia
(Mar. Alg. Peru (1914) ), is of the same species as Bory’s type, since it
corresponds in all essentials with Bory’s figure. Careful comparison of
West’s specimen with Skottsberg’s figures shows that it is identical with
the material of Skottsberg’s own collection which he illustrated as Den-
drymenia flabellifolia, but is quite a different plant from the species as
re-established by Howe. Close relationship in several morphological
characters is to be found between R. Skottsbergii and R. flabellifolia
(Plate 21), but the former differs very strikingly in the amplexicauline
development of the bases of the blades around each successive branch of
the stipe. In R. flabellifolia there is frequently a decurrent growth of stipe
and blade at their points of junction but never the amplexicaul character.
‘The specimen at hand has a more coriacious texture to the frond as well.
Reproductive bodies are unfortunately absent, but the external mor-

146 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

phology of this species is so outstanding that it need not be confused with
any other members of the Rhodymenia assemblage.

As shown in Plate 21, the sympodial method of growth is essentially
the same in R. Skottsbergii, R. flabellifolia, and R. corallina, indicating
close relationships among these South American species. This character
is not so easily identified in other members of Sec. Dendrymeniae, but
may prove to be similarly present as more and better material is available.
Rather than to segregate all of these typically rhodymenioid species into
another genus (Dendrymenia), it has seemed best to keep them within
Rhodymenia but to give them separate section status.

(40) RHODYMENIA RHIZOIDES sp. nov.
Plate 20, Fig. 16; Plate 26, Fig. 37

Frons 12-15 cm. alta, pauca e disco primario per stolones laxe implicatas basi
stipitis prolificantes obscurando; stolonibus copiose ramosis, superne compressis,
aliquando proliferentibus; lamines late flabellatis, e basi late cuneatis, segmentis
4-5 mm. latis, apicibus rotundatis (iis in spec. typ. plus minusve laceratis prolif-
icantibusque) plus minusve 140 w crassis, cellulis medullaribus 2-3 stratosis,
magnis ad cellulares parvas corticales gradatim parvioribus; tetrasporangiis cysto-
carpiisque nondum visis.

Fronds 12-15 cm. high, several from a primary discoid holdfast ob-
scured by the loose tangle of branched stolons proliferating from the
lower parts of the stipes, these creeping and frequently giving rise to
erect branches which develop blades; stipes abundantly branched, com-
pressed above, sometimes somewhat proliferous; blades broadly flabellate,
broadly cuneate from the stipe; segments 4-6 mm. wide, with rounded
apices (these somewhat lacerated and slightly proliferous in the type)
about 140 u thick, composed of 2-3 layers of large medullary cells showing
gradation in size from the small cells of the cortical region; tetraspores
and cystocarps unknown.

Type.—San Diego, Calif., June 1924, N. L. Gardner; Herb. Univ.
Calif. 377902.

(41) RHODYMENIA HANCOCKII sp. nov.
Plate 20, Fig. 20; Plate 26, Fig. 38

Frons partibus basalibus intimis ignota, ramosa, teres, stipitibus abrupte in
laminas stricte regulariter dichotomas, flabellate expansis, segmentis inferis fere
angulis rectis patentibus; sesmentis 4.5-7 mm. latis, apicibus rotundatis, 150-400 u
crassis, interne pluristratosis, cellulis gradatim e centro ad superficiem parvioribus.
Tetrasporangiis cystocarpiisque nondum visis.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 147

Lowest basal parts unknown; fronds composed of branched, terete
stipes expanding abruptly into quite regularly dichotomous, flabellate
blades, these with the lower segments almost at right angles to the ul-
timate stipes; segments 4.5-7 mm. broad, with rounded apices, 150-400 p
thick, composed of many layers of cells showing gradation in size from the
small cells of the cortical region to the large ones of the medulla. Tetra-
spores and cystocarps unknown.

Type.—Dredged in 21 fms., west side of bay, shell bottom, Puerto
Refugio, Angel de la Guardia Island, Gulf of Calif., Jan. 27, 1940,
E. Y. Dawson 252 of Allan Hancock Expedition to the Gulf of Califor-
nia, 1940; Herb. Allan Hancock Foundation, AHF no. 3.

This species from the Gulf is distinguished from R. rhizoides, with
which it shows similarities, by the stouter, more extensively terete stipe,
thicker blades, and more regular dichotomies of the segments. No stolons
are known from the material, since the lower parts of the stipes are
absent, possibly because of the raking action of the dredge.

(42) RHODYMENIA FLABELLIFOLIA (Bory) Mont., Voy.
Bonite (1844-46), p. 105; Sphaerococcus flabellifolius Bory, Voy.
Coquille, Atlas (1826), pl. 17; Howe, Mar. Alg. Peru (1914),
p. 124, pl. 49; Dendrymenia flabellifolia Skottsb. p.p., Bot. Ergeb.
schwed. Exped. nach Patagon., IX Rhodophyceae (1923), p. 16

(ex. illustr.).
Plate 21, Figs. 24-27

There has been less confusion surrounding this species than has at-
tended Bory’s other species, R. corallina, but presumably only because
fewer specimens of sundry collections and localities could be found to
resemble his figure. Indeed this species is very unique in the genus and
should be confused with no other members. R. flabellifolia has been defi-
nitely re-established upon specimens obtained by Coker at Lobos de
Tierra, Peru (Howe, lit. cit.). As discussed under R. Skottsbergii, with
which it was associated by Skottsberg, R. flabellifolia can readily be recog-
nized by the conspicuous, usually stout, much-branched stipe which bears
sessile, flabellate blades without any amplexicaul structure.

Distribution Wiest coast of South America; Galapagos Archipelago.

(43) RHODYMENIA LOBATA sp. nov.
Plate 19, Figs. 12-13; Plate 28, Fig. 41
Frons e disco simplici fere non-stolonifera, 20-25 cm. alta, stipiti gracili
compressa, 10-15 cm. usque ad laminam primam; segmentis vulgo 3 mm. latis,
ultimis 1-2.5 cm. longis, angulis inter segmenta 30° et 40° divergentibus, apicibus

148 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

rotundatis, aliquando in regione segmentorum inferiorum et stipitum superiorum
prolificantibus, plus minusve 100 w crassis; cellulis medullaribus 2-3 stratosis,
cellulis corticalibus parvis, plus minusve 2 stratosis; tetrasporangiis in lobis curtis
ultimis abrupte expansis 2-plo latioribus quam segmentis et soros rotundatos for-
mantibus, lobis fertilibus plus minusve 200 wu crassis, stratis corticalibus per
divisiones accessorias irregularesque in nematheciis transformatis; tetrasporangiis
cruciatis; cystocarpiis nondum visis.

Fronds from a simple disk attachment with almost no stolon develop-
ment, 20-25 cm. high, from a slender, compressed, branched stipe which
reaches 10-15 cm. before expanding to the blades ; segments mostly 3 mm.
broad, the ultimate ones 1-234 cm. long with angles of between 30 and 45
degrees, with rounded apices, somewhat proliferous in region of lower
segments and upper stipes, about 100 wu thick, of 2-3 layers of medullary
cells covered by about 2 layers of small cortical cells; tetraspores in
rounded sori at apices of the ultimate segments, each sharply expanded
into a short lobe at least twice as broad as the segment, this lobe about
200 u thick and showing considerably modified cortices in which accessory
and irregular cell divisions convert them into nemathecioid layers con-
taining the cruciate tetraspores; cystocarps unknown.

Type.—Cast ashore, Pebble Beach, Carmel Bay, Calif., Jan., 1917,
N. L. Gardner 3612; Herb. Univ. Calif. 372025.

Extensively branched stipes, thin fronds, and narrow angles of the
dichotomies distinguish this species from other Rhodymenia species of the
North Pacific coasts. Its nearest relative may be R. arborescens, from
which it is distinguished by its thinner blades, longer, more slender stipe,
and less abundant segmentation of the upper fronds.

(44) RHODYMENIA CORALLINA (Bory) Grev., Alg. Brit.
(1830), p. xlviii; Sphaerococcus corallinus Bory, Voy. Coquille,
Atlas (1826), tab. 16.
Plate 21, Fig. 28; Plate 29, Fig. 42

Bory’s original figure shows a large, erect-appearing plant with a
branched, terete stipe, the blades from this stipe being themselves individ-
ually short stipitate. Moreover, he indicates an extended, abundantly
dichotomous blade with long segments divided by narrow angles. Agree-
ment with these points is found in specimens of three collections from the
region of South America in which this species was first found. The only
point of confusion remaining is in Bory’s portrayal of the holdfast. He
does not indicate the presence of branched stolons around the holdfast,
but we may assume that his specimen either did not have a really complete

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 149

base or was immature in the development of the base, the stolons not yet
having appeared. Our specimens, in particular those of Stork and Horton
from Peru, show abundant stolons at the base. Since, however, such a
close resemblance exists between specimens of modern collections and
Bory’s figure, we may best consider these South American plants as rep-
resentative of his species and redefine Rhodymenia corallina as a South
American member of the subgenus Dendrymenia, characterizing it as de-
scribed above.

Distribution —Coasts of Peru and Chile; Southern Argentina ? (a
mutilated specimen).

(45) RHODYMENIA PALMIPEDATA pp. nov.
Plate 20, Fig. 17; Plate 24, Fig. 34

Frons 6 cm. alta, pauca e disco simplici, per stolonium explicationem confusa ;
stipitibus sympodialiter ramosis, inferne teretibus, superne compressis et in laminas
angustas expansis; segmentis laminarum inferne 1-1.5 mm. latis, iis ultimis
palmatis, brevissimis, acutis, palmipedes simulantibus; laminis plus minusve 200-
250 uw crassis; medullis 5-6 stratosis, cellulis magnis compositis et corticibus 2-
stratosis, cellulis parvis et transformationibus inter se forma magnitudinique
abruptis; tetrasporangiis cystocarpiisque nondum visis.

Fronds several, to 6 cm. high, from simple holdfasts which are some-
what confused by the development of stoloniferous proliferations, of
slender, sympodially branched stipes, terete below, becoming compressed
above and expanding into narrow blades; segments 1-114 mm. broad
below, terminating in a palmate arrangement of very short, acute ultimate
segments resembling the digits of a webbed foot; blades about 200-250 u
thick, of 5-6 layers of large medullary cells covered by 2 layers of small
cortical cells and with a fairly abrupt change in cell size. Tetraspores and
cystocarps unknown.

Type——Akaroa, New Zealand, R. M. Laing 1098, Sept., 1902;
Herb. Univ. Calif. 96189.

The branched stipe together with the peculiar sharp-pointed ultimate
segments distinguish this species from all other South Pacific Rhody-
menias.

(46) RHODYMENIA ARBORESCENS pp. nov.
Plate 20, Fig. 19; Plate 30, Fig. 43

Frons usque ad 12 cm. alta, e disco pauca, stolonibus deutibus; stipitibus,
primo semiteretibus, mox compressis, crassis, rigidis, in segmentis laminarum
angustis transientibus, iis 2-3 mm. latis; laminis multoplo dichotomis, cuneatis,
segmentis, superne gradatim angustioribus, medio plus minusve 450-500 p crassis;

150 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

medullis plus minusve 6 stratosis, corticibus quibusque plus minusve 8 stratoso,
subcorticibus cellulis gradatim magnitudine e cellulis medullibus usque ad cellulas
corticales; tetrasporangiis cystocarpiisque nondum visis.

Fronds up to 12 cm. high, several from a discoid holdfast, without
stolons; stipes branched, semiterete at first, soon compressed, thick, rigid,
expanding gradually into the narrow segments of the blade, these 2-3
mm. broad; blades multidichotomous, cuneate in outline, the segments
becoming shorter and narrower above, about 450-500 u thick in the mid-
portions, of about 6 layers of medullary cells bordered by about 8 layers
of cortical and subcortical cells through which there is a gradual transi-
tion in cell size from the smallest to the largest ; tetraspores and cystocarps
unknown.

Type.—Growing on a barnacle, cast up on shore, Laguna Beach,
Orange Co., Calif., N. L. Gardner 2562, Feb. 2, 1913; Herb. Univ.
Calif. 274046.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 151

LITERATURE CITED

AGARDH, J. G.
1841. In historia Algarum Symbolae—Linnaea XV—Hallae.
1851-1863. Species, genera et ordines Algarum, II: 1-3. Lundae.

1876. Species, genera et ordines Algarum, III (Epicrisis system. Florid.).
Lipsiae.

1877. De Algis Novae Zelandiae marinis. Lundae.

1884. Till Algernes Systematick VII—Lunds Univ. Arsskrift. tom XXI—
Lundae.

1896. Analecta Algologica—Continuata II].—Lunds Univ. Arsskrift. N.F. II,
Bd 7. Lundae.

ARDISSONE, F.

1868-1878. Le Floridie italische descritte ed illustrate, I-II. col. Milano e
Firenze.

BOERGESEN, F.
1920. Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies, Vol. 2—Dansk Botanisk
Arkiv Udgivet af Dansk Botanisk Forening, Bd 3, Nr 1f—Copenhagen.
Bory DE S. VINCENT, J. B.
1826. Voyage de la Coquille, Histoire naturelle Botanique, Atlas. Paris.
1827-1829. Voyage de la Coquille, Botanique, Cryptogamie. Paris.
De Tonl, G. B., et Forti, A.
1922. Alghi di Australia, Tasmania, e Nuova Zelanda—Memorie R. Inst.
Veneto, XXIX: 3. Venezia.

Esper, E. J. C.
1797-1800. Icones fucorum, col. Norimb.

GREVILLE, R. K.
1830. Algae Britannicae, Edinburgh.

Harvey, W. H.
1845. In Hooker, Flora Antarctica I, London.
1849-1851. Phycologia britannica, 3 vol. London.
1855. In Hooker, Botany of the Antarctic Voyage II: part II. London.
1858-1863. Phycologia australica, 5 vol. London.

HoweEg, M. A.
1914. Marine Algae of Peru—Memoirs of the Torrey Botanical Club, XV.
New York.

KUETZING, F. T.
1849. Species Algarum, Leipzig.
1849-1869. Tabulae Phycologicae, Cent. I-XIX. Nordhausen.

152 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Kyun, H.

1925. Marine red Algae of Friday Harbor—Lunds Univ. Arsskrift. N. F. II,
Bd 21. Lund.

1931. Die Florideenordnung Rhodymeniales—Lunds Univ. Arsskrift. N. F.
II, Bd 27, Nr 11. Lund.
Ky.in, H., and SkorrsBere, C.

1919. Subantarktischen und Antarktischen Meeresalgen, II Rhodophyceen—
Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der Schwedischen Siidpolar-Expedition,
1901-1903, Bd IV: lief. 15. Stockholm.
LainoG, R. M.

1909. Marine Algae of the Subant. Islands of New Zeal.—Subantarctic
Islands of New Zealand, Article XXII. Wellington.

1926. A List of New Zealand Marine Algae—Trans. of the New Zeal.
Inst. 57.
MonrTAGNE, J. F. C.

1838-1845. Des Plantes Cellulaires exotiques nouvelles, Cent. I-V—Extrait
des Ann. des Sci. nat. II: 8. Paris.

1839. Cryptogamae brasiliensis seu plantae cellulares—Extrait des Ann. des
Sci. nat. II: 12.

1844-1846. Voyage Autour du Monde exécuté pendant les années 1836 et
1837 sur la corvette la Bonité, Crypt. cell.—Paris.

1850. Pugillus Algarum Yemensium quas collegerunt annis 1847-49 clarr.
Arnaud et Voysiere—Ann. Sci. Nat., XIII (Bot.), p. 236-248.
OKAMURA, K.
1928-1934. Icones of Japanese Algae, Vol. VI-VII. Tokyo.
1934. Notes on Algae dredged from the Pacific Coast of Tiba Pref.—Records
of Oceanographic works in Japan, VI: 1.
Piccong, A.
1884. Contribuzioni all’Algologia eritrea—Nuova Giorn. bot. ital. XVI.

PosTEts, A., and RupRECHT, F. J.
1840. Illustrations Algarum Oceani Pacifici imprimis septentrionalis. Pet-
ropoli.
REINSCH, P. F.
1890. Zur Meeresalgenflora von Siid-Georgien—Extr. a. d. Deutsch. Polar
Exped. II: 15.
SEGAWA, S.
1935. On the Marine Algae of Susaki, Prov. Idzu—Scientific Papers of the
Inst. of Algol. Research, Fac. of Sci.. Hokkaido Imp. Univ., I: 1.
SKOTTSBERG, C.

1923. Botanische Ergebnisse d. Schwedischen Expedition nach Patagonien
und dem Feuerlande 1907-1909. IX. Rhodophyceae—Kungl. Sv. Vet.
Akad. Handl., Bd 63. Stockholm.

nwo. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA 153

Sonper, G. O.

1845. Nova Algarum Genera et Species quas in itinere ad oras occidentalis
Novae Hollandiae, collegit L. Preiss—Bot. Zeit. 3: 49-57.

1854-1855. In Zollinger, Systematisches Verzeichniss der im indischen Archi-
pel in der Jahren 1842-48 gesammelten sowie der aus Japan empfang-
enen Pflanzen, Algen, Heft I. Zurich.

STACKHOUSE, J.

1809. Tentamen marino-cryptogamicum—Memoires de la Société Impériale

des Naturalistes. Moscou.
Taytor, W. R.

1938. Alg. Coll. by “Hassler,” “Albatross,” and Schmitt Exped., II. Mar.
Alg. from Uruguay, Argentina, Falk. Isl., and Str. of Magellan—
Papers of Mich. Acad. Sci., Arts and Letters, Vol. XXIV: I.
WEBER VAN Bosse, A.

1913-1928. Liste des Algues du Siboga—Siboga Expedition, LIX: a, b, c, d,
Leiden.

1926. Algues de l’Expedition danoise aux iles Kei—Saertryk af Vidensk.
Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren, Bd 81.
ZANARDINI, G.

1843. Saggio di classificazione naturele delle Ficee con nuovi Studi sopra
lAndrosace degli antichi. Venezia.

1858. Plantarum in mari rubro hucusque collectarum enumeratio—Memorie
R. Instituto Veneto, VII: parte II. Venezia.

1874. Phyceae Australasicae novae vel minus cognitae—Flora.

Fie HE kal AE i ADS !

ie ‘ : Hy iD Se AAG i
Pr aed ty : . d att ty ab Ai pre ens ‘sls a |
Pa ab 3 VAS PARR Pe Oe

; pa’
- ee 3 Na
; any ie

Py iL
A fi ;
; ee yg!) ap va
bay yt "

at eal
Oh Gop :
{ ie)
rs a
a}
y nA
Alm
' ]
‘
Le
i
I if
ii
¢
fi
i
(
7
Gh CUA

156

Figs.

Figs.

Figs.

Figs.

7-8.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE 18
Rhodymenia pertusa, cross sections of a tetrasporic frond
to show unmodified cortex. x 120

R. palmata, cross sections of a tetrasporic frond to show
the nemathecial modification of the cortex. x 130

R. palmetta, cross sections of (5) a tetrasporic and (6) a
sterile frond. x 140

R. australis, cross sections of (7) a sterile and (8) a tet-
rasporic frond. x 135

0.9 OWS 0 0000 GO 9AQ000
OR OOS
000 sre 400

PL. 18

DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA

No. 8

(Tiers)

K 0 0
OC

WL S50

009 020 PPL 200000

S aso gat S8EB EO CS EN
crs o ce

<<
900 O
SQ00OGOK 000 ona ooeseowooo — (>
4

24

aex@) So
vel Moe.

OOS a)

fe) aeSomwe Osoy IS soss Os? 2 Oso O50
2,2),2, 9000.0 00 0° 00070 09 00000990295 5g9090 020,00000000
0°00

MEF O oe a al
Se OYs TC ee
0G. Ol =

6 aon 65

|

158 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 19
Fig. 9. Rhodymenia Howeana, median section through a ma-
ture cystocarp. x 150
Fig. 10. R. attenuata, portion of a frond bearing cystocarps. x 5

Fig. 11. R. attenuata, median section through a mature cysto-
carp. x 60

Figs. 12-13. R. lobata, cross sections of (12) a sterile and (13) a tet-
rasporic frond. x 150

10

' No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PL. 19

200°

a
cS

Z)
eoS00

999900509900 9 9009909
SESS. iste)
© ZF
1S)

o. eo

Bi
Cs
io i o ° 0 See

090 0
og§ [ole}
C CR
Sogo

099% °0

A990 0.
\O
eon

oe
CG

0B
oO
(0,

fc) e
e og
So We)
fe}

p

09,

0

Q.

Q)

i
/

O

0
yy

Q

@)
2

oy (a)
¢

p

Ve
i

0°.

RY yo)
qui

12
a

0

‘

00
No

160 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

LEAL ZANE, AAO

Cross sections of sterile fronds

» 14:
ey illais
ig. 16.
Ble
. 18.
5 UO
“205

Rhodymenta pacifica. x 120

R.
Re:
. palmipedata. x 160

awW nr DW

californica. x 140

rhizoides. x 160

. leptophylloides. x 210
. arborescens. x 110

. Hancockit. x 125

VOL. 3

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA Pie)

‘=
0299S oo Se) Spe QCS9 9900
) ) OSS SX,

: 3 oa Sa ee SE
SSS ? Pe Oe SS roe

1865 aL ot

Br coor a apa SY

Ook ew, SDO0OSSS88358)
SS RoQGq2 ODS CSRS cS)
< Se! CO DITSOSsHoo So SSQILS HOOVES FI LSS 000950

5 16

AEB IIOP IN AOI9W0 59300 0G055050,0069 DOD LODS ‘S)
5a ROTOR OBOSQEBSCQ SGN IPO SES SOLE LIS
0009 GEES OIRO » =
FOOSSYS AG S

0 SB HE)
Se Ot
Bee Xa

CX <4
Lo

(a)
S, SS
0005 200055 000000
20 °89200 S8& 00000 0
fi Coo SS aE SSO 9086 6605 20808
4. G,

© i Ole) ox)
05.0% OODOLS0 9 2206 00H 005
§ 092009090 20,70,0 9% 0% 500 900000 008 OGG"
$40 0GAG0000 000500 0.86 0100.6 C6442 0 0000000000000

19

O90 CO. ._OG_o S006 _O,
00595 20D967 Sos OS S90

cs}
So SGO0002%

f .
— a)
——( (S)
ery) O°,
Ser 000
D000Z C02
50052

39 Qi fo) [o)
9
2 a8 0d00%MOS200 OSS P62 o0geco00 3)

162 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PIL ANIEIS, Ail

Fig. 21. Rhodymenta Skottshergit, detail of the region of growth
showing the sympodial method of branching. x 214

Fig. 22. The same enlarged. x 8

Fig. 23. R. Skottshergii, detail of the amplexicaul structure of
the branches as derived from the development shown in
figs. 21-22. x 5

Figs. 24-25. R. flabellifolia, apices of a specimen from the Gala-
pagos Islands, showing sympodial growth analogous
with figs. 21-22. x 10

Figs. 26-27. R. flabellifolia, apices of a specimen from Chile. x 10

Fig. 28. R. corallina, sympodial apex. x 8

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PEA

164 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3.

PEAGE, 22

Fig. 29. R. palmettiformis. A photograph of the type material.

Fig. 30. R. novazelandica. A photograph of part of the type mate-
rial,

No. 8

Fe IEW Le IU OU aL UL PU TP
2 3 4 5 "EN ae, SURES ANE Ba |

~

DAWSON:

A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA

166 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PVA E 23
Fig. 31. R. divaricata. A photograph of a specimen from the
type collection.

Figs. 32-33. R. rosea. Photographs of 2 specimens from type collec-
tion.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PEAS

168 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 24

Fig. 34. R. palmipedata. A photograph of the type specimen.

Fig. 35. R. attenuata. A photograph of a specimen from the type
collection.

NO. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PL. 24

PLATE: 25

Fig. 36. R. lobulifera. A photograph of the type specimen. _

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA Pie Zo

PLATE 26

Fig. 37. R. rhizoides. A photograph of the type specimen.

Fig. 38. R. Hancockii. A photograph of the type specimen.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PL. 26

UD CU ULL Levan enn eh '
ste a ie a ce -

o6

ri P + “Py een te
7 y : Si Sel eos Pe |
1 5 - -

174 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS re Be

IRIL/NIDIS, Qi

Fig. 39. R. leptophylloides. A photograph of the type material.

Fig. 40. R. Skottsbergit. A photograph of the type specimen.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PL. 27

rT yi

ee EET ER TET TT Oe my
efarc i] 2 3 4 5] eae gf.

PLATE 28

Fig. 41. R. lobata. A photograph of the type specimen.

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PL. 28

TTT TAT Se SNA aS es I a UL
2 ee Be ee Se ie is ile

A

41

PEA s29

R. corallina. A photograph of a typical specimen fri

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PL. 29

vu, pif | Vy «

42 VL?

‘PEDITIONS

solani

PLATES30

] Ay,

ze ,

No. 8 DAWSON: A REVIEW OF THE GENUS RHODYMENIA PL. 30

ti

Ten LU Ra
dete Ho 23 ALS

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBER 9

SOME LICHENS FROM THE AMERICAN
TROPICS COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

BY

JOYCE HEDRICK

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
1942

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA,
AND GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, IN 1933, IN 1934, IN 1935,
IN 1936, IN 1937, IN 1938, IN 1939, IN 1940, AND IN 1941.

SOME LICHENS FROM THE AMERICAN
TROPICS COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR

By JOYCE HEDRICK

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
ALLAN HAncock PAcIFIc EXPEDITIONS
VOLUME 3, NUMBER 9
IssUED DECEMBER 30, 1942

Tue UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

SOME LICHENS FROM THE AMERICAN TROPICS
COLLECTED BY WM. R. TAYLOR*

Joyce HEprick

The specimens upon which this report is based were collected by Wm.
R. Taylor, botanist with the Allan Hancock Expedition of 1939. Lichens
were obtained at stops made off the west coast of Mexico, on Clarion and
Socorro islands; along the west coast of Costa Rica, at Port Parker near
Salinas Bay and at Golfo Dulce; along the west coast of Panama, at
Bahia Honda, and the south coast at Islas Secas near Puerto Neuvo; and
at the western end of Tortuga Island in the Caribbean Sea north of
Venezuela.

There has been little published on the lichens from these specific re-
gions. The Flora of Costa Rica by Durand and Pittier in 1891-96 gives
two lists of lichens prepared by J. Miiller. The first enumerates 214
species and the second 281. Part I, Foliose and Fruticose Lichens of Costa
Rica, by Dodge appeared in 1933 with discussions of 73 species and vari-
eties. Lichens collected on the Galapagos Islands by Snodgrass and Heller
were reported by Robinson in 1902. Stewart in 1912 published Notes on
the Lichens of Galapagos Islands. Linder in 1932 presented the lichens
of the Templeton Crocker Expedition of the California Academy of
Sciences, 1932, mainly from Guadalupe Island, Lower California, and
other islands off the west coast of Mexico. In 1936 Dodge reported on
the lichens of the Allan Hancock Expedition of 1934. Svenson in 1935
listed the lichens of the Astor Expedition of 1930.

In the present account 23 species in 15 genera are listed. ‘'wo species,
Monoblastia lutescens and Minksia saxicola, are described as new. Seven
other species in the list are not found in the papers mentioned above.

PYRENULACEAE

Monoblastia lutescens n. sp. ‘Thallus crustaceus uniformis effusus
haud limitatus, continuus laevigatus aut parte inaequalis, laeviter lutes-
cens. Perithecia circ. 0.3-0.6 mm. lata, dimidiata alte hemisphaerico-
convexa, parte superficialia, ostiolo minute umbilicato concolore thallo.
Paraphyses persistentes ramoso-convexae. Asci cylindrices, 6-8-spori.

* Papers from the Herbarium of the University of Michigan.

[ 183 ]

184 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Sporae incolores simplices ellipsoideae aut oblongae, 44-60 x 21-28 gh,
membrana crassiuscula laevigata.

Thallus crustose, uniform, widespread, continuous, smooth or becom-
ing partly rough, light yellow; perithecia small, 0.3-0.6 mm. across, di-
midiate, above hemispherical convex, partly superficial, the ostiole minute,
terminal; colored like the thallus; paraphyses persistent, netlike inter-
woven; asci cylindrical; spores 6-8, hyaline, nonseptate, ellipsoid or ob-
long, 44-60 x 21-28 yu, with thick smooth wall.

On tree bark, Port Parker, Costa Rica, March 24, 1939, Wm. R.
Taylor, 39-718. Type deposited in the herbaria of the Allan Hancock
Foundation and of the University of Michigan. M. lutescens can be dis-
tinguished from M. palmicola Riddle, which has a white thallus, asci with
2-4 spores, and spores 30-50 x 16-20 p.

Anthracothecium canellae-albae (Fée) Mill. Arg—On bark of trees,
Port Parker, Costa Rica, March 24, 1939, Taylor, 39-717.

TRYPETHELIACEAE

Trypethelium aeneum (Eschw.) Zahlbr.—On tree branches, Choca-
hua Bay, coast of Mexico, March 21, 1939, Taylor, 39-715; on bark of
trees, Islas Secas, Panama, March 27, 1939, Taylor, 39-728.

ARTHONIACEAE

Arthothelium spectabile Mass—On bark of trees, Port Parker, Costa
Rica, March 24, 1939, Taylor, 39-720.

Arthothelium macrothecum (Fée) Mass.——On bark of trees, Port
Parker, Costa Rica, March 24, 1939, Taylor, 39-721.

GRAPHIDACEAE

Graphis scripta (L.) Ach—On bark of trees, Port Parker, Costa
Rica, March 24, 1939, Taylor, 39-719.

CHIODECTONACEAE

Minksia saxicola n. sp—Thallus crustaceus, uniformis, pallido aut
laeviter glaucescens, hypothallo indistincto. Apothecia thallo immersa, ag-
gregata, vulgo rotundata aut elongata, disco nigro, 0.05-0.1 mm. lato.
Paraphyses ramosae. Asci clavati, 96 x 32 yw, 4-8-spori. Sporae incolores,
oblongae, murales, 33-40 x 9-15 , 9-11 transverse septate et 1-2 longi-
tudinale septatae, cellulis cubicis.

NO. 9 HEDRICK: SOME LICHENS FROM AMERICAN TROPICS 185

Thallus thin to moderately thick, smooth to minutely chinky and
becoming powdery, ashy to greenish gray, brighter green when moist,
hypothallus indistinct; apothecia minute to small, 0.05-0.1 mm. across,
round to elongated, several to many immersed in round to irregular thal-
loid warts, the disk flat, black; hypothecium brown, the apothecial wall
scanty and not well defined ; paraphyses hyaline below to brownish above,
branched ; asci broadly clavate, 96 x 32 p, the wall somewhat thickened
above; spores 4-8, hyaline, oblong, 33-40 x 9-15 », muriform, 9-11-septate
transversely and 1-2-septate longitudinally, the cells cubical.

On maritime rocks, Tortuga Island, April 13, 1939, Wm. R. Taylor,
39-731. Type deposited in the herbaria of the Allan Hancock Foundation
and of the University of Michigan. The species previously described in
this genus were growing on wood. M. caesiella Mill. Arg. and M. can-
dida Mill. Arg. have a whitish thallus and spores 20-28 x 6.5-7 p. M. ir-
regularis Mill. Arg. has a yellowish white thallus and spores, one in each
ascus, 65 x 23 yp. M. saxicola is found on rocks, has a greenish white thal-
lus and spores 33-40 x 9-15 », which separate it from the other species.

ROCCELLACEAE

Roccella Babingtonii Mont.—On twigs, Tortuga Island, April 13,
1939, Taylor, 39-733.

COENOGONIACEAE
Coenogonium linkii Ehrh.— On twigs in forest, Golfo Dulce, Costa
Rica, March 26, 1939, Taylor, 39-726.
COLLEMACEAE

Leptogium denticulatum Nyl.—Specimen sterile; so identification
doubtful—on twigs in forest, Golfo Dulce, Costa Rica, March 26, 1939,
Taylor, 39-725.

LECANORACEAE
Lecanora varia (Ehrh.) Nyl.—On bark of trees, Port Parker, Costa
Rica, March 24, 1939, Taylor, 39-722.
PARMELIACEAE

Parmelia latissima Fée.—On trees, Islas Secas, Panama, March 27,

1939, Taylor, 39-727.

186 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Parmelia sulphurata Nees. & Flot.—On trees, Bahia Honda, Panama,
March 28, 1939, Taylor, 39-729.

USNEACEAE

Ramalina complanata (Sw.) Ach.—On twigs of trees, Tortuga Is-
land, April 13, 1939, Taylor, 39-730, 39-735.

Ramalina Usnea (L.) Howe.—On trees, Tortuga Island, April 13,
1939, Taylor, 39-732, 39-734, 39-736.

CALOPLACACEAE

Caloplaca elegans (Link) T. Fries —On broken old coral near shore,
Sulphur Bay, Clarion Island, March 16, 1939, Taylor, 39-713.

Caloplaca Malmeana Zahlbr.—On rocks near shore, Sulphur Bay,
Clarion Island, March 16, 1939, Taylor, 39-710.

Caloplaca diphocia phaea (‘Tuck.) Zahlbr.—On rocks, Sulphur Bay,
Clarion Island, March 16, 1939, Taylor, 39-712.

Caloplaca murorum (Hoffm.) T. Fries —On lava rocks near shore,

Soccoro Island, March 18, 1939, Taylor, 39-714.

BUELLIACEAE

Buellia parasema (Ach.) T. Fries—On bark of trees, Port Parker,
Costa Rica, March 24, 1939, ‘Taylor, 39-716.

Buellia xanthinula (Mill. Arg.) Malme.—On shale along shore,
high above the tide line, Port Parker, Costa Rica, March 25, 1939, Tay-
lor, 39-724.

PHYSCIACEAE

Physcia alba (Fée) Mill. Arg—On rocks, top of peak, Sulphur Bay,
Clarion Island, March 16, 1939, Taylor, 39-711.

Physcia aegilata (Ach.) Nyl.—On bark of trees, Port Parker, Costa
Rica, March 24, 1939, Taylor, 39-723.

NO. 9 HEDRICK: SOME LICHENS FROM AMERICAN TROPICS 187

LITERATURE CITED

Dopce, C. W.

1933. The Foliose and Fruticose Lichens of Costa Rica. I. Annals Missouri
Botanical Garden, 20: 373-467.

1936. Lichens of the G. Allan Hancock Expedition of 1934, collected by Wm.
R. Taylor. Allan Hancock Pacific Exped., 3(3): 33-46.

Duranp, TH. et Pittier, H.

1891-96. Primitiae Florae Costaricensis Bruxeles, Jardin Botanique de L’etat.
Lichens by J. Miller, 1: 49-95, 3: 122-173.

Linper, Davip H.

1934. The Templeton Crocker Expedition of the California Academy of
Sciences, 1932. Proc. Calif. Acad. Science, 21: 211-224.

Rosinson, B. L.

1902. Flora of the Galapagos Islands, Lichens by W. G. Farlow. Proc. Am.
Acad. Science, 38: 83-89.

STEWART, ALBAN

1912. Notes on the Lichens of the Galapagos Islands. Proc. Calif. Acad.
Science, 1: 432-446.

SvENSON, H. K.

1935. Plants of the Astor Expedition, 1930. Lichens by C. W. Dodge. Am.
Jour. Bot., 22: 221.

BEN yell td
sii te AY}
ay) i

By

hy ies “Ly +e 7 ° +) ms “ ‘7 Mi ‘8
If; MEE ead ELA SP OE I
oh aE, alert aa PR RD

r : N ‘ i t ty N j y 4

WAS re Sinha ph On
Hess i) Wat La

i Nae
deat

\
Nia

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

VOLUME 3 NUMBER 10

THE MARINE ALGAE OF THE
GULF OF CALIFORNIA

(ForTY-SEVEN PLATES)

BY

ELMER YALE DAWSON

DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
aay pee 1944

iF oa!
RV

|

a2

Paytt

unr
As 7,

+ die Ny

‘aa

REPORTS ON THE COLLECTIONS OBTAINED BY ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS OF
VELERO III OFF THE COAST OF MEXICO, CENTRAL AMERICA, SOUTH AMERICA,
AND GALAPAGOS ISLANDS IN 1932, IN 1933, IN 1934, IN 1935,
IN 1936, IN 1937, IN 1938, IN 1939, IN 1940, AND IN 1941.

THE MARINE ALGAE OF THE
GULF OF CALIFORNIA

(FortTy-SEVEN PLATES)

By ELMER YALE DAWSON

DEDECA TED, TO. THE MEM OR Y.:0F

WILLIAM ALBERT SETCHELL

Professor Emeritus of Botany
i _ of the
University of California

Foremost American phycologist of this century; a scien-
tist of rare wisdom and breadth of understanding; a
teacher who endeared himself to thousands; a man of un-

forgettable personality ; a prince of good fellows.

It was the author’s very great privilege to have been
among Professor Setchell’s closest associates during the last
years of his life, and to have been his last and youngest
pupil. It was with him, under his guidance, and inspired
by his great understanding and kind helpfulness that this
work was done. By the younger of his friends and associ-
ates during more recent years he was known as “Uncle
Bill,” and by our adoption into his family of friends we
fortunate ones gained a treasured intimacy with this great
man. He will not be forgotten, for, as his life has been an

inspiration, so his memory will be a shrine.

—at the time of his death,
April 5, 1943

THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
ALLAN HANcocK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS
VoLuME 3, NUMBER 10
IssUED JULY, 1944

Tue UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA PRESS
Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

CONTE Nt? Ss

INTRODUCTION ‘ A a - 3 5 A j A A F 189
HISTORICAL SUMMARY é : 3 c ; é ; ; é ; 189

RECENT COLLECTIONS OF THE AUTHOR ; : ; 4 : 5 ; 190

GENERAL NATURE OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA ; i 5 . ‘i 192
EcoLocic CONSIDERATIONS s ; : A : i ; s 5 195
GENERAL ASPECTS OF THE ALGAL FLORA - A ‘ ° F é 198

CHLOROPHYCEAE P 5 ; ‘ ; 3 A 5 < : ‘ 5 201

PHAEOPHYCEAE A : : 3 ; : : : : 4 : : 220
RHODOPHYCEAE : ° C : é : 6 : : : : 251
GENERAL SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS , : - : : : : 337
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS c : : : ¢ d : 5 : : 338
TABLES
I. TEMPERATURE DATA, SCRIPPS, 1939 4 6 : A ; C 3 339
II. Oxycen Dara, Scripps, 1939 S c : : : c 3 é 341
III. Sration Locations, Scripps, 1939 ‘ 4 : E 5 : 343

ALGAL COLLECTION STATIONS
ALLAN HANCOCK EXPEDITION, 1940 , é 5 . 0 4 - 353

Dawson, JULY, 1940 5 : é ‘ : ; : é ; : 356

PRINCIPAL ALGAE FOUND AT TURNER’S ISLAND

JANUARY, 1940 : . : : A : c ‘ c S 357
Juty, 1940 : = 4 é : 5 4 4 0 357
List oF NEw NAMES AND COMBINATIONS : < : : : 358
LITERATURE CITED : 0 - c 5 5 - f ; A 344

EXPLANATION OF PLATES i 5 : 5 : 5 A ; 5 359

“ eat Wea j rf Ma) y
ina ven Ni Aa eglceign veh a

Vai at nh RAEN

THE MARINE ALGAE OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA

(FORTY-SEVEN PLATES)

ELMER YALE Dawson
Department of Botany, University of California

INTRODUCTION

HisTorRIcAL SUMMARY

The first alga known to have been taken and preserved from the Gulf
of California is a specimen of /”urdemannia miniata collected in 1860 by
Edward Palmer on the shore of Carmen Island. In 1890 T. S. Brandegee
and Walter E. Bryant of the third expedition of the California Academy
of Sciences to Lower California collected a considerable number of speci-
mens, particularly of Sargassum. These, however, received no mention in
print until thirty-four years later. It was not until 1895 that any account
of algal material from this region came into press, that published by M.
Paul Hariot being the first (Algues du Golfe de Californie recueillies par
M. Diguet). Five marine and two fresh-water species were recorded. The
collection consisted mainly of crustaceous corallines which have, since
Hariot’s work of 1895, been re-examined and reported on by other au-
thorities on the Corallinaceae: Foslie, Heydrich, and Lemoine.

The year 1904 marked the first collection in the northern Gulf, made
by D. T. MacDougal at San Felipe Bay. In 1911 G. J. Vives gathered a
number of beach-drift specimens at La Paz, and these together with Mac-
Dougal’s material found their way to Marshall A. Howe, who published
that year an account of the combined 24 species (Phycological Studies V).

The most important publication to date on the marine algae of this
region was made by W. A. Setchell and N. L. Gardner in 1924 (New
Marine Algae from the Gulf of California). These authors had at hand
a far greater quantity of material than the aggregate of previous collec-
tions, and their account includes designations of 144 species and varieties
of which 111 were described as new. The bulk of the collection was com-
posed of specimens secured by Ivan M. Johnston on the expedition of the
California Academy of Sciences to the Gulf of California in the summer
of 1921, but the old collections of Brandegee and Bryant were included
in the study as well as a collection made in 1917 by Dr. and Mrs. Mar-
chant.

[ 189 ] ae

190 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

In Phycological Contributions VII, 1924, Setchell and Gardner pre-
sented the name Meneginiella Brandegeei for an undated specimen of
Brandegee’s collection from La Paz.

N. L. Gardner published in 1927 (New Rhodophyceae from the
Pacific Coast of North America VI) two new species from a collection
of D. T. MacDougal made at Puerto Libertad, Sonora, in November,
1923. Another small collection was made by MacDougal in May of the
same year, some specimens of which are mentioned for the first time in the
present account.

In the quantity of material secured by J. T. Howell of the 1932 Zaca
Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences are some specimens
taken from the waters of the Cape region of Lower California. These are
included in the present paper.

Waldo L. Schmitt obtained in 1938 a few algae from dredgings off
the Cape of Lower California. These were accounted for by W. R. Tay-
lor in 1939 (Marine Algae of the Presidential Cruise of 1938).

In addition to the author’s extensive collections made in the winter
and summer of 1940 and described below, material from this report has
been made available by several other contributors. Principal among these
other collections is that made by Dr. Francis Drouet and Mr. Donald
Richards of the Field Museum Expedition to Sonora in the winter of
1939, E. F. Ricketts of Pacific Biological Laboratories contributed some
samples from Puerto Refugio obtained in April, 1940. A few were
brought in by J. Wyatt Durham of the Scripps Institution of Ocea-
nography Expedition of the Fall of 1940. Lastly, a small but valuable col-
lection was made by Dr. John Poindexter of Stanford University at
Punta Penasco, Sonora, in the spring of 1941.

All of the above-mentioned collections from the Gulf of California,
excepting part of those of Diguet and those of Schmitt, have been ex-
amined in the preparation of this report.

RECENT COLLECTIONS OF THE AUTHOR

In January of 1940 the writer was given the unique opportunity of
accompanying the Allan Hancock Expedition from The University of
Southern California as marine botanist. It was a splendid chance to visit
the Gulf of California in winter and with such equipment as would be
most effective in securing an unprecedented quantity of algal material.
Winter collections had not been secured from the area before, and,
moreover, a visit had never been made by an investigator primarily in-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 191

terested in the marine algae. The general environmental conditions were
still unrecorded for the plants of this large area, and seasonal changes not
only had escaped investigation but had never been considered. Though
over a hundred species of algae were recorded from the Gulf, collection
localities were scattered, and the absence of winter collections suggested
strongly that further exploration would be very fruitful.

Five weeks of cruising on the 195-foot twin Diesel Velero III allowed
us to make 90 collection-station records, from over half of which algal
material was obtained. The whole length of the Gulf was traversed, from
San Jose del Cabo, Lower California, to Punta Pefiasco (Rocky Point),
Sonora.

For the detailed analysis of this expedition, the cruise charts, and com-
plete station records, the reader is referred to Volume 1, nos. 1, 2, 3, of
this series.

The splendid dredging equipment afforded by the Velero III permit-
ted the carrying out of extensive sublittoral collecting, much of which was
exceedingly profitable from the phycological point of view. Deep-water
dredgings were made mostly off the bow of the Velero by means of the
ship’s dredge, while shallower areas were dredged by means of a motor
dredge launch. A glass-bottomed skiff was used for inshore raking, grap-
pling, and diving. The small dredge boat, being best suited for work over
the most excellent sublittoral vegetation areas, yielded the most interest-
ing sublittoral algal collections. Much of this material has never been
taken in any other way.

The low tides of late January, 1940, made available some of the
richest shore stations under optimum collecting conditions. Later, during
February, in spite of relatively higher tides, the exceptional fall of ordi-
nary tides made all shore stations in the northern Gulf profitable. Brief
descriptions of the littoral and sublittoral stations together with accessory
data are to be found on pp. 353-356.

In July, 1940, in order to study the seasonal change in the algal flora,
a return trip was made to Turner’s Island, the only island station visited
in January by the Hancock Expedition which could be reached without
unreasonable difficulty. Turner’s Island is 25 miles seaward from Kino
on the Sonora coast and may be reached by small boat owing to the safety
afforded by the shores of Tiburon Island which extend far out into the
Gulf. The trip was made in three days by outboard motor attached to a
one-ton fishing dory. We crossed the channel between Tiburon Island
and the mainland, followed the south shore, and then crossed to the reef

192 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

at the north end of Turner’s Island. A week in mid-July was chosen in
which the lowest tides of the summer season were predicted. The impossi-
bility of mooring a small boat at high tide made it necessary that all
specimens be thrown together in large jars and preserved in formalin, to
be segregated, sorted, and spread after the return to the laboratory. A
stay of several days would have been valuable, but the difficulties of the
trip did not allow it.

GENERAL NATURE OF THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA

Just as the Galapagos Archipelago has long been recognized as a
unique land area of the eastern Pacific, so more recently the Gulf of Cali-
fornia has gained attention as an almost equally unique marine area. On
this account, frequent expeditions from learned institutions have made
their way into the “Sea of Cortez” to investigate both the extraordinary
oceanography of the region and the plant and animal inhabitants of its
islands and its waters. he phycologist, however, has been wholly de-
pendent upon herbarium specimens brought back from the region. In-
deed, until 1939 no part of the living marine flora of the Gulf of Califor-
nia had ever been seen by phycologists.

One would perhaps suppose that so interesting an area, being rela-
tively near the large cities of the California coast, might have become well
explored by means of overland routes. The Gulf of California, however,
is far less accessible than the distance alone might imply. Even today there
is no satisfactory road to any point on the Gulf from any point in the
United States; indeed, there are few roads of any kind. Even if one
reaches the few accessible points, relatively little can be done, for the
Gulf is a sea of islands; and without the cruising facilities of an ample
ship and adequate dredging equipment the waters are not likely to yield a
large part of their inhabitants.

The Gulf of California is one of those few marine areas in the world
so set apart from the ocean at large that its whole nature is at variance
with comparable parts of the greater mass. Over 600 miles long, with
fully 2,000 miles of coastline and a large number of islands, it constitutes
a very considerable part of the Pacific coast of North America and one
which is fast fulfilling the expectations stated by Setchell and Gardner
nearly twenty years ago: “It seems likely that there will be found to be
an exceedingly rich marine flora in the Gulf of California when it shall
have been carefully and thoroughly explored.” The purpose of this paper,
however, is not only to describe the variety and abundance of marine plant

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 193

life in this region but to show wherever possible how the nature of the
vegetation reflects directly the peculiar conditions existing in this body
of water.

The southwestern limit of the Gulf is taken as Cape San Lucas, the
outjutting rocks of the extreme tip of Lower California forming a geo-
graphic point of division between the two parallel coasts of the peninsula.
It is not possible to establish an eastern boundary, for no known collec-
tions of algae have been made on the mainland coast of Mexico between
Mazatlan and the mouth of the Rio Mayo. On the chart of collection
stations a 300-mile blank exists without a single record, and, instead of
attempting to extend the treatment southward across this unknown re-
gion, the collections at Rio Mayo are taken as representing the southern-
most samples known from the eastern Gulf coast.

Geographically, the Gulf of California extends through ten degrees
of latitude and is, for this reason alone, subject to a very considerable
range of variation in climate. The southern waters lie below the Tropic
of Cancer and, as will be shown below, are influenced by temperature
conditions entirely unlike those acting upon the northern waters. Ac-
tually, the Gulf forms a marine pocket reaching deeply into the western
side of Mexico. Surrounded as it is by barriers to the tempering influences
of the Pacific winds, the waters of much of this marine area are subjected
to much greater climatic extremes than are the waters along the outer
coast of Lower California. On the west is the backbone of the peninsula,
a largely unbroken chain of mountains 6,000 to 10,000 feet high, barring
the access of winds which would cool the heated air of summer and stay
the falling temperatures of winter. On the north and east lies the great
Sonoran desert mass, flanked by the North American cordillera. The
summers of this whole country are notoriously hot and snow falls cn the
cactus-studded desert in winter. The upper half or more of the Gulf,
therefore, confined by these remarkable barriers, is subjected to conditions
much as a large inland lake would be, and the temperatures of its surface
waters vary directly with these seasonal climatic conditions.

Aside from the unusual temperature conditions existing in the region,
another remarkable feature is present which both directly and indirectly
has considerable influence on the distribution of the marine plants. No-
where else on the Pacific coast do the tidal conditions compare with those
at the head of the Gulf. The great length and relatively narrow propor-
tions of the Gulf result in the development of a tidal bore which reaches
tremendous volume in its northern regions. Twice a day the great influx

194 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

of tidal water sweeps up the gradually narrowing channel of the Gulf and
causes an increasingly greater tidal range toward the Colorado river. At
Puerto Refugio the spring range is 11.8 feet, at Tepoca Bay 17.2 feet,
and at the mouth of the river 31.5 feet. These figures merely represent
the average differences between high and low water at the time of new or
full moon, and, since the author’s visits to the Gulf were made during
times of maximum tidal difference in the winter and summer of 1940,
proportionally greater ranges were observed at all the stations visited.
Puerto Refugio, in particular, exhibited a most striking rise and fall of
the water level. A reef on the north side of the bay, exposed to a height of
at least 15 feet at lowest ebb, was completely submerged at high water.
At San Felipe on the Lower California coast quite near to the upper
extremity of the Gulf, large fishing boats were observed late in July of
1938 to be high and dry in a basin far above the reach of the high water
of that particular time. Yet, these boats are floated in on the crest of one
high-water tide and floated out again on another such crest.

‘Two thirds of the way up the Gulf lie a group of large islands and an
outjutting peninsula of land which together serve as a very decided hin-
drance to the movement of water up and down the Gulf. Above this nar-
row “bottleneck” is a large water area connected to the southern water
mass and the ocean at large only through these straits. Consequent upon
the tremendous movement of tidal water in and out of the northern area,
very strong currents develop in the channels between the islands. On
either side of San Esteban Island the currents are so powerful that an-
chorage is impossible and must be sought in protected bays of the south-
facing shore. The significance of these currents in regard to the general
distribution of algal populations will be taken up in a consideration of the
oxygen relations of these plants.

No discussion of general water movement in the Gulf is complete
without mention of the nature of wave action. Here again is a factor
playing an exceedingly important role in the oxygen relations of marine
algae. Unlike the outer coast, where powerful surf is the rule, the action
of waves in the Gulf of California is contrastingly slight. Except at times
of heavy winds and general storminess, the waters are essentially calm
and small waves prevail, breaking directly on the shore. Commonly there
is scarcely more than a strong lap of water on the beaches; and, wherever
protection is afforded, little more than a gentle surge. Toward the south-
ern limits of the Gulf, however, increasingly heavy wave action is present,
reaching full proportions in the Cape district, where the collector, instead

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 195

of being able to work casually at the water’s edge when choosing desirable
specimens, must scan and pick hurriedly from exposed rocks or sustain
frequent immersions.

EcoLocic CONSIDERATIONS

Setchell, in a series of papers (1915, 1920, 1922) on the temperature
relations of marine algae, has shown the primary importance of tempera-
ture in ecologic and distributional considerations of these plants. He rec-
ognized that the ranges of temperature to which marine plants are sub-
jected are in general much narrower than are those of land plants. Also,
in contrast to terrestrial plants, whose various parts are subjected to quite
different temperatures at a given time, the marine plants are completely
surrounded by a medium of uniform temperature. The problems of tem-
perature for marine plants, thus, are relatively simple, and the ease with
which temperature can be measured makes some interesting correlations
possible.

The seasonal variation in the temperature of surface waters along the
outer coasts of California and Mexico does not exceed 10° C. and is usu-
ally considerably below that figure. This coincides with Setchell’s gen-
eral thesis as to temperature amplitudes in ocean waters (1915, 1920).
In the Gulf of California, however, we have not only latitudinal temper-
ature differences from south to north but exceptionally pronounced sea-
sonal differences far exceeding those known for any other waters of our
coasts (see p. 339). From winter to summer, amplitudes of tempera-
ture variation may reach as high as 25° to 28° C. Records made on the
Velero cruise, January 20-30, 1940, showed a gradual decrease in tem-
perature of surface water from San Jose del Cabo, 23° C., to San Felipe,
14° C. Scripps Institution data obtained over the same course from Feb-
ruary 13 to March 19, 1939, showed a range from 21.5° in the south to
between 15° and 17° in the north. A recording of the Zaca Expedition at
San Jose del Cabo, August 4, 1932, gave 26°-27° for surface water. The
writer’s surface readings for July 18, 1940, were 31° on the reef at Tur-
ner’s Island and 32°-33° along shore and in bays of adjacent Tiburon
Island. The highest temperature known to have been measured is a figure
of 36° C. obtained by the author in shore waters of Concepcion Bay,
Lower California, in mid-July, 1934.

As soon as the extent of these seasonal temperature changes was re-
alized, it was strongly suspected that investigation would reveal a marked
seasonal alternation in the marine floras of northern parts of the Gulf.

196 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

With this in mind, careful attention was given to collection localities to
which return trips at other seasons might be made feasible. After the re-
turn of the Hancock Expedition it was found that one of the richest algal
stations visited during the winter season could be reached from the Sonora
side of the Gulf. This was Turner’s Island, a tiny, rocky island off the
south end of Tiburon, within 25 miles, in direct line, of the fishing village
of Kino. A return visit to this island at the height of the warm-water
season of midsummer confirmed completely the suspicions regarding sea-
sonal alternation of the floras.

In attempting to explain the general distribution of algal types and
floras in the Gulf, the author is fully aware that in the present account
only suggestions can be made. Ecologic data are still exceedingly scanty.
Even so easily recorded a fact as temperature is available for only a small
part of the year, and that almost entirely from measurements in the open
sea. Fortunately, Sverdrup and the Scripps Institution staff have made
available a series of oxygen values showing the concentration of oxygen in
the sea water of the Gulf of California at 53 stations and at many depths.

Unlike terrestrial plants, which live in a partly atmospheric partly
subterranean environment, the algae, in their aquatic medium, are subject
to different primary environmental factors. Next to temperature, oxygen
is probably the most significant primary factor. In contrast with lan¢c
plants, when marine algae carry on photosynthesis the CO, removed from
sea water is immediately replaced by the dissociation of bicarbonates and
carbonic acid. This buffering action of sea water prevents any deficiency
in the CO, content which might be limiting to photosynthesis. ‘The oxy-
gen supply, therefore, except when photosynthesis is proceeding at an ade-
quate rate, becomes a critical factor, and its availability in the sea water
of different habitats becomes significant as a factor in the general devel-
opment and distribution of marine vegetation.

From the oxygen data at hand (see p. 341) we find values in sur-
face waters ranging from 5 to 9 milliliters per liter from south to north
in the Gulf. These differences are attributable to a number of climatic
and oceanographical factors.

The solubility of oxygen varies inversely with the temperature. Thus,
the warmer waters of the southern regions contain much less oxygen at
saturation than do the colder northern waters (in winter). The extreme
seasonal temperature differences at Turner’s Island serve as an instance in
which the solubility of oxygen in 15° C. winter water is approximately
35 per cent greater than in the 31° summer water.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 197

The oceanographical factors affecting aeration, mixing, and diffusion
are highly significant in regard to the concentration of oxygen in surface
and subsurface waters. In shore water the degree of wave action is a fac-
tor of particular importance. In the narrow Gulf waters general surface
agitation is relatively low and the absence of strong wave action is in
marked contrast to the situation on the outer Pacific coast. In wave-beaten
water the oxygen concentration may reach high supersaturation values,
which are from all indications very favorable to the development of
algae. In the Gulf of California the wave action is much reduced or es-
sentially absent, and, though no data are available on the oxygen content
of Gulf shore water, the relative paucity of vegetation as compared with
the outer California coasts may in part be accounted for by this more lim-
ited oxygen supply.

It will be noted from Table II that in the region of the island mass
toward the head of the Gulf there are definitely higher oxygen concentra-
tions than anywhere southward in the Gulf. The occurrence of narrow
channels between the islands causes rapid movement of tremendous vol-
umes of tidal water and mixing of rougher, more broken surface waters.
This undoubtedly provides for some additional aeration. Of greater im-
portance is the oxygen supply already present in the water at the north
which is involved in the movement. A study of the soundings in the upper
Gulf reveals that the region north of the island mass is essentially shallow.
Very little of the water is deeper than 300 meters, and a great part of it
is under 100. The Scripps data show that southern Gulf waters over
depths of 1,500 meters or more may be as low in oxygen at 300 meters as
.15 ml. per liter. In the northern region the lowest figure given for 300
meters is 1.10 ml. per liter. The lower concentrations in surface waters of
southern parts of the Gulf can partly be explained, therefore, by upwell-
ings of deep waters very low in oxygen. According to this interpretation
the distinctly higher concentrations in all of the northern waters are at-
tributable to the absence of any such deep waters, and high residual con-
centrations at all of the comparatively slight depths.

A comparison of the data on oxygen values with the relative luxuri-
ance of vegetation shows a very significant correlation. The greatest con-
centrations of algae, as to both kinds and quantity, are to be found on the
reefs bathed by the highly oxygenated waters of this northern region, par-
ticularly those reefs bordering the channels between the islands and lying
in the paths of the ever-moving tidal currents.

On the southwestern side of the Gulf, at Agua Verde Bay, it was
notable that on rocky reefs ideally suited for the growth of algae as far as

~

198 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

substratum is concerned, and where temperature conditions in February
were apparently satisfactory, an extreme paucity of algal vegetation ex-
isted. ‘(he same paucity was observed at Escondido Bay. Determinations
of oxygen values in the vicinity of these two localities show that the sur-
face oxygen content is low, first because of generally higher surface tem-
peratures, but principally because of definite upwellings of adjacent abys-
mal waters with a negligible oxygen supply. Moreover, wave action and
general water movement are exceptionally slight in both of these quiet,
well-protected bays. It seems, therefore, possible, and even probable, that
at these localities the development of marine vegetation is limited by oxy-
gen deficiency.

GENERAL ASPECTS OF THE ALGAL FLORA

It has already been pointed out that the waters of the southern re-
gion of the Gulf of California are essentially tropical in nature. Like
most tropic waters, their littoral flora, as revealed by collections at San
Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, are dominated by widely distributed
warm-water elements and are very scanty in bulk. Although San Gabriel
Bay is the only well-known station of its kind in the Gulf, its flora
may undoubtedly be considered typical of many such bays of the warm
waters of the southwestern Gulf coast and islands. The temperature of
surface waters varies less than 10° C. annually, and a uniform flora of
diminutive plants is prevalent. On the bottoms of the shallows grow
large coral heads, in and about which may be found Dictyosphaeria,
Gelidiella, and Caulerpa. Both Caulerpa racemosa and C. sertularioides
are abundant and often form thick mats. Several other warm-water
genera are present, Hydroclathrus, Wurdemannia, and Jania being fre-
quent. Sargassum was not encountered here, though it is known to occur
in the general region of La Paz.

One who is not familiar with tropical marine floras but has seen the
rich algal growths of cool, northern latitudes would be immediately im-
pressed by the relative paucity of vegetation. Almost all tidal rocks are
completely barren, for very few plants of the southern Gulf seem to
tolerate exposure at low tides. On the whole, considering its poverty
and the dominance of tropical elements, the San Gabriel Bay flora shows
almost no characters in common with floras known for the northern part
of the Gulf.

The shore flora of Guaymas harbor and near-by bays is moderately
well known for the winter season through the studies made on the Velero
cruise. he vegetation is not particularly rich or varied, but certain

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 199

characteristic and conspicuous elements are worthy of mention for com-
parison with the floras farther north. “Iwo species are prevalent and
especially conspicuous: Sargassum sinicola and Padina Durvillaei. ‘This
Sargassum is here and in other localities accompanied by one or several
other less abundant species. Padina Durvillaet, however, is the only mem-
ber of the genus anywhere abundant in our region. It is apparently a
common plant south along the Mexican coast all the way to Central
America. In the Gulf it occurs at all the northern stations, often in great
abundance. Tropical elements such as were found at San Gabriel Bay
are absent or very obscure. Codium simulans and Gracilaria compressa
are occasional. Small rock-cover species begin to be conspicuous in this
region but do not reach the rich development of those of the island reefs
to the north.

The first rich winter vegetation is encountered on the south shores
of the islands of the large northern group. All of the prevalent plants
of the Guaymas area are present and many others in addition. Colpo-
menia, Gigartina, Gelidium, Gracilaria, Hypnea, Laurencia, Lomen-
taria, Centroceras are common fleshy genera. The articulated corallines,
Corallina and Amphiroa, are abundant and form, with various crus-
taceous Lithophyllum species, dense covers over shore rocks. A list of
species collected at Turner’s Island is given on p. 357.

Having been acquainted with the flora of the coast of California, the
author was struck with the peculiar appearance of this vegetation. he
entire aspect is at variance with floras a few hundred miles northwest on
the California coast. The most obvious differences are in regard to the
“Kelps.” ‘The Laminariales are not represented in any part of the Gulf
of California. These plants, so conspicuous and important a part of the
California marine flora, are utterly lacking from these shores as are most
of the other larger brown algae. The order Fucales is represented only
by Sargassum, which is, however, the dominant brown alga of the Gulf.
Other fucoids such as Fucus, Pelvetia, Halidrys, and Cystoseira, so com-
monplace to Californians, apparently do not occur.

It is well known that the larger brown algae, particularly the Lami-
nariales, are characteristic of cool or cold waters, rarely extending into
warm seas. On the outer coast of Lower California there is evidence of
their extension perhaps as far south as Magdalena Bay, where rising sum-
mer temperatures undoubtedly become limiting for the development of
critical phases in the life cycle. In the Gulf of California temperature
conditions during the winter season are in general quite in accord with

200 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

the requirements of the kelps, at least through most of the northern re-
gions, but the extremes of midsummer transform all surface waters into
tropical ones. There seems little question that conditions are adequate for
dispersal and introduction of these plants into the Gulf, but they have
not become established because they have not been able to survive the un-
favorable seasons.

The richest development of algae in the Gulf is found on the reefs of
islands lying in the northern regions in the path of the rapidly moving,
more highly oxygenated water of those parts: San Esteban Island, Pond
Island, Puerto Refugio, Turner’s Island, and Tepoca Bay, Sonora. Pos-
sible ecologic explanations have already been discussed.

The shore vegetation of Turner’s Island reef was as luxuriant in
January as was that of any other station. Collecting was again done in
July, under identical tidal conditions, exactly six months after the winter
visitation. The most significant observations have already been described
(Dawson, 1941, pp. 117-118). Here, it need only be repeated that with
the temperature increase of 15° C. there occurs a profound change in the
vegetation. Many winter elements apparently disappear completely or are
present only as juvenile forms. Some obscure elements of the winter flora
attain very rich and dominant development. Other entirely new elements
appear. The summer and winter floras are of more or less comparable bulk
but are of utterly different composition. Further mention of specific cases
may be found under Dictyota Johnstonii and by referring to the list of
species from Turner’s sland on p. 357.

The sublittoral floras of the Gulf as known from dredgings at a
limited number of stations appear to be exceedingly varied and apparently
often very rich. A large proportion of the sublittoral species were ob-
tained only by dredging, and the infrequent duplication of species in dif-
ferent hauls suggests how incomplete our knowledge of these plants is. At
Puerto Refugio, for instance, five dredge hauls were made in different
parts of the small bay. Each one yielded a number of species not found in
any of the others. Many such dredge hauls, in fact, have brought to light
unique samples of species unknown elsewhere.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 201

CHLOROPHYCEAE*

Family Ulvaceae
Genus ULVA Linnaeus
Ulva dactylifera S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 272, pl. 21, fig. 1; 1924, p. 717.

This species may be identified by its expanded, thick, laciniate fronds
composed of cells appearing vertically elongated in cross section. Thus
far, Ulva dactylifera has been collected only in warm waters in the Gulf
area: San Marcos Island, Tortuga Island, La Paz, Eureka, Espiritu
Santo Island. On the outer coast it is recorded from San Roque, near
Turtle Bay, and from exposed rocks, uppermost littoral in southern Cali-
fornia. The author’s recent collections are of plants found growing on a
sandy substratum in warm oyster-culture pools at San Gabriel, Espiritu
Santo Island, D. 617, Feb.

J. lla, San Marcos Island, June; J. 31, Tortuga Island, June;
Brand. 9, 30, La Paz; M. 5, Eureka, May.

Ulva angustata S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 264, pls. 22, 26, fig. 1.

D. & R. 3152, on rocks between tide marks, 3292, on rocks in shallow
water, 3159, in tidal stream, near Guaymas, Dec.

These specimens seem to agree in general with Setchell and Gardner’s
concept of Ulva angustata. The cells are quadrate in cross section. The
fronds resemble those of Ulva teniata in form, but the lower parts are not

* The general scheme of classification used is that found in Okamura, 1936,
pp. 1-5. He has employed the most modern systems, notably those of Kylin for the
Phaeophyceae and Rhodophyceae.

Abbreviations used preceding numbers in the designation of collection data
are as follows:

Brand.—collections of T. S. Brandegee of the California Academy of Sciences
Expedition to Lower California in 1890.

M.=collections of Dr. and Mrs. Marchant, mostly at Eureka, south of La Paz,
and at Guaymas in 1917.

J.=collections of Ivan Johnston, Expedition of the California Academy of
Sciences to the Gulf of California in 1921.

H.=collections of John Thomas Howell of the Zaca Expedition of the Cali-
fornia Academy of Sciences to the Galapagos Archipelago in 1932.

D. & R.=collections of Dr. Francis Drouet and Donald Richards of the Field
Museum Expedition to Sonora in the winter of 1939.

D.=collections of the author during the year 1940. All collection data for
these numbers are to be found in the Appendix.

AHF=Allan Hancock Foundation type or isotype specimen to be found in the
Foundation Herbarium.

202 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

dentate. Our specimens are generally shorter and somewhat broader than
the type, and frequently have less conspicuous undulation of the margins.

Ulva rigida Ag.
C. Agardh, 1822, p. 410; Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 269; 1924, p. 717.

On upper littoral rocks at Turner’s Island an abundance of this small,
crisp, tufted species was found. It was noted in the upper littoral at other
stations in the northern part of the Gulf, but apparently collecting of it
was neglected. This species may be distinguished from young plants of
Ulva lactuca, which often resemble it, by the thicker fronds and the
vertical elongation of cells in cross section. The small, ruffled blades do
not expand broadly as in U. lactuca.

D. 114, Turner’s Island, Jan.

Ulva lactuca L.

Linnaeus, 1753, p. 1163; Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 265; 1924, p. 717.

Twenty-one collections of this cosmopolitan species are present from
various localities and habitats in the Gulf, from La Paz to Punta Penasco.
It is distinguished from the other three Gulf species by its broadly ex-
panded fronds and quadrate cells in cross section.

Genus ENTEROMORPHA Link

For the most part, Setchell and Gardner, 1924, can be followed in the
identification of the Gulf species or forms of Enteromorpha. Our speci-
mens of E. acanthophora correspond closely with the material they ex-
amined. This species is quite distinct in habit from any others from the
region.

Enteromorpha Marchantae, on the other hand, should certainly be
considered nothing more than a form of E. intestinalis. I cannot confirm
the distinctions made in the original description. Since Enteromorpha
“species” are so often merely form names, it is difficult to justify the ad-
dition of more names for minor shape differences in these variable and
undoubtedly much hybridized plants.

Enteromorpha prolifera in the Gulf is usually much finer in habit
than E. compressa and shows more fine proliferations as well as cells in
more or less longitudinal series. It seems best here to follow Collins in
listing E. tubulosa as a synonym or variety of E. prolifera. The Gulf ma-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 203

terial can, as Setchell and Gardner indicate, only doubtfully be referred
to this form-name (E. tubulosa), though some of the specimens at hand
may very well fall under E. prolifera. The forms which best correspond
with E. compressa are common and fairly consistent in morphology.

Enteromorpha acanthophora Kiitz.

Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. VI, pl. 34; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 715, pl. 16,
fig. 43, pl. 38.

Considerable variation in size and proliferation is present among the
many collections of this species, which may best be recognized by the
abundance of short, spinelike proliferations, longer in lax specimens,
shorter in smaller forms with larger tubes.

D. & R. 3140, 3423, 3288, 3365, 3156, 3139, 3427, on rocks in tidal
water, various shore stations near Guaymas, Dec.; D. 40, Guaymas Bay,
Jan.; J. 39, lower littoral rocky beach, Los Angeles Bay, June; D. 374,
dredged from 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 418, in lagoon, Pond
Island, Feb.; D. 470, dredged in 30-36 meters, near Guaymas, Feb.; D.
604, shallow lagoon, San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.

Enteromorpha compressa (L.) Grev.

Greville, 1830, p. 180, pl. 18; Setch. & Gard., 1920, pp. 251-252; 1924,
p. 716.

This species may be distinguished by its smooth, slender tubes of even
diameter, which are nonproliferous and little branched.

Abundant in tidal water about Guaymas, both floating and attached:
D. & R. 3261, 3282, 3321, 3312, 3280, 3428, 3244, 3429, 3245, 3241,
3143, 3154, 3153, Dec.; D. 56, 65, Jan.; D. 87, dredged in 12-20 meters,
outside Guaymas Bay, Jan.; D. 152, dredged in 4-32 meters, off Tiburon
Island, Jan.; D. 526, high rock pool, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.; Brand. 17,
La Paz.

Enteromorpha intestinalis (L.) Link

Link, 1820, p. 5; Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. VI, pl. 31; Setch. & Gard., 1920,
p. 252. Enteromorpha Marchantae Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 716,

pl. 16, figs. 40-42.
The forms which best fall under this name are of larger tube-diameter
than the others known from the Gulf, to 15 mm. in diameter. The tubes

204 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

are irregularly inflated and constricted in age, nearly smooth in younger
stages and in dredged specimens.

The type specimen of Enteromorpha Marchantae (loc. cit.) is a plant
nearly identical with D. & R. 3279 from pools in a tidal flat, Playa Mira-
mar, Guaymas, December. Both consist of numerous, irregularly inflated
and constricted tubes averaging 4-5 mm. in diameter. Those of Mar-
chant’s specimen are younger and shorter than Drouet’s.

D. 625, dredged in 34-50 meters over fine, gray sand off Gorda Point,
Lower California, Feb.; D. 150, dredged in 4-32 meters off Tiburon
Island, Jan.

Enteromorpha prolifera (Muell.) J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1883, p. 129, pl. 4, figs. 103, 104; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p.
715. Enteromorpha tubulosa Setch. & Gard. (not of Kiitzing),
1924, p. 716.
The specimens placed here have the most slender, hairlike tubes of
the known Gulf species.
Floating or on rocks in tidal water, D. & R. 3155, 3249, 3146, Guay-
mas, Dec.; M. 4, Guaymas, May; J. 49, along beach at La Paz, April.

Family Chaetophoraceae
Genus ENTOCLADIA Reinke
Entocladia condensata S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 718, pl. 12, figs. 4, 5.

This species was detected by Setchell and Gardner on various species
of Codium in the Johnston collection. It has again been found in the
terminal membrane of Codium simulans, D. 439, San Esteban Island,
February, and in Codium MacDougalii, MacDougal, Port Libertad,
May, 1923.

According to Setchell and Gardner, Entocladia condensata is similar
to E. codicola growing on the utricles of Codium fragile on the coast of
California, but the cells are much larger throughout and the whole plant
is more condensed. It is apparently quite widely distributed in a number
of different species of Codium in the Gulf.

As to the members of the genus as a whole as they occur in the Gulf,
Setchell and Gardner say: ““We have represented in the three species ap-
parently the extremes of variation in the matter of the formation of the
thallus. In Entocladia condensata the whole plant is practically a solid

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 205

parenchymatous disk, with only a few peripheral short free filaments. In
E. Polysiphoniae there is no indication of a central parenchymatous disk.
The filaments are all free, more or less crooked and distorted, and the
branching is alternate or at times secund, usually arising from the center
of the cells. Between these two extremes we have E. codicola with a slight
central disk, E. mexicana and E. cingens. In all cases the reproductive
cells are merely vegetative cells enlarged and more or less metamorphosed.
In E. Polysiphoniae those of the central part of the thallus are enlarged to
almost spherical, whereas those near the margin may only be slightly
swollen. This condition does not seem to be the case in the other species.”

Entocladia Polysiphoniae S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 718, pl. 13, fig. 18.
Growing in the membrane of Polysiphonia Marchantae, Bryant 7, La
Paz; M. 50b, Guaymas Bay, May. Not again detected.

Entocladia mexicana S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 719, pl. 19, fig. 57.

Growing within the membrane of Chaetomorpha antennina, J. 49b,
La Paz; within the membrane of Valoniopsis Hancocki, D. 215, Puerto
Refugio, Jan.

Genus PRINGSHEIMIA Reinke
Pringsheimia Marchantae S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 720, pl. 12, fig. 8.
Growing on various species of Laurencia, M. 68, La Paz, May. Not
again detected.

Family Valoniaceae
Genus DICTYOSPHAERIA Decaisne
Dictyosphaeria Versluysii W.-v. B.

Weber-van Bosse, 1913, p. 64, pl. II, fig. 6.

Specimens from the tropical waters of the southern Gulf agree very
well with the figure and description given by Madame Weber of this spe-
cies. The plants grow attached to coral heads in shallow lagoons, are
solid in structure throughout, and are made up of very large cells 1.2 to
1.8 mm. in diameter. Unfortunately, specimens were not preserved in

206 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

liquid, and the internal structure of the cells cannot satisfactorily be
studied. The wide extension in the distribution of this tropical Austral-
asian species must, therefore, remain tentative.

D. 599, growing in shaded places on coral heads in shallow lagoon and
in oyster-culture ponds, San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.

Genus CLADOPHOROPSIS Boergesen
Cladophoropsis robusta S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 714, pl. 13, fig. 16.

J. 135, growing on rocks in the upper sublittoral, Tortuga Island,
June. Not again collected.

According to Setchell and Gardner, this species may readily be dis-
tinguished from all other known species of Cladophoropsis by the large
diameter and by the great length of the segments between the branches.

Genus VALONIOPSIS Bérgesen
Valoniopsis pachynema (Martens) Bé¢rg.

Bérgesen, 1934, p. 10, figs. 1, 2. Valonia confervoides Harvey, Alg. Cey-
lon Exsicc. no. 73 (nomen nudum); J. Agardh, 1887, p. 100.
Bryopsis pachynema Martens, 1866, p. 24, pl. IV, fig. 2.

Comparison of our specimens was made with an original specimen of
Martens’ collection from Sumatra in the Herbarium of the University of
California. The correspondence is remarkably close, especially with D.
214. Bgrgesen’s description also conforms satisfactorily to our plants.

The species is widespread in the Gulf and moderately common on
middle and lower littoral rocky shores. Collections have been made in
both winter and summer, the plant apparently tolerating a considerable
range of temperature. It is known from warmer seas in many parts of the
world.

D. 682, south shore of Tiburon Island, July; D. 126, Turner’s
Island, Jan. (young specimens) ; D. 694, July (mature specimens) ; D.
614d, occasional in oyster-culture ponds, San Gabriel Bay, Feb.; D. 71,
Guaymas harbor, Jan.; D. & R. 3236, cave north of Cabo Arco, near
Guaymas, Dec.; D. 217, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

In the winter collections it is peculiar that the specimens were usually
found associated with a small species of sponge.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 207

Valoniopsis Hancockii sp nov.
Plate 31, Fig. 9
Frondes caespitosae supra arenam repentes; filis coenocyticis iis erectis 300-400

uw diam. ramellis curtis lateralibusque ad bases septatas abrupte constrictis; apici-
bus late rotundatis; membranis translucidis nitentibusque.

Plants caespitose, creeping, forming small, tangled masses of filaments
over loose substrata of sand and small algae, apparently without attach-
ment organs when mature; filaments coenocytic with only occasional cross
walls, these mostly at points of branching; prostrate parts very crooked,
125-250 p» in diameter; ascending filaments straighter, 300-400 p» diam.,
with occasional short lateral branches, these of about the same diameter as
the parent filament but sharply constricted at the septate bases; apices
broadly rounded; membrane transparent and shiny; chloroplasts dark
green, minute, unevenly distributed in dried specimens causing blotched
appearance of the filaments.

Type: Dawson 215, on rocky shore in lower littoral zone, Puerto
Refugio, Angel de la Guardia Island, Jan. 27, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 4.

D. 293 from the same locality is composed mostly of the irregular
prostrate, creeping filaments, none of the short, erect parts being
branched. These examples are surely the same as D. 215 and undoubtedly
represent immature plants.

Awaiting further collections and observations of this plant in the field,
it is here tentatively described as a new species of the hitherto monotypic
genus Valoniopsis. The specimens at hand resemble in several ways, but
are not the same as, V. pachynema, which occurs with the present species
at Puerto Refugio and is conspicuously different in both the fresh and the
dried state. It seems to conform to Bérgesen’s genus better than to any
other. The plants are much more slender and more widely branched with
more extensive horizontal parts than ’. pachynema. The lateral branches
of the erect filaments are sharply constricted at the septum, a character
which the other species does not possess.

Family Cladophoraceae
Genus CHAETOMORPHA Kitzing
Chaetomorpha antennina (Bory) Kiitz.

Kiitzing, 1849, p. 379; Tab. Phyc. III, tab. 60; Setch. & Gard., 1920,
p. 203; 1924, p. 713.

This species, which is found more abundantly along the southern coast

of Mexico to Costa Rica and Panama, was collected in the Gulf only in

208 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

July at the peak of the warm-water season. Very thick tufts of half-
mature plants were taken from rock pools at Turner’s Island, D. 710,
and from a rocky point just north of Kino, D. 660. These examples,
though young, are typical of the species and show the characteristically
long basal cell.

Chaetomorpha aerea (Dillw.) Kiitz.

Kiitzing, 1849, p. 379; Collins, 1909, pp. 324, 325; Setch. & Gard.,
1920, p. 200, pl. 14, figs. 9-11. Conferva aerea Harvey, 1846-51,
pl. XCIXb.

Two collections seem possibly referable to this species reported from
the coast of California. D. 285 from Puerto Refugio is young. The plants
were scraped from rock surfaces and consist of short tufts of filaments
about 350 p thick. The basal cell is short and those above as long as
broad. D. 368 from epoca Bay was dredged and consists of only a few
stray filaments 200-240 » in diameter, likewise with cells only slightly
longer than broad. The former collection agrees with Collins’ description
of the typical species, and with the figure of Harvey as far as the cell shape
is concerned. The latter collection is probably the detached state of the
same species, called by Collins Chaetomorpha aerea forma Linum
(Muhl.) Collins. Setchell and Gardner (loc. cit.) have not recognized
this form, not having found any Pacific coast specimens agreeing with
Collins’ description.

Genus LOLA Hamel
Lola lubrica (S. & G.) A. et G. Hamel

A. & G. Hamel, 1929, p. 1094; G. Hamel, 1930, p. 118, fig. 37, 1-5.
Rhizoclonium lubricum Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 185, pl. 9, fig.
5a-b.

The several collections from the Gulf correspond precisely to the de-
scriptions both of Setchell and Gardner and of Hamel. The specimens
were taken in thick masses, usually floating, resembling, as Hamel says,
masses of Spirogyra. The filaments in ours are 25-45, 28-35, 30-50 yu in
diameter in various specimens. Hamel reports lateral rhizoids rare or not
present. Only unbranched filaments without rhizoids have been observed
in the Gulf material. The texture, whether lubricous or not, cannot well
be determined from material in the dried state.

D. & R. 3266, 3263, 3271, floating in tidal stream near Guaymas,
Dec.; D. & R. 3300, in shallow water along shore of bay near Guaymas,

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 209

Dec.; D. 613b, in oyster-culture pond, San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo
Island, Feb.

Genus CLADOPHORA Kiitzing
Cladophora Rudolphiana (Ag.) Kiitz.

Kiitzing, 1843, p. 268; Harvey, 1846-51, pl. LX X XVI; Collins, 1909,
p. 336; Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 218; Taylor, 1937, p. 87, pl. 5,
figs. 2-4, pl. 6, fig. 2.

Two collections which show main filaments about 50 » in diameter
and with very long cells fall best into this old European species reported
by Collins and by Taylor from the east coast of North America. Setchell
and Gardner, 1920, do not report having seen any specimens comparing
with the typical species from the Pacific coast, but give Cladophora Ru-
dolphiana f. eramosa Gardner. D. & R. 3273 is more like this lax form,
having longer, simpler branches than D. & R. 3425a, which corresponds
rather well with Collins’ description and with Harvey’s figures. Our
specimens are not of large plants; D. & R. 3275 is up to 5 cm. high.

D. & R. 3273, on rocks in tidal creek near Guaymas, Dec.; D. & R.
3425, attached to drifting Gracilaria, Empalme, Dec.

Cladophora microcladioides Collins

Collins, 1909a, p. 17, pl. 78, figs. 2, 3; Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 212,
plo 13: fis: 2.

Several collections of this distinct species have recently been made in
the Gulf and extend the range of this plant still farther south on the
Pacific coast. The figures of Collins and of Setchell and Gardner are
sufficient to identify it, the curved secund ramuli easily setting it apart
from others of our region. Plants of different collections vary consider-
ably in size and diameter.

This species is sublittoral in the Gulf, no specimens being known from
shore stations except as drift.

D. 147, in 4-32 meters off Tiburon Island, Jan.; D. 348, in 22 me-
ters, Punta Pefiasco, Feb.; D. 51, in 3-4 meters, Guaymas Bay, Jan.;
D. 380, in 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. & R. 2928, washed up on
beach, Kino, Nov.

Cladophora albida (Huds.) Kiitz.

Kiitzing, 1843, p. 267; Harvey, 1846-51, pl. CCLX XV; Collins, 1909,
p. 336.

210 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

This species is easily distinguished from others of our region by its
very slender filaments and small size. Collins gives the following charac-
ters: plants soft, dense, pale green; filaments 21-30 » diam.; segments 4
to 5 diameters long, delicate; branching irregular; ramuli long, patent,
blunt.

Growing with Cladophora microcladioides, cast up on beach at Kino,

D. & R. 2928a, Nov.

Cladophora delicatula Montagne

Montagne, 1850a, p. 302; Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. VI, pl. 1, fig. 2; Collins,
1909, p. 337.

A single collection of a mass of filaments from the tidal flats of Rio
Mayo, D. & R. 3207, December, agrees well both with the description of
this species given by Collins and with the figure of Kiitzing. The fila-
ments are about 50 » in diameter below, with cells about four diameters
long. Above, the filaments are 25-35 » broad and with shorter cells, 1.5-
2.5 times as long, often somewhat constricted.

Cladophora graminea Collins

Collins, 1909a, p. 19, pl. 78, fig. 6; Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 211.

One specimen of this coarse, erect species, corresponding excellently
with Collins’ figure and description, was collected in a rock pool on the
shore of Tiburon Island, D. 677, July. It is distinguished by its erect
habit and coarse texture, main branches about 300 » in diameter, and
very long cells up to 30 diameters long below.

Other specimens tentatively to be referred here: D. & R. 3147, on
tidal rocks, Guaymas, 3229, in tide pools near Guaymas, 3134a, on tidal
rocks at entrance to Guaymas harbor, Dec.; D. 70, in shallow water along
shore of Guaymas Bay, Jan.; D. 271, dredged in 12-22 meters, Puerto
Refugio, Jan.

These latter collections are robust, coarse, erect plants perhaps of
Cladophora graminea. The branching, however, is more secund and the
cells generally shorter than described for that species. They may prove
to be of a distinct entity when more ample collections are at hand and
more information is available as to the appearance of C. graminea in na-
ture in the Gulf. For the present, it seems best to set them off in this way.

Cladophora trichotoma (Ag.) Kiitz.

Kiitzing, 1849, p. 414; Howe, 1911, p. 492; Setch. & Gard., 1920, p.
210, pl. 16, fig. 2.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA Zit

A fragmentary specimen from La Paz, in the Herbarium of the New
York Botanical Garden, ex. herb. C. L. Anderson, was doubtfully identi-
fied with this species by M. A. Howe. It was not considered worth while
to re-examine this specimen. The record must remain a questionable one
for our area until confirmed by ample material.

Cladophora MacDougalii Howe

Howe, 1911, p. 491, pl. 33, fig. 7; Collins, 1912, p. 96; Setch. & Gard.,
1920, p. 214.

The type specimen was taken in San Felipe Bay by D. T. MacDougal
in February, 1904. No specimens referable to this species have appeared
in recent collections. Collins considers it very near to or the same as Cali-
fornia specimens of Cladophora ovoidea, but Setchell and Gardner prefer
to consider the two distinct. From other Gulf species it is said to be dis-
tinguished by its rather large diameter, 135-310 » in main branches, 75-
110 p» in ultimate lateral ramuli, and by its short cells, mostly 1.5-2.5
times as long as broad, somewhat constricted at the septa.

Cladophora hesperia S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 713, pl. 13, fig. 17.

A comparison of D. 653 with the type of this species indicates that the
two are the same. The plants collected by the writer were, like the type,
growing in a dense, thin mat on rock surfaces. They are 1-1.5 cm. high,
abundantly branched, and in all respects conform to the description and
illustration given by Setchell and Gardner.

Brand. 21, growing in muddy habitat at the southern extremity of
Lower Calfornia; D. 653, on middle littoral rock surfaces, rocky point
north of Kino, July.

D. 602f from San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, is only a scrap
of a specimen but perhaps should be referred here. It is more lax than the
typical species but is of the same size and habit.

Cladophora tiburonensis sp. nov.
Plate 31, Figs. 1-3

Frondes caespitosae, 3-4 mm. altae, matta fibrarum multicellularum ramos-
arum affixae; filis erectis superne circa 25 wu diam., stricte, subdichotomo usque ad
secundo ramosis; cellulis 4-5 plo. diam. longioribus; zoosporangiis circa 40 x 70 p
amplis.

212 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Plants 3-4 mm. high, forming small, dense tufts on rock surfaces,
crustaceous corallines, etc., attached by a spreading mat of multicellular,
branched, creeping filaments, bright green; individual fronds erect, with
a stupose axis, about 60 p» diam. below, ultimate branches about 25 p
diam. ; branches strict, subdichotomous to secund, gradually decreasing in
diameter to the extremities, but these + — blunt; cells mostly 4-5 diam-
eters long, occasionally much longer below; mature and empty zoospo-
rangia present, the cells short and swollen, about 40 to 70 in dimen-
sions, conspicuous beside the slender cells of the sterile branches.

Type: Dawson 132, scraped from rock pools at low tide, Turner’s
Island near Tiburon Island, Jan. 24, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 5.

The erect, stiff habit of this minute plant, resembling Cladophora
graminea in all but size, sets it apart from any known Pacific coast spe-
cies. The presence of zoosporangia and its encrustation with diatoms and
other minute epiphytes indicate its maturity.

Family Bryopsidaceae
Genus BRYOPSIS Lamouroux

Bryopsis plumosa var. pennata (Lam.) Bé¢rg.

Bérgesen, 1913, p. 117. Bryopsis pennata, Vickers, 1908, p. 30, pl.
LII.

The specimens at hand agree closely with Vickers’ figures. Only a
single collection is available, but specimens were obtained in luxuriant
abundance. The plants are 3-4 cm. high, forming very thick, rounded
tufts on rock surfaces. This species was not present at the time of the
winter expedition and is apparently a warm-water annual.

D. 688, lower littoral reef-rocks, Turner’s Island, July.

Family Caulerpaceae
Genus CAULERPA Lamouroux

Caulerpa van Bosseae S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 704, pl. 13, figs. 13-15.

Bryant 1 (AHF no. 72), islands of San Jose and Espiritu Santo; D.
214, lower littoral rocky shore, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

The latter specimens are large and vigorous, measuring several centi-
meters in extent, of somewhat larger diameter than the type throughout
(500-800 »). They grow in loose, spreading tangles over broken shell in
rock pools.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 213

Caulerpa racemosa var. uvifera (Turn.) W.-v. B.

Weber-van Bosse, 1898, pp. 360, 362, pl. XX XIII, figs. 6, 7.

One collection of very abundant material made at San Gabriel Bay,
Espiritu Santo Island, agrees with the figures given by Madame Weber.
The plants were growing in mats several centimeters thick and sometimes
a meter or more in extent on the sand bottom of abandoned oyster-culture
ponds at the head of the lagoon. Here, the absolutely quiet water was
about 25° C. and abounded with these plants and schools of small tropi-
cal fish.

D. 600, Feb.

Caulerpa racemosa var. chemnitzia (Esper) W.-v. B.

Weber-van Bosse, 1898, p. 376, pl. XX XI, figs. 5-8.

A few rather dwarfish, immature specimens were collected on the
rocky shore of Agua Verde, D. 541, February. They show in general the
characters delineated by Madame Weber for the above variety, and,
though not entirely satisfactory, this designation will probably serve best
for the present material, which may not be at all typical. The plants form
mats about 7 cm. wide, thickly branched, the erect branches bearing as-
similating laterals which are very irregular as to both arrangement and
length.

Caulerpa pinnata f. pectinata (Kitz.) W.-v. B.

Weber-van Bosse, 1898, pp. 290-291, pl. XXIV, fig. 3.

The few specimens at hand correspond sufficiently well with the fig-
ures of both Kiitzing (Tab. Phyc. VII, tab. 5) and Madame Weber to be
designated under the above name. The plants have long, spreading, pros-
trate rhizomes with a few erect, pinnate branches up to 4.5 cm. high.

D. 269, dredged in 12-22 meters over sand and coralline bottom,
Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Caulerpa sertularioides (Gmel.) Howe

Howe, 1905, p. 576. Fucus sertularioides Gmelin, 1768, p. 151, tab. 15,
fig. 4. Caulerpa plumaris Weber-van Bosse, 1898, pp. 294-295.

This species is strictly a lagoon dweller in the quiet, warm waters of
the southern part of the Gulf. It is found growing on the sand bottoms of
the shallow bays and lagoons, and was collected several times by means

214 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

of a long-handled rake from a skiff. The only form thus far known is that
which has been called C. sertularioides f. longiseta (J. Ag.) Weber-van
Bosse (B¢rgesen, 1913, p. 133).

D. 563, on sand bottom with coral clumps, shallows of San Gabriel
Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.; D. 574, dredged in 6-12 meters,
same locality ; D. 618, abundant on mucky bottom of oyster-culture ponds,
forming extensive mats with C. racemosa var. uvifera, same locality.

Family Codiaceae
Genus HALIMEDA Lamouroux

Halimeda discoidea Decaisne

Decaisne, 1842a, p. 102; Howe, 1907, pp. 495-500, pl. 25, figs. 11-20, pl.
26; 1911, p. 492; Setch. & Gard., 1920, p. 177, pl. 13, fig. 3;
1924, p. 704.

This species is reported thus far only from the warm waters of the
southern part of the Gulf. Three very early collections were made at La
Paz. H. 724, dredged in 40 meters off San Jose del Cabo, August; D. 519,
dredged in 30-40 meters over sand bottom at Puerto Refugio (the most
northern locality).

Halimeda discoidea is here near or at the northern boundary of its po-
tential area. None of the specimens collected are of the size and vigor of
examples from Central America and other parts of the Pacific. It has al-
ready been suggested that low calcium content of the Gulf sea water may
in part account for their scanty development.

Genus CODIUM Stackhouse

In 1924, when Setchell and Gardner wrote their account of the Gulf
species, only a few collections were available, and nothing was recorded
on the ecology of the various species or of their appearance in nature. Since
the preservation of material by drying destroys much of the normal aspect
of these plants, unless one has some experience with the species of a par-
ticular region it is difficult to visualize the nature of the plants from the
dried specimens. The recent experience of the author in the field and the
somewhat more extensive collections have made possible a revision of the
several Gulf Codium species from a different point of view.

‘The author considers utricle shape-characters of secondary importance
in distinguishing the species at hand, for considerable variation due to age
and habitat may occur in the same plant. Indeed, utricles of various ages,

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 215

shapes, and sizes may occur side by side in the same part of a plant. The
species of the Gulf of California, as recognized in this paper, are distin-
guished first by their gross morphology and habit, secondarily by utricle
characters. Since gross morphology is modified by age, we must consider
the possibility that small plants such as have been placed under the name
Codium cervicorne may likely be young stages of a species like C. simu-
lans. A plant collected in summer such as that named C. unilaterale may
be a more aged form of a plant similar to that named C. Brandegeei. A
floating plant such as C. amplivesiculatum may be a growth form of C.
unilaterale or C. longiramosum from the same station. C’. anastomosans
was described from immature material but has juvenile characters which
suggest its possible distinctness. All of these problems must be investigated
in the field before any of the specific determinations given here can be con-
firmed. However, with the information at hand, the following modifica-
tions in nomenclature seem justified.

A re-examination of the type of Codium simulans and of C. Brande-
geei indicates that these two plants are essentially indistinguishable. Setch-
ell and Gardner saw similarities between the two but stated no points of
distinction. The type of C. Brandegeei is a fragmentary specimen with no
positive data as to either locality or date. It does, however, match C. sim-
ulans and other comparative specimens so closely that its synonymy here
can be stated with certainty. Codium unilaterale is an entity which is rec-
ognized by Setchell in recent study notes as being closely related to C.
simulans. The plant was collected in the summer and is undoubtedly an
older growth form of this species, exhibiting the same fundamental char-
acters merely in a somewhat larger, more expanded form. On the other
hand, the type of C. cervicorne, though future investigation alone can
verify this, shows every evidence of being the juvenile form of the same
species. In all these plants the utricles are of the same shape, the size vary-
ing directly with that of the specimens. Thin end-walls in the utricles of
C. unilaterale are conspicuous but may not be of genetic importance.

Codium unilaterale is one of that remarkable set of specimens collected
in July, 1921, by Johnston (74) in the lagoon at Pond Island. Pond
Island’s “rattlesnake harbor” is only about 150 yards long, the whole is-
land being less than a square mile in area. In this lagoon Johnston col-
lected several specimens which Setchell and Gardner segregated under
three names, C. unilaterale, C. amplivesiculatum, and C. longiramosum,
by reason of the strikingly different appearance of the dried plants. In
February, 1940, the author collected in the same lagoon specimens which

216 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

seem to be either Codium anastomosans or juvenile examples of C. sini-
cola. Now, it seems remarkable indeed that four species of Codium should
be growing side by side in that very small area. True, at present there is
no way by which we can show that they are genetically related, and at
least tentatively these specimens must remain separately designated, but it
is strongly suspected that at Pond Island, inside and outside the lagoon,
there are situations which will, upon investigation, reveal much as to the
influence of environment on the growth forms of these Codia. It is prob-
ably to be expected that at that time further changes in the present no-
menclatorial concepts will become necessary.

Most of the recent collections of Codium are of young plants, few of
them having attained a sufficiently mature stage of development to allow
them to be matched satisfactorily with the older specimens collected in
the spring and summer. A large number of the author’s specimens are
small plants resembling the types of either C. cervicorne or C. anasto-
mosans. In some instances it is impossible to draw any lines of distinction.
C. anastomosans is, however, here left separate, awaiting verification of
the permanency of its caespitose, clumping habit which may prove distinc-
tive.

Codium simulans S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 706, pl. 14, figs. 21, 22, pl. 31. Codium unilater-
ale Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 710, pl. 15, figs. 30, 31, pl. 36. Codi-
um Brandegeei Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 712, pl. 14, figs. 25, 26,
pl. 30. Codium cervicorne Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 712, pl. 14,
figs. 19, 20, pl. 32b. Codium tomentosum, Howe, 1911, p. 493
(not of Stackhouse).

The species here understood as Codium simulans is probably the com-
monest member of this genus in the Gulf, and its growth-forms are re-
sponsible for the several names given in synonymy. With regard for sea-
sonal and other ecological variation, all of the specimens listed under the
several names can reasonably be considered as being of a very close genetic
relationship. With the exception of the somewhat larger utricles with
thin end-walls in C. unilaterale, a difference perhaps to be expected in
such larger specimens, there are no points with which the utricles can be
used to distinguish them. From all indications of the collections at hand,
C. cervicorne is probably a young form of this plant, not yet having de-
veloped the distinctive branching habit of the larger specimens. The type

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 217

specimens of C. simulans and C. Brandegeei are quite indistinguishable in
all respects. The latter name is based on a single, imperfect specimen from
La Paz, likewise the type locality of C. cervicorne.

D. 439 from the south shore of San Esteban Island, February, seems
to be most like the C. Brandegeei type in all respects. Though diameter
relations are difficult to interpret in the dry specimens, part of this col-
lection grades into the more robust-appearing plants of D. & R. 3411,
3231 from Guaymas, December, 2926, Kino, November, and D. 109,
Turner’s Island, January. These specimens were evidently dried slowly
and retained more of their original size and form. The dichotomous
branching is less regular than is common in the other specimens referred
to C. simulans, but the plants are not fully mature and in other respects
there is considerable similarity.

D. 74, Guaymas, January, is another plant closely related here but
showing more divaricate branching. The terminal portions of the
branches are shriveled to slender proportions from rapid drying and give
the specimens a peculiar appearance. Young specimens present in the col-
lection resemble the type of C. cervicorne: D. 107, Turner’s Island, D.
310, Gonzaga, D. 396, Tepoca Bay. Nothing short of a study of these
plants in the field will be able to establish them in their proper relation to
one another.

Codium conjunctum S. & G.
Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 706, pl. 15, figs. 32, 33, pl. 32a.

Specimens matching the type have not been rediscovered. This is a
small, caespitose species which in bearing slender branches is apparently
distinct from the others of the Gulf.

J. 16, Tortuga Island, June.

Codium amplivesiculatum S. & G.
Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 709, pl. 15, figs. 28, 29, pl. 35.

The type specimen is highly distinctive in appearance from anything
else known. (See the general discussion of Codium.)
J. 74 (AHF no. 67), floating in Pond Island lagoon, July.

Codium longiramosum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 710, pl. 15, fig. 27, pl. 37.

The very long, unbranched, cylindrical segments set this specimen off
from any others known. (See general discussion of Codium.)

J. 74b, floating in Pond Island lagoon, July.

218 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Codium cuneatum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 708, pl. 16, figs. 24, 25, pl. 34. Codium reductum
Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 707, pl. 14, figs. 23, 24, pl. 33.

Specimens given two different names were collected by Johnston in
virtually the same locality. Smith Island, the type locality of C. cuneatum,
is immediately opposite Los Angeles Bay, the locality for C. reductum,
and only a short distance off shore. In habit and general aspect, though
differing somewhat in branching proportions, the two type specimens are
certainly of the same species, and it seems best to consider them as such
in this account. Fresh specimens would undoubtedly confirm the decision
more fully, though it seems clear enough that C. reductum is but a less
regularly flabellately branched growth form of C. cuneatum.

In the original account the description of C. reductum immediately
precedes that of C. cuneatum, but the type specimen of the former is frag-
mentary and very much inferior to that of the latter. Hence, according
to the International Rules, it is permissible to retain the name bearing
the fullest description of the plant.

Codium anastomosans S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 711, pl. 16, figs. 36, 37.

Plants collected in January and February which match quite perfectly
the type of this species are closely branched, ++ — hemispherical clumps,
the branches smaller in diameter than those of C. conjunctum. The spe-
cies is here maintained with due realization that the type specimen is
probably an immature plant without gametangia, and that further com-
parative work is essential before it can be substantiated.

J. 84e, Puerto Refugio rocks, June.

D. 109a, Turner’s Island, Jan., and 396a, Tepoca Bay, Feb., are
mixed in with other juvenile specimens which seem to belong somewhat
more probably to Codium simulans. C. anastomosans, as interpreted here,
is of darker color when dry and is attached to the substratum at more than
one point.

Codium MacDougalii sp. nov.
Plate 53, Fig. 1

Frondes 8-10 cm. altae, essentialiter cylindricae, disco 1 cm. lato afixae; ramis
irregulariter usque ad 4-plo furcatis, inferne constrictis, latioribus in partibus
mediis, usque ad 11-13 mm. tumefacientibus; utriculis longis, gracilibus, 1100 uw
longis, superne 125-200 u latis; gametangiis angustis, fusiformibus, 250-300 uw lon-
gis, 70-90 w latis.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 219

Thallus 8-10 cm. high, essentially cylindrical, attached by a disk
about 1 cm. broad; one to several erect axes arising from the holdfast ;
branches irregularly forked, narrow below and constricted at the junc-
tions, broadest in midportions above, swollen to as much as 11-13 mm.;
utricles long, slender, about 1100 » long in upper swollen parts, mostly
125-200 » diam., shorter and narrower below but of same proportions ;
end-wall very thick, 50-75 », laminate, smooth, dome shaped ; gametangia
mostly narrow fusiform, 250-300 p long, 70-90 » broad.

Type: MacDougal, Port Libertad, Sonora, May 4, 1923. Isotype,
Herb. AHF no. 6.

This is one of the most outstanding species of the Gulf of California,
distinct at once from any of the other Pacific coast species, and one of the
few known in which the branches are swollen above. The utricles are
notably long and narrow, and the end-walls very thick. In Setchell’s study
notes there is a statement that he has considered this plant near to Codium
contractum Kjellm. of northeast Asia, another species with swollen upper
branches.

An additional collection of this plant was recently made by Dr. Poin-
dexter at Punta Pefiasco, near the type locality, March, 1941. His speci-
mens are largely immature, but some show very well the broad, swollen
upper portions of the branches.

220 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PHAEOPHYCEAE

Family Ectocarpaceae
Genus ECTOCARPUS Lyngbye
Ectocarpus Mitchellae Harv.

Harvey, 1852, p. 142, pl. 126; Saunders, 1898, pl. 21, figs. 1, 2; Setch. &
Gard., 1925, p. 428.

The collections from the Gulf agree in all essential particulars with
this species as delineated by Saunders. In the description by Setchell and
Gardner, the plants from the Pacific coast have not been separated satis-
factorily from those of the Atlantic coast (Taylor, 1937, p. 111). The
present specimens are 2-4 cm. high and vary from green to olivaceous
brown upon drying. Only plurilocular gametangia are present.

D. 358, 363, growing on Sargassum, Punta Pefiasco, Feb.; D. 644,
growing on young Sargassum, Ralfsia, etc., in rock pools, middle littoral,
San Jose del Cabo, Feb.; H. 717, Santa Maria Bay (outer coast), Aug.

Ectocarpus confervoides f. variabilis Saunders

Saunders, 1898, p. 155, pl. 23; Setch. & Gard., 1925, p. 414, pl. 46, fig. 7;
Phyc. Bor. Amer., no. 1737.
D. 747, densely tufted, .5-1.0 cm. high, on disintegrating Sargassum
fronds, lower littoral, Turner’s Island, July.

Ectocarpus mucronatus Saunders

Saunders, 1898, p. 152, pl. 19; Setch. & Gard., 1925, p. 429.

The present collections have uniformly sessile, ovoid, short-acuminate
plurilocular gametangia and conform in all other essentials to Ectocarpus
mucronatus as described and figured by Saunders. The type is from San
Pedro, California, and the Gulf collections extend the range into a new
area.

D. 358a, plants .8-2.5 cm. high, attached to the bladders of Sargas-
sum, upper sublittoral, Punta Penasco, Feb.

Ectocarpus Bryantii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 720, pl. 17, fig. 45.
According to Setchell and Gardner, Ectocarpus Bryantii and E. gono-
dioides are evidently closely related and both have near affinities in the

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 221

pusillus group of Sauvageau (1895). Both species differ from all others
recognized by Setchell and Gardner in the method of branching and in
the lack of hairs terminating the erect filaments.

Bryant 3a, growing on Codium simulans, La Paz. Not again detected.

Ectocarpus gonodioides S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 721, pl. 17, fig. 44.

According to Setchell and Gardner, the small tufts of this species re-
mind one of the genus Gonodia (Myriactis), but the penetrating part,
which extends relatively deeply into the host, is composed of slender, al-
most colorless, slightly branched, closely intertwined filaments, which,
however, do not coalesce or form a false parenchyma as in the case of some
species of Gonodia.

J. 47e, growing on Codium cuneatum, Smith Island, July. Not again
detected.

Ectocarpus sonorensis sp. nov.
Plate 31, Fig. 5

Frondes usque ad 10 cm. altae; filis primariis usque ad 50 p diam., cellulis 1.25-
1.50-plo diam. longioribus; ramificatione semierecta, moderate remota; ramulis
superne usque ad 12 yp attenuatis; ramis ultimis usque ad apicem acutam elongato-
subulatis; ramellis spinuliformibus superne numerosis; gametangiis pluriloculari-
bus gracilibus, usque ad 400 yp longis, 20-25 py latis, in extensionem cellularum vege-
tativarum terminantibus, pedicellis 2-cellularibus suffultis.

Plants large, light green abundantly and finely branched, to 10 cm.
high; main filaments up to 50 p in diam., of thin-walled cells 1.25-1.5
times as long as broad; branching semi-erect, rather distant; ramuli grad-
ually attenuating from 40 p to 12 » diam., ultimate branches elongate-
subulate, to a sharp point, in terminal parts bearing numerous short, spine-
like ramelli; chloroplasts pale, thin, nongranular, apparently lining the
walls; plurilocular gametangia developing in same position and orienta-
tion as short vegetative branches of upper parts of the plant, uniformly
borne on a 2-celled pedicel, slender, to 400 p long, 20-25 p wide, ending
in a pointed extension of vegetative cells 30-120 » long; zoosporangia un-
known.

Type: D.& R. 3281 (Field Museum, Chicago; isotype, AHF no.
7), on rocks in tidal stream, 3 km. east of Guaymas, December 15, 1939.

Its large size and branching habit, together with the peculiarities of
its plurilocular gametangia, identify this species as a very distinctive one
from our coasts.

222 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Ectocarpus Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 31, Fig. 4

Frondes 4-6 mm. altae, dense caespitosae; filis erectis non crebro ramosis, circa
20 w diam., cellulis 2-3-plo diam. longioribus; gametangiis plurilocularibus later-
alibus, sessilibus, 125-175 wu longis, 28-32 u latis, anguste lanceolato-conicis.

Plants 4-6 mm. high, forming dense tufts on surface of rocks or crus-
taceous coralline algae, attached by a mat of cells and basal filaments
from which the erect filaments arise abundantly, the latter infrequently
branched, about 20 p» diam., not constricted, commonly blunt-tipped, with
cells mostly 2-3 diam. long; plurilocular gametangia abundant, lateral,
sessile, 125-175 yw long, 28-32 w broad, narrowly lanceolate-conical ; zo-
osporangia unknown.

Type: D. 133, on rock and crustaceous coralline surfaces, middle
littoral, Turner’s Island reef off Tiburon Island, Jan. 24, 1940. Herb.
AHF no. 8.

This species differs in several respects from any other known from the
Pacific coast. Its small size, saxicolous habit, commonly unbranched fila-
ments, and long slender, sessile gametangia are characters which in com-
bination mark this plant as very distinct.

Family Myrionemataceae
Genus COMPSONEMA Kuckuck

Compsonema immixtum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 724, pl. 17, fig. 49; 1925, p. 487.
J. 58b, growing on Colpomenia sinuosa f. deformans, Isla Partida,
July. Not again detected.

Family Ralfsiaceae
Genus RALFSIA Berkeley
Ralfsia pacifica Hollenberg ms.

Ralfsia verrucosa Setch. & Gard. (at least in part not of J. Agardh),
1925, p. 497.

Thallus very dark brown to blackish, 400-800 » thick, coriaceous,
2-10 cm. in extent, firmly adhering to substratum throughout. The Gulf
specimens were examined by Dr. Hollenberg, and, though all are sterile,
he finds them satisfactorily referable to this unpublished species.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 225

On rocks with crustaceous corallines, lower littoral: D. 397a, Tepoca
Bay, Feb.; D. 468, San Esteban Island, Feb.; D. 757a, Turner’s Island,
July; D. 318a, Gonzaga Bay, Jan.

Ralfsia californica S. & G.
Setch. & Gard., 1925, p. 497, pl. 36, fig. 22.

Unfortunately, the material is sterile, but it is a thin species which
seems to correspond in most respects with R. californica. Fertile material
will be required to establish this determination.

D. 619, on rocks with crustaceous corallines in quiet water of shal-
low lagoons, San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.; D. 479c,
Puerto San Carlos, near Guaymas, Feb.; D. 130a, reef at Turner’s
Island, Jan.

Ralfsia Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 31, Figs. 6,7; Plate 54, Fig. 2

Frondes leves, crustosae, irregulariter lateque lobatae, usque ad 6 cm. diam.
prorsum per rhizinas pluricellulares ad substratum arcte adhaerentes, in partibus
sterilibus 175-200 pw crassae; cellulis stratorum 2-3 basalium horizontaliter elon-
gatis et iis ramos assurgentes ad directionem marginium producentibus; partibus
fertilibus 150-175 w crassis, inferne hypothallo 3 stratoso compacto cellulis cubicis
et superne paraphysibus gracilibus et sporangiis unilocularibus compositis; para-
physibus 150-175 u longis, gracilibus, clavatis, 7-9 u diam., sporangiis uniloculari-
bus 90-110 p longis, 20-30 uw diam.

Thallus flat, smooth, crustose, irregularly and broadly lobed, to 6 cm.
in diameter, bister brown, firmly adhering to the smooth rock substratum
throughout, largely by means of small, branched, pluricellular rhizoids ;
sterile vegetative portions 175-200 p» thick; cells of basalmost 2-3 layers
elongated horizontally, these leading into branching, assurgent rows in
the direction of the margins, the cells averaging about 12 by 25 yp in di-
mensions; fertile portion 150-175 p thick, of slender paraphyses and uni-
locular sporangia from a compact, 3-tiered hyperthallic layer of quadrate
cells; paraphyses 150-175 » long, slender, clavate, 7-9 » diam. at thickest
outer ends, of cells much longer than broad below, mostly at least 1.5
times as long as broad above; unilocular sporangia clavate, with a nar-
row basal stalk, 90-110 p long, 20-30 p in diameter.

Type: D. 640, growing over bare rock surfaces in middle littoral,
San Jose del Cabo, Feb. 16, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 9.

This species is very distinct among those of our region in its light
brown color, its thick, adherent thallus of assurgent cell rows, and in the
length and slender proportions of the paraphyses.

224 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Family Elachistaceae
Genus GONODIA Nieuwland
Gonodia Johnstonii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 722, pl. 17, figs. 46, 47; 1925, p. 506.
J. 11b, growing on Sargassum lapazeanum, San Marcos Island, June.
Not again detected.

Gonodia Marchantae S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 723, pl. 17, fig. 48; 1925, p. 506.

M. 22a, growing on the fronds of Sargassum horridum, Eureka, May.
Not again detected.

According to Setchell and Gardner, Gonodia Marchantae differs
from G. Johnstonii in the character of the basal penetrating portion, the
former having few narrow filaments and the latter having a dense, copi-
ous, pseudoparenchymatous base. Two or three cells in the lower part of
the free filaments are usually asymmetrical in G. Marchantae and not so
in G. Johnstonii. Neither species has hairs or any indication of having had
them, a prominent character as figures by Thuret and Bornet in Etudes
Phye. pl. 7, figs. 2-6, for Elachista pulvinata, and mentioned by Yendo
as ‘paraphysibus paucioribus’ in Myriactis Sargassi (Nov. Alg. Japon.,
1920, p. 3). G. Marchantae is close to G. pulvinata in character of the
basal penetrating portion. G. Johnstonii in general resembles G. monili-
formis but is much smaller throughout.

Family Sphacelariaceae
Genus SPHACELARIA Lyngbye
Sphacelaria furcigera Kiitz.

Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. V, p. 27, pl. 90; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 724, pl.
19, fig. 58.

Gametophytic specimens were detected on Marchant’s collections of
Sargassum (22) and provisionally identified by Setchell and Gardner as
Sphacelaria furcigera. Propagulum-bearing specimens, which seem satis-
factorily to correspond to those of this species as figured by Kiitzing, have
recently been observed growing on Sargassum.

D. 686b, growing on old, lower stems of Sargassum Camouit, Tiburon

Island, July.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 225

Sphacelaria brevicorne S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 725, pl. 19, figs. 59, 60.

Brand. 59 on Sargassum, La Paz; D. 598b, on and among encrusting
algae in coral heads, San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, February.

In describing this species Setchell and Gardner say: “Sphacelaria
brevicorne has very close affinity in S. cornuta Sauv. (1901, p. 132, repr.)
the type locality of which is New Caledonia. Unfortunately, we have no
fruit on ours. We are basing the distinction from S. cornuta largely on
the differences in the character of the propagula.”’

D. 589b is undoubtedly of this same species but even more closely re-
sembles S. cornuta. The propagulum-rays are 3-4 celled and often mark-
edly acute, rather than “short, blunt, and of two cells,” as stated in the
original description of S. brevicorne. Some, however, are identical with
the Setchell and Gardner figure. The plants are about 3 mm. high, some-
what larger than those of the Brandegee collection, but it is not unlikely
that the latter specimens are younger, the propagula not fully mature, this
accounting for the shorter rays and the smaller size of the whole plants.
For the present, the specimens on hand will be placed under the name
given to them by Setchell and Gardner, although this may be relinquished
in favor of S. cornuta as a fuller knowledge of our species is developed.

Sphacelaria Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 31, Fig. 8

Frondes caespitosae, 8-12 mm. altae, inferne dense superne sparse ramosae;
ramis omnibus erectis strictisque; filis 35-60 diam.; pilis copiosis, 500-1000 u
longis; propagulis tribuliformibus, 75-90 pw latis, 100-110 u longis, pedicellis 2-3
cellularibus suffultis et radiis inconspicuis, quibusque cellula rotunda singula aut
leviter protrudente aut non protrudente compositis; zoosporangiis gametangiisque
nondum visis.

Erect filaments forming brown tufts on rock surfaces, 8-12 mm. high,
attached by a small, dense mat of rhizomes, densely branched from the
base, sparsely and irregularly above; all branches erect and strict; fila-
ments 35-60 » in diam.; segments as broad as high, with vertical parti-
tions only; hairs abundant, 500-1000 p» long, of up to 10 cells, about 15 »
in diam.; propagula tribuliform, 75-90 » broad, 100-110 p» long, on 2-3-
celled pedicels ; rays inconspicuous, each of one rounded cell, little project-
ing or not at all; zoosporangia and gametangia unknown.

226 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Tyre: D. 643, on rocks in middle littoral, entangled with Cladoph-
ora, Ectocarpus, Ceramium, etc., San Jose del Cabo, Feb. 16, 1940. Herb.
AHF no. 10.

D. 703, on rocks in middle littoral, Turner’s Island, July.

This species is very near to Sphacelaria novae-caledoniae Sauv. (1914,
p. 141, fig. 34) in morphology, but is not known to be parasitic or epi-
phytic as is that species. It is considerably larger, with filaments mostly
40-50 » in diameter, none as slender as 20 p. The propagula are, however,
very similar. Sauvageau does not mention the presence of hairs in S.
novae-caledoniae.

Family Cutleriaceae
Genus CUTLERIA Greville

Cutleria Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 54, Fig. 1

Frondes dimorphae; gametophyticae 4-6 cm. altae, 100-140 pu crassae, laminis
complanatis, membranaceis, flabellatis, 3-6 cm. latis, marginibus trichothallico
crescentibus; sporophyticae crustosae, per rhizinas pluricellulares ramosas laxe
affixae, usque ad 2 cm. diam., multilobatae, marginibus integris, in superficie
supera 20-30 w revolutis; divisione cellulari marginali crescentes.

Gametophytic plants 4-6 cm. high, with flat, membranous, flabellate
blades with broadly rounded margins, prostrate at first and attached by
numerous rhizoidal outgrowths from the under side, soon erect; flabella
3-6 cm. broad, with marginal trichothallic growth, somewhat laciniate in
outer, submarginal parts, 100-140 » thick, of large, thin-walled, + —
rectangular, colorless, medullary cells 100-125 » in greatest length, bor-
dered on either side by a single cortical layer of very small, brick-shaped
cells rich in chromatophores, 5 by 12 p in cross section, nearly quadrate in
surface view but with rounded corners; gametangia unknown; sporo-
phytic thallus thin, crustose, light brown, loosely attached by branched,
pluricellular, nonmoniliform rhizoids to articulated corallines and other
semiloose substrata, spreading to 2 cm., multilobed ; lobes 2-5 mm. broad,
rounded; margins entire, turned back 20-30 » on upper surface; growth
by marginal cell division; surface cells quadrate, 6-8 » in dimension;
growing together with gametophytic plants in January.

Type: (gametophyte) D. 111, lower littoral on rocky reef, Tur-
ner’s Island off Tiburon Island, Jan. 24, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 11a.

Type: (sporophyte) D. 164, lower littoral on rock-shingle beach,
southwest shore of Tiburon Island opposite Turner’s Island, Jan. 25,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 11b.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA pea

D. 318, sporophytes and gametophytes, rocky shore, Willard’s Island,
Gonzaga Bay, Jan.; D. 410, gametophytes, rocky shore, Pond Island, Feb.

The collections of this plant from the Gulf were first identified as
Zanardinia prototypus (Nardo) Nardo (Dawson, 1941, p. 119), a species
which they resemble very closely. The discovery and investigation of an
“A glaozonia’ among the collections led, however, to the conclusion that
the plant belongs to Cutleria, a genus whose sporophyte stage has long
been known as Aglaozonia. Zanardinia, on the other hand, does not have
dissimilar gametophytes and sporophytes. Close correspondence in general
aspect was found also with Cutleria adspersa (Roth) De Not. Sauva-
geau (1899, p. 298-301) has compared Cutleria adspersa and Zanardinia
prototypus (Z. collaris), which differ very little in the nature of the ster-
ile gametophytes and has pointed out the slight distinctions. Since, how-
ever, the sporophyte is present also in the Gulf collections, comparison
could be made on two bases. Hamel (1931-1939, p. 325) discusses the
gametophyte of C. adspersa together with its sporophyte, known as 4 glao-
zonia melanoidea. The latter plant is characterized by its very dark color
and firm attachment to rock surfaces. Its size reaches several (4-8) cm.
The A glaozonia stage from the Gulf, which in one case was found grow-
ing directly at the base of the Cutleria gametophyte, and which is without
question the sporophyte of that plant, is not dark in color, is not firmly at-
tached to the substratum, and reaches only 1.5-2 cm. in extent. Though
little can be found to distinguish the gametophyte of our species from
Cutleria adspersa, except perhaps the thin appearance of the cortical cells
in cross section, the presence of a distinctive type of sporophyte seems suf-
ficient to establish this plant as a species new to science.

It is remarkable in being the first member of the order Cutleriales to
be positively recorded from the Pacific coast of America.

Apparently it is an ephemeral plant, and no specimens were found in
July, 1940, although special search was made at the precise spot from
which examples were taken in January. This fact would indicate a winter
annual development. All gametophytes found in January were in excel-
lent, fresh, rapidly growing condition, all with fine trichothallic marginal
fringes.

Cutleria adspersa (Roth) De Not has been reported in Japan, but as
yet no sporophyte Aglaozonia stage has been mentioned. The Japanese
plant may perhaps be the same as ours, but evidence is at present incom-
plete.

228 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Family Dictyotaceae
Genus DICTYOTA Lamouroux
Dictyota crenulata J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1847, p. 7; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 730, pl. 18, figs. 50, 51.
A collection taken from beach drift at San Jose del Cabo, D. 629x,
February, is identical with that previously reported from the Gulf, name-
ly, Brand. 24, from La Paz. Taylor (1939, p. 8) has reported it from off
Punta Gorda in 12-20 meters, Waldo Schmitt, 7, July, 1938.
‘The author’s specimens average 10 cm. high, are finely but conspicu-

ously denticulate and richly proliferous with sporelings as mentioned by
Setchell and Gardner (loc. cit.).

Dictyota hesperia S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 731, pl. 18, figs. 52, 53.

D. 713, 718, middle littoral rocks, Turner’s Island, July.

The present specimens compare well with the type from Tortuga
Island, J. 32 (AHF no. 71), and with the cotype from San Marcos
Island, J. 5, both collected in June. The species seems to be a summer an-
nual, since it was not found at the Turner’s Island station in January. Its
smaller size, 3-5 cm., and narrower segments, 1-1.5 mm., serve to distin-
guish it from the much more abundant Dictyota Johnstonii of the same
habitat.

Dictyota Johnstonii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 730, pl. 18, figs. 54-56, pl. 39.

J. 4, lower littoral rocks, San Marcos Island, June; J. 81 (AHF no.
70), Isla Partida, July; D. 95, rocky reef, Turner’s Island, January, D.
740, July; D. 659, middle littoral rocks north of Kino, July; D. 686,
cobblestone beach, south shore of Tiburon Island, July; D. 155, dredged
in 4-32 meters off south shore of Tiburon Island, Jan.

The winter and summer collections at Tiburon Island in 1940 have
revealed much concerning the seasonal development of this species. Jan-
uary collections on the reef at Turner’s Island and off the shore of Tib-
uron Island yielded a few plants, mostly very young. At that season indi-
vidual plants were only occasional and formed no conspicuous colonies.
‘The surface temperature in January was 15.5-16° C. In July, when the
first low-tide collections were made on the shore of Tiburon Island, the

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 229

great abundance of this species was the most conspicuous feature of the
vegetation. Together with Padina Durvillaei and Ishige foliacea, Dicty-
ota Johnstonii made up the bulk of the vegetation, far surpassing the
young Sargassum plants in quantity. On the reef at Turner’s Island the
change in the vegetation from that of January was even more pronounced.
Sargassum, which had been so conspicuous and abundant, was gone, as
were Colpomenia and Gigartina. Quantities of Dictyota Johnstonii clung
to almost every rock, and the alga was the dominant member of the sum-
mer flora. Many plants were over 15 cm. high, and everywhere the
growth was very dense.

Though we have such a record from only a single locality, it seems
safe to say that D. Johnstonii is a very abundant, sometimes dominant,
summer annual, reaching its highest development at the peak of the
Warm-water summer season. The water temperature on the reef at Tur-
ner’s Island was 31° C. by July 18, an increase of 15.5 degrees over the
temperature in January. Johnston’s specimens are also large, vigorous
plants and probably are indicative of this species’ abundance in other lo-
calities in the upper Gulf.

Dictyota Vivesii Howe

Howe, 1911, p. 497, pl. 27.

One collection from the waters of the Cape region compares favor-
ably with Howe’s illustration of Vives’ plant from La Paz. The divari-
cate habit, smaller size, and shorter segments distinguish this species from
Dictyota Johnstonii. Furthermore, the latter plant is thus far known only
from the coasts of the northern third of the Gulf of California.

Though Howe does not mention anything in regard to the habitat of
Vives’ plants, we may assume, perhaps, that they were cast up as were
most of his collections. Further collecting will verify whether it is con-
fined to the tropical waters of our coast.

D. 623, dredged in 34-50 meters off Gorda Point, south of La Paz,
Feb.

Genus NEUROCARPUS Weber & Mohr

Neurocarpus zonarioides (Farlow) Howe

Farlow, 1899, p. 73; Howe, 1914, pp. 69-70; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p.
128 1925, pl.99,

This species was first collected in the Gulf by Johnston on high sub-

littoral (lower littoral) rocks at Tortuga Island. These specimens, col-

230 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

lected in June, are 8 to 12 cm. high and with broad segments (5-8 mm.).
In February, 1940, the author found specimens cast up in abundance on
the beach near San Jose del Cabo. They are up to 16 cm. high and with
only a few broad segments from the basal parts, the upper parts being
very abundantly branched into narrow segments about 1 mm. in width.
So little do the upper parts of these plants resemble the more typical broad
segments of N. zonarioides that they were at first suspected of being of a
different species. A careful examination of the lower parts and younger
segments showed convincingly, however, that the plants should be placed
here. They have woody, stupose axial parts and are apparently over-
mature.

Poindexter has recently collected at Punta Penasco, Sonora, March,
1941, several specimens which correspond closely with Johnston’s Tor-
tuga Island material.

Genus PADINA <Adanson
Padina Durvillaei Bory

Bory, 1826, pl. 21, fig. 1; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 729.

The numerous collections of this species by Marchant, Brandegee,
Bryant, and Johnston (S. & G. loc. cit.) showed that it is abundant and
widely distributed in the lower littoral and upper sublittoral belts
throughout the Gulf of California during the months April to June. The
present collections (which include specimens obtained in November, De-
cember, January, February, March, April, and July) allow us to con-
clude that this plant is perennial in the Gulf and is adaptable to great
variations of water temperature known to exist in its habitats.

The species is to be found at almost all shore stations, but grows
most abundantly in large colonies on the smooth rock and sand bottoms of
shallow bays and lagoons. E. F. Ricketts, Pacific Biological Laboratories,
Pacific Grove, California, makes the following statement of observations
at Puerto Refugio, April 2, 1940: “Very common flat alga; acres of the
littoral were choked with this form.”

Development of new fronds from the perennial bases apparently be-
gins in late fall and becomes most rapid by about December. January and
February collections are of maturing specimens, mostly with fresh, full,
nonlacerated margins. Collections from late July to early November are
largely lacerated and covered with other organisms, and are obviously
old. Some early December collections show many very young fronds, no
old ones. Specimens collected near Guaymas, December 22, show great
increase in growth over those collected three weeks earlier.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 231

The species is widespread along the whole coast from Costa Rica to
the head of the Gulf of California and is evidently a plant developing
long-lived annual fronds, often from perennial bases, though rapid winter
growth from sporelings probably accounts for by far the greater number
of plants. Fruiting material is most abundant in spring and summer.

D. 538, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.; D. 386, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 309,
Gonzaga Bay, Jan.; D. 139, Tiburon Island, Jan.; D. 681, July; D. 89,
Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. 748, July; D. 413, Pond Island, Feb.; D.
281d, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. & R. 3137, Guaymas, Dec. 2, 3391, Dec.
22, 3239, Dec. 6, 3324a, Dec. 21, 2930, Nov. 10; D. 66, Guaymas, Jan.;
H. 1, San Jose del Cabo, Aug.; Poindexter, Punta Pefiasco, March.

Padina mexicana sp. nov.
Plate 52, Fig. 2

Frondes complanatae, expansae, resupinatae, late flabellatae, 1.5-4 cm. latae
integrae stipite basali non insigniter distincta, basim arcte et prorsum per rhizinas
numerosas e superficie infera orientes affixae, calce incrustatae, candido-calcareo-
fuscae, zonatae; laminis prope margines revolutas 2 stratosis, aetate provecta 4-6
stratosis; pilis tantum in superficie supera; tetrasporangiis in superficie supera, in
lineis interruptis aut in gregariis sparsis zonas interpilas occupantibus.

Thallus flat, expanded, resupinate, broadly flabellate, 1.5-4 cm. broad,
entire, without a recognizable basal stipe, attached at base and throughout
by numerous rhizoids from the under surface, these holding the plants
firmly to dense tufts of articulated corallines (Jania, Amphiroa) rather
heavily calcified, of a light chalky, gray-brown color, zonate, but noncalci-
fied piliferous lines parallel with the margins; lamina of 2 cell layers near
the revolute margins, of 4-6 layers in older parts, the cells of the outer
layers in cross section about half as long as the inner, though this is not so
definite in the lower layer; hairs on upper side only; tetrasporangia borne
on upper surface in broken lines or scattered in groups in interpilar zones,
covered with a thin indusium; antheridia and oogonia unknown.

Type: D. 725, middle and lower littoral, Turner’s Island reef, off
Tiburon Island, July 18, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 12.

This species is near to Padina Vickersii in color and structure, but dif-
fers from that and other related species in its remarkable habit of growing
firmly attached by its whole under surface to the irregular coralline sub-
strate. Overlapping laminae become firmly adherent to each other by the
same rhizoidal development. It is in striking contrast with P. Durvillaei
in all its specific characters.

Padina mexicana is a rather short-lived summer annual, appearing
only with the warm-water season. It was found fairly abundant in July

232 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

in rock pools measuring 31° C., growing with Amphiroa and Jania, but
was not seen at all in January at the same station.

Family Sporochnaceae
Genus NEMACYSTUS Derb. & Sol.
Nemacystus Brandegeei(S. & G.) Kylin

Kylin, 1940, p. 49. Meneghiniella Brandegeei Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 5;
1925, p. 549, pl. 47, fig. 11, pl. 49, fig. 16.

Kylin did not have examples of this species when he wrote his revision
of the Chordariales, and he was able to judge the systematic position of
this plant only from the published description and figures, the latter quite
inadequate for his purpose. A reinvestigation of the type specimen together
with another specimen of recent collection confirms Kylin’s opinion.
Setchell, in a marginal note in his personal copy of the Melanophyceae
(S. & G., 1925), had also reached the conclusion that the species belonged
to the genus Nemacystus of Derbés and Solier, but this was never pub-
lished.

The genus as delimited by Kylin includes those plants having a single
central axis-strand, growth in length by means of an apical cell rather
than by intercalary division, and in the presence of vegetative hair-
branches clothing the whole of the thallus surface.

Recent collections of Sargassum leaves show this species is epiphytic.
Only a single example was found, this at the northernmost station in the
Gulf, whereas the type came from La Paz in the southern region.

Brand. 24, cast up at La Paz; D. 359, on a Sargassum leaf dredged
in shallow water near shore at Punta Pefiasco, Sonora, Feb.

Family Scytosiphonaceae
Genus COLPOMENIA Derb. & Sol.
Colpomenia sinuosa (Roth) Derb. & Sol.

Derbés & Solier, 1856, p. 11, pl. 22, figs. 18-20; Setch. & Gard., 1925,
p. 539, pl. 45, figs. 82-86.

To avoid added confusion, though Sauvageau (1927, p. 350) has
questioned the occurrence of true Colpomenia sinuosa on the Pacific coast
of North America, the name is here used by which the plants under con-
sideration have long been known and may most readily be recognized.

From the material now at hand it is clear that several forms or varie-
ties of this species are abundant perennial inhabitants of the shores of the

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 233

Gulf of California. At least three different entities are present, and, fol-
lowing the practice of Setchell and Gardner (loc. cit.), they are here iden-
tified as forms. In the case of plants known as C. sinuosa f. deformans this
treatment would seem hardly justifiable if based only on specimens of the
Gulf of California, since the forma deformans as found in the Gulf is
strikingly distinct from the other forms. Indeed, f. deformans is so sharply
defined and so different in shape and texture that the author was at first
inclined to place it in the genus Scytosiphon. However, it does have a
small, bullate, colpomenioid basal portion from which tiny, hollow pro-
jections arise, pushing outward and expanding into the long, hollow sacs
of the mature frond. Sections at the narrowest point of the stipelike por-
tion indicate a hollow structure throughout, unlike Scytosiphon. These
specimens are, to the author’s knowledge, the most extreme of any re-
ferred to C. sinuosa f. deformans.

Within the Gulf there are relatively few specimens which can be sat-
isfactorily identified with C. sinuosa f. typica. Some examples are perfectly
smooth, but the greater number are slightly to very strongly tuberculate,
all gradations being present in young as well as in old plants.

Colpomenia sinuosa f. tuberculata (Saunders) S. & G.

Saunders, 1898, p. 164, pl. 32; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 725.

On almost every rock-shingle beach or in stony places bordering bays
and lagoons, these plants are to be found growing in abundant colonies at-
tached to the stones. Plants 10-14 cm. in diameter are frequent in some
localities.

Colpomenia sinuosa f. expansissima is undoubtedly a form of C. sinu-
osa £. tuberculata, which has achieved very extensive development in a de-
tached, floating condition in warm water. This form was described by
Setchell and Gardner in 1924 from specimens collected by Johnston,
floating on San Francisquito Bay, Lower California.

D. 422, Pond Island, Feb.; D. 307, Gonzaga, Jan.; D. 220, Puerto
Refugio, Jan.; D. 351, dredged in 6-20 meters, Punta Penasco, Feb.;
D. 384, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 636, Feb. (young); D. 90, Turner’s
Island, Jan.; J. 26, San Francisquito Bay, June; J. 117, Los Angeles Bay,
May; M., Brand., La Paz, May.

Rosenvingea intricata (J. Ag.) Bérg.
Plate 52, Fig. 1
Bérgesen, 1914, pp. 181-183. Encoelium intricatum, Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc.
PX: tab; 'd;

234 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

This plant is here reported for the first time from our coasts. It is evi-
dently an inhabitant of the warm waters of shallow bays and lagoons in
many parts of the world.

Growing in middle littoral, in quiet water of shallow, silty bays and
lagoons, on substrata of loose gravel or coarse sand and broken shell: D.
306, Willard’s Island, Jan.; D. 385, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 424, Pond
Island, Feb.; D. 606, San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.

Genus HYDROCLATHRUS Bory
Hydroclathrus clathratus (Bory) Howe

Howe, 1920, p. 590; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 727. Hydroclathrus can-
cellatus Harvey, 1859, tab. 98.

Thus far, specimens of this tropical species have been found only in
the warm waters of the southern part of the Gulf. When found they are
only occasional.

Brand. 11, cast ashore at La Paz; M. 12, Eureka; D. 598d, growing
in coral heads on bottom of shallow lagoon, San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu
Santo Island, Feb.; D. 608, among other algae on rock shingle, same
locality.

Family Chnoosporaceae
Genus CHNOOSPORA J. Ag.
Chnoospora pacifica J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1847, p. 7; Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. IX, tab. 86; Setch. & Gard.,
1924, p. 728.

M. 16, Eureka; Brand. 39, cast ashore at La Paz.

This species has not again been encountered, and its absence from all
the recent collections as well as from those of Johnston suggests that it
may be of strictly tropical distribution and limited to the warm waters of
the southern extremity of the Gulf. The type was collected by Liebmann
at St. Augustine, near Acapulco much farther south on the coast of
Mexico.

Family Ishigeaceae

Genus ISHIGE Yendo

Ishige foliacea Okam.
Plate 53, Fig. 2

Okamura, in Segawa, 1935, pp. 65, 66; Okamura, 1936, p. 239, figs. 130,
131; Yendo, 1907, p. 155, pl. II, figs. 1-8.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 235

This peculiar brown alga may be distinguished from all others on our
coast by its dichotomous, complanate fronds, 4-7 cm. high, composed of a
medullary tissue of tangled hyphal cells and a cortex of rows of anti-
clinally arranged cubical cells.

As to the systematic position of the plant Segawa says: “Jshige Yendo
was put by Yendo under the Fucaceae in his ‘Fucaceae of Japan,’ but re-
cently zoospores have been observed by different authors and the new
family has consequently been established.

“Of the establishment of the new family Okamura is of the opinion
that Ishige may be put in the Chnoosporaceae, though Chnoospora has a
parenchymatous structure in the inner layer instead of a filamentous one.
Apart from this difference of structure of the frond, uniseriate gametangia
alone are known in Chnoospora, while in Ishige, zoosporangia only. So,
until the true nature of both kinds of reproductive organs of both genera
is fully known, it certainly seems best, at present, to place [shige in a
family of its own.”

Ishige foliacea Okam. was separated from J. Okamurai Yendo by
Okamura. It had been considered by Yendo a foliose type of the more or
less cylindrical J. Okamurai. ‘These plants were first described from
Japan and are known to be common on the warmer coasts of that country
as well as along the coast of China, to Amoy and southward. Up to the
present record it has not been known outside of Far Eastern habitats.

On the coast of Japan and China both foliose [shige foliacea and the
more or less cylindrical [shige Okamurai grow together in the same locali-
ties. In the Gulf of California, on the other hand, only the former has
been found. The Gulf plants are identical in structure and in external
morphology with Japanese plants of J. foliacea, and the summer collec-
tions show in some sections cortical cell rows which seem to bear zoospo-
rangia as figured by Okamura (1936, fig. 131). Fronds vary in width
from 1 to 5 mm., the narrowest ones being found in July, the broad ones
in February.

This plant seems to be perennially abundant on many reefs and rock-
shingle beaches of the upper half of the Gulf. In winter it was found
plentiful in the middle littoral zone at all of the shore stations visited be-
tween San Esteban Island and Tepoca Bay. In summer it competes with
Dictyota Johnstonii as the most conspicuous rock cover on the south shore
of Tiburon Island.

D. 190, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 313, Gonzaga Bay, Jan.; D. 388,
Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 446, San Esteban Island, Feb.; D. 680, south shore
of Tiburon Island, July.

236 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Family Desmarestiaceae
Genus DESMARESTIA Kjellm.

Desmarestia filamentosa sp. nov.
Plate 76

Frondibus cylindaceis, inferne lente compressis; stipitibus 1.5-2 mm. diam., 5
cm. usque ad laminam primam; ramis totaliter oppositis et copiosis, gradatim et
successive magnitudine decrescentibus; ramulis ultimis gracillimis flaccidisque, 80-
100 uw diam.; corporibus reproductivis ignotis.

Fronds cylindrical, or somewhat compressed in older parts, to 5 dm.
high, with profuse, opposite branching throughout, from a stipe about 5
cm. long below the first branches, pale greenish brown when dry; main
axis 1.5-2 mm. diam. with 4-5 orders of branches gradually reduced in
size, the ultimate ramuli very slender and flaccid, 80-110 » diam., each
producing by trichothallic growth from its tip a slender, monosiphonous
hair of short, swollen cells about 40 » diam., in a catenate series; repro-
duction not seen.

Type: Dredged in 15 fathoms, Puerto Refugio, Angel de la Guardia
Island, March 20, 1937. Herb. AHF no. 64.

This species is similar in general form and structure to Desmarestia
media (Ag.) Grev. from Alaska and Puget Sound. It also resembles D.
compressa (Reinsch) Skottsberg from the Antarctic region.

Desmarestia mexicana sp. nov.
Plate 77

Frons membranacea, 9-15 dm. alta, ad 18 cm. lata, e disco simplici, 8-10 cm.
longe stipitata, simpliciuscula vel e stipite ramosa; frons e stipite cuneatim dilata,
simpliciuscula, costata, dentata.

Fronds from a small discoid holdfast giving rise to a slender, com-
pressed, usually branched stipe 8-10 cm. long, 2-3 mm. wide, the several
branches expanding gradually into large, broad, thin, membranous blades
9-15 dm. long, up to 18 cm. wide, of a pale greenish brown color when
dry; blades unbranched, with a slender mid-vein from which opposite,
lateral veins branch at regular intervals, these breaking up into fine vein-
lets; margins with regularly spaced, broad, low teeth, the abruptly sharp
points directed upward ; blades commonly lacerate above, the apical parts
unknown.

Type: Dredged in 15 fathoms, Puerto Refugio, Angel de la Guardia
Island, March 20, 1937. Herb. AHF no. 65.

The two Desmarestia species here described from Puerto Refugio are
remarkable in being the southernmost representatives of the genus on our

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 237

coasts. Hitherto, San Diego, California, had marked the southern limits
of this cold-water genus, and to find two species in the Gulf of California
is indeed unexpected. The waters of Puerto Refugio at 15 fathoms’ depth,
however, are quite as cold in March and earlier as some of our more
northern Pacific waters, 13-14°C., and therefore allow environments
acceptable to the members of this genus. The presence of Desmarestia,
on the other hand, does not seem in accord with the complete absence of
members of the Laminariales. Yet, considering the poorly explored nature
of the sublittoral waters of the Gulf, some even of these may remain to
be found as more extensive exploration is carried out.

Family Laminariaceae
Genus MACROCYSTIS C. Agardh
Macrocystis pyrifera (Turner) Ag.

C. Agardh, 1820, p. 47; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 728.

J. 78, caught in the log line of vessel between Espiritu Santo Island
and La Paz, April.

“A single specimen about 3 feet long was brought aboard the ship, but
no specimens were found growing attached within the Gulf”—Johnston.

Family Sargassaceae
Genus SARGASSUM C. Agardh

J. Agardh, 1889, pp. 32-34; Setch. & Gard., 1925, p. 711; Setchell, 1937,
pp. 127-158.

The Sargassa of the Gulf of California, as determined from a study
of almost every specimen known to have been collected in that area, may
be arranged under four major type-groups according to leaf-shape, cos-
tation of the leaf, and cryptostomata. These characters mark off groups
of species with reasonable distinctness, and, with few exceptions, these
groups seem to be natural, the members of each showing close mutual re-
lationship.

All of the Sargassa of the Gulf fall under J. G. Agardh’s subgenus
Eusargassum. Further arrangement according to his system, that is, under
his groups Zygocarpicae, Acanthocarpicae, Malacocarpicae, etc., is too
confusing to be attempted, since when the sexuality of the various species
is taken into consideration the characters used as a basis for Agardh’s
broader classifications are too unreliable. Therefore, in this paper, the

238 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

plants are placed under the four natural groups, each designated by the
name of the principal or most expressive species of the group.

A considerable reduction in the number of species proposed by Setchell
and Gardner has been necessary, as well as the addition of three new ones.
From the specimens at hand in 1924 these authors were largely justified
in proposing the names they did. The material was often fragmentary, the
importance of the sexual nature was not so well understood as at present,
and little or nothing was known about the native habitats of the various
species or of seasonal disturbances. The present collections and records
help considerably toward clearing up some of the problems surrounding
this genus as it occurs in the Gulf, but the work is still in a preliminary
state.

Key TO THE SPECIES OF SARGASSUM IN THE
GULF OF CALIFORNIA
I. Leaves without a midrib (sometimes dimly costate in S. John-
stonii and S. lapazeanum)

A. Johnstonii group: leaves very narrow, semiterete to flat-
tened (branching usually abundant, loose, spreading; ves-
icles elliptical, long-apiculate; cryptostomata usually fre-
quem) eh ald i el al ite Rael eR, AS ee

B. Lapazeanum group: leaves expanded, asymmetrical.

1. Vesicles mostly long-apiculate . . . . S. acinacifolium
2. Vesicles with foliaceous crest or extension
a. Vesicles mostly only cristate; upper leaves less than
fem. long!) @ 02 153) 2 pe See
b. Vesicles with prolonged foliaceous extension; up-
per leaves large, more than 1.5 cm. long.
(1) Lower leaves usually less than half as long as
broad. ci eiyie. es. ne 3) oS eee
(2) Lower leaves almost as broad aslong . . .
eeie si lee bce salle | nol» Aenean een
II. Leaves with a midrib

A. Sinicola group: cryptostomata abundant and usually con-
spicuous on leaves of upper parts of plants; vesicles mostly
spherical; known holdfasts parenchymatous or of short,
coarse rhizomes.

1. Plants not lax, with short internodes and short lateral
branches; color dark gray-brown; base a solid paren-
chymatous disk or cone . . . . «. . . S. Camoutt

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 239

2. Plants usually lax, with + — long internodes and
+ — long lateral branches; color brown; base so far
as known of coarse, short, woody rhizomes.
a. Receptacles spinose or terminally dentate in both
sexes ; stems strongly muricate in oogonial plants
See i laincles Nahai ited NT See hh wiht el CMM ed iar
b. Receptacles smooth or nearly so in both sexes;
stems usually smooth ..... . . . . 8S. sinicola
B. Herporhizum group: cryptostomata absent or inconspicu-
ous on leaves of upper parts of plants; vesicles apiculate
(see also S. sinicola for some specimens) ; holdfasts of long,
loosely developed rhizomes.
1. Leaves dentate to very strongly so; dentations more or
less evenly spaced: 6) sr 6 Nice a) S. Brandegeet
2. Leaves slightly and irregularly dentate or merely with
uneven margins; plants drying very dark . S. herporhizum

I. The Johnstonii Group
Plates 32, 33

Leaves ecostate, very slender, expanded to filiform; branching loose,
secondary mostly bifarious; vesicles elliptical, with long apiculae or
linear, foliar extensions; cryptostomata usually frequent.

The plants of this group are especially distinct from all others as re-
gards leaf-structure. The very slender, flattened to cylindrical leaves
give the plants a delicate, stringy appearance. They bear fairly numerous,
large cryptostomata which appear like eruptions on the surface. These
characters are generally reliable, especially when combined with the
elliptical vesicles which are almost universally tipped with a medium to
long apicula or flattened, linear, leafy extension. Sometimes the vesicles
are slender and the apicula is several times as long as the bladder. More
commonly the apicula and bladder are of about equal length.

Antheridial and oogonial specimens are present in the collections, but
the receptacles are not markedly different, showing about the same degree
of branching and no recognizable difference in diameter. The antheridial
receptacles frequently have, however, a noticeable denticulation of the tips
and the surface, while thus far all oogonial receptacles have been found
to be smooth. The specimens available show to some degree evidence of
the more general association of vesicles with oogonial “inflorescences”
(Setchell, 1937) and of modified leaves with antheridial “inflorescences”

240 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

(pl. 32). There are frequent instances elsewhere, as will be shown later,
in which this feature is very obvious. It often causes considerable differ-
ence in appearance of the fruiting parts of the two sexes. In two collec-
tions we have plants of both sexes from the same locality, and it is thus
possible to make some statement regarding sexual variation. The plant
called Sargassum Johnstonii f. laxius, for instance, is an antheridial plant
from the same collection as that named S. Johnstonii f. gracile, an oogo-
nial plant.

The species Sargassum guardiense was distinguished principally be-
cause of its heteroclyte cyme and short apiculae. The type plant is oogo-
nial, and vesicles, as might be expected from the foregoing, are to be found
associated closely with the receptacles in the inflorescences. The observa-
tions that these often emerge from receptacular tissue gave rise to the
idea that this plant was distinct from 8. Johnstonii. D. 476, however, is a
collection including both sexes, the oogonial plant of which is identical in
this respect with the type of S. guardiense. The antheridial plant shows no
such emergence of vesicles from receptacular tissue, and, furthermore, the
vesicles are not so important an element of the inflorescence as are the
leaves, evidence again of the above-mentioned idea of the inflorescence
associations. This heteroclyte cyme character is, then, clearly one of sexual
variation in these plants and cannot be relied upon to separate species.
Sargassum guardiense S. & G. thus falls in as synonymous with S. John-
stonii, and we have only the one species and its variety as constituting this
first group.

Sargassum Johnstonii S. & G.
Plate 32, Figs. 1-15; Plate 33, Figs. 1, 2, 17-22

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 737, pl. 20, fig. 72, pl. 21, fig. 80. Sargassum
guardiense Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 732, pl. 19, fig. 64.

Basal parts unknown; plants long and stringy, 1-2 m., with terete,
smooth primary axes usually continuous from the base; secondary branch-
ing bifarious, at intervals of 3-10 cm., alternate and open below, more
closely spaced and sometimes almost opposite above, the branches of more
or less equal length, forming a fairly symmetrical branch system densely
crowded with fructiferous ramuli; leaves narrowly lanceolate to linear,
1.25-2.25 cm. long, 1-2.5 mm. wide, expanded, ecostate or rarely dimly
costate, with sparsely denticulate margins; cryptostomata not abundant
but fairly conspicuous; vesicles smooth, narrowly elliptical, 5-9 mm. over-
all, merging below gradually into a pedicel somewhat shorter than the

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 241

body of the vesicle, above into a long apicula which is often somewhat
flattened or even resembles a leaf-remnant; receptacles known for both
antheridial, oogonial and intersex plants; antheridial receptacles cylindri-
cal, once to several times branched, smooth except frequently for small,
scattered teeth, more often associated with leaves than vesicles in the in-
florescences ; oogonial receptacles little different in size and shape from
antheridial ones but with little or no evidence of denticulations, usually
associated with vesicles in an inflorescence in such a compact way that it
may be termed a heteroclyte cyme.

This is a common species in the lower littoral and upper sublittoral at
many stations. E. F. Ricketts says that in April this species is the com-
monest one below the Padina Durvillaei belt at Puerto Refugio.

D. 355, 357a, Punta Penasco, Feb.; Poindexter, March; J. 71,
Georges Island, April; D. 476, Puerto San Carlos near Guaymas, Feb.;
D. & R. 2914, Kino, Nov.; J. 2, Puerto Refugio, June; D. 551, cast up
at Agua Verde Bay, Feb.

Sargassum Johnstonii f. gracile S. & G.
Plate 33, Figs. 3-16

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 738, pl. 21, fig. 76. Sargassum Johnstonii f. lax-
ius S. & G., p. 737, pl. 21, figs. 75, 81.

This form is like the species but more slender and lax throughout,
with fewer and longer, more stringy branches; leaves not much flattened,
usually filiform with relatively more abundant and conspicuous crypto-
stomata; vesicles with long cylindrical apiculae.

Growing in upper sublittoral or lower littoral: D. 340, Punta Pemas-
co, Feb.; M. 28, 28a, Guaymas; D. 63, Guaymas, Jan.

Il. The Lapazeanum Group
Plates 34-37

Plants from slender, short stipes, attached by an essentially paren-
chymatous, discoid, semirhizomatous holdfast ; leaves ecostate, expanded,
unsymmetrical.

Most members of this group are easily distinguished from other Gulf
species by their unsymmetrical, ecostate leaves. The group as a whole is
rather sharply defined. The members show close mutual relationship in
the gradation in size and shape of leaves and vesicles from Sargassum
lapazeanum to the long-vesicled floating form of S. MacDougalit.

Sargassum lapazeanum represents a small-leaved, short-vesicled spe-
cies found thus far at Guaymas, San Marcos Island, Tortuga Island,

242 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

La Paz, and Turner’s Island. It has characteristically very small, broad,
unsymmetrical leaves, and vesicles with a conspicuous, irregularly toothed
crest which may extend into a margin around the edges of the bladder.
The small size of the upper leaves and the shortness of this crest distin-
guish this plant from the other members of the group.

The receptacles of Sargassum lapazeanum are quite distinctive, being
variously and rather conspicuously dentate in both sexes. The antheridial
receptacles are commonly smaller in diameter and more openly branched.
In both cases the heteroclyte character is more or less conspicuous. The
variation is of such a nature as easily to include the obviously similar speci-
mens given the names S. Bryantii and S. insulare in the 1924 account.
The former has somewhat flattened receptacles, but the type specimen is
oogonial. From the study of the sexual dimorphism of receptacles in these
plants it is clear that the above character used to distinguish S. Bryantii is
one of sexual variation. The heteroclyte cyme condition is also variable,
and the gradient is such that it seems impossible to set apart the type speci-
men of S. insulare from the two afore-mentioned species. The names Sar-
gassum Bryantii and S. insulare become synonymous with S. lapazeanum.

Sargassum acinacifolium is represented by three mature specimens,
two oogonial (Brand. 2, Guaymas; J. 75, San Francisquito Bay, June)
and one sterile (MacDougal, Port Libertad, May). This species may be
distinguished fairly well on the basis of the vesicles, most of which have
merely a simple apicula about 0.6 as long as the bladder, unflattened or
not conspicuously so. The smoothness of the oogonial receptacles seems
generally reliable as does also the branching habit, which is much more
deliquescent than in the two following members of the group. These char-
acters are sufficient for present segregation and they may be found to
hold, though relationship with the other members of the group is very
close.

The other two members of the group, Sargassum asymmetricum and
S. MacDougalii, are distinguished from the foregoing by a branching
habit in which the primary branches are percurrent and the secondary
branches distinct, by the vesicles with prolonged, foliaceous extensions,
and by the large upper leaves, more than 1.5 cm. long. Reproductive ma-
terial is present only in S. asymmetricum, specimens of which were col-
lected in January at Turner’s Island and at Puerto Refugio. The charac-
ters of the antheridial receptacles of this species are very much in accord
with those of S. lapazeanum, having the same branching structure and
denticulations. The vesicles are, however, very different in the occurrence

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 243

of a markedly foliaceous extension 1-3 times as long as the bladder. The
upper leaves are large, strongly one-sided on most specimens, and boldly
dentate.

A specimen collected in December by MacDougal at Puerto Libertad
is recognized as the same as D. 383 from Tepoca Bay and D. & R. 3392
from Guaymas. These three examples, though immature and sterile, have
leaves on the lower parts of the primary stems sufficiently different from
the other species of this group that it seems well to distinguish the species
Sargassum MacDougalii. The proposal is tentative, however, awaiting
the collection of more mature material. The nature of the branching, the
parenchymatous holdfast, and the short, slender stipe as well as the gen-
eral character of the leaves are in perfect congruity with the lapazeanum-
complex.

A comparative study of juvenile specimens of the several species of
this group suggests strongly that distinctive characters are evident in the
early developmental stages of these plants.

Sargassum lapazeanum S. & G.
Plate 34, Figs. 1-34

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 733, pl. 20, fig. 74. Sargassum Bryantii S. & G.,
1924, p. 733, pl. 21, fig. 83. Sargassum insulare S. & G., 1924,
p. 735, pl. 20, figs. 67, 68, pl. 21, fig. 78.

Fronds 4.5-6 dm. high, arising from a solid, parenchymatous disk;
stipe about 1 cm. long; primary branches terete, smooth, becoming con-
fused above in the secondary branches which are equally long; leaves 0.5-
1.25 cm. long, essentially ecostate, asymmetrical, widest above the middle,
with very short petioles, the basal half of the upper margin smooth and
concave, the remainder of the blade sharply dentate, cryptostomata usu-
ally quite abundant and conspicuous; vesicles ellipsoidal, 4-6 mm. long
overall, the bladder 1.5-3 mm. crowned or rimmed by foliar remnants
which form a crest; receptacles in 2-4 times closely branched, usually
more or less heteroclyte inflorescences, the antheridial receptacles some-
what more broadly branched and smaller in diameter than oogonial, va-
riously and quite abundantly denticulate in both sexes.

M. 21, 24, cast ashore, Eureka, May; Bryant 5, La Paz; M. -, Guay-
mas, Aug.; J. 20, Tortuga Island, June; J. 10, 11, San Marcos Island,
June; D. 712, lower littoral rocky reef, Turner’s Island, July (all young
but seem to have the juvenile characters of this species) ; D. 746 from
same locality seems to be very old, dying or mostly disintegrating speci-
mens of the same species.

244 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Sargassum acinacifolium S. & G.
Plate 37, Figs. 1-26

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 724, pl. 21, fig. 82.

Basal parts not positively known, probably a parenchymatous disk-
holdfast; branches terete, smooth, deliquescent above; leaves 12-16 mm.
long, asymmetrical, the upper margin concave and smooth, the lower
margin and apex coarsely dentate, ecostate, cryptostomata absent; ves-
icles subspherical to ellipsoidal, smooth, with a simple apicula about
0.6 as long as the bladder, commonly unflattened, on pedicels shorter than
the diameter; oogonial receptacles 2 to 3 times forked, nearly cylindrical,
smooth, or more or less denticulate toward the apices.

J. 75, high sublittoral rocks, San Francisquito Bay, June; Brand. 2,
Guaymas?; MacDougal, Port Libertad, Sonora, May 4, 1923; D. 678,
lower littoral on cobblestone beach, south shore of Tiburon Island, July
(young specimens but apparently with the juvenile characters of this
species ).

Sargassum asymmetricum sp. nov.
Plate 36, Figs. 8-18

Frondes axi primaria curta (1 cm. longa) gracilique, a rhizomatibus crassis
discum efficientibus oriente; ramis primariis teretibus, levibus, strictis, percurrenti-
bus, minime 6 dm. longis; foliis ecostatis, plerumque valde asymmetricis, dentatis,
2-2.5 cm. longis, infernis parvissimis, 3-6 mm. longis; cryptostomatibus inconspic-
uis; vesiculis ellipsoideis, cum extensionibus foliaceis dentatisque, 1-3-plo longi-
oribus coronatis.

Primary axial stems terete, smooth, strict, percurrent, unbranched to
at least 6 dm., from a slender stipe 1 cm. long, attached to a small, knotty
disk of short, thick rhizomes, 1-1.5 cm. across; leaves ecostate, usually
strongly asymmetrical by means of a smooth, concave upper side, dentate
or almost lobed at times, 2-2.5 cm. long, the lowermost very small, 3-6
mm., blunt-lanceolate to almost triangular in shape; cryptostomata small,
inconspicuous, but present; vesicles ellipsoidal with usually dentate, foli-
aceous extensions, 1-3 times as long as bladder; antheridial inflorescences
about 1 cm. long, more or less heteroclyte, of 2-4 times branched recep-
tacles which are terminally dentate; oogonial receptacles unknown.

Type: D. 156, on rocks in lower littoral, Tiburon Island (opposite
Turner’s Island), Jan. 25, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 13.

D. 221, on rocky shore, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 314, rocky shore,
Gonzaga Bay, Feb. (juvenile specimens) ; Poindexter, Punta Penasco,

March.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 245

Sargassum MacDouzgalii sp. nov.
Plate 35, Figs. 1-8; Plate 36, Figs. 1-7; Plate 37, Figs. 27-30

Frondes axi primaria gracili, 1 cm. longa, a disco parenchymatico, affixa;
ramis primariis paucis, teretibus, levibus, usque ad 5 dm. continuis; foliis ramorum
primariorum ecostatis, asymmetricis, 4-8 mm. longis, 0.6 usque ad quam latis quam
longis, acute-denticulatis, cryptostomatibus deuntibus; foliis superis usque ad 2 cm.
longis; vesiculis ellipticis extensionibus foliaceis coronatis.

Primary stems several, terete, smooth, continuous as main axes to at
least 5 dm., from a slender stipe 1 cm. long, attached by a small paren-
chymatous disk-holdfast; leaves of lower parts of primary branches ecos-
tate, asymmetrical, small, 4-8 mm. long, 0.6 to nearly as broad as long,
lower halves of upper sides smooth, concave, the remainder of blade
sharply denticulate especially at apices; cryptostomata absent; upper
leaves the same but longer and larger, to 2 cm.; vesicles elliptical with
dentate foliar extensions about as long as the bladder; mature plants with
receptacles unknown.

Type: MacDougal (U.C. 615657; isotype AHF no. 14), Puerto
Libertad, Sonora, December, 1923.

D. 383, rocky shore, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. & R. 3392, in deep rock
pools, Punta San Pedro, near Guaymas, Dec.

D. & R. 3287 and 3311, cast up on shore near Guaymas, December,
are very probably of this species, but due to prolonged floating habit have
become very lax and all parts attenuated.

III. The Sinicola Group

Plates 38, 39

Leaves expanded, symmetrical, costate, irregularly and more or less
strongly dentate or dentate-serrate, usually with abundant cryptostomata ;
vesicles mostly spherical, often with cryptostomata.

The largest and most variable assemblage of Sargassum forms in the
Gulf of California is that which falls under the above characterization.

The spiny receptacles of Sargassum horridum and 8. Marchantae
were among the first subjects to be investigated in this group. They were
soon found to belong to the same entity, S. horridum being a spiny oogoni-
al plant, S. Marchantae, a spiny antheridial plant. Since the former name
appears first in the 1924 account, according to article 56 of the Inter-
national Rules, it is here adopted. Both plants were of the same collec-
tion, Eureka, Lower California.

The macrospecies, Sargassum sinicola, probably the commonest and
most widespread in the region, has, on the whole, smooth receptacles,

246 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

though occasional spiny oogonial ones may occur. In general, the oogonial
receptacles are shorter and more robust than the antheridial; yet in some
cases almost the opposite was found to be true. All the specimens here re-
ferred to S. sinicola are fundamentally indistinguishable in general ap-
pearance and morphology. The leaves, variable in size, are basically the
same in shape, dentation, and cryptostomata. The vesicles are nearly
always spherical and rather large, a form peculiar to this group (see pls.
38 and 39).

In this complex, variation in the inflorescences seems generally to up-
hold the observations mentioned above, that oogonial inflorescences show
closer association with modified vesicles and antheridial with leaves. How-
ever, here again, definite exceptions have been observed in some plants.

As evidenced by specimens collected and observed cast up on the beach
at Kino in July (see below), the floating habit has considerable influence
on the gross morphological appearance of plants. A prolonged life in the
floating condition may account for the undulate, crisped leaves and for
modification of receptacular parts. It is undoubtedly the cause of the
lighter, yellowish color of these specimens.

Apparently, differences in the age of plants or the luxuriance of
growth also determines to some degree the extent of branching of the re-
ceptacles. The name Sargassum cylindrocarpum S. & G. was given to one
bearing much-branched, only slightly spiny receptacles. S. sinicola was
first used to apply to a form with less abundantly branched, smooth recep-
tacles. In no particular does it seem possible with the knowledge at hand
to distinguish the type specimen of the latter from that of S. polyacan-
thum f. americanum S. & G.

Sargassum paniculatum (det. W. A. Farlow) appears on the label of
a specimen from Guadalupe Island outside of the Gulf. This plant has
been referred to S. californicum (Grun.) Setchell. The leaves are shorter
but of the same proportions in this example, and the antheridial recep-
tacles are very slender, but again its basic nature and aspect do not suggest
its distinctness from certain plants referred here to S. sinicola.

The collections made in the summer of 1940 between Kino and Tur-
ner’s Island include both Sargassum sinicola (in the broader sense) and a
species which is here named Sargassum Camouii after the French-Mexi-
can fisherman who guided and navigated us to the island. On the beach
at Kino, both were cast up and could easily be distinguished by their con-
trasting color, S. sinicola a light, shiny yellow brown, S. Camouii a dull
gray brown. On the south shore of Tiburon Island, §. Camouii was found
growing, attached by woody, basal disk or cone holdfasts to the cobble-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 247

stones (pl. 35, fig. 9). The plants lacked any form of rhizome; and the
lower parts of the stems were rough, thick, and gnarled, the upper parts
mostly muricate. No mature specimens were present.

At Turner’s Island the dark Sargassum Camouti was not found; in-
deed, only very young Sargassum plants were present. Some of these
proved to be immature plants of S. sinicola (a species collected at the same
station in January). These showed stiff tangles of short rhizomes as basal
holdfasts (pl. 35, fig. 10).

Speculation in regard to the Sargassum sinicola problem in this region
suggested that, since young plants are present in midsummer, old floating
plants being cast up at the same time, and mature, attached plants in Jan-
uary, at least in this particular locality a marked seasonal development of
this species occurs.

On the south shore of Tiburon Island, Sargassum Camouii was found
nearly mature in both January and July. This species, then, has different
seasonal development from that of 8S. sinicola; and the observation sug-
gests that, when more extensive field investigations can be made, the sea-
sonal development may prove specifically distinctive in these species and
in others as well.

Sargassum horridum S. & G.
Plate 38, Figs. 1-4

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 734, pl. 20, figs. 65, 66. Sargassum Marchantae
S. & G., 1924, p. 735, pl. 19, fig. 63.

Basal parts unknown; branches and branchlets muricate in oogonial
plants, smooth and terete in antheridial plants; leaves linear-lanceolate,
acute, midrib percurrent, margins irregularly serrate-dentate to doubly
serrate; cryptostomata numerous and conspicuous; vesicles spherical, 4-8
mm. in diam., short-pedicellate; receptacles sexually dimorphic; oogonial
decompoundly ramose, decidedly spinose; antheridial less abundantly
branched, more slender, merely finely spinulose.

M. 17, 22, Eureka, Lower California.

Bryant 7, from the islands of San Jose and Espiritu Santo, and J. 77,
from between Ceralbo and Espiritu Santo Island, April, are sterile but
seem to belong here.

Sargassum sinicola S. & G.
Plate 35, Fig. 10; Plate 38, Figs. 5-11; Plate 39, Figs. 1-11

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 736, pl. 20, fig. 73. Sargassum cylindrocarpum
S. & G., 1924, p. 738, pl. 21, fig. 77. Sargassum polyacanthum f.

248 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

americanum S. & G., 1924, p. 736. Sargassum paniculatum of S.
& G., 1924, p. 740, 1925, p. 721, pl. 46, fig. 5. Sargassum califor-
nicum (Grun.) Setchell, 1937, p. 129.

The type of Sargassum sinicola is a fragment of the upper reproduc-
tive part and shows only the special characters of that portion of the plant.
A study of entire and fragmentary plants of all Gulf collections has been
made to derive the above synonymy. Considering the very wide variation
included in this species-complex, no attempt is made here to reach a posi-
tive determination of the limits of the species and its varieties, but only to
discuss the variations and something of their significance. Thus it may be
possible to segregate examples of this complex species from examples of
the other, more sharply defined species of the region.

With few exceptions, the proportionately long, narrow, dentate
leaves, with conspicuous cryptostomata, the smooth branches and vesicles,
together with the basal holdfast of short, coarse, branched, and knotted
rhizomes will distinguish this macrospecies. It is usually very much more
lax in habit than Sargassum Camouii. Vesicles may sometimes have a
small apicula (D. & R. 3141). Leaves may sometimes be large, broad,
and with inconspicuous cryptostomata (D. 135).

D. 135, Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. 738, July; D. 426, Pond Island,
Feb.; D. & R. 3355, 3354, 3141, Guaymas, Dec.; M. 29, 30, 31, Aug.;
Mexia, 1945, Brand. 5, 3, 1; D. 676b, Kino, July; D. & R. 2927, Nov.;
J. 15, Concepcion Bay, June; M. 20, 26, 27, 11, 23, Eureka, May; Bry-
ant 6, La Paz; Brand. 37, 13, 27; D. 357, Punta Pefiasco, Feb.; Poin-
dexter, March.

A peculiar form of this species with receptacles bearing both oogonial
and antheridial conceptacles has been collected twice at Punta Penasco,

Sonora (pl. 39, figs. 6, 7).

Sargassum Camouii sp. nov.
Plate 35, Figs. 9, 11-13

Frondes usque ad 6 dm. altae, axi primaria e disco solido parenchymatico aut
cono orientes; ramis primariis asperis; foliis 4-6 cm. longis, lineari-lanceolatis,
6-12-plo longioribus quam latis, costa percurrente, irregulariter dentatis, crypto-
stomatibus numerosis, parvis; vesiculis sphericis, muticis, 3-4.5 mm. diam.

Plants to at least 6 dm. high, from a solid parenchymatous disk or
cone-holdfast ; stems rough, usually muricate, coarse and woody below;
leaves 4-6 cm. long, linear lanceolate, 6-12 times as long as broad, with
percurrent midrib, irregularly dentate, dark-colored, with numerous
small cryptostomata which are not conspicuous on dried specimens; gen-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 249

eral habit erect and compact, not lax, internodes very short ; vesicles spher-
ical, smooth, 3-4.5 mm. in diam.; receptacles (oogonial) 1-3 times
branched, +- — cylindrical, somewhat spiny.

Tyre: D. 686a, growing attached to cobblestones on rocky south
shore of Tiburon Island, July 17, 1940.

It is unfortunate that most of the specimens of this collection were lost
on the return open-boat voyage to the mainland. Only a single plant lack-
ing the holdfast was saved. Field notes, however, verify the recollection
that the holdfast of this species is as described above, and this is substanti-
ated by a mature specimen with holdfast among J. Wyatt Durham’s mate-
rial. These specimens are from a bay 10 miles N.W. of Guaymas, Oc-
tober 30, 1940. They agree well with those from Tiburon Island, and
represent fully mature plants with abundant receptacles.

D. 158, Tiburon Island, Jan.; D. 463, San Esteban Island, Feb.
(probably this species but has undulate leaves) ; M. 18, 25, Eureka (per-
haps the same). Herb. AHF no. 15.

IV. The Herporhizum Group

Sargassum herporhizum and S§. Brandegeei form a compact, easily
recognizable group because of the outstanding features of their attach-
ment organs. In both species attachment of adult plants is by means of
loose, spreading rhizomes which grow around pebbles and through the
generally loose substratum upon which the plants are found. When basal
parts are present, these plants need not be confused with species of other
groups, for this character together with the absence of conspicuous cryp-
tostomata distinguishes them readily.

Sargassum herporhizum S. & G.
Plate 40, Figs. 1-12

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 739, pl. 20, figs. 69-71.

Only two collections of this species are thus far known: J. 72 from
Georges Island, April, and J. 55, San Pedro Martir Island, April. These
plants are distinct from S. Brandegeei in their smaller leaves whose mar-
gins are entire or only sparsely denticulate. 8. Brandegeei is characterized
by very bold dentations of the margins.

Sargassum Brandegeei S. & G.
Plate 40, Figs. 13-26

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 736, pl. 21, fig. 79.
Plants attached primarily by a parenchymatous disk, but branching

250 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

immediately above this soon gives rise to numerous decumbent rhizomes
which develop clasping hapteres and form a loose, spreading, holdfast
tangle about the substratum; branches and branchlets terete, smooth,
without cryptostomata; branching rather dense in the upper parts; leaves
15-25 mm. long, 4-8 mm. wide, apices blunt, base cuneate, margins deeply
serrate, cryptostomata absent; vesicles spherical, small, 2-3 mm. diam.,
smooth, apiculate or crowned by a rudiment of a leaf, supported by pedi-
cels mostly shorter than their diameter, occupying positions of leaves
toward the base of ramuli, or scattered among the receptacles ; receptacles
in short, dense racemes, with short, distinct pedicels below but with ses-
sile branches above, mostly blunt.

Brand. 4, cast ashore, Guaymas?; MacDougal, Puerto Libertad,
Dec.; D. 383, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 141, dredged at Tiburon Island,
Jan.; D. 157, on rock-shingle beach in lower littoral, south shore Tiburon
Island, Jan.; D. 462, San Esteban Island, Feb.; D. & R. 3393, in deep

rock pools, Guaymas, Dec.

Sargassum Liebmanni J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1889, p. 91, pl. 5; Setchell, 1937, p. 130, pl. 28, figs. 1-3.
Setchell, in the above-mentioned paper, has discussed this species so
fully that little more need be said here. Reviewing a cotype specimen of
Liebmann’s collection from St. Augustine, Mexico, together with Mexi-
can and Costa Rican specimens identified with it by Setchell, it seems un-
likely that any of the plants of the Gulf of California can be included
under that name. Setchell has identified H. 2 and H. 5 from San Jose del
Cabo as Sargassum Liebmanni, but, since these specimens are only frag-
ments and badly encrusted with foreign matter, it seems undesirable to
include them as positive records of this species in our area. Rather it is
better to suggest that it may be found in the warm waters of the southern
coasts of the eastern side of the Gulf and should be looked for there.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 251

RHODOPHYCEAE
Family Porphyridiaceae Kylin, 1937a
Genus GONIOTRICHUM Kitzing

Goniotrichum elegans (Chauvin) Le Jolis

Le Jolis, 1863, p. 103; Bgrgesen, 1915, p. 4, fig. 2. Goniotrichum Alsidi

(Zanard.) Howe, 1914, pp. 75, 76; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 741.

Filaments microscopic, monosiphonous, attached by one unmodified,
basal cell, pseudoramose, with a thick gelatinous wall.

Frequently found with other minute algae in various collections
throughout the Gulf.

The name Goniotrichum elegans has been chosen, following the argu-
ments of Bgrgesen. Zanardini’s name G. A/sidii, though antedating that
of Chauvin, should not be used, for as Bérgesen says: “‘it seems impossible,
judging from Zanardini’s description and figure to say quite certainly
which species of Goniotrichum we have to deal with.” In any case, there
should be no difficulty in recognizing the present entity in our region.

Family Bangiaceae
Genus ERY THROCLADIA Rosenvinge

Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 72; Kylin, 1925, p. 9, fig. 3 c-g. Erythrotrichia
polymorpha Setch. & Gard. (not of Howe), 1924, p. 741.

Specimens epiphytic on Polysiphonia, D. 402a, Pond Island, Febru-
ary, correspond precisely with Kylin’s figure (loc. cit.). The Erythro-
trichia polymorpha of Setchell and Gardner is undoubtedly a summer
example of this species. The disks are older, larger, and more extensively
spread than in the winter example. No young disks are present. The ab-
sence of any erect filaments on such material does not suggest its identity
with Howe’s Peruvian plant, which has abundant, long filaments charac-
teristic of the genus Erythropeltis.

Erythrocladia irregularis Rosenv.

Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 72; Kylin, 1925, p. 9, fig. 3 a, b.

Specimens growing on the surface of Dictyota, D. 718, Turner’s Is-
land, July, seem to correspond most nearly to the figures of this species.
They are not the same as Erythrocladia subintegra and have more of an
irregular structure when young. They had best be referred here awaiting
further investigation.

252 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Genus ERYTHROTRICHIA Aresch.
Erythrotrichia californica Kylin

Kylin, 1941, p. 3, fig. 1 A-D.

The examples at hand are 1000-1500 » high and 20-40 p» in diameter,
showing no cellular, basal disk. ‘Though somewhat smaller than plants
examined from Monterey, California, this is perhaps due to their scanti-
ness and immaturity. It seems best to refer the Gulf plants to the Cali-
fornian species rather than to Erythrotrichia Kylini from farther north,
which is also closely related here.

D. 686b, epiphytic on Sphacelaria, Tiburon Island, July.

Erythrotrichia carnea (Dillw.) J. Ag.
J. Agardh, 1883, p. 15; Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 67, fig. 8.

Several examples of this minute epiphytic red alga have been identi-
fied from various collections in the Gulf of California. It may be recog-
nized by its slender, unbranched filaments, 16-24 » diam., of cells slightly
longer than broad, attached only by the basal cell and a few minute
rhizines.

Genus ERYTHROPELTIS Schmitz
Erythropeltis discigera (Berthold) Schmitz

Schmitz, in Engler & Prantl, 1896, p. 313. Erythrotrichia discigera,
Kylin, 1937, p. 44, fig. 19 A-C.

Spreading disks of an epiphytic red which seems referable to this
species were detected on the fronds of Sphacelaria D. 686, Tiburon Is-
land, July. Short, erect filaments are present arising from the disks which
encircle the fronds of the host. Very close similarity is seen with the fig-
ures of Kylin, especially as to the appearance of the short, erect filaments.
Since the material is scanty and the erect filaments perhaps not fully de-
veloped, the present identification must be considered tentative.

The predominance of the spreading disk over the very short, erect
filaments suggests that this plant should best be distinguished under
Schmitz’ genus. Setchell, in a recent manuscript, has considered this treat-
ment most advisable and has included Erythrotrichia polymorpha Howe
and EF. pulvinata Gardner in this genus. By distinguishing the genus
Erythropeltis from Erythrotrichia because of its spreading basal disks, the
present species is set well apart from Erythrotrichia californica and E.
carnea here recorded from the Gulf. From Erythrocladia it is distinct in
possessing erect portions.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 253

Genus PORPHYRA J. Agardh
Porphyra perforata J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1883, p. 69; Hus, 1902, pl. XX, figs. 4a-10; Phyc. Bor.
Amer., no. 682.

Specimens agreeing very well with certain forms of this species as
they occur on the coast of California and the outer coast of Lower Cali-
fornia were collected from an abundance of material on the upper littoral
rocks at Agua Verde Bay, D. 539, February. The plants are greenish rose
colored when dry, up to 16 cm. high and with lanceolate fronds. The
habitat is also typical of the species. Our material is probably nearest to
what Setchell and Hus called Porphyra perforata f. segregata (loc. cit.).

Porphyra Thuretii Setchell & Dawson nom. nov.

Porphyra leucosticta Hus (not of Thuret) 1902, p. 199, pl. XX, figs. la-
3b; Howe, 1911, p. 499; Phyc. Bor. Amer., no. 376.

Fronds from a small, distinct disk, bearing a short but distinct stipe
with cordate base expanding into a broader or narrower oblong mem-
brane, 7-70 cm. long, 2-25 cm. broad, margins somewhat undulate, mono-
stromatic, cells once and a half to twice as broad as high (in transverse
section), surface jelly and jelly between cells thin, very readily soluble in
dried plants; monoecious, spermatangia forming small elongated patches
among the dark-colored cystocarps, the fruit at first marginal, gradually
developing over the whole frond, compact, no vegetative cells mixed with
the reproductive cells; vegetative frond 25-50 p thick, cystocarpic 25-50
p thick, spermatangial 30-50 p» thick; each cystocarp (simple) forming 8
spores (in two tiers) ; spermatangia (simple) forming 64 spermatia ar-
ranged in two spherical groups in each spermatangium; color pinkish.

Type: W. A. Setchell 5161 (Univ. Calif., Herb.), Pacific Grove,
California.

Specimens are also known in California from Santa Cruz and from
Monterey Bay, on rocks or sometimes epiphytic, March to May.

Hus has already called attention to the fact that the Pacific coast
specimens referred by him to Porphyra leucosticta Vhuret differed from
the European and N. E. Atlantic coast specimens in being more definitely
stipitate, in being a much lighter shade of red, and in the arrangement of
the spermatia within the spermatangium. Although the type specimen of
Thuret has not been studied, in view of these differences and the wide dis-
continuity in distribution it seems best to bestow upon the California

254 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

plant another specific name and to dedicate it to that Prince of Phycol-
ogists, Gustav Thuret.

The specimen from the Gulf of California referred by Howe (loc.
cit.) to this species has been re-examined, and his statements can here be
confirmed. It is undoubtedly very closely related if not identical with the
plants of the outer California coast. He also noted a difference from the
European plants, but followed Hus in his determination. Howe’s plant
was collected at San Felipe Bay by MacDougal, February, 1904, and
described as follows: ‘““Thallus monoecious; antheridia in spots and
streaks adjoining sporocarps, both unmixed with vegetative cells; carpo-
spores 8; spermatia 64; thallus disintegrating and deliquescing when
dried specimens are soaked in fresh water.”

Resembling the true Porphyra leucosticta, P. Thuretii also seems to
be a spring annual.

In relationship, P. Thuretii seems closer to the distromatic species as
regards the smaller number of spermatia and carpospores. Rosenvinge
(1909) says that the number of spermatia in P. leucosticta is often smaller
than 64 from each mother cell, and that “the carpogonia produce 4 and
8 spores in two layers.”

We are here considering Porphyra leucosticta and P. Thuretii as two
monostromatic species, closely related taxonomically, but widely separated
geographically.

Family Chantransiaceae

The plants of this family are small, even to microscopic, and unless
they occur in quantity on a given host or other substrate, most of them are
very easily overlooked. Consequently, many more species may be expected
in the Gulf of California than have thus far been detected.

It has been considered advisable to use the genus Rhodochorton in the
more expanded sense (Drew, 1928) in the designation of the species thus
far known from the Gulf.

Genus RHODOCHORTON (Naegeli) Drew
Rhodochorton microscopicum (Naeg.) Drew
Plate 41, Fig. 3

Drew, 1928, p. 163. Callithamnion microscopicum Kitzing, Tab. Phyc.
XI, pl. 58;:e.2.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 255

A large number of plants were found growing on a Polysiphonia taken
on shore at Turner’s Island, D. 737, July. They are 30-50 » high exclu-
sive of the long terminal hairs.

Rhodochorton arcuatum Drew

Drew, 1928, p. 165, pl. 37, figs. 1-3.

Specimens growing on the surface of Sphacelaria are quite identical
with the figure given by Drew. The plants are hairless, about 50 p long,
and consist of a few short branches of barrel-shaped cells. The plants may
be recognized further by the reclining position of the main branch in re-
lation to the host, always ascending at an acute angle (see Drew descrip-
tion, p. 165).

D. 686d, on Sphacelaria furcigera, Turner’s Island, July.

Rhodochorton Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 41, Figs. 4-6

Frondes epiphyticae, per cellulam unicam basalem non-amplificatam affixae;
filis erectis 500-1500 p longis, 5-7 u latis, leviter attenuatis, cellulis 3-4-plo diam.
longioribus; filis sterilibus rare, filis fertilibus frequenter, ramosis; ramellis curtis,
secundis, vulgo simplicibus, 2 (-pauci)-cellularibus; monosporis vulgo in ramellis
curtis lateralibusque terminalibus aut sessilibus, ovoideis, 6-7 w diam., 10-11 pu
longis.

Plants epiphytic, attached to host by a single, unenlarged basal cell ;
erect filaments abundant and very close together, slender, 500-1500 pu
long, 5-7 » diam., slightly attenuated to apices, with cells 3-4 diameters
long, cylindrical; sterile filaments rarely or almost unbranched in some
specimens, more frequently in others; fertile filaments more frequently
branched, with short, lateral, secund branchlets in series; branchlets
mostly simple, 2 (or several) celled, narrowed to 4 p diam., the cells 1.5-2
diam. long; reproduction known only by monospores; sporangia mostly
terminal on the short, lateral branchlets, sometimes sessile, ovoid, 6-7 p
diam., 10-11 p» long.

Type: D. 218a, growing on Gelidium, from shore of Puerto Re-
fugio, Jan. 27, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 16.

No other species has been described from the Pacific coast which has
the very long, simple branches and single unenlarged basal cell of this
plant. Many cross sections of the host have been made in endeavoring to
find penetrating filaments, but only the simple, epiphytic attachment of
the single cell has been seen in the type. The filaments arise, however,
densely over the whole surface of the host, innumerable simple strands at-

256 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

tached individually to the surface cells. Sterile specimens are so simple
in morphology (unbranched) that at first observation they do not seem
to resemble Rhodochorton.

In D. 381c, Tepoca Bay, February, a few filaments arising from
short, prostrate filaments seem otherwise like this species, though long
branching is more frequent. D. & R. 3425d, on Gracilaria, Guaymas, De-
cember, is a sterile example of this species.

A specimen from San Martin Island on the outer coast of Lower
California, H. 626, on Cystoseira, resembles this species very closely in
general appearance, but was tentatively named Rhodochorton variabile
Drew by N. L. Gardner in manuscript. The fragmentary material avail-
able seems to indicate a base of creeping filaments and in other respects
shows close similarity to D. 381c. These two collections may be mutually
identical and yet different from R. Hancockii, but, for the present, mate-
rial is not sufficiently ample to make positive determination. All of the
plants mentioned here differ from R. variabile in their smaller size and in
the more slender, less abundantly branched filaments. The branchlets,
moreover, are secund and mostly simple, of about 2 cells; those of R. vari-
abile are pinnate and mostly compound.

Rhodochorton sinicola sp. nov.
Plate 41, Figs. 1, 2

Frondes epiphyticae, 300-500 p altae, per cellulam basalem multo-dilatatam,
affixae et ex ea filis uno aut multis, prope basim copiose, superne laxe ramosis ori-
entibus; ramis cylindricis, 4-5.6 w diam., cellulis 3-5-aut 6-plo diam. longioribus,
compositis; monosporis in ramellis, 2-cellularibus, lateralibus, secundis positis, 11-
14 w longis, ovoideis, uni-et angustiori pedicellatis; spermatangiis prope 4-5 pu
longis, laxe et terminali aggregatis in ramellis brevibus lateralibusque, positis.

Plants epiphytic, 300-500 ». high, attached by a single, much-enlarged
basal cell which may be embedded between the surface cells of the host;
basal cell giving rise to from one to several erect filament-axes which
branch abundantly near their bases, less frequently above; branches longer
above, cylindrical throughout, not markedly attenuated, 4-5.6 » diam.,
cells mostly 3-5, or 6 diameters long; chromatophore parietal; asexual
reproduction by monospores; monosporangia borne terminally on usually
2-celled lateral secund branchlets, 11-14 long, ovoid, the 1-celled pedicel
very much smaller in diam.; antheridia in loose, terminal clusters on
short, branching lateral branchlets, ellipsoidal, about 4.5 p» long.

Type: D. 739, on Dictyota, shore of Turner’s Island, July 18,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 17.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 257

This species, with its enlarged basal cell and long, slender, free
filaments, does not correspond to any known described plant. The pecu-
liar, partly embedded basal cell and the basal branching habit together
with its very slender diameter distinguish it clearly.

Family Bonnemaisoniaceae
Genus ASPARAGOPSIS Montagne
Asparagopsis Sanfordiana Harv.

Harvey, 1855, p. 544; 1858-63, pl. VI. Asparagopsis Sanfordiana f. am-
plissima 8. & G., 1924, p. 760, pl. 22, fig. 3, pl. 41.

Abundant material of this widely distributed Pacific species was taken
from a dredge-haul in Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, 12-22 meters, D.
268, January.

A comparison of the material from the Gulf, including the rather poor
specimens of Marchant’s collection from Eureka, does not indicate to the
author sufficient difference to merit the retention of the suggested name
given above in synonymy. Examples seen from the coast of southern Cali-
fornia likewise seem to correspond well with the typical species as figured
by Harvey (1858, pl. VI). There may, however, be some query regard-
ing the application of the same name to all of the Pacific plants which
have been considered to belong here, since Harvey’s type from Australia
has not been re-examined and verified so far as can be determined. The
gross morphological nature of our plants is, nevertheless, so distinct that
they need not be confused with any other Pacific coast algae.

Family Chaetangiaceae
Genus SCINAIA Bivona

Scinaia Johnstoniae Setchell

Setchell, 1914, p. 97, pl. 11, figs. 14, 15. Scinaia furcellata var. undulata
Howe, 1911, p. 502 (not Ginannia undulata Mont.).

Scinaia Johnstoniae is a sublittoral plant recorded thus far from
southern California, the outer coast of Lower California, and from sev-
eral stations in the Gulf. It is the only cylindrical, nonconstricted species
known on our Pacific coast.

D. 235, cast up, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 137, dredged, 4-12 m.,
off Tiburon Island, Jan.; D. 50, dredged, 4-6 m., Guaymas Bay, Jan.;
D. 281a, dredged 12-22 m., Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; J. 46,
dredged, Los Angeles Bay; J. 106, San Pedro Martir Island; J. 114, San
Esteban Island.

258 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Scinaia latifrons Howe

Howe, 1911, p. 500, fig. 1, pl. 28; Setchell, 1914, p. 102, pl. 11, fig. 23.

Scinaia latifrons is the broadest and most differentiated of the com-
planate species of the genus. The figures given by Howe are sufficient to
distinguish it immediately. It has been recorded sparingly from the outer
coast of the Californias, but in the Gulf seems to be very abundant in
certain sublittoral localities. S. Johnstoniae often grows with S. latifrons
in the same sublittoral habitats.

D. 82, dredged, 12-20 m., outside Guaymas Harbor, Jan.; D. 136,
dredged, 4-32 m., off Tiburon Island, Jan.; D. 277, dredged, 12-22 m.,
in Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; M. 53, 57, cast ashore, Guay-
mas; Vives, La Paz.

Genus GALAXAURA Lamouroux
Galaxaura fastigiata Dec’ne

Kjellman, 1900, p. 64, tab. 9, figs. 1-3, tab. 20, fig. 4; Tanaka, 1936, p.
157,20.

Only two sterile specimens of this widely distributed Pacific species
have been taken, both in beach-drift.

J. W. Durham, at Red Bluff Point, Tiburon Island, Dec. 2, 1940;
Poindexter, at Punta Pefiasco, March, 1941.

The specimens are cylindrical, smooth, and light pink to greenish in
color. They fall in the generally recognized subgroup Eugalaxaura.

Galaxaura marginata (Solander) Kjellm.

Kjellman, 1900, p. 77, tab. 20, fig. 44. Corallina marginata Solander, in
Ellis & Solander, 1786, p. 115, tab. 22, fig. 6; Bérgesen, 1915,
p. 106, figs. 115-117, pp. 458-459.

A single imperfect example, which seems nearest to the West Indian
species Galaxaura marginata, was dredged in 40 meters at San Jose del
Cabo, H. 601, August. It was so determined by N. L. Gardner. The per-
ipheric assimilating cells are broadly rounded. No apiculae such as Bérge-
sen illustrates have yet been observed.

Family Gelidiaceae
Genus GELIDIUM Lamouroux
Gelidium pusillum (Stack.) Le Jolis (in extenso)
Plate 42, Figs. 1-6
Le Jolis, 1863, p. 139; Feldmann & Hamel, 1936, p. 236, figs. 19, 20;
Bérgesen, 1920, p. 280, fig. 26. Fucus pusillus Stackhouse, 1801,
tab. 6. Fucus caespitosus Stackhouse, 1801, tab. 12.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 259

This variable and widely distributed small plant has been recorded
from many parts of the world: the coasts of Spain, the Mediterranean
and Adriatic, Australia, Easter Island, England, Japan, etc. Recent Pa-
cific collections, among which are several specimens from the Gulf of
California, have given this species a wide distribution along the western
coast of America, from the Galapagos Archipelago to central California.
Variation is sometimes extreme, and with our still scanty collections from
this very large area it seems hardly advisable to burden the nomenclature
with additional names for variations which seem largely ecologic in this
plant, notwithstanding the fact that some of them may ultimately be des-
ignated as separate entities. Illustrations of the major extremes are given
here together with locality citations for all specimens thus far available.
From these, any given specimen may at least be conveniently placed with
other plants nearest like it.

Tall forms 12-16 mm. high, with strongly flattened linear-oblong or
linear-clavate blades, blunt or frequently attenuated at the ends, com-
monly irregularly pinnate-branched or proliferating into narrow lobes.

H. 367, 659, Galapagos Archipelago; Dodge, H. 783, Costa Rica:
D. 79, middle to lower littoral, Guaymas Bay, Jan.; D. 211a, Puerto
Refugio, Jan.

Forms in which the cylindrical lower parts are more conspicuous, fre-
quently branched and having flattened, linear-clavate blades which are
usually entire. Plants, on the whole, not strongly flattened.

D. 135c, lower littoral, Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. 328, Gonzaga Bay,
Jan.; D. & R. 3299, near Guaymas, Dec.; D. 783, southern California.

Small, depauperate forms, 5 mm. high or less.

H. 479, 479a, Galapagos Archipelago; H. 779a, Costa Rica; H.
572h, 569b, Clarion Island; D. 684, near channel at Tiburon Island,
July.

These small forms frequently produce a short stubble over rock sur-
faces and may be associated with the following larger form which, with
its shorter, broader blades and larger size, forms scattered little tufts and
does not give the uniform “furry” appearance of the dwarf form.

H. 279, 315, 564, 533, Galapagos Archipelago; H. 269, 492, 572,
211, Clarion Island.

Gelidium crinale (Turn.) Lamour.

Lamouroux, 1825, p. 191; Feldmann & Hamel, 1936, p. 240, fig. 22;
Okamura, Icon. Jap. Alg. III, Pl. CXLVI. Acrocarpus crinalis
Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XVIII, tab. 33.

260 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

The several Gulf specimens, particularly D. 692, are similar to ex-
amples of this species known from the coast of California. They are fre-
quently somewhat more flattened in the upper parts, but, on the whole,
seem quite properly to belong here. Agreement with European specimens
likewise is sufficiently close that they may be placed together to further
extend the already wide distribution of Gelidium crinale.

D. 692, 702, lower littoral, Turner’s Island, July; D. 322a, on shore
at Gonzaga Bay, Jan.

Gelidium microphysa S. & G.
Setch. & Gard., 1930, p. 151, pl. 9, fig. 31.

This outstanding small species was described from Guadalupe Island,
Lower California, and until now has been known only from the type
specimen. A comparison of the cross sections of the frond of the type with
that of the present specimens shows that they are undoubtedly identical.
This is the only species on our Pacific coast which possesses interlacing
rhizoidal filaments in the cortex and medulla instead of straight ones. In
other species a cross section severs these filaments at right angles, while
in G. microphysa they are found running in all directions.

D. 726, found growing on lower littoral rocks, Turner’s Island, July.

Gelidium decompositum S. & G.
Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 743, pl. 71.

J. 23, on rocks in lower littoral, San Francisquito Bay, June. Not
collected since.

Gelidium decompositum is said to differ chiefly from G. Johnstonii,
with which it is closely related, in the greater irregularity of the length of
the pinnae, which are mostly very decidedly crowded together and stand
more nearly perpendicular to the parts from which they arise. The plants
also are smaller in all of their dimensions. The cells of the subcortex, and
especially the cells of the medulla, are decidedly larger and thicker walled.

Gelidium Johnstonii S. & G.
Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 742, pls. 46a, 72, 73.

This is the largest and most abundant species in the Gulf, and, from
collections made thus far, seems to be a spring annual. The material col-
lected in January and February is very largely young, or at least im-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 261

mature. The late July collections from Turner’s Island, too, are depau-
perate. Johnston’s collections made in June are large and luxuriant, seem-
ing to indicate a maximum of development. Undoubtedly, it is of rather
wide and general distribution on rocky shores in the upper half of the
Gulf being favored by moderately cool water.

J.27 (AHF no. 69), San Francisquito Bay, June; J. 12, San Marcos
Island, June; D. & R. 3228, tide pools near Guaymas, Dec.; D. 105,
reef at Turner’s Island, Jan., 693, July; D. 492a, Catalina Bay, near
Guaymas, Feb.; D. 403, Pond Island, Feb.; D. 387, Tepoca Bay, Feb.;
D. 294, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Gelidiella acerosa (Forsk.) Feldm. & Hamel

Feldmann & Hamel, 1934, p. 6; Okamura, 1936, p. 472, fig. 218. Gelidi-
opsis rigida (Vahl) Weber-van Bosse, 1928, p. 427, fig. 172.
Echinocaulon rigidum Kitzing, Tab. Phyc. XVIII, tab. 40, E.
spinellum, tab. 39, E. ramulliferum, tab. 39.

This is the largest species in our area and is easily recognized by its
robust branches, 400-700 » diam., and wiry texture. It is of more or less
tropical distribution in many parts of the world. In the Gulf it has been
encountered only in the warmer waters of the southern extremity, pre-
ferring protected pools or the shallow waters of quiet lagoons.

D. 594, growing on or in coral heads on the bottom of shallow San
Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.; D. 610, on rocks in oyster-
culture ponds, same locality; D. 633, in rock pools, San Jose del Cabo
Bay, Feb.

Gelidiella Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 43, Figs. 1-2

Frondes usque ad 2 cm. longae, prorsus cylindricae, pro maxima parte 200 w
diam., e partibus repentibus rhizoideo affixis, multo ramosae; ramis e superficiebus
partium repentium pro maxima parte superis, ramis erectis simplicibus, apicibus
acutis; tetrasporangiis in corticibus transformatis ramellorum brevium lente tumi-
dorum aut apicium ramellorum positis.

Plants forming small, tangled tufts on rock surfaces ; individual plants
to 2 cm. in length, wiry, cylindrical throughout with an average diameter
of about 200 », much branched from crooked, semicreeping parts which
form rhizoidal attachments to rocks or other surfaces by means of abun-
dant, short rhizoids which arise in a mass on the under sides; branching
from prostrate parts polystichous but mostly from upper side, the erect
branches mostly entire, only occasionally branching secondarily, this being

262 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

confined largely to the prostrate parts; apices acute, not attenuated; cor-
tex and subcortex of about 3 layers of more or less isodiametrical cells
surrounding a large medulla of elongated cells, the two areas not very
distinct in cross sections; tetraspores produced abundantly in cortical
cavities of slightly swollen short branchlets or tips of branches.

‘Type: (tetrasporic) D. 651, on middle littoral rocks, rocky point 3
mi. north of Kino, July 16, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 18.

D. 288, rocky shore, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Gelidiella mexicana sp. nov.
Plate 43, Fig. 3

Frondes 4-6 mm. altae, floccosae; ramis cylindricis, 120-180 diam.; filis
erectis copiosis, e partibus brevibus, prostratis, rhizoideo-affixis; apicibus acutis;
tetrasporangiis nondum visis.

Plants 4-6 mm. high, forming small, dense tufts, cylindrical through-
out, 120-180 » in diam.; erect parts rising abundantly from short, pros-
trate parts firmly attached to the substratum by abundant short rhizoids,
frequently and irregularly polystichously branched above the prostrate
parts ; apices acute, not attenuated ; cortex and subcortex of about 3 layers
of cells, not very distinct in cross section from the large medulla; tetra-
spores unknown.

Type: D. 401a, on middle littoral rocks with other small algae, Pond
Island, Feb. Herb. AHF no. 19.

D. 328a, shore of Gonzaga Bay, Jan. (somewhat larger throughout,
150-200 p diam.).

D. & R. 3227, from tide pools, Cabo Arco near Guaymas, December,
may be distinct yet closely related here, but the specimens are not suffi-
ciently mature to merit description. It is similar in size and apparently
in branching but is not so closely tufted, has arching stolons of smaller
diameter than the rest of the parts and attachment organs only at points
opposite the erect branches, these points being spanned by short, arching
stolons. More material of this form is needed to establish its identity.

Gelidiella P refugiensis sp. nov.
Plate 43, Figs. 4-6

Frondes 1-1.5 cm. altae, ramis erectis divaricatisque, 150-300 uw diam., sub-
cylindricis usque ad compressis compositae; ramificatione vulgo disticha, laxa, ir-
regulari; partibus prostratis exiguis, per uncos disciformes parvos irregulares af-
fixis; apicibus acutis; sporis subsphericis indivisis (monosporis) in subcorticibus
caverno excavatis ramorum, brevium, terminalium positis, 20-50 diam.; per
foramina subcorticis emittentibus.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 263

Plants 1-1.5 cm. high, of slender, erect, and spreading branches 150-
300 » in diameter, subcylindric to compressed; branching mainly dis-
tichous, loose, irregular; prostrate parts not extensive, apparently not
stoloniferous; holdfasts of rather small, irregular attachment-disks, not
conspicuous in our material; apices acute, somewhat attenuated; cortex
and subcortex of about 3 layers of cells surrounding a filament-free me-
dulla; subspherical spores borne in cavities in the subcortex of short,
acute terminal branchlets which are not conspicuously swollen and cor-
respond in general to typical tetrasporic ramuli of the genus Gelidiella,
but spores apparently undivided (monospores) when shed, 20-50 p» diam.,
discharged through openings in the cortex.

Type: D. 237, cast up on beach at north shore of Puerto Refugio,
Jan. 28, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 20.

The observation of what are apparently large monospores rather than
tetraspores in these specimens leaves their true nature in doubt. The spe-
cies is more or less typically Gelidiella in all other respects and must be
placed here to await further investigation.

Genus WURDEMANNIA Harvey
Wurdemannia miniata (Drap.) Feldm. & Hamel

Feldmann & Hamel, 1936, p. 260, figs. 34-36. Wurdemannia setacea
Bérgesen, 1929, p. 268, figs. 360, 361 ; Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XIX,
tab. 26. Gelidium miniatum Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XVIII, tab. 58.

This species is characterized throughout its wide area of distribution,
according to Feldmann and Hamel, by its habit of forming dense mats
of slender, branched erect filaments 0.5-2 cm. high. These filaments are
cylindrical, irregularly branched, without an apical cell, and with a
medullary cone of elongated cells.

The collections in the Gulf have yielded two sets of specimens which
correspond very well to the above concept of this species. A specimen from
Carmen Island, Palmer, 1870, matches especially well the description
and illustrations quoted above. It forms a dense mat about 2.5 cm. high.

D. 614 from San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, another warm-
water locality, is the same. These plants are 2-2.8 cm. high and form
similar mats sometimes as large as 15-20 cm. across.

The collection of this species in the perennially warm parts of the
Gulf corresponds to the habitat of the plant as found in other parts of
the world.

264 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Two other species have been found which show the same anatomical
structures as WVurdemannia: rounded tip without apical cell, central
medullary cone of elongated cells. These, however, are much larger in
size and do not develop the closely matted habit. Some of them correspond
perfectly with the type of Gelidiopsis tenuis S. & G., while the largest
specimens, 8-10 cm., are very much like Gelidiopsis variabilis. More de-
tailed notes on these plants will be found below.

As Feldmann and Hamel have stated (loc. cit., p. 263) “Cette Alge
n’est pas une Gélidiacée; elle en differe par sa structure de type fastigié
et ses tétrasporanges zonés. Elle est généralment rangée parmi les Gigarti-
nales, mais, en l’absence de cystocarpe, sa position systématique est encoure
douteuse.”

Genus GELIDIOPSIS Schmitz

Schmitz, 1895-1896, p. 143; Feldmann, 1931, p. 156; Bérgesen, 1937,
P.ooZ ke

Since the original investigations of Schmitz in 1895, no authors have
observed or studied cystocarps of this genus. Schmitz originally placed it
with Ceratodictyon in the family Rhodymeniaceae. Feldmann does not
offer further suggestions or elucidations on its proper position. Okamura,
1936, has likewise placed it beside Ceratodictyon, but in the Gracilaria-
ceae. Bérgesen, loc. cit., p. 321, has not followed these precedents and
has placed it in the Gelidiaceae. This latter interpretation seems to be the
best, for Wurdemannia, with which it is most closely allied anatomically,
in the absence of knowledge of its sexual nature, is generally placed here.
With this consideration in mind, we will allow it to stand in this group,
awaiting more abundant knowledge of the life histories of our plants.

Gelidiopsis tenuis S. & G.
Plate 70, Fig. 1 (right)
Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 749, pl. 22, fig. 2.

Fronds 2-4 cm. long, .5-.8 mm. in diam., cylindrical to compressed,
sparsely and irregularly branched, long attenuate, semiacute; without an
apical cell; medulla of elongated cells in longitudinal section; reproduc-
tion unknown.

Several collections which undoubtedly are identical with the type of
Gelidiopsis tenuis are on hand from a number of stations in the Gulf and
from Clarion Island. They are similar in structure to W’urdemannia
miniata but are larger in all dimensions and do not form densely felted
mats like that species. Though fertile material is still unknown, this

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 265

species, as Setchell and Gardner have pointed out, is sufficiently distinct
to be rather readily recognized. The Gulf plants are about intermediate
in size between Wurdemannia miniata and Gelidiopsis variabilis, and
may be identified further by their loosely caespitose habit.

This is apparently another warm-water species. Most of our material
is from the southern extremity of the Gulf and southward.

M. 104 (Univ. of Calif.; isotype, AHF no. 21), cast ashore, Santa
Rosalia; H. 514, Sulphur Bay, Clarion Island; H. 605, dredged in 40
m. off San Jose del Cabo, Aug.; D. & R. 3134c, on rocks along shore,
Guaymas, Dec.; D. 543, 533b, in rock pockets, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.;
D. 475b, dredged in 30-36 m., Ensenada de San Francisco, near Guay-
mas, Feb.

Gelidiopsis variabilis (Grev.) Schmitz
Plate 70, Fig. 1 (left)
Schmitz, 1895, p. 148; De Toni, 1900, 410. Gelidium variabile Kitzing,
Tab. Phyc. XIX, tab. 23.

A very fine collection of plants which correspond in all determinable
characters with this species was made from rocks below tide level, Punta
San Pedro, Guaymas, D. & R. 3395, December. The plants are 8-10 cm.
high, abundantly branched, the whole mass forming a rounded, caespitose
clump of erect and divaricate branches. The blunt apices without an
apical cell and the elongated medullary cells remind one of the genus
W urdemannia, but these examples are much larger and of a looser habit
throughout. Gelidiopsis variabilis is a semitropical species known from
East Africa, the Indian ocean, the East Indies, and from northern For-
mosa. The latter locality is at the same latitude as the station in the
Gulf of California.

Though a consideration of the very wide discontinuity in distribution
would seem to discount from the likelihood of our plants being identical
with G. variabilis, the similarities are such that in the absence of fertile
material it is best to place them here awaiting further investigation.

Family Squamariaceae
Genus HILDENBRANDTIA Nardo
Hildenbrandtia rosea Kiitzing

Kiitzing, 1843, p. 384; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 787.

Excellent tetrasporic material of this species has been detected on
rocks with corallines taken from the reef at Turner’s Island, D. 757b,
July. The closely attached crusts are dark brown in color, irregularly
lobed, and spreading to about 2 cm.

266 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Family Cruoriaceae
Petrocelis sp.

A few sterile examples of a Petrocelis species have been noted on the
surface of rocks from various stations in the Gulf. We shall have to await
the detection of fertile material before determination can be made.

Family Corallinaceae
Genus LITHOPHYLLUM Philippi
Lithophyllum pallescens (Foslie) Heydr.
Plate 55, Fig. 4

Heydrich, 1901, p. 531. Lithothamnion racemus Hariot, 1895, p. 169 (in
part), not of Lamarck. Lithothamnion pallescens Foslie, 1895, p.
4 figs. 11-13;' 1897, p. 13+ 1901, p.. 20: 1909,’ p. 36-1920 ter.
LXIV, figs. 15-17; Lemoine, 1911, pp. 156-158, figs. 87-91.
Goniolithon ? pallescens Foslie, 1898, p. 9. Lithothamnion (Lepi-
domorphum) pallescens Foslie, 1901, p. 20. Lithophyllum califor-
niense Heydrich, 1901, p. 530.

Lemoine has given (1911) a fine account of the anatomy of this plant
as well as a description of its habit and distribution. According to a map
made by M. Diguet and transcribed by Madame Lemoine, the type lo-
cality of this species is found to be along a sublittoral bank off the west
shore of the main body of Espiritu Santo Island rather than in La Paz
Bay proper. It abounds in great quantity on the pearl-fishing banks and is
known by the natives as chicaron. Recent collections have been made in
this region and have yielded specimens identical with those of the type
collection, part of which is preserved in the Herbarium of the University
of California. D. 572 was collected from the bottom of the shallow la-
goon of San Gabriel, Espiritu Santo Island. D. 593b, in 12-26 m. in San
Lorenzo Channel. No other specimens can positively be assigned to this
species, which would seem to be confined to warm waters in the Gulf. Of
this species Foslie says, however (Sib. Exp., 1904, p. 33), “Lithophyllum
pallescens Fosl. (including L. californiense Heydr.) from the Gulf of
California is so closely allied to Lithophyllum Okamurae from the Pa-
cific coast of Japan and several places in the Malay Archipelago, that the
limit is hardly to be drawn.”

Lithophyllum ? Margaritae (Hariot) Heydr.

Heydrich, 1901, p. 530; Lemoine, 1911, pp. 173-175, fig. 100. Litho-
thamnion Margaritae Hariot, 1895, p. 167. Lithothamnion ele-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 267

gans Foslie, 1895, including forma angulata and f. complanata,
p. 6, pl. 1, figs. 9, 10. Goniolithon (Cladolithon) elegans Foslie,
1899, p. 8. Lithophyllum elegans Foslie, 1909, p. 27; 1929, pl.
LMI, figs, 1, 2:

Lemoine has given careful analysis of all of the habit and structural
features of this unique species, which has never yet been rediscovered.
From Lemoine’s map of La Paz Bay, after Diguet’s records, showing the
localities of the coralline banks, the “grisement” of L. Margaritae is indi-
cated lying off the outer shore of Isla San Juan Nepomucens, which itself
lies just off the lighthouse point a few miles north of the city of La Paz.
No other dredgings have been made in that vicinity, and apparently this
species is of limited distribution. Its remarkable habit and the now pre-
cisely identified type locality should make it readily recognized when
collections are again made in that region.

Lithophyllum ? trichotomum (Heydr.) Lem.
Plate 55, Fig. 2; Plate 58, Figs. 1, 4-6; Plate 60

Lemoine, 1929, p. 45. Lithothamnion ? trichotomum Heydrich, 1901,
p. 538.

Examples of Diguet’s type collection sent from the Museum of Paris
by Madame Lemoine are labeled: Lithothamnion trichotomum Heydr.
= Lithophyllum trichotomum (Hey.) Lem. (le structure est celle des
Lithophyllum). These specimens have been compared with recent collec-
tions and found to match material from several localities.

D. 425, in shallow lagoon at Pond Island, Feb.; D. 226, on rocky
shore of west side of Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 619, shallow water, San
Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.; M. 15, Eureka, May.

This plant resembles in habit Lithophyllum frutescens (Foslie) Lem.
(1911, p. 144) of the Indian and South Pacific oceans.

‘Two types of conceptacles have been observed, but neither carpospores
nor tetrasporangia can be described. In D. 619 large superficial concep-
tacles which seem to be antheridial occur, 800 p» in external diameter,
broadly ovate conical with a single pore in the tip of the neck. In both
other collections large empty conceptacles have been found deeply em-
bedded and connected to the surface by a long canal. They are 450-500 p
in diam. and occur in the broader portions of the fronds at the point of
junction of the branches. Externally these plants may be distinguished
from other known Pacific American species by their smooth, slender
branches and particularly by the truncate tips which usually appear as
white or light-colored ‘“‘caps” to the branches.

268 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Foslie and Howe (1906) have illustrated Goniolithon strictum var.
nana, which is in many ways strikingly like the present species. Should
the large conceptacles prove to be tetrasporangial, this plant would
probably fall into Goniolithon. In this case it will be difficult to establish
points of distinction between the Gulf plants, G. frutescens and G.
strictum. The last two species are admittedly indistinct (Foslie & Howe,

1906, p. 131).

Lithophyllum Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 55, Fig. 1; Plate 62, Fig. 1

Frondes crusta tenui affixae, ramos dense et irregulariter conglobatos emit-
tentes, usque ad 7 cm. altae; ramis superne 1.5 mm. diam., verrucosis forma irreg-
ularibusque, inferne multo coalescentibus, superne liberis; conceptaculis tetra-
sporangiiferis profunde immersis, 240 u diam., 110 pu altis, poro apicali aperienti-
bus, columna centrali paraphysium e basi assurgenti et tetrasporangiis circumdata.

Plants attached to corals and stones by a thin crust, shrubby, forming
densely and irregularly branched clusters to 7 cm. high and 10 cm. across;
branches about 1.5 mm. diam. in upper parts, warty and irregular in
form, much coalesced or anastomosed, but free in upper parts, with
rounded or truncate apices, in longitudinal section showing a large hypo-
thallic region and a sometimes feebly, sometimes well-developed peri-
thallic layer, up to 250 y thick; hypothallus cells in upper parts 8-11 p
broad by 18-23 pu long, symmetrically arranged in very regular concentric
rows; perithallus cells usually short, square or slightly flattened to 1.5
times as long as broad, usually distinctly smaller in all dimensions than
hypothallus cells and somewhat less regularly arranged; tetrasporic con-
ceptacles deeply immersed, 240 » diam., 110 p» high, opening with a
single apical pore, with a central column of paraphyses, rising from the
conceptacle floor and surrounded by tetrasporangia, these 50-60 p» by
25-30 p.

Type: D.619a, shallow water of San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo
Island, February 14, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 22.

This plant shows considerable resemblance to Lithophyllum trichot-
omum but may be distinguished on several points. The clusters are larger
than are common in the latter species, the branching more irregular and
warty, more compact and anastomosed throughout. Whereas in L. trichot-
omum the outgrowths of the basal crust are straight, erect, symmetrical
structures, those of L. Hancockii arise as irregular lobed branches. The
conceptacles are much smaller than any observed in L. trichotomum. It
differs from L. frutescens in the size of the tetrasporic conceptacles and
tetrasporangia.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 269

Lithophyllum lithophylloides Heydr.
Plate 55, Fig. 3; Plate 58, Figs. 2, 3, 7; Plate 59, Figs. 9, 10; Plate 61, Fig. 1
Heydrich, 1901, p. 531, with formae bracchiata and phylloides. Lithophyl-
lum bracchiatum Lemoine, 1929, p. 44. Lithothamnion racemus
Hariot (in part) 1895, p. 169, not of Lamarck.

Specimens of Diguet’s type collection, which has received the particu-
lar attention of Heydrich and Lemoine, have been re-examined in the
light of recent collections. Some of the author’s material has proved iden-
tical with Heydrich’s form phylloides, and some approaches closely the
slender branching form dracchiata. In comparing all these specimens their
similarities are far more striking than their differences, particularly the
internal structure. It seems best, therefore, to consider them under the
same name and to illustrate here some of the degrees of variation in these
plants. The size of protuberances is particularly variable as are the
amount and form of branching.

Tetrasporic conceptacles range between 250 and 300 » and correspond
in all material observed.

The principal internal characters of the plants are the very small size
of the thallus cells (7-12 » in greatest diameter) and their habit of over-
growth forming successive layers of tissue through which the prominent
and abundant conceptacles may be found at all levels.

D. 250, 251, dredge-haul in 21 fathoms, west side of Puerto Refugio,
shell bottom, Jan. (some specimens identical with type of L. lithophyl-
loides f. phylloides) ; D. 572a, bottom of shallow lagoon, San Gabriel
Bay; D. 278, 279, dredged in Mejia channel, 12-22 m., Puerto Refugio,
Jan.; D. 513, dredged in 16-24 m., sand bottom, Puerto Escondido, Feb.

Differences in general aspect are often due to the difference in age of
surface tissues. Rapidly growing, spreading crusts are composed only of
hypothallic tissue of rectangular, closely joined cells. This is brighter pink
in color and smoother in texture. When perithallic tissue is developed, the
surface becomes more roughened and raised into excrescences. The cells
are rounded and in looser “filamentous” vertical rows. In some cases
where spreading crusts are growing over old perithallic layers it seems as
if two species are present. Conceptacles may be borne in either young or
older crusts and are developed successively as the crusts thicken.

Lithophyllum Digueti (Hariot) Heydr.
Plate 59, Figs. 8, 11-16
Heydrich, 1901, p. 532. Lithothamnion Digueti Hariot, 1895, p. 168.
Lithothamnion dentatum Foslie, 1895, p. 4, fig. 15 (not of
Hauck.). Lithophyllum Diguetii, Foslie, 1909, p. 26; 1929, pl.
LXI, fig. 8; Lemoine, 1911, p. 120.

270 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Two additional collections of this unique and attractive species have
recently been obtained. They have been compared with a specimen of the
type collection and found to agree well. Variation is prominent in the
degree of branching and in the thickness and extent of the flat segments.

D. 591, dredged in 12-26 m., San Lorenzo Channel, Feb. (Diguet’s
type specimens came from very near this locality) ; D. 281, dredged in
Mejia Channel, Puerto Refugio, 12-22 m., Jan.

Lithophyllum veleroae sp. nov.
Plate 55, Fig. 5; Plate 56, Figs. 1-4

Frondes in forma globorum sphericorum, 4-6 cm. diam., semisolidae, laminis
multifariam radiantibus anastomosantibusque compositae; conceptaculis tetraspor-
angiiferis immersis, 225-275 uw diam., 100-125 wu altis, columnam centralem para-
physium et porum singulum apicale ostendentibus.

Thallus forming rounded galls 4-6 cm. diam., semisolid, formed of
anastomosed plates radiating in all directions; outer surface intricately
designed by the wavy, intersecting double margins of the plates, the edges
of each of the major anastomosing plates parted at the surface into two
sharp ridges bordering a shallow channel (much as in some forms of L.
dentatum) ; these channels and ridges sometimes more or less continuous,
sometimes broken, give the plant a distinctive appearance; thallus com-
posed of a massive hypothallus of more or less radiating rows of oblong-
rectangular cells 16-20 » high, grading into a usually well-developed peri-
thallus of square or subspherical cells 9-10 » high, in compact vertical
rows; perithallus sometimes highly developed and stratified ; tetraspor-
angial conceptacles immersed, 225-275 p» diam., low, 100-125 p» high, with
a median paraphysis column and a single apical pore; tetrasporangia about
45 by 22 uw; cystocarps and antheridia unknown.

Type: D. 592, dredged in 12-26 meters, San Lorenzo Channel,
Espiritu Santo Island, Feb. 14, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 23.

In habit this species shows considerable similarity to Lithophyllum
dentatum f. dilatata of the Irish coast (Foslie, 1929, pl. LXII, figs. 8, 9).
The channeling of the margins of the anastomosed plates is stronger, how-
ever, and the marginal ridges are sharper.

Lithophyllum decipiens Foslie
Plate 57, Fig. 20

Foslie, 1897, p. 20; 1900, p. 71; Mason, p. 119, pls. 17, 18.

Sections of tetrasporic material from the Gulf of California have been
compared with sections of a duplicate type and found to correspond in
all essential details.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 211

This species is frequently encountered growing on beach or reef stones
in the northern Gulf.

D. & R. 3373, between tide marks, Guaymas, Dec.; D. 227, on shore,
Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 465, San Esteban Island, Feb.; D. 479, Puerto

San Carlos, near Guaymas, Feb.

Genus LITHOTHAMNION Philippi
Lithothamnion australe Fosl. f. americana Foslie
Plate 56, Figs. 5-10; Plate 57, Figs. 11-16

Foslie, 1900, p. 13; Foslie, in Weber-van Bosse, 1904, pp. 25, 27, fig. 10.
Lithothamnion coralloides f. australis Foslie, 1895, p. 8, figs. 6, 7.
Specimens of Diguet’s collection from the Gulf were the basis for the
species Lithothamnion australe (Foslie, 1904, p. 25). They were then
named f. americana, as other forms were proposed from the South Pacific.
Some material of recent collections is undoubtedly identical with Diguet’s
plants from the Gulf figured by Foslie (1895). The present material,
however, is sterile, and we can therefore only follow Foslie, who says:
“The question whether the forms from the East-Indian Archipelago actu-
ally belong to the same species as the American form is not to be settled at
present, the material partly in the main consisting of sterile specimens,
partly being too small. There are several specimens in the collection in
hand which are in almost full conformity with the said American form.
It is, however, to be observed that specimens of rather widely different
species may often resemble each other in habit as well as in structure, and
accordingly cannot be defined with certainty, when sterile. Besides it
cannot—as yet—be ascertained to what extent there is a connection—as
to this group of the algal flora—between the East-Indian Archipelago and
the Pacific Coast of America.”

Three collections are at hand containing specimens referable to forms
of this plant: D. 61, dredged in 4-6 meters, Guaymas Bay, Jan.; D. 593a,
dredged in 12-26 m., San Lorenzo Channel, Feb.; D. 278a, dredged in
12-22 m., Mejia Channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

In D. 61 the material is largely uniform and compares closely to Di-
guet’s original specimens, also to figures of form bracchiata from the
South Pacific. In D. 593a there is great variation; some material is iden-
tical in habit with form bracchiata, others with form uwhiana and form
tualensis. Some with thickest branches resemble Lithothamnion monterey-
icum. D. 278a is a variable set similar throughout to D. 593a.

That all this variation is produced by the same species is evident in
some specimens, part of which branch like form bracchiata, while an op-
posite side branches like form ubiana.

Bi2 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Genus HETERODERMA Foslie
Heteroderma Gibbsii (Fosl. & Setch.) Fosl.

Foslie, 1909, p. 56. Melobesia Gibbsii Foslie & Setchell, in Foslie, 1907,
p. 26:

Lacking a satisfactory figure of the characters of the type material, the
description has been expanded and clarified as follows by Mason (un-
published thesis manuscript) :

Thallus crustaceous, epiphytic upon Sargassum, Dictyota, Padina,
etc., suborbicular at first, later irregular with adjacent thalli confluent,
partially monostromatic; cells square, 7-12 » diam., or elongated parallel
to the substratum, 11-16 » long by 6-12 » broad ; cover cells rarely present
in the central portion of the thallus, a hypothallic layer often present, one
cell thick, with cells 2-4 » high by 6-10 pw broad, variable; heterocysts
absent in the thallus; sporangial conceptacles subconic, 250-300 p» in
diam. ; antheridial conceptacles 40-50 » diam., 12-16 » high; cystocarpic
conceptacles 140-160 « diam., 40-70 p high.

Gibbs, 20-21, San Jose and Espiritu Santo islands, growing on Sar-
gassum; H. 4, growing on Padina, dredged in 40 m., off San Jose del
Cabo, Aug.; H. 9, same, on Dictyota; D. 217a, on old Padina, on shore,
Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Before this alga was critically studied, it was called Melobesia tenuis
by W. A. Setchell, and as such was sent to Foslie, who upon superficial
examination at first considered it to be a form of M. farinosa. Later, how-
ever, he studied it in greater detail and found that in the size of cells and
size and form of conceptacles it did not agree with either M. farinosa or
any other known Melobesia; so he named it MZ. Gibbsti. When Melobesia
was split up into two subgenera, it fell into the Heteroderma group. Upon
the raising of Heteroderma to generic rank, it became Heteroderma

Gibbsii.

Heteroderma corallinicola sp. nov.
Plate 63, Fig. 2

Frondes tenues, minutae, crustas ad superficies ramorum vetustorum. Coral-
linae arcte adhaerentes, monostromaticae tantum in partibus margine plerumque
2-4 stratis cellularum cuboideis 9-14 4 diam., compositae; heterocystis deuntibus;
conceptaculis cystocarpiiferis aut immersis aut leviter prominentibus, 60 w diam.;
conceptaculis spermatangiiferis tetrasporangiiferisque nondum visis.

Thallus thin, minute, forming closely adherent crusts over surfaces of
old branches of Corallina; very inconspicuous except when fruiting;
monostromatic only in marginal parts, usually of 2-4 layers of square

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 213

cells, 9-14 » diam., without heterocysts; cystocarpic conceptacles im-
mersed or forming a slight prominence, 60 » diam.; tetrasporangial con-
ceptacles unknown.

Tyre: D. & R. 3328a (Field Museum; isotype, AHF no. 24), on
Corallina, in intertidal pools, cove north of Cabo Arco, Guaymas, Dec.
19, 1939.

This species resembles Heteroderma Gibbsii but differs in habit and
host, and particularly in cellular structure. The cells of H. Gibdbsii are
considerably smaller and often more flattened. The crusts are 10-30 p
thick, while those of H. corallinicola are commonly 25-40 p» thick and
often reach 50 p.

The present species would fall under Foslie’s subgenus Pliostroma,
while H. Gibbsii he places in subgenus Euheteroderma.

Genus POROLITHON Foslie
Porolithon sonorensis sp. nov.
Plate 57, Figs. 17-19; Plate 61, Fig. 2

Frondes primo laminis prostratis flabellatis, imbricate superpositis plerumque
150-200 p crassis, et marginibus rotundis, compositae, aetate provecta laminarum,
undulatarum, assurgentium, erectarum usque ad 1 cm. altarum, contorte anastomo-
santium crustam scabrosam densam formantes; heterocystis in stratis libratis in
partibus crassioribus frondorum prostratorum; conceptaculis tetrasporangiiferis
immersis aut subprominentibus, 175-225 wu diam., poro singulo; tetrasporangiis
paraphysibusque e basi tota conceptaculorum orientibus.

Thallus at first composed of prostrate flabellate plates growing imbri-
cately over one another, these mostly 150-200 p» thick, with rounded,
light-colored margins; later, the plates becoming erect to about 1 cm.
high, forming a rough crust of dense, erect undulate, intricately anasto-
mosed flat structures; in tetrasporic plants, coalescence of individual thal-
lus parts very complete and little erect development apparent except as
upfolds or undulations of the prostrate parts; cells of central tissue of
erect parts 20-25 pw long, 7-10 » wide; cells of surface layers square or
oblong, 6-9 » diam.; heterocysts present, mostly in horizontal rows in
thicker parts of prostrate thallus; tetrasporangial conceptacles immersed
or subprominent, often forming rounded excrescences, 175-225 » diam.,
ovate in longi-section or with a slightly flattened floor (disk), opening by
a single pore without a projecting rim; tetrasporangia and paraphyses
arising from whole surface of the conceptacle floor ; cystocarps and anther-
idia unknown.

Type: D. 226a, on rocky shore at low tide, west side of bay, Puerto
Refugio, Angel de la Guardia Island, Jan. 26, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 25.

274 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

This species is one of the very common intertidal crustaceous coral-
lines in the northern Gulf. It has been taken on shore at several localities
besides that from which the type came. D. & R. 3162, cove north of Cabo
Arco, Guaymas; D. 416, 429, Pond Island; D. 465, San Esteban Island;
D. & R. 3383, intertidal pools, Punta San Pedro near Guaymas, Sonora,
December 22, 1939. The presence and horizontal arrangement of the
heterocysts seem to allow this species to be described under the genus
Porolithon.

Considerable resemblance in form and structure is evident between
young examples of P. sonorensis and Lithothamnion mesomorphum var.
ornatum described from sterile material from the West Indies (Foslie &

Howe, 1906, p. 129).

Genus DERMATOLITHON Foslie
Dermatolithon veleroae sp. nov.
Plate 62, Fig. 2

Frondes tenues, prostratae usque ad assurgentes, in superficiebus conchae trans-
lucentis laxe affixae, coacervationes 1 cm. latas, valde imbricatae, exigue anasto-
mosantes formantes, crustis individuis 75-125 w crassis; conceptaculis tetraspo-
rangiiferis humilibus, tholiiformibus, circa 300 wdiam. extern., 100 w altis, poro
singulo; tetrasporangiis 70-80 uw longis, columnam centralem paraphysium circum-
vallentibus; conceptaculis cystocarpiiferis forma magnitudineque tetrasporangi-
iferis similibus; conceptaculis spermatangiiferis 400 p latis, 125 w altis, superficie
humili poro conico centrali ostioli excepto.

Thallus thin, prostrate to ascending, growing loosely over surface of
a translucent shell and bits of attached Ulva as well as over crusts of its
own kind, forming patches about 1 cm. broad, all very weakly attached
and imbricated parts little or not at all anastomosed; crusts 75-125 p
thick, composed of a hypothallic layer largely composed of vertically
elongated cells, and a perithallic superior portion of shorter, square to
oblong cells; all cells 6-11 ». wide; tetrasporangial conceptacles low, dome
shaped, about 300 » outside diam., 225 uw broad by 100 » high inside;
tetrasporangia 70-80 » long, borne around periphery of disk, the center
bearing a tuft of paraphyses; cystocarpic conceptacles similar in size and
shape to tetrasporangial ones; antheridial conceptacles 400 » broad, 125 p
high, outside, low except for a central ostiolar cone.

Type: D. 550, on a shell picked up in middle littoral zone, Agua
Verde Bay, Feb. 12, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 26.

‘This plant is known only from the single collection which fortunately
bears all reproductive organs. It is unique in its habit on shells, though the
specimen at hand shows the crusts growing up and over all objects at-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 215

tached to the shell as well, including a small tuft of Ulva. This character
and its loosely attached habit with tendency to ascend and form free parts
make this plant distinct from any others known.

Genus LITHOLEPIS Foslie
Litholepis sonorensis sp. nov.
Plate 63, Fig. 1

Frondes monostromaticae, superpositae usque ad 4-stratosae, crustam continu-
am, arcte ad substratum adhaerentem ad superficies totas concharum magnarum
duratarum tegentem, obscure cinereo-albae formante; cellulis magnitudine varia-
bilis, plerumque recto elongatis, 13-25 w altis; conceptaculis tetrasporangiiferis
humilibus, conicis, poro singulo, circa 400 win diam. externe, 175 w altis, cavitate
interna 300 uw in diam., disco plano, parietibus supernis crassioribus (circa 3-
stratosis) porum circumferentibus; tetrasporangiis circa 50 w altis, discum circum-
vallentibus.

Thalli monostromatic, growing superposed over one another, to 2-4
layers, forming a continuous, closely adherent crust over all the surfaces
of large, weathered shells, dull gray-white in color; cells variable in size,
mostly elongated slightly vertically, 13-25 » high; tetrasporangial con-
ceptacles low, conical, with a single pore, about 400 » external diam., 175
pw high; internal cavity 300 » diam., with a flat disk, the upper wall
thickest (about 3 layers) around pore; tetrasporangia about 50 p long,
arising from the periphery of the disk.

Type: D. 592x, growing on a large weathered shell, dredged in
San Lorenzo Channel, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb. 14, 1940. Herb. AHF
no. 27.

No species of this genus has been described from the Pacific American
coasts. The large size of the thin, superposed crusts of this species, com-
pletely covering extensive surfaces, seems to be a character distinguishing
it from the several known in Atlantic waters. More complete collections
will be necessary, however, to verify this. The described species have not
been illustrated, and it is difficult to compare habit characters from the
existing descriptions.

Genus CORALLINA (Tournef.) Lamouroux
Corallina pilulifera Post. & Rupr.

Postels & Ruprecht, 1840, p. 20, tab. XL, fig. 101; Yendo, 1902a, p. 30,
pl. III, figs. 14-16, pl. VII, figs. 14-16.
Our plants correspond most closely to form sororia of Ruprecht. It is
a common middle and lower littoral species in the rock-cover vegetation
of the northern Gulf and is abundant in many tidal pools.

276 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

D. & R. 3233, 3328, intertidal pools in vicinity of Guaymas, Dec.;
D. 394, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 320, Gonzaga Bay, Feb.; D. 225, Puerto
Refugio, Jan.; D. 460, San Esteban Island, Feb.

Genus AMPHIROA Lamouroux
Amphiroa pusilla Yendo

Yendo, 1902a, p. 13, pl. I, figs. 22, 23, pl. V, figs. 11-13.

Several collections are on hand of an Amphiroa of variable form
which in many respects seems to be referable to the Japanese plant de-
scribed by Yendo. Iwo forms are present as well as many intermediate
variants: a loosely branched, broad segmented, more or less decumbent
form, and a densely tufted, erect form in which the segments are largely
attenuated in the upper parts, ending in a blunt, rounded tip. These
characters correspond to Yendo’s description, and his figures show much
resemblance to the Gulf plants. The extreme variability of our specimens
and the limited knowledge of the distribution of the species must make
this plant subject to much further inquiry.

The various forms make up an abundant rock cover in many shore
localities in the northern Gulf: D. 717, Turner’s Island, July; D. 222,
Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 112, Tiburon Island, Jan.; D. & R. 3387,
3390, 3325, 3330, vicinity of Guaymas, Dec.

Amphiroa zonata Yendo

Yendo, 1902a, p. 10, pl. I, figs. 11-14, pl. IV, fig. 9.

Specimens of several Gulf collections correspond excellently to Yen-
do’s descriptions and figures of this plant. Its regular, dichotomous
branching and cylindrical to slightly compressed segments with very dis-
tinct transverse banding of the terminal segments are distinctive charac-
ters.

These plants are not abundant in the collections at hand, but occur
occasionally in material from a number of shore localities: D. 717, Tur-
ner’s Island, July; D. 222a, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. & R. 3386, Punta
San Pedro, Guaymas, Dec.; D. 485, Catalina Bay, Guaymas, Feb.

Amphiroa rigida Lam.

Lamouroux, 1816, p. 297, tab. 11, fig. 1; Bérgesen, 1915-20, pp. 182-185,
figs. 171, 172 (var. antillana).

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 277

Following the investigations of Bgégrgesen concerning the history and
literature of this species, I am convinced that certain Gulf specimens are
to be considered here. ‘The well-developed and ample material at hand
corresponds closely with his descriptions and figures of West Indian plants
which he designates as var. antillana. Though our material may not be
identical with his, I hesitate to add to the literature a different name to
designate these plants which seem best identified here.

D. 395, lower littoral tide pools, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 460, lower
littoral pools, San Esteban Island, Feb. ; D. 485, Catalina, near Guaymas,
Feb. ; D. 112a, lower littoral, Turner’s Island, Jan.

Genus JANIA Lamouroux

Jania rubens Lamour.

Lamouroux, 1816, p. 212; Harvey, 1846-51, pl. CCLII.

Although all the Gulf specimens of this genus thus far secured are
sterile, the general habit correspondence with Jania rubens is such that it
seems tentatively advisable to place our plants under this designation to
await further collections and more intensive examinations.

D. 414, on shore, Pond Island, Feb.; D. & R. 3327, 3237, 3388,
Guaymas, Dec.; D. 700, Turner’s Island, July.

It is interesting to note the occurrence of the genus Jania in the Gulf
as well as Amphiroa, neither of which is known to occur on the Pacific
California coasts.

Family Grateloupiaceae
Genus HALYMENIA (C. Agardh) J. Agardh

Halymenia actinophysa Howe

Howe, 1911, p. 509, pl. 34.

A re-examination of the type specimen of this species was made and a
comparison with certain broad membranous specimens from the Gulf.
Two collections proved identical in all structural details, as well as in
size and external appearance, with Howe’s plant from La Paz. Our
largest example measures 38 cm. by 29 cm. and is dark rose in color. One
smaller specimen shows basal parts: a small discoid holdfast with several
broad blades arising from very short (3 mm.) stipes. The blades are plane
and broadly elliptical when young, becoming somewhat undulate in age.

The description and account given by Howe are very ample and need
scarcely be elaborated.

278 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

D. 138, dredged in 30 m., south of Tiburon Island, near Turner’s
Island, Jan.; D. 347, in 22 m., off Punta Penasco, Feb.

This species is distinct from Halymenia abyssicola of this paper in its
thinner fronds (70-130 »), outer cortex of only one or two layers of small
cells, and absence of a thick surface jelly.

Halymenia P abyssicola sp. nov.

Frondes planae membranaceae, minime 8 cm. latae, 300 w crassae, marginibus
integris, atro-roseae; glutino superficiali 25-35 w crasso; corticibus stratis paucis
cellularum minutarum dense aggregatarum, 5-7 4 diam. compositis; subcorticibus
cellulis majoribus compositis; in medulla filamentis laxe intricatis et crabro con-
junctiones stellae-formantes ostendentibus; (frondibus fructuosis nondum visis).

Fronds plane, membranous, basal parts unknown, at least 8 cm. broad,
with an entire margin, 300 » thick, deep rose colored ; cross section show-
ing a thick surface jelly 25-35 » thick, a cortical tissue of a few layers of
minute, closely packed cells 5-7 diam., a subcortex of larger cells merg-
ing into a medulla of loosely interwoven filaments with frequent stellate
“ganglia” or points of junction.

Type: D. 433, dredged in 110-152 m. off Isla Partida, Feb. 5, 1940.
Herb. AHF no. 28.

The present species is known only from the single collection of frag-
mentary fronds which came up from a great depth together with a
dredge load of boulders. The thickness of the frond and the presence of
the thick surface jelly seen in cross section make it distinct, however, from
any known broad, plane, entire-margined species. Furthermore, its occur-
rence at such great depths is remarkable, and it seems well to put it on
record for the information of future collectors. ‘The cross-sectional struc-
ture exhibits characters corresponding most closely to those generally rec-
ognized for the genus Halymenia, but this arrangement can only be tenta-
tive until more ample material is available.

Halymenia P refugiensis sp. nov.
Plate 44, Figs. 2, 3.

Frondes planae, membranaceae, obtuse lanceolatae, usque ad minime 11 cm.
altae, 2.5 cm. latae, inferne gradatim ad bases angustas attenuatae, marginibus
integris; corticibus unistratosis cellulis plus minusve complanatis, 4-10 p in diam.
max. compositis; subcorticibus 2 stratosis, cellulis complanatis 15-20 w longis com-
positis et textis internis fila pluricellularia, 6-8 u diam., transverse et plus minusve
et directe usque ad cellulas subcorticales oppositae currentia emittentibus, textum
medullarem filorum plerumque simplicum formantibus, filis stricte in longitudinem
nullis; (frondibus fructuosis nondum visis).

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 279

Plants flat, membranous, blunt-lanceolate, to at least 11 cm. high, 2.5
cm. broad, with entire margins, narrowing gradually below to a very nar-
row base; basal attachment organs unknown, but lowermost parts com-
pressed or flattened, 0.5 mm. wide, giving rise to two erect blades; cross
section showing a single outer cortical layer of small, -+- — flattened
cells 4-10 » in greatest dimensions (in surface view the smaller cells are
seen to be derived from the larger ones by division into 4-8 parts) ; sub-
cortex of about 2 layers of flattened cells, 15-20 » in length; from these
subcortical cells pluricellular (2-5) filaments 6-8 » in diam., run -+- —
directly across to an opposite subcortical cell, forming thus a loose medul-
lary tissue of usually unbranched, bridging filaments; no strictly longitu-
dinal filaments present.

Type: D. 182, dredged in 24-44 m., Puerto Refugio, Jan. 26, 1940.
Herb. AHF no. 29.

This species is known from a single, fairly complete but perhaps im-
mature plant. The very remarkable structure of the frond, together with
the external form, although allowing it to be classed rather well with
Halymenia, sets it apart from all other known species. The medulla is un-
usual in the absence of longitudinal or interlacing filaments. Those pres-
ent are mostly at right angles to the surface and form a sort of “pillar
effect” between the cortices. Relatively few run obliquely.

Genus GRATELOUPIA C. Agardh
Grateloupia prolongata J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1847, p. 10; Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XVII, tab. 24; De Toni,
1905, p. 1565; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 780, pl. 80.

On the basis of the description given by De Toni and the figure of
Kiitzing, Setchell and Gardner placed several Gulf specimens under this
name. The treatment seems acceptable in view of the type locality of the
species: Pochetti, Pacific Coast of Mexico, and here additional specimens
are recorded. This determination must stand in question, however, until
the type specimen of Grateloupia prolongata can be examined with refer-
ence to the Gulf material. Yendo, 1914, records this species from Japan.
He is followed in 1936 by Okamura. Yendo states that he has studied the
Agardhian type and finds it agrees satisfactorily with Okamura’s speci-
mens distributed as no. 32 of Algae Japonicae Exsiccatae and sent out
under the name G. filicina. He further states that in the Agardh herbar-
ium there is a Japanese specimen sent by Farlow and named G. prolongata

by Agardh.

280 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

From his study, Yendo concluded that the figures of Kiitzing (loc.
cit.) represent the typical form of the species and that which is common
on the coast of Japan. Returning to the specimens from the Gulf, we see
that they have conspicuous proliferations arising on the surface of the
flattened blades as well as along the margins. This occurs in all collections
and must be considered typical of the Gulf material. On the other hand,
the specimen of Okamura in the Exsiccatae set of W. A. Setchell is merely
marginally pinnate; the figure of Kiitzing of one of Liebmann’s original
specimens from Mexico shows only marginal proliferations, and the de-
scriptions and discussion given by Yendo include no mention of prolifera-
tions other than marginal ones. Some Japanese specimens in the Univer-
sity of California Herbarium show proliferations from the surfaces, but
rarely to so great a degree as in the Gulf material. It is, therefore, to be
suspected that we may be dealing with a different species in the Gulf from
that known on the southern coasts of Mexico, in Japan, and perhaps else-
where.

J. 25, lower littoral, San Francisquito Bay, June; J. 53a, San Esteban
Island, April; J. 87, Isla Partida, July; D. 443, San Esteban Island, Feb.

Grateloupia ? Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 69, Fig. 2

Frondes caespites rotundas formantes, 2-3 cm. altas, e disco emergentes, erectae
complanatae, angustae, plerumque in medio .5-.7 mm. latae, 300-400 pw crassae,
prorsus copiose margine ramosae, apicibus acutis, saepe attenuatis.

Plants forming greenish-black, rounded, caespitose clumps 2-3 cm.
high, from a discoid holdfast attached to rocks and old corallines, the
holdfast giving rise to several to many erect fronds; erect parts flattened,
narrow, mostly about .5-.7 mm. wide in middle portions, 300-400 p thick,
abundantly branched throughout, the branches marginal, apices commonly
acute, often attenuated; cross section showing a loose medulla of
branched, frequently septate filaments, interlacing obliquely but -+- —
longitudinal, these more closely packed in outer medulla, merging into the
subcortex composed of about 2 layers of cells 12-15 » diam., these adjoin-
ing the outer composed of anticlinal rows of 4-5 minute elliptical cells 5 »
or less long; fertile material unknown.

Type: D. 650, middle littoral rocks on point 3 mi. N. of Kino, July
15, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 30.

Only a single collection of this species is as yet known, but from the
consistency, branching habit, and cross-sectional appearance, it seems most
likely to be a small member of the genus Grateloupia. In its several char-
acters of size and habit it is distinct from any other known species.

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 281

Grateloupia squarrulosa S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 780, pls. 81, 82.
J. 60 (AHF no. 84), cast ashore, Smith Island, June. Not again col-
lected.

Grateloupia acroidalea S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 781, pl. 26, figs. 45, 46.
J. 121, on lower littoral rocks, Guaymas; M. 58 (AHF no. 82),
Guaymas, May. Not again collected.

Grateloupia Howeii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 782, pl. 83.

J. 113 (AHF no. 83), cast ashore, San Esteban Island, April. Not
again collected.

“Closely related to Grateloupia denticulata Mont., but according to
studies made by M. A. Howe, not identical with that species.’”’ Setchell
and Gardner.

Grateloupia Johnstonii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 782, pl. 84.

J. 88 (AHF no. 81), cast ashore, Angel de la Guardia Island, July;
not again collected.

“This species of Grateloupia seems closely related to G. squarrulosa
but differs in thickness, color, number and character of the ultimate pin-
nules, and the angle at which the branches arise.” Setchell and Gardner.

Genus ESTEBANIA Setchell & Gardner
Estebania conjuncta S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 783, pl. 25, figs. 25, 36, pls. 85, 86.

Several collections of this remarkable plant were made by Johnston
in 1921, and one more recent record may be added to these. All are sterile.
The habit illustrations of this plant are sufficient to distinguish it at once
from any other Gulf species.

J. 53f, floating or entangled among other algae, San Esteban Island ;
J. 115, same; J. 103, San Pedro Martir Island, April; J. 130, Angel de
la Guardia Island, June; D. 475g, dredged in 30-36 meters, Ensenada de
San Francisco, near Guaymas, Feb.

282 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Genus POLYOPES J. Agardh
Polyopes sinicola S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 784, pl. 28, fig. 61, pl. 42b.

J. 38, growing on rocks in lower littoral and upper sublittoral belts,
Los Angeles Bay, June; J. 85, Isla Partida, July; J. 84d, Angel de la
Guardia Island, June. Not recently collected.

This species is undoubtedly a summer annual, judging from the abun-
dance of collections made by Johnston at several stations during the sum-
mer and its complete absence from the winter collections.

Genus PRIONITIS J. Agardh
Prionitis Sternbergii (Ag.) J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1851, p. 190; Kylin, 1941, p. 10, tab. 2, figs. 6, 7. Sphaero-
coccus Sternbergit C. Agardh, 1822, p. 275. Grateloupia Stern-
bergii var. versicolor J. Agardh, 1847, p. 10. Grateloupia versi-
color J. Agardh, 1851, p. 181.

Kylin has recently re-examined the types of Prionitis Sternbergti and
Grateloupia versicolor and has arrived at the conclusion that the two are
identical.

Growing on rocks in upper sublittoral belt, J. 100, Georges Island,
April; J. 119, Tortuga Island, June; J. 6, San Marcos Island, June; D.
537b, 539d, in rock pockets, middle littoral, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.; D.
727, lower littoral, Turner’s Island, July (young).

Agreement is good between some of Johnston’s collections and Kylin’s
illustration of the type of Prionitis Sternbergiit. ‘The narrowness of the
pinnae compared with the usually lobate ones of P. abbreviata is one
point of distinction. The main branches of the latter are also blunt-tipped
lanceolate, while those of the former are usually acute and somewhat
attenuated.

One poor, encrusted specimen of the winter collection (D. 537b)
shows the pinnae characters as well as the habit features in general of
P. Sternbergii and may tentatively be recorded as a winter occurrence of
this species in the southern Gulf. J. 6 undoubtedly represents a typical
summer form. A comparison of the known records suggests that P. Stern-
bergii is typically a warm-water species extending south along the central
coast of Mexico, while P. abbreviata seems to be favored by cooler waters.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 283

Prionitis abbreviata S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 785, pl. 25, fig. 39, pl. 50b.

This plant is well illustrated by Setchell and Gardner and may be
identified thereby. Difficulty may be encountered in distinguishing young
stages from those of Prionitis Sternbergii, and even in adult plants there
may be some confusing similarities, but in general the distinctions pointed
out under that species may be relied upon.

J. 53e, on rocks, San Esteban Island, April; D. 453, Feb.; D. & R.
3404, Punta San Pedro, Guaymas, Dec.; D. 490, Catalina Bay, near
Guaymas, Feb.

Prionitis mexicana sp. nov.
Plate 67, Fig. 2
Frondes 8-12 cm. altae, e disco basali parvo, teretes usque ad leviter com-
pressae, .7-.8 mm. diam., irregulariter pinnatae; ramis longitudine variabilibus 2

mm. usque ad 6 cm. longis, diametro ea axis primae equatis, apicibus semiacutis;
structura generis typica.

Fronds 8-12 cm. high, attached by a small discoid holdfast from which
arise several slender, terete, to slightly compressed main axes, .7-.8 mm.
diam.; branching irregularly pinnate, the branches of varying length,
some short, 2-4 mm., but often long, 2-6 cm., of about the same diameter
as the main axis or not conspicuously smaller; apices semiacute, not much
attenuated ; structure typical of the genus; reproduction unknown.

Type: D. 628, middle littoral on rocky reef, San Jose del Cabo,
Feb. 16, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 31.

D. 29, dredged in 36-50 meters, Santa Maria Bay, outer coast of
Lower California, Jan. 19, 1940.

This species is highly distinctive among the Prionitis plants of our
region. It resembles in its slenderness P. filiformis of the central Califor-
nia coast, but differs markedly in its long-pinnate branching.

Only one of the two localities for Prionitis mexicana is strictly within
our area, this plant probably being more abundant on the outer coast of
southern Lower California than within the limits of the Gulf.

Prionitis Suaymasensis sp. nov.
Plate 66, Figs. 1, 2

Frondes usque ad 7 cm. altae, rigidae, cartilagineae, a disco parvo affixae;
a disco axes paucae primae assurgentes, compressae, 1.5-2 mm. latae, per occa-
sionem furcatae, ramis multis pinnis indutis; pinnis plerumque angulis rectis emer-
gentibus, frequenter proxime aggregatis, basim attenuatis, supra medium 0.7-1 mm.
latissimis, longitudine variabilibus (5-18 mm.) per occasionem furcatis aut ramo-
sis,-apicibus semiacutis sed non attenuatis.

284 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Fronds to 7 cm. high, rigid, cartilaginous, attached to rocks by a small
disk from which one or a few main axes arise, compressed, 1.5-2 mm.
broad, occasionally forked, with many pinnate branches; pinnae com-
monly standing at right angles to the main axis, often arising very close
together, narrowed to the point of attachment, broadest beyond the
middle, .7-1.0 mm., of varying length 5-18 mm., occasionally forked or
branched; apices semiacute, not attenuated; reproduction unknown.

Type: D. & R. 3402 (Field Museum; isotype AHF no. 32), in
intertidal rock pools, Punta San Pedro, near Guaymas, Dec. 22, 1939.

D. 46, on rocks near wharf, Guaymas Harbor, Jan., 1940; D. 295,
on middle littoral rocks, Puerto Refugio, Jan., 1940.

This species resembles Prionitis abbreviata and P. Sternbergii in some
respects, but the narrow fronds and peculiar long-pinnate branching mark
it as distinct. No other Pacific species resembles this plant sufficiently to
be much confused with it.

Prionitis kinoensis sp. nov.
Plate 67, Fig. 1

Frondes caespitosae, 2.4 cm. altis, stipitibus curtis, atro-purpureae, copiose
dichotomae, segmentis compressis, plerumque 0.6-0.8 mm. latis, internodiis infernis
longioribus et frequenter dense pinnatis; ramellorum externorum pinnis egentibus;
structura generis typica.

Plants caespitose, a clump 5-6 cm. diam. from a single, short stipe (.5
cm.) attached to rock surfaces, 2-4 cm. high; dark purplish in color;
fronds abundantly dichotomous, especially above, the segments com-
pressed, mostly .6-.8 mm. broad, the lower internodes longer and fre-
quently close-pinnate; pinnae absent from outer branches; structure typi-
cal of Prionitis; apices blunt; reproduction unknown; texture slippery
when fresh.

Type: D. 648, middle littoral rocks, rocky point 3 miles north of
Kino, July 16, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 33.

D. 723, lower littoral rocks, Turner’s Island reef, July 18, 1940.

This is the smallest and one of the most distinctive members of the
genus on the Pacific coasts of North America. The thickly caespitose habit
and abundant dichotomies of the narrow branches are distinctive. The
pinnate character of the genus is also exhibited on the lower segments,
making easier the identification of the genus of this plant, which is so
different in size and form from most of the others of our coast. It is
probably another summer annual, not having been found at Turner’s
Island in January.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 285

Family Callymeniaceae
Genus CALLYMENIA J. Agardh

Callymenia angustata S. & G.
Plate 68, Fig. 1

Setch. & Gard., 1937, p. 77, pl. 3, fig. 6b, pl. 12, fig. 32.

Fronds up to 7 cm. high, many blades arising from a discoid holdfast ;
blades membranaceous and flaccid, linear-lanceolate, entire or deeply di-
vided, with a cuneate base and a very narrow stipe, 1-2 cm. wide, 50-60 p
thick; medulla composed of loose, relatively sparse fibers irregular in
diameter ; cortex composed of a single layer of nearly isodiametric angular
cells 5-8 » diam., and a layer of more or less ellipsoidal cells slightly larger
than the surface cells; cystocarps abundant, scattered over surface of
fronds, protruding slightly on one side and prominently on the other,
with an ostiole; tetrasporangia scattered over the frond in the cortex,
cruciately divided ; antheridia unknown.

The present more ample material allows us to add to the original de-
scription of this plant and to extend its range from the southern, outer
coast of Lower California (Santa Maria Bay) to the Gulf: D. 369,
dredged in 22 m., Tepoca Bay, February. This plant is apparently of
rather deep sublittoral habitat, the type having been dredged in 32 meters.

The cystocarps, tetraspores, and cross-sectional appearance of the
frond correspond to Kylin’s recent comments on the genus Callymenia

(1937, p. 165, p. 222: fig. 177B):.

Callymenia veleroae sp. nov.
Plate 45, Fig. 1

Frondes usque ad 4 cm. altae, membranaceae, e disco basali abrupte laminae
paucae erectae orientes integres, longi ellipticae basi latae-cuneatae, inferne ad
stipites angustiores attenuatae, mox laciniatae et in segmentis lateralibus trans-
formatae, 80-90 uw crassae; medullis filis intertextis compositis.

Plants to 4 cm. high, flat, membranaceous from a small disk-holdfast,
giving rise abruptly to several erect blades; blades at first (young) entire,
long-elliptical with a broadly cuneate base narrowing to a very slender
stipe-region, early becoming split and developing further into variously
and much lacerated segments, the broadest nonlacerated lower parts of
blades up to 8 mm. across, spread of upper parts up to 1.5 cm.; frond in
longitudinal section 80-90 p» thick, showing an outer single-layered cor-
tex of small isodiametrical cells 5-7 » diam., merging imperceptibly into
a subcortex of irregularly arranged larger cells 10-18 » diam. in one or

286 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

two layers; medulla narrow, rather dense of (mostly longitudinally ar-
ranged) interlacing cellular filaments about 6 » diam., the cells 30-65 p
long; reproduction unknown.

Type: D. 85, dredged in 12-20 meters, outside Guaymas Harbor,
Jan. 23, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 34.

A comparison of this plant with Callymenia angustata shows many
features in common: cuneate base of blade and slender stipe region, tex-
ture and color, general structure of frond. The small size and early split-
ting and progressive laceration of the blades are distinctive features. Lack-
ing fertile material, the generic determination must be somewhat tenta-
tive, but these similarities certainly suggest relationship with C. angustata,
and in association with that species it probably may most readily be recog-
nized. It likewise is fairly deep sublittoral in habit.

Callymenia guaymasensis sp. nov.
Plate 68, Fig. 2

Frondes 5-7 cm. altae, planae, membranaceae, stipite curta, angusta supra
discum basalem; laminis flabellato expansis, profunde in segmentis multis, rotun-
datis, superpositis (8-15 mm.) divisis, marginibus integris aut per occasionem pro-
liferationibus parvissimis angustis lobiformibus indutis, 60-70 uw (inferne usque ad
130 uw) crassis; medullis angustissimis, filis rudibus intertextis compositis.

Fronds 5-7 cm. high, flat, membranaceous, with a short, narrow stipe
above the simple disk-holdfast ; blades expanding flabellately, deeply di-
vided above into many broad, rounded overlapping segments (8-15 mm.),
margins entire or occasionally with very small, narrow lobate prolifera-
tions; frond 60-70 thick, up to 130 p» below by repeated periclinal divi-
sion of cortical cells, above, a single-layered cortex of cells 6-7 » diam., a
subcortex of a layer of + — elliptical cells about twice as large, and a
very narrow medulla of coarse, loose, cellular filaments about 5 p» diam.;
reproduction unknown.

Type: D. 49, dredged in 4-6 meters over muddy bottom, Guaymas
Bay, Jan. 22, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 35.

D. & R. 3308, drifting along shore of bay, 4 km. east of Guaymas,
Dec.

This species has essentially the same frond structure as the other two
Callymenia species of the Gulf, but here again there is an entirely differ-
ent habit by which this plant may be easily distinguished. It is also sub-
littoral, inhabiting the mucky bottoms of shallow bays, usually badly over-
grown with foraminifera shells and bryozoan colonies. Its bright rose
color is much like that of the other species.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 287

Callymenia pertusa S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 746, pl. 49b.
J. 105, cast ashore at San Pedro Martir Island, April. Not again col-
lected.

Genus CALLOPHYLLIS Kitzing
Callophyllis Johnstonii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 746, pl. 51a-b.
J. 118, on rocks in upper sublittoral belt, Tortuga Island, June. Not
again collected.

Callophyllis sp.
Plate 44, Fig. 4

D. 198, collected at low tide on the shore of Puerto Refugio, is an in-
teresting plant, apparently of this genus. The material is not in such con-
dition as to allow it to be described, but the illustration will provide means
of establishing its presence in the Gulf flora.

Family Nemastomaceae
Genus SCHIZYMENIA J. Agardh
Schizymenia Johnstonii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 786, pl. 88. Schizymenia violacea S. & G., 1924,
pi/86; pl. 25) fies: 37,38, pl: 87.

From a re-examination of the types of Schizymenia Johnstonii and 8S.
violacea, it seems more satisfactory to consider these plants the same spe-
cies. The thickness and structure of the fronds, color, and habitat of the
two are the same. Both type specimens were collected in the same general
locality (Isla Partida and San Esteban Island are not far apart). The
thickness of the frond of S. Johnstonii given in the original description
(400 ») is evidently that of a fertile frond. That given for S. violacea
(230 p») is of a sterile frond. These measurements are not comparable.
The amount of protrusion of the cystocarps seems variable. Those de-
scribed in §. Johnstonii are the more deeply embedded of the two. Other
than these unconvincing differences, the type specimens are to be distin-
guished only by arbitrary characters of frond-shape, known to be incon-
stant in this genus.

288 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Family Solieriaceae
Genus EUCHEUMA J. Agardh

Eucheuma uncinatum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 748, pls. 67, 68. Eucheuma Johnstonii S. & G.,
1924, p. 748, pl. 25, fig. 42, pls. 65, 66.

A re-examination of the types of Eucheuma uncinatum (AHF no. 64)
and E. Johnstonii (AHF no. 65) together with specimens collected re-
cently has aroused a question as to the distinctness of the plants so classi-
fied. The type specimen of E. Johnstonii appears under the same collec-
tion number (J. 84) as a specimen cited under E. uncinatum. The mate-
rial from Mazatlan resembles the type of E. Johnstonti much more than
that of E. uncinatum. Recent collections have shown further variation in
the degree of branching of the fructiferous ramuli, and this variation is
now considered to account for the differences exhibited by the two type
specimens.

Eucheuma uncinatum is evidently quite abundant in the Gulf, judg-
ing from the several collections, especially during the spring and summer
months. It is a rocky shore inhabitant of the lower littoral zone. J. 28,
San Francisquito Bay, June; D. 434, San Esteban Island, Feb.; J. 54,
April; J. 80, Isla Partida, July; D. 208, Angel de la Guardia Island,
Jan. (very young) ; J. 84a, July (mature) ; J. 86, San Lorenzo Island,
June; D. 102, Turner’s Island, Jan.; J. 88b, Pond Island, June.

Genus AGARDHIELLA Schmitz
Agardhiella tenera (J. Ag.) Schmitz

Schmitz, 1889, p. 442; Harvey, 1852, p. 121, tab. 23A (excl. syn.) ;
Bérgesen, 1915-20, p. 361, fig. 355.

This species has been collected only on the tropical outskirts of the
Gulf, a few examples being taken in the dredge from 40-meter depth off
San Jose del Cabo, H. 612, August. They are rather slender examples of
this species but are quite typical in both habit and structure. They reach
16 cm. in height.

Agardhiella mexicana sp. nov.
Plate 69, Fig. 1

Frondes 10-14 cm. altae, cylindricae, radiante multifarieque ramosis, axi per-
currente deunte, 1.1-1.5 mm. diam., apicibus curte attenuatis, acutis; ramis ultimis
tenuibus, acutis; medulla parva fibris longitudinalibus composita; tetrasporangiis
zonatis, in corticis subsuperficiem; partibus sporangiiferis projecturis copiosis
indutis.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 289

Fronds 10-14 cm. high, cylindrical, branching radially in all direc-
tions, diverging at 40-50°, deliquescent, without a main axis, 1100-1500
p diam.; apices short-attenuate, acute, with “fountain tip’; ultimate,
sharp, slender branches giving the dry plant a spiny appearance; cross sec-
tion showing a small core of longitudinal fibers within the medulla; cysto-
carps unknown; tetrasporangia zonate, in the cortex immediately below
the surface; tetrasporic portions of frond provided with abundant spinu-
lose projections.

Type: D. 233, dredged in 4 meters at low tide, south shore of
Puerto Refugio, Jan. 28, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 36.

D. 242, cast up at high tide, north shore beach, Puerto Refugio, Jan.
28, 1940; D. 254, dredged in 12-22 meters, Mejia channel, Puerto Re-
fugio, Jan.; D. 299, dredged in 60-80 meters over mud bottom, Gonzaga
Bay, Jan.

This species is clearly distinct from any known member of the genus.
The character of the tetrasporic plants has confirmed its placement here.

Genus SARCODIOTHECA Kylin

The three known species of this genus in our area are remarkable in
their external morphology, and are clearly distinct both from each other
and from other red algae. Their habit characters are so different from
other Gulf plants that they may readily be identified merely by glancing
at the several habit illustrations of the types. Anatomically the genus may
be recognized by its complanate structure, fibrous medullary core, zonate
tetrasporangia, and seriate carpospores.

Sarcodiotheca linearis S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1937, p. 80, pl. 5, fig. 12a-b, pl. 15, fig. 35.

The narrow, strict, infrequently branched fronds of this plant are
well illustrated and described by Setchell and Gardner. It is another sub-
littoral species known only from the extreme southern limits of our area.
The type specimen came from a depth of 40 meters in San Lucas Bay, H.
41, August (tetrasporic and cystocarpic). Recent collecting has yielded a
few more specimens, D. 627, dredged in 34-50 meters off Gorda Point,
February (sterile).

Sarcodiotheca elongata (S. & G.) Setchell comb. nov.

Anatheca elongata Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 747, pl. 22, figs. 4, 5, pl. 64.
In a marginal note in his personal copy of the 1924 publication, Setch-
ell has stated that this species is of the genus Sarcodiotheca. The investi-

290 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

gation was evidently first made after a study of the species of this genus
reported by these same authors in 1937. Re-examination of these plants
confirms the statement.

Only a single fragmentary specimen has appeared in recent Gulf col-
lections, but is easily identified here.

The species was first collected by Johnston in beach drift on San
Pedro Martir Island, April. Our present plant was taken in a 4-30-meter
dredge-haul off Tiburon Island near Turner’s Island, D. 140, Jan.

Sarcodiotheca dichotoma (Howe) comb. nov.

Anatheca dichotoma Howe, 1911, p. 502, pl. 29.

This species was described and illustrated sufficiently by Howe to be
recognized readily. Its widely divaricate, dichotomous branching is a con-
spicuous distinguishing feature. Other Pacific coast species are definitely
stricter in habit.

‘The type specimens were from La Paz, Vives 1lc, 18b, 20a. Abun-
dant sterile material has been obtained from 30-36 meters in Ensenada de
San Francisco near Guaymas, D. 471, Feb.

Family Hypneaceae
Genus HYPNEA Lamouroux
Hypnea nidifica J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1852, p. 451; 1876, p. 564. Hypnea Marchantae Setch. &
Gard., 1924, p. 759, pl. 23, figs. 22, 23, pls. 42a, 56.

This species was originally described from Hawaii, and an investiga-
tion of Hawaiian Hypneae has convinced me that it is distinct from other
species of that region. In the Herbarium of the University of California
there is a fine collection of Hawaiian material containing a good number
of specimens of Hypnea nidifica. Its loose divaricate branching is conspicu-
ously different from the more percurrent growth of the other species. We
can indeed be quite certain that we have abundant, typical material of
this species, showing a broad range of variation.

Hypnea nidifica varies widely in size, but the divaricate branching
habit, quite devoid of percurrent axes, is generally consistent. A gradual
transition in size of branches is found among the specimens on hand, and
in the coarser ones the number of stichidia is greater. A comparison of the
type of H. Marchantae from the Gulf with coarser specimens from Ha-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 291

waii reveals no essential differences, as they fit well into the scale of vari-
ation. Finding no consistent means of distinguishing them, the type of
H. Marchantae is here considered to be a coarser form of H. nidifica and
one bearing stichidia in greater number.

Recent collections in the Gulf have added greatly to the Hypnea as-
semblage known from that region, and a fine series of gradation types in
Hypnea nidifica is now on hand. Specimens quite identical with Hawatian
forms are present and range into the coarser forms described as H. Mar-
chantae. Specimens from Costa Rica and from southern California have
been studied and should also undoubtedly be referred here.

D. 342, 349, dredged in 22 m., Punta Pefiasco, Feb. ; D. 253, dredged
in 12-22 m., Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 469, in 30-36 m., Ensenada de San
Francisco near Guaymas, Feb.; D. 377, in 22 m., Tepoca Bay, Feb.;
D. 500, lower littoral rocks, Catalina Bay, near Guaymas, Feb.; D. 607,
in shallow pools, San Gabriel Bay, Feb.; M. 48, cast ashore, Eureka,
May.

Hypnea pannosa J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1847, p. 14; 1852, p. 453; Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XVIII, tab.
27; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 758.

An examination of portions of the type material of this species from
Liebmann’s original collection made at St. Augustine, on the west coast
of Mexico, confirms Setchell’s conclusion that his Hypnea nidulans is dis-
tinct. The type of H. pannosa is that from which Kiitzing drew his fig-
ures, but the statement that they are natural size is incorrect and mislead-
ing. The figures show the plants enlarged 1.5-2 diameters. The true H.
pannosa is therefore a much smaller plant than H. nidulans and more
compactly caespitose. Though most of the caespitose Hypneae of our col-
lections agree more properly with H. nidulans, at least one collection, D.
722, taken in July from the reef at Turner’s Island, agrees well with the
type of H. pannosa. H. 651, dredged in 40 meters off San Jose del Cabo, is
similar in size and may be the same.

Hypnea nidulans Setchell
Setchell, 1924, p. 161; 1926, p. 100; Tanaka, 1941, p. 246, fig. 18.

In recent years this species, originally described from Samoa, has been
recorded abundantly from many tropical Pacific stations. It is known
abundantly from Japan and now is found to be frequent in the Gulf of
California. One specimen in the Herbarium of the University of Califor-
nia from the Galapagos Archipelago seems also to be of this species.

292 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

The Gulf specimens are distinguished from Hypnea pannosa by their
larger size and coarser texture, by their habit of creeping over pebbles and
coral, and by their usually bright reddish color. Iridescence has been ob-
served in the fresh specimens.

D. 690, 733, Turner’s Island reef, July; D. 545, in rock pockets on
shore, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.; D. 497, Catalina Bay, near Guaymas,
Feb.; D. 430j, Pond Island, Feb.

Hypnea Esperi Bory

Bory, 1829, p. 157; Kiitzing, 1849, p. 759; Tab. Phyc. XVIII, tab. 26a-
c; Bégrgesen, 1920, p. 306, fig. 48.

This is another small species similar to Hypnea pannosa in size. The
habit is less compactly caespitose and more delicately branched through-
out ; the branches are cylindrical, longer, more slender, and more attenu-
ate than in that species.

It is not well established what Bory’s type of Hypnea Esperi really
is, but the Gulf plants do correspond to the illustrations of Kiitzing and
of B¢rgesen. The determinations of this species, therefore, wherever they
occur, must remain uncertain.

Our specimens, particularly D. 106, agree excellently with Kiitzing’s
figure and with Bérgesen’s description.

The present record of its occurrence in the Gulf adds to the already
wide distribution attributed to Hypnea Esperi in the warmer Pacific: D.
106, lower littoral, reef at Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. & R. 3396d, on
rocks at low-tide mark, Punta San Pedro, near Guaymas, Dec.; D. 533,
in rock pockets, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.

Hypnea Johnstonii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 758, pl. 23, figs. 19-21, pl. 57.

This species is well described and illustrated by Setchell and Gardner,
and is to be distinguished readily from the other Gulf species by its
coarseness and by the absence of an apical cell. The tips have a group of
cells instead of one apical initial.

J. 1 (AHF no. 66), Pond Island, June; J. 125, Tortuga Island,
May; D. 494, Catalina Bay, near Guaymas, reef rocks, Feb.; D. 121, reef
at Turner’s Island, Jan.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 293

Family Gracilariaceae
Genus GRACILARIA Greville

Gracilaria Vivesii Howe

Howe, 1911, p. 503, pls. 30, 33, figs. 1-5; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 750.

This species has not appeared in any of the recent collections and is
known only from cast-up specimens, the type from La Paz, Vives 20e, and
M. 20 from Guaymas. It may be identified by its large, broad, dichoto-
mous-flabellate fronds. Excellent figures of both specimens have been
given.

Gracilaria Johnstonii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 752, pl. 22, figs. 11-14, pl. 60. Gracilaria sini-
cola, S. & G., 1924, p. 752, pl. 62. Gracilaria vivipara S. & G.,
1924, p. 750, pl. 24, figs. 28, 29, pl. 63.

This species, which is closely related to Gracilaria Vivesii, has un-
doubtedly been misinterpreted, owing to lack of information regarding
the habitat of the plants. All of the type specimens concerned in the above
synonymy have been examined, and there appears to the author no reason
for segregating them specifically. The name G. Johnstonii is chosen to
represent this entity because the type specimen is the most normal and
characteristic-appearing plant of the three, though the other names pre-
cede it in the paging of the original publication. The type of G. vivipara
is clearly only a proliferating example of this species; that of G. sinicola
is merely a somewhat old, ragged, and curled cystocarpic specimen. Other
examples of the latter from the same station are proliferating much as
G. vivipara and are partly covered with epiphytes. Considerable variation
in the width of the fronds is shown in the several specimens, ranging from
1 cm. at the forks to as much as 5 cm. The heavy, coreaceous texture is
the same in all of them, and in this particular they differ from all Gulf
Gracilarias except G. Vivesii.

No mature plants which can be referred to this species with certainty
occur in the winter collections. From the evidence at hand it would ap-
pear to be a summer annual of sublittoral habitat.

Specimens are known from Smith Island, J. 61 (AHF no. 79), June;
J. 108 (AHF no. 78), San Esteban Island, April; J. 62 (AHF no. 77),
Isla Partida, July; J. 36, 36x, Los Angeles Bay, June.

Gracilaria lacerata S. & G.
Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 755, pl. 51c.

Several plants of this species were collected at Guaymas, growing on
rocks in the intertidal zone, D. & R. 3353, December. They are up to 10

294 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

cm. high and show good discoid holdfasts, each giving rise to several erect
axes branched into irregular segments with unevenly toothed or prolifer-
ous margins. Comparison of these plants with the poor, battered types of
Gracilaria lacerata has convincingly demonstrated their identity.
‘The type was found cast up at Santa Rosalia, M. 102 (AHF no. 76),
May.
Gracilaria crispata S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 751, pl. 22, figs. 7-10, pl. 44a.

A number of examples of this species have appeared from several lo-
calities in our area. Gracilaria crispata is similar in its irregular appear-
ance and uneven margins to G. lacerata, but is distinguished by its more
abundant branching (usually somewhat more divergent), shorter inter-
nodes, and crisped, undulate margins. Abundant, congested, semiprolifer-
ous branching is generally conspicuous in the terminal portions of mature
plants.

D. & R. 3397, 3398, intertidal rock pools, Punta San Pedro, Guay-
mas, Dec.; H. 600, dredged in 40 meters, San Jose del Cabo, Aug.; D. &
R. 3232, tide pools, cove north of Cabo Arco, Guaymas, Dec.; D. 729,
lower littoral rocks, ‘Turner’s Island, July; M. 51 (AHF no. 75), Eu-
reka.

A collection is also on hand which extends the range of this species to
Banderas Bay on the central coast of Mexico, H. 737, July.

Gracilaria pinnata S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 751, pl. 61.

J. 44 (AHF no. 80), dredged in 8-12 meters, Los Angeles Bay, June;
D. 243, cast up at high tide, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 272, dredged in
12-22 meters, Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Gracilaria pachydermatica S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 753, pl. 24, figs. 30, 31.
J. 122 (AHF no. 74), on rocks in upper sublittoral belt, Tortuga
Island, June. Not again collected.

Gracilaria subsecundata S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 755, pl. 23, figs. 26, 27, pl. 59.
M. 56 (AHF no. 73), cast ashore, Guaymas Bay, May. Not again
collected.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 295

“This species of Gracilaria is decidedly distinct from all of the others
collected in the Gulf of California, and indeed seems to have no close
relative outside the Gulf. The relatively delicate acute fronds and the
diversity of methods of branching are distinguishing characters.” Setchell
and Gardner.

Gracilaria confervoides (L.) Grev.

Greville, 1830, p. 123; Kylin, 1930, p. 55, fig. 44, 1941, p. 20; Harvey,
1846-51, pl. 165. Cordylecladia lemanaeformis Setch. & Gard.,
1924, p. 759 (not of Howe).

Kylin, 1941, lists both Gracilaria confervoides and G. Sjostedtii for
the central coast of California. He points out in his earlier paper, 1930,
the distinctions between these two species, which are very similar vege-
tatively. He describes G. confervoides, as typified by specimens from
Naples, Italy, as having cystocarps with special connecting strands be-
tween the gonimoblasts and cystocarp wall. Specimens collected by Kylin
at Naples and deposited in the Herbarium of the University of California
were examined and found to show no connecting strands in the cystocarps.
This led at first to considerable confusion in the author’s mind, but the
fact that the cystocarps examined were quite old and contained great num-
bers of mature carpospores perhaps explains the inability to find the
strands, which undoubtedly are more conspicuous in younger stages.

The fibers have been observed in two examples collected in July at
Turner’s Island as well as in one collected in December at Guaymas. The
Gulf of California plants are more delicate and slender than most forms
of the widely distributed G. confervoides, a feature which undoubtedly
led Setchell and Gardner to refer Johnston’s specimens from Los Angeles
Bay to Cordylecladia lemanaeformis. Comparison of Gulf plants with
Howe’s Peruvian material of C. lemanaeformis shows that none of our
specimens are identical with his.

The delicate, slenderly branched forms of G. confervoides are pre-
dominant in our area. Most of the material collected thus far has been
found floating, cast ashore, or has been obtained by dredging.

D. 57, in 4-6 m., Guaymas Bay, Jan.; J. 35, sublittoral, Los Angeles
Bay, June; D. 366, in 22 m., Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. & R. 3425, drifting
along shore of bay, Empalme, Dec.; D. 431, dredged off Pond Island,
Feb.; D. 672, cast ashore, Kino, July; D. 667, cast ashore at south chan-
nel entrance, Tiburon Island, July; D. & R. 2929, cast ashore, Kino,
Nov.; 3247, floating in brackish water of Rio Mayo, Dec.; 3159, mouth
of tidal stream, Playa Miramar, Guaymas, Dec.

296 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Gracilaria Sjostedtii Kylin
Kylin, 1930, p. 55, fig. 43; 1941, p. 21.

D. 381 compares favorably in external morphology with specimens
from the coast of California. Cystocarps examined have not exhibited the
connecting strands between gonimoblasts and cystocarps wall which char-
acterize G. confervoides. Until more collections and accurate field obser-
vations on these two plants in the Gulf are made, D. 381 is separated from
G. confervoides. It was dredged in 22 meters at Tepoca Bay, February,
and is much more robust and less branched than D. 366 from the same
haul referred to G. confervoides.

Gracilaria compressa (Ag.) Grev.

Greville, 1830, p. 125; Harvey, 1846-51, pl. 205; J. Agardh, 1851,
p. 593; Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XVIII, tab. 78; Okamura, Icones
V, p. 161, pl. 242, figs. 5-10.

Specimens of several collections from Guaymas appear to agree in
all essential details with this widely distributed species. Correspondence is
exceedingly close with the Japanese forms illustrated by Okamura (loc.
Cit):

There is considerable variation in size of the plants and diameter of
the branches, but the branching habit and fleshy texture of the fresh speci-
mens are ready means of identifying the plant.

Thus far it has been found only in the vicinity of Guaymas, abundant
in shallow water or on shores of quiet bays: D. & R. 3356, 3305, 3284,
3148, Dec.; D. 59, 67, Guaymas Bay, Jan.; D. 477, Puerto San Carlos,
near Guaymas, Feb.; D. & R. 3246, 3242, floating in brackish water at
mouth of Rio Mayo, Dec.

Gracilaria lichenoides (L.) Harv.?

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 750.

A single sterile collection from Coyote Bay, Concepcion, J. 14, June,
was referred to this species by Setchell and Gardner. The plants show
much resemblance to the coarser forms of G. confervoides or G. Sjostedtit.
The specimens have the pale, cartilaginous character so commonly associ-
ated with G. lichenoides, but this may largely be due to conditions under
which the present plants were dried. Since no other collections have been
made from that part of the Gulf, this record must remain questionable
until confirmed by additional material.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 297

Gracilaria veleroae sp. nov.
Plate 70, Fig. 2 (left)

Frondes 6-8 cm. altae, complanatae, crasso-membranaceae, basi cuneatae e
disco parvo orientes, irregulariter dichotomo-flabellatae, segmentis plerumque 5-7
mm. latis, integris; internodiis curtis, 1-1.5 cm.; apicibus rotundatis; frondibus
300-400 pw crassis; cellulis internis magnis, parietibus tenuibus; corticibus essen-
tialiter unistratosis cellulis forma laterium; cystocarpiis marginalibus, 1 mm.
diam., carpostomio leviter elevato.

Fronds 6-8 cm. high, complanate, thick-membranous, cuneate at the
base from a small discoid holdfast, irregularly dichotomo-flabellate, the
segments mostly 5-7 mm. broad, entire, dull reddish in color; internodes
short, 1.0-1.5 cm.; apices rounded ; fronds 300-400 p thick in cross section,
medulla of large, thin-walled cells, cortex of essentially a single layer of
brick-shaped cells about 12 by 5 ; cystocarps spherical, usually marginal,
about 1000 » diam., with a small, slightly raised ostiole; tetrasporangia
unknown.

Type: D. 141a, in a 4-30-meter dredge haul, off Tiburon Island
near Turner’s Island, Jan. 25, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 37.

D. 83, dredged in 12-20 meters, outside Guaymas Harbor, Jan. 23,
1940; D. 265, dredged in Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan. 28, 1940;
D. 371, dredged in 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb. 4; D. 339, dredged in 5
meters, San Felipe Bay, Feb. 2.

In color and habit this species very closely resembles a Rhodymenia,
and until cystocarps were found was confused with that genus. The typi-
cal gracilarioid gonimoblast development, however, is clearly indicated in
sections of cystocarps of several collections.

This species seems morphologically related to the other broad, com-
planate Gulf species, Gracilaria Vivesii and G. Johnstonii, but is much
smaller throughout than those plants.

Gracilaria Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 65, Fig. 2
Frondes 7-15 cm. altae, tenues, inferne cylindratae, superne complanatae, axi-
bus paucis e disco basali orientibus, multifarie ramosis, basim teretibus, 800-1200 u
diam., superne complanatis usque ad 2 cm. latis, apicibus acutis attenuatisque ;
cystocarpiis protrudentibus e disco frondis, 1500 diam., carpostomio parvissimo.
Plants 7-15 cm. high, slender, cylindrical below, flattened above, from
a small, solid, discoid holdfast, several main axes arising directly from the
holdfast or from a very short, thick basal stipe; axes branching loosely,
multifariously, terete at the base, 800-1200 » in diam., becoming com-
pressed to flattened above and to 2 mm. broad; apices acute, attenuated ;

298 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

fronds in cross section showing a broad medullary area of large, thin-
walled cells and a 2-3 layered cortex of much smaller cells; cystocarps
occasional, protruding from compressed to flattened parts of fronds, 1500
p diam., with a very small ostiole and an extensively branched, dendroid
gonimoblast structure; inner pericarp of flattened cells simulating a
crushed layer (a sort of “pericarpium proprium”’).

Type: D. 149, dredged in 4-32 meters off south shore of Tiburon
Island near Turner’s Island, Jan. 25, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 38.

D. 177, seine-haul over sand, just off south shore beach, Puerto Re-

fugio, Jan. 26, 1940.

Gracilaria guaymasensis sp. nov.
Plate 70, Fig. 2 (right)

Frondes 3-4 cm. altae, valde ramosae, axibus multis e disco basali orientibus,
prorsus compressis, segmentis 1.5-2 mm. latis, dichotomis, densis; internodis 2-5
mm. longis; apicibus obtusis; cystocarpiis globosis, 1.2-1.3 mm. diam., late sessili-
bus aut basim constrictis, carpostomio leviter elevato.

Plants 3-4 cm. high, much branched, many axes arising from a simple,
discoid holdfast, compressed to flattened throughout, the segments 1.5-2
mm. wide; branching mainly dichotomous, close, internodes 2-5 mm.
long; apices blunt; outer cortical cells in cross section in a palisade, 5 by
10 w; cystocarps abundant on upper branches, large, globose, 1200-1300
p diam., entirely superficial, broadly sessile or commonly constricted about
the base, with a small, slightly raised ostiole; placenta typically gracilari-
oid, of large, elongated, thin-walled cells.

Type: D. & R. 3401 (Field Museum; isotype, AHF no. 39), in
intertidal pools, Punta San Pedro, near Guaymas, Dec. 22, 1939.

Known only from a single collection but distinct in habit and in
morphology of cystocarps from other known species.

Gracilaria secundata S. & G.

Gracilaria secundata Setch. & Gard., 1937, p. 78 (not of Harvey).

Setchell and Gardner described a new species from a fragment of a
tetrasporic plant and erroneously gave it a name already used by Harvey
(Phyc. Austr. V, 1863, no. 432) for another species. The type of Setchell
and Gardner’s plant is so fragmentary that it can only be considered an
interesting but indeterminable scrap.

Further collecting in the sublittoral off San Jose del Cabo may reveal
sufficient material later for the establishment of a name.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 299

Gracilaria sp.
Plate 44, Fig. 1
Fronds up to 9 cm., complanate, thick, coriaceous, from a short, terete
stipe, 2-3 mm. diam., expanding cuneately into the base of the blades, ir-
regularly, divaricately forked and lobed, the segments short, 6-8 mm.
(to 15) broad, with smooth margins; fronds 300-700 pu thick, with 2-3
layered cortex of quadrate cells about 12 » diam.; reproduction unknown.
The several examples of this plant in our collections seem surely to be
of this genus but are sterile. The terete basal stipe is distinctive as are the
littoral habit and the thick, coriaceous fronds. It appears to be related to
the G. Vivesii-G. Johnstonii group in the Gulf, and, since it is present in
so many collections, it seems well to record it in this way.
D. 118, lower littoral rocks, Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. 200, Puerto
Refugio, Jan.; D. 446, San Esteban Island, Feb.

Family Dicranemaceae
Genus DICRANEMA Sonder

Dicranema rosaliae S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 745, pl. 22, fig. 6.

Recent collections have yielded a number of specimens of this little-
known plant. Its small size (2-4 cm.) and slender diameter of the terete
fronds (250-350 ), together with the presence of a medullary core of
compact, thick-walled, elongated cells, distinguish it from all other Gulf
plants. Fertile material has, however, not yet been detected.

M. 103, cast ashore, Santa Rosalia; D. & R. 3426, drifting along
southeast shore of bay, Empalme, Dec.; D. & R. 3309, drifting along
shore east of Guaymas, Dec.; D. & R. 3362, on shore rocks, Guaymas,
Dec.; D. 255a, dredged in 12-22 meters, Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio,
Jan.; D. 614e, in oyster culture ponds, San Gabriel Bay, Feb. (slender,
125-250 p diam) ; D. 546, on lower littoral rocks, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.

Family Phyllophoraceae
Genus GYMNOGONGRUS Martius

Gymnogongrus carnosus S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 745, pl. 47a, pl. 22, fig. 1.

J. 102, cast ashore, San Pedro Martir Island, April. Not again col-
lected.

“The combination of characters of this species is not such as to make
it unmistakably a member of the genus Gymmnogongrus. It has a Gigarti-

300 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

naceous cystocarp, and the histological characters are mainly those of
Gymnogongrus. The very gelatinous nature of the cell-walls, however, is

quite different from those of all known species of the genus.” Setchell and
Gardner.

Gymnogongrus sinicola sp. nov.
Plate 71, Fig. 2 (lower left)

Frondes 4-6 cm. altae, e disco simplici orientes, inferne teretes, superne leviter
compressae, 2-3 mm. diam., firmae, solidae, carnosae, maxime in planitie una, di-
chotomo-ramosae; segmentis curtis, vulgo circa 5 mm. longis; apicibus rotundatis;
structura generis.

Fronds 4-6 cm. high, from a simple holdfast, terete below, to slightly
compressed above, 2-3 mm. broad, of a firm, turgid, fleshy texture, di-
chotomously branched, mainly in one plane; segments short, mostly about
5 mm., and slightly broader above than below; apices blunt, rounded;
cross section showing a very large medulla of large, thin-walled, isodia-
metric cells to 200 p diam., grading toward the periphery into the sub-
cortex of small cells 40 » to 18-20 ; cortex of a single palisade layer of
anticlinally arranged cells measuring 8-16 »; reproduction unknown.

Type: D. 447, lower littoral rocks, San Esteban Island, Feb. 5,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 40.

D. 484, on reef rocks, Catalina Bay, outside Guaymas Harbor, Feb.;
D. 213, on rocky shore, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 122, reef rocks,
Turner’s Island, Jan.

This species may be distinguished by its rigid, thick, fleshy, usually
terete fronds. Though all our material is sterile, the habit and structure
seem to justify its arrangement under Gymnogongrus.

Gymnogongrus Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 71, Fig. 2 (upper left)

Frondes usque ad 2 cm. altae, caespitosae, copiose-late-divaricato-dichotomo-
ramosae; segmentis circa 300 u crassis, plerumque 0.8-1 mm. latis, inferne angusti-
oribus, ad apicem curtioribus, plerumque inferne 2-3 mm. longis; apicibus bifidis
aut 3-4 digitatis; cystocarpiis circa 450 uw diam., dimidio immersis, carpostomia
pauca praebentibus.

Plants to 2 cm. high, of abundant, narrow, widely divaricate, dichoto-
mous branches, caespitose, forming a small, rounded clump on rocks, of a
soft, delicate texture when fresh; segments, about 300 p thick, mostly
.8-1 mm. wide, narrower below; distance between dichotomies succes-
sively shorter toward apices, mostly 2-3 mm. below; apices bifid, or 3-4

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 301

digitate; cystocarps frequent on frond surfaces, about 450 p diam.,
smooth, rounded, about half embedded in frond, protruding only 200-300
p from normal frond surface, with several ostiolar openings.

Type: D. 649, middle littoral rocks on point 3 miles north of Kino,
July 16, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 41.

The specimens are ample and have a very distinctive habit. It is the
smallest species thus far recorded from our area.

Gymnogongrus divaricatus Holmes
Plate 71, Fig. 2 (right)

Holmes, 1895, p. 255, tab. VII, fig. 3a-b; Okamura, Icones Jap. Algae
VIL ps toy pk 310.

Specimens are known from a single locality in the Gulf, but material
is ample and fertile. It seems to correspond in all essential characters with
the Japanese species. The truncate or bifid frond-apices and the marginal
clavate proliferations serve to identify it.

D. 94, 120, lower littoral rocks of reef at Turner’s Island, Jan.

Family Gigartinaceae
Genus GIGARTINA Stackhouse
Gigartina Teedii (Roth) Lamour.

Lamouroux, 1813, p. 49, tab. 4, fig. 11; Okamura, Icones Jap. Algae I,
pp. 163-165, pl. 33, figs. 9-12.

Several specimens taken from the vicinity of Guaymas correspond
satisfactorily with the descriptions and figures of this widely distributed
species, known heretofore from southern Europe, Brazil, and Japan. The
narrow, complanate fronds, 2 mm. broad, and abundant, delicate branch-
ing distinguish it from the others of our region.

D. 47, middle littoral rocks by wharf, Guaymas Harbor, Jan.; D. &
R. 3364, 3286, in shallow water, Guaymas, Dec.

Gigartina Eatoniana J. Ag.
Setch. & Gard., 1933, p. 271, pl. 51.

A few examples are at hand which seem to exhibit the characters of
juvenile or immature plants of Gigartina Eatoniana. They show good cor-
respondence with the type specimens as illustrated by Setchell and Gard-
ner, and until more fully developed material is collected, they are best

302 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

referred to that species. They differ from other Gulf species of the genus
by their discoid holdfasts and smooth, attenuated lower parts of the
blades.

MacDougal, Puerto Libertad, Sonora, May 4, 1923 (with Gigartina
MacDougalii) ; D. 91, on rocky shore, Turner’s Island, Jan.

Gigartina Johnstonii sp. nov.

Gigartina Chauvinii Setch. & Gard. (not of Montagne), 1924, p. 744,
pls. 46b, 70.

Frondes 12-25 cm. altae, complanatae 5-12 (-16) mm. latae, basim laxe ramoso
stoloniferae; laminis primariis e stolonibus orientibus, secundariis tertiariisque
marginalibus; marginibus omnibus pinnulis simplicibus vestientibus; discis lami-
narum projecturis papillatis indutis; apicibus acutis.

Plants 12-25 cm. high, of complanate blades 5-12 (or 16) mm. broad
arising from a holdfast composed of a loose, branched, stoloniferous tan-
gle; primary blades arising as branches from the stolons; secondary and
tertiary blades successively smaller and all marginal; all margins with
conspicuous acute, simple or branched, spinose pinnules; blade surfaces
with shorter, more papillate projections; tips all very acute; branches
narrowed but not conspicuously constricted at bases.

Type: D. 436, lower littoral rocks, San Esteban Island, Feb. 5,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 42.

A comparison of specimens from the Gulf collections of this plant
with Peruvian examples of Gigartina Chauvinii has revealed that they
are not identical and that the Mexican plants are worthy of a distinguish-
ing name.

The species is common on lower littoral rocks in the upper Gulf and
is known from the following stations: D. 92 (117 young), Turner’s
Island, Jan.; D. 189 (207 young), Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 311, Gon-
zaga Bay, Jan.; D. 436, San Esteban Island, Feb.; J. 53, April; J. 101,
Georges Island, April.

Gigartina pectinata sp. nov.
Plate 64, Fig. 1

Frondes 5-30 cm. extendentes, laxe per extensiones papillarum superficium
inferarum aut per stolones parvas ramosas affixae; segmentis frondium angustis,
complanatis, primariis circa 3 cm. latis, distiche 3-plo ramosis, in ordine angustior-
ibus curtisque, apicibus acutis; partibus latioribus ramorum, pinnulis copiose mar-
ginalibus, tenuibus, pectinatis.

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 303

Plants spreading 5-10 cm. in extent, attached loosely by elongation of
papillae from the under surfaces or by small, branched stolon-attachments
from the primary base and the prostrate blades; fronds composed of nar-
row, complanate segments, the primary ones about 3 cm. broad, branched
distichously into about 3 orders of branches, successively narrower and
shorter and apically acute; broader parts of primary and secondary
branches conspicuously clothed with abundant, semiequal, slender margi-
nal pinnules, giving a somewhat pectinate aspect to these parts; older
blade-surfaces commonly with similar, shorter projections ; cystocarps lat-
eral on smaller segments, not abundant, with a dense proper pericarp;
cystocarpic plants more densely branched than sterile specimens.

Type: D. 239, cast up on shore at high tide, north shore beach at
Puerto Refugio, Jan. 27, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 43.

D. 209, lower littoral rocks, Puerto Refugio, Jan. 26, 1940; Poin-
dexter, shore rocks, Punta Pefiasco, March, 1941 (juvenile).

This species resembles in some respects young specimens of Gigartina
leptorhynchus of the coast of California.

Gigartina MacDougalii sp. nov.
Plate 64, Fig. 2

Frondes 6-9 cm. altae laminis angustis complanatis e stolonibus valde ramosis,
complanatis, in massam intertextis orientes; laminis complanatis basim attenuatis,
semel distiche in segmenta 5-6 mm. lata et usque ad 5 cm. longa ramosis; segmentis
levibus aut inferne spinulis paucis marginalibus, sed superne papillis ramosis
lobatis, dense intertextisque ubique indutis.

Plants 6-9 cm. high, of narrow complanate blades from a large tan-
gled holdfast of many narrow, flattened, much-branched stolons; blades
flattened from the start, attenuated to the base, branching once distichous-
ly into segments 5-6 mm. wide and up to 5 cm. long, smooth or with a
few marginal spinules in lowest parts, thickly matted above with branched
and lobed papillae over all surfaces, giving these parts a spongy appear-
ance and obscuring the flatness of the blades; cystocarps among branched
papillae, with a “pericarpium proprium.”

Type: MacDougal (Univ. Calif. Herb.; isotype, AHF no. 44),
Puerto Libertad, Sonora, May 4, 1923.

The tangled holdfast of branched stolons and the matted effect of
the papillae over the blades are the distinctive features of this remarkable
species.

304 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Genus RHODOGLOSSUM J. Agardh

Rhodoglossum Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 71, Fig. 1
Frondes 10-16 cm. altae, 5-8 (12) cm. latis, membranaceae, plus minusve di-
chotomo-divisae; segmentis latissimis, divergentibus, apicibus acutis, quibusque
inferne ad stipitem, angustam, basi teretem, 1-1.5 cm. longam, 1 mm. latam, attenu-

atis, 1-paucis e stipite commune orientibus; marginibus integribus; laminis 200-
300 pw crassis.

Fronds 10-16 cm. high, membranous, 5-8 (or 12) cm. broad, -+- —
dichotomously divided, the segments very broad, spreading and with acute
apices, narrowing abruptly at the base to a narrow, basally terete, cuneate
stipe 11.5 cm. long, 1 mm. diam., one to several such stipitate blades from
a short, common stipe; margins essentially smooth, entire; blades 200-
300 p thick, of a loose, fibrous medulla and a cortex of 3-5 layers of mi-
nute, -+ — isodiametrical cells with conspicuous intercellular connec-
tions, 5-7 » diam., those of the outermost layer commonly somewhat anti-
clinally elongated; tetrasporic sori and cystocarps scattered evenly over
all but the tips of their respective fronds; cystocarps completely em-
bedded, 500-900 p», diam.; tetrasporangia in sori 500-700 p» across, com-
pletely immersed under the cortex, cruciately divided.

Type: D. 437, lower littoral rocks, San Esteban Island, Feb. 5,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 45.

This species was found in only one locality but was quite abundant
there. It was first taken for a small Jridophycus species, but investigation
has shown it to have the characters of the genus Rhodoglossum.

Family Rhodymeniaceae
Genus FAUCHEA Montagne & Bory
Fauchea mollis Howe

Howe, 1911, p. 507, pl. 32, pl. 33, fig. 6.

Study of the type specimen collected at La Paz by Vives confirms
Howe’s designation of the plant as most likely a Fauchea. The structure
corresponds to Kylin’s diagnosis of the genus (1931, p. 8). It has not,
however, appeared in any collections since the original one.

Fauchea Seffer1 Howe

Howe, 1911, p. 506, pl. 31.

This plant, another species from Vives’ collections at La Paz, cor-
responds with Kylin’s interpretation of the genus Fauchea (1931, p. 8).
It has not been collected a second time.

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 305

Genus BOTRYOCLADIA Kylin
Botryocladia pseudodichotoma var. datilensis var. nov.
Plate 45, Fig. 7; Plate 73, Fig. 1

A forma typica, magnitudine prorsus parviore, vesiculis densiore conglobatis
divergente; cellularibus glanduliformibus 30-35 diam., 5-6 collocatis.

Plants smaller in size throughout than the species, with more compact
arrangement of vesicles; gland cells 30-35 » diam., in groups of 5-6.

Type: D. 116, lower littoral rocks, Turner’s Island (El Datil) off
south shore of Tiburon Island, Jan. 24, 1940 (tetrasporic). Herb. AHF
no. 47.

In general habit and appearance the specimens on hand resemble the
species very strongly. They are, however, smaller in size throughout and
show a more compact arrangement of the vesicles. An investigation of the
gland cells which Bgrgesen has shown to be of specific significance and is
here used as a varietal distinction, reveals a difference both in size and ar-
rangement. In the typical species they usually measure between 14 and 28
p. and are found in large aggregations, up to 25 on a single large interior
cell (plate 45, fig. 6). In the Gulf material they are larger, 30-35 p,
and occur in groups of only 5-6. In view of the great similarities with the
Pacific coast species and the not widely separated localities, it seems best
to make only a varietal distinction.

Botryocladia Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 45, Figs. 2-5

Frondes axibus primariis, solidis, ramosis, vesiculas elongato-saccatas, cavas,
plerumque 3 cm. longas, pedicellis teretibus, 2 mm. longis, et in dimidio superno
projectionibus secondariis digitiformibus cavis provisas, ferentibus; projectionibus
irregularibus et magnitudine variabilus usque ad 14-plo longitudine vesicularum
primariarum. Specimene typico mesquam completo sed distinguente.

A single cystocarpic portion known, 3.4 cm. long, consisting of one
hollow, saccate branch (or vesicle) subtended by a solid, branched, terete
main axis bearing also remnants of 3 other saccate parts; fronds expand-
ing and becoming hollow about 2 mm. from the axil of each branch of the
terete axis, the vesicle elongated and bearing a few secondary, hollow,
fingerlike projections from the upper half, these irregular and of varying
size, up to 4 the length of the main vesicle; vesicle-wall consisting of 3
cell-layers, the innermost of large cells averaging about 70 by 200 p, the
subcortical layer of cells about 20 by 30 p» in dimensions, arranged regu-
larly over the lateral walls of the large inner cells; the outer layer of cells
incomplete, consisting of small cells 10 » or less in diameter, partly cov-

306 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

ering the subcortical layer but more or less arranged in such a way as to
leave the middle of the larger inner cells uncovered ; gland cells borne oc-
casionally in groups of 4-8 on the middle of the inner face of the large
cells next to the cavity of the vesicle, pyriform, about 20 p» long; cysto-
carps sparsely scattered over the surface of the vesicle, smooth, hemi-
spherical, 600 p» broad, 300 » high, with a small pore 50 p» in diam.

Type: D.561, dredged in 20-40 meters, Agua Verde Bay, Feb. 12,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 48.

This species is in many respects similar to the West Indian Chrysy-
menia Enteromorpha, from which it differs in possessing a solid, branched
axis, in the less proliferous branching of the vesicles, and in the smooth,
hemispherical nature of the cystocarps.

Botryocladia uvarioides sp. nov.
Plate 45, Figs. 8-10; Plate 75, Fig. 1

Frondes usque ad 22 cm. altae, axi primaria, tereti, solida, ramis lateralibus
copiosis sphericis, dense collocatis, saccatis, prorsus totaliter axes investientibus,
compositae; vesiculis 2-3 mm. diam.; cellulis glanduliformibus, singillatim aut
paucitatibus conglobatis, 10 diam.

Attachment organs unknown; plants up to 22 cm. high, consisting of
a sparingly branched, solid, terete main axis with abundant, close-set lat-
eral, spherical saccate branches almost completely covering the solid axis
throughout its length; spherical vesicles usually 2-3 mm. in diam., con-
sisting of a 3-layered wall enclosing the cavity; the innermost of large,
roundish cells 50-90 » diam.; the subcortex of cells 12-18 » diam.; the
outer cortical layer of small cells 4-6 » diam.; gland cells fairly infre-
quent, often occurring singly on the inner surface of the large inner cells,
or, when there are two, these not usually attached close together, not un-
commonly in groups of 3-5 arising from smaller cells of the inner layer,
small, 10 », with a slender attachment; reproduction unknown.

Type: H. 727 & 598 (Calif. Acad. of Sciences; isotype, AHF no.
49), dredged from 40 meters off San Jose del Cabo, August 4, 1932.

H. 45, dredged in 40 meters, San Lucas Bay, Aug. 4, 1932.

In some instances the gland cells arise from peculiar stellate cells re-
sembling those which B¢grgesen figures for Coelarthrum Albertisii (1914,
pp. 405-406, figs. 390, 391).

‘This species corresponds in size and general appearance with Botryo-
cladia occidentalis (Bérg.) Kylin, but differs in the nature of the gland
cells and in the close-set arrangement of the spherical vesicles. B. uvaria
seems to represent a widespread semitropical type, geographic species or

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 307

forms of which are now recognized under several names such as B. occi-
dentalis and B. leptopoda, and to which the present species is taxonomi-
cally equal in magnitude.

Genus RHODYMENIA Greville
Rhodymenia divaricata Dawson

Dawson, 1941a, p. 141, pl. 23, fig. 31.

D. 53 (AHF no. 1), dredged in 4-6 meters, mud bottom, Guaymas
Bay, Jan.; D. 257, dredged from sand and coralline bottom in 12-22 me-
ters off Mejia Island, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Rhodymenia rosea Dawson

Dawson, 1941a, p. 141, pl. 24, figs. 32, 33.
D. 266 (AHF no. 2), dredged in 12-22 meters off Mejia Island,
Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Rhodymenia Hancockii Dawson

Dawson, 1941a, p. 146, pl. 20, fig. 20, pl. 26, fig. 38.
D. 252 (Type AHF no. 3), dredged in 42 meters, west side of bay,
over shell bottom, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Rhodymenia lobata Dawson

Dawson, 1941a, p. 147, pl. 19, figs. 12, 13, pl. 28, fig. 41.

A sterile plant with extensive branched stipes, narrowly cuneate
blades, narrow segments, and thin blades was dredged in 10-18 fathoms
near Isabel Island, Sinaloa, Mexico, April 2, 1937. In the sterile state it
cannot be distinguished from Rhodymenia lobata, known hitherto only
from the sublittoral of central California, and is tentatively placed under
that name, awaiting fertile examples.

Rhodymenia P tepocensis sp. nov.
Plate 65, Fig. 1

Frondes 12-18 cm. altae, circa 200 wu crassae, valde complanatae, partibus in-
ferioribus exceptis, iis ad basem subteretem copiose ramosam valde attenuatis,
superne 2-3 mm. latae, remote dichotomae, in planitie una ramosae; segmentis
acute ascendentibus, axillis anguste acutis; apicibus 2-6 -acute divisis.

Plants 12-18 cm. high, strongly flattened except in lowermost parts,
very much attenuated to a subterete branching base, but holdfast un-

308 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

known; fronds mostly 2-3 mm. wide above, distantly subdichotomously
branched in one plane, the segments sharply ascending; axils a narrow V;
branches originating at very apex by development of pairs of primordia
from the multicellular apical meristem, elongation retarded at apex and
consequently 4-6 pointed growing tips are common and conspicuous;
fronds commonly 200 » thick, of a single cortical layer of small cells,
sharply angular in surface view, flattened in cross-sectional view ; medulla
of large, thin-walled cells; proliferations frequent by superficial out-
growths, at first very slender, 200-250 pu, soon becoming flattened and as-
suming the general habit of primary axes, though much more slender and
delicate throughout; fertile material unknown.

Type: D. 367-370, in 22 meters over sandy bottom, Tepoca Bay,
Feb. 4, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 46.

D. 432, dredged in 124-152 meters 4 miles off Pond Island, Feb. 5,
1940.

In habit and structure these plants are nearest to Rhodymenia, but
without reproductive material the generic status can be considered only
tentative.

Family Champiaceae
Genus LOMENTARIA Lyngbye
Lomentaria catenata Harvey
Plate 74, Fig. 1

Harvey, 1857, p. 331; Okamura, Icones Jap. Algae, I, pl. 26. Corallopsis
excavata Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 756, pls. 23, 44, 48.

J. 21, Tortuga Island, June; J. 59, Isla Partida, July; J. 129, oppo-
site Pond Island, July; D. 100, on reef at Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. 449,
middle littoral, San Esteban Island, Feb.

Of the five collections from the Gulf of California, including both
tetrasporic and cystocarpic material, all seem indistinguishable from the
hitherto Japanese species Lomentaria catenata. The condition of some of
the dried material of Johnston’s collection in 1921 was such that it was
misinterpreted by Setchell and Gardner and published by them as a new
species, Corallopsis excavata. There is, however, little or no question but
that the Gulf specimens are virtually, if not precisely, the same as the
Japanese specimens of L. catenata in the Herbarium of the University of
California.

Lomentaria hakodatensis Yendo
Plate 75, Fig. 2

Yendo, 1920, p. 6. Lomentaria sinensis Howe, 1924, p. 139, pl. 1, fig. 1.

Hooperia Baileyana Setch. & Gard. (not of J. Agardh), 1930, p.
U5Se

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 309

In the report of Setchell and Gardner on the Algae of the Revillagi-
gedo Island Expedition a specimen from Guadalupe Island, off the coast
of Lower California, is referred to Hooperia Baileyana J. Ag. Specimens
in six collections from the Gulf of California seem identical with the
Guadalupe Island specimen, and the cross sections of the 3-layered cortex
bear this out. The Atlantic specimens of Lomentaria Baileyana have a
characteristically unilateral branching habit. These branches are usually
curved so as to give a slightly curly appearance to the plants, a character
not at all conspicuous in the Gulf material.

The species Lomentaria hakodatensis occurs on the coasts of China
and Japan. The cross sections of this species show a somewhat variable
size in the three layers of cortical cells, though often, if not usually, the
arrangement is quite the same as in L. Baileyana. The same close rela-
tionship is shown with the Gulf specimens, but because of the nonsecund
branching habit and the more erect rather than curled nature of the
branches there is virtually no means of distinguishing our plants from
the western Pacific L. hakodatensis. Thus, lacking any real criterion for
separating them, it seems best at present to refer all of them to that spe-
cies.

D. 174, 232, 238, 261, dredged in 8-22 meters, Puerto Refugio, Jan.;
D. 475f, dredged in 30-36 meters, Ensenada de San Francisco, near
Guaymas, Feb.

Lomentaria Drouetii sp. nov.
Plate 46, Figs. 1, 2; Plate 74, Fig. 2

Frondes usque ad 8 cm. altae, basi solidae, erecta et iterum ad iterum copiose
ramosae usque ad systema complicatum segmentorum, gracilium, cylindratorum,
cavorum, nonseptatorum, superne circa 400 w diam. et apicibus acutis, efficientes ;
segmentis ultimis superne stratum corticale cellularum 3 x 12 uw, ordine palorum
intus 3-4 strata cellularum plus minusve isodiametricarum 5-15 uw, et zonam filorum
laxorum plerumque longitudinalium cavitatem vestientium ostendentibus.

Plants to 8 cm. high, arising from a small holdfast; fronds solid at
base, branching erectly, increasingly, and abundantly to a complex system
of slender, cylindrical, hollow, nonseptate segments, these ultimately
about 400 p» in diam. and terminating in moderately acute apices ; ultimate
segments composed of an outer cortical layer of palisade cells, measuring
about 3 by 12 p, below which are 3-4 layers of more or less isodiametrical
cells measuring from 5-15 p, these proceeding to a zone of loose, mostly
longitudinal filaments which line the cavity ; cortical cells in surface view
rectangular and strongly flattened in the longitudinal plane of the seg-

310 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

ment ; tetraspores and cystocarps unknown; color purplish brown (Ridge-
way’s Taupe Brown) when dry.

Type: D. & R. 3135 (Field Museum), on rocks below low-tide
level, shore of island at entrance to harbor, Guaymas, Dec. 2, 1939.

The hollow nature of the frond, nonseptate and bearing the longitu-
dinal filament-zone, seems to place it in Lomentaria, though we have no
reproductive structures as yet to verify this. In cross section this species is
especially distinct. ‘The palisade of very small cells has not been observed
or found reported in any other Lomentaria.

Genus CHAMPIA Desvaux
Champia parvula (Ag.) Harv.

Setch. & Gard., 1930, p. 153. Chylocladia parvula Harvey, 1846-1851,
pl. 210. Lomentaria parvula Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XV, tab. 87.

Setchell and Gardner (1930) identify a few fragments under H. L.
Mason 74 from Clarion Island, Revillagigedo group, as Champia parvula.
They say, “it seems to belong to this species attributed to the Atlantic
Ocean, the Mediterranean Sea, the East Indies, and Japan.”’ The present
collections add new records to the occurrence of this species in the Pacific
region.

D. 475a, dredged in 30-36 meters, Ensenada de San Francisco, near
Guaymas, Feb.; D. 704, at low tide on reef at Turner’s Island, July;
H. 608c, dredged in 40 meters off San Jose del Cabo, Aug.

Champia disticha sp. nov.
Plate 46, Fig. 5
Frondes epiphyticae, 0.5-1.5 cm. altae, e adhesione parva, rhizinoide, 600-1100
w latae, cavae, ad diaphragmata tantum leviter constrictae, compressae usque ad

14 plo diam.; segmentis quam curtioribus quam latis; ramis distichis e marginibus
orientibus, per occasionem adhaesiones accessorias rhizinoides producentibus.

Plants epiphytic, .5-1.5 cm. high from a small rhizoidal holdfast;
fronds 600-1100 » broad, hollow throughout, with regular diaphragms
and only slight constriction, compressed to 14 the breadth of the frond,
with segments much shorter than broad; branches almost entirely distich-
ous from the margins of the flattened frond, short, acute, occasionally
producing accessory rhizoidal attachments, not much constricted at their
bases; segments composed of a one-layered cortex of angular, somewhat
elongated cells and the typical inner, cortically attached filament series
with gland cells; cystocarps and tetrasporangia unknown.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA Sit

Type: D. 441, middle littoral, on Laurencia, San Esteban Island,
Feb. 5, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 51.

D. 283, on Corallina in a water-filled rock-cup at low tide, Puerto
Refugio, Jan., D. 219, on Amphiroa at same locality.

This species differs from other allied species of Champia in its small
size, its strongly compressed nature, and distichous branching.

Champia caespitosa sp. nov.
Plate 46, Figs. 3, 4

Frondes plerumque epiphyticae, circa 2 cm. altae, caespites parvas ramorum
intertextorum et per rhizinas connectas ostendentes et basi ad substrata algarum
per rhizinas disciferas irregulares affixae, copiose multifarie ramosae, leviter com-
pressae, 500 x 900 p in sectione transversali; segmentis circa quam latis quam
longis.

Plant colonies mainly epiphytic, about 2 cm. high, forming small
caespitose mats of intergrown and rhizoidally joined branches, from sev-
eral basal attachments to algal substrata by irregular, rhizoidal disks; in-
dividual plants almost indistinguishable because of the numerous acces-
sory holdfasts which interlock the various parts; fronds abundantly short-
branched from all sides, hollow, slightly constricted by regular dia-
phragms into segments usually about as long as broad, slightly compressed,
the dimensions about 500 by 900 w in cross section, composed of a single
cortical layer of axially elongated cells here and there interspersed with
smaller irregularly shaped cells within, and attached to which is a series
of longitudinal gland-cell-bearing filaments; gland cells sometimes occur-
ring also on the inner surface of the cortical cells; rhizoidal attachments
abundantly formed by means of surface cell elongation and division; cys-
tocarps and tetrasporangia unknown; color bluish, iridescent when fresh.

Type: D. 407, rocky shore, middle littoral, on articulated coral-
lines, Pond Island, February 4, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 52.

D. 193a, on Digenia, D. 212a, on Centroceras, Puerto Refugio, Jan.
(fragmentary).

This species in general form and structure resembles C. parvula rather
closely, but in habit is very distinct. The abundant production of acces-
sory rhizoidal holdfasts causes the plant colony to assume a compact, caes-
pitose, distinctly matted aspect, which is augmented by the relative rigid-
ity of the branches as compared to C. parvula. The branches differ from
the generally more extended, looser ones of C. parvula by their shortness
and more erect habit. C. parvula, moreover, generally has cylindrical
fronds, while those of this species are slightly compressed.

312 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Genus GASTROCLONIUM Kiitzing
Gastroclonium clavatum (Roth) Ardiss.

Plate 46, Figs. 6-8; Plate 73, Fig. 2

Ardissone, 1883, p. 322; Bliding, 1928, p. 38, fig. 29.

Five collections are on hand of a Gastroclonium species which in
many respects shows close similarity, if not identity, with the Mediter-
ranean G. clavatum.

D. 68, shallow water, Guaymas, Jan.; D. 343, in 22 meters, Punta
Penasco, Feb.; D. 404, on shore, Pond Island, Feb.; D. 440, on shore,
San Esteban Island, Feb.; H. 673, San Bartolome Bay, outer coast of
Lower California, Aug.

Varying degrees of vegetative development are shown among these
plants, which range in size from about 2 cm. to over 10 cm. They possess
the solid basal axis characteristic of the genus, though in the largest speci-
mens this is no more extensive than in some of the smallest. Indeed, the
large plants seem at first to be entirely hollow. In habit the smaller speci-
mens resemble very closely most of the examples present in the University
of California Herbarium of G. clavatum from the Mediterranean. The
large specimens from Guaymas are more like the illustration of one of
Agardh’s specimens of G. clavatum as given by Bliding (1928).

In cross section the Mediterranean specimens usually show a 2-lay-
ered wall, while the Gulf specimens tend more toward a 3- or 4-layered
wall. The latter, as well, usually have a more or less pronounced short-
palisade effect in the outer layer. None of these differences is convincingly
distinct or constant, however, and in view of the very close similarity in
gross morphology and the lack of any specific points of distinction, it
seems best to refer all of these specimens to G. clavatum while awaiting
further information on the range and variation of these Pacific forms.

Family Ceramiaceae
Genus CALLITHAMNION Lyngbye
Callithamnion endovaginum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 771, pl. 28, fig. 62.
J. 53b, parasitic on fronds of Grateloupia, San Esteban Island, April;
D. 488a, Catalina Bay, near Guaymas, Feb.

Callithamnion veleroae sp. nov.
Plate 50, Figs. 3-5
Frondes caespitosae, epiphyticae, usque ad 2.5 cm. altae, distiche ramosae}; axi

centrali non corticata et ramis primariis ostendentes; axi centrali circa 150 uw diam.,
in 4-ordinibus ramosa, ramis gradatim superne attenuatis, apicibus paululum ob-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 513

tusis, omnibus acute inclinatis, e termino superno cellularum sustinentium orienti-
bus; tetrasporangiis in lateribus adaxialibus ramellorum ultimorum seriatis, ovoid-
eis, 45-55 uw diam.; cystocarpiis circa 150 diam., plerumque ramum secondarium
terminantibus.

Plants tufted, epiphytic, to 2.5 cm. high, distichously branched, with
a central, uncorticated axis and frequent primary branches; primary axis
about 150 » diam. (of cylindrical cells slightly longer than thick) with
4 orders of branches gradually attenuated upward, but apices rather
blunt; cells in main axis slightly longer than broad; cells in ultimate
ramuli about twice as long as broad (cells in sterile portions usually
longer than those in fertile portions) ; all branches sharply inclined, com-
ing off at upper end of cells bearing them; sporangia seriate on adaxial
sides of ultimate branches, arising at the top of each cell as a little peg,
enlarging to an ovate body; mature tetrasporangia measuring 45-55 p,
tripartite; cystocarps occasional, usually terminal on a secondary branch,
about 150 » diam. at maturity; antheridia in tufts along the adaxial side
of the 3-4 cells just above axil of ultimate branches.

Type: D. 195, on shore, lower littoral, Puerto Refugio, Jan. 27,
1940 (tetrasporic). Herb. AHF no. 53.

D. 381f, dredged in 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb. 4, 1940 (antheridial
and cystocarpic).

There are no distichous Callithamnion species described from the
North Pacific which exhibit the characters of our plants. The good for-
tune of having all reproductive stages gives us ample means of identifying
them, though the vegetative characters are also distinctive.

Genus ANTITHAMNION Naegeli
Antithamnion sublittorale S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1937, p. 86, pl. 6, fig. 15.
H. 613, 646a, 721, epiphytic on other algae dredged in 40 meters off
San Jose del Cabo, Aug.

Antithamnion pacificum (Harv.) Kylin

Kylin, 1925, p. 47, fig. 29.

D. 381e from 22 meters at Tepoca Bay, February, is indistinguishable
from Kylin’s illustrations (loc. cit.), and the specimens agree with his
key characters for this species described from Puget Sound.

A specimen from 30-36 meters in Ensenada de San Francisco, near
Guaymas, February, is evidently the same but has shorter branchlets due
to their shorter cells.

314 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Genus PLATYTHAMNION J. Agardh
Platythamnion tepocensis sp. nov.
Plate 72, Fig. 1

Frondes usque ad 3 cm. altae, axi primaria conspicua magni-cellulari, laxe
ramosa provisae; ramulis lateralibus plerumque 500 wu longis, oppositis, superne
curvatis, acute attenuatis, ramulis secondariis 30-110 pt longis, nonnullis suppressis;
cellulis glandularibus frequentibus; cellulis axium primariarum superne 50-70 uw
diam., inferne usque ad 150 u aut plus diam., 1-1.5-plo longioribus.

Attachment organs unknown; plants to 3 cm. high, with a sparingly
branched, conspicuous, large-celled main axis bearing well-developed
lateral ramuli and reduced ramuli on upper and lower sides of axis cells,
producing a complanate general aspect to the fronds; lateral ramuli aver-
aging 500 yu long, opposite, curving upward and tapering to a sharp point,
bearing opposite, acute secondary ramuli 30-100 u long, some of these
commonly suppressed, occasionally with tertiary ramuli; gland cells fre-
quent, principally on primary and secondary ramuli; main axis cells
cylindrical, 50-70 4 diam. above, to 150-++ p below, 1-1.5 times as long
as wide; antheridial clusters mostly at the base and at the lower nodes
of the primary ramuli; tetraspores and cystocarps unknown.

Type: D. 379, dredged in 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb. 4, 1940.
Herb. AHF no. 54.

From the nature of the branching—bearing four sets of branches
on each axis cell, two well-developed lateral sets and two reduced sets,
dorsal and ventral—this plant is seen to fall into the genus Platytham-
nion J. Ag. The Gulf specimens correspond to none of the previously de-
scribed species from the American coasts, all of which have been figured

by Kylin (1925).

Genus GRIFFITHSIA C. Agardh
Griffithsia pacifica Kylin

Kylin, 1925, p. 58, figs. 38, 39.

From a comparison of our material with specimens of Griffithsia
pacifica from the coast of California we are quite certain that the Gulf
material is referable to this species. Most of the author’s specimens are
somewhat more slender and less strongly articulated than the typical
Californian plants, but D. 382 is an example which fulfills perfectly all
dimensional requirements.

D. 43, 73, shallow water at low tide, Guaymas Harbor, Jan.; D. 163,
rock shingle in lower littoral, south side of Tiburon Island, Jan.; D.
382, dredged in 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb.

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 315

Griffithsia tenuis Ag.

C. Agardh, 1828, p. 131; Collins & Hervey, 1917, p. 135, pl. VI, figs.
38, 39; Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XII, tab. 31c-d; Bgrgesen, 1915-
1920, p. 462, fig. 423; Okamura, Icones Jap. Algae VII, p. 2,
pl. 302, figs. 1-6, pl. 303, figs. 4-7.

We have several specimens at hand which, though sterile, undoubt-
edly belong to this widely distributed species. Their habit is very distinc-
tive and is well delineated by Okamura. The absence of dichotomous
branching and the irregularity in the length of the lateral branches are
sufficient to distinguish it.

D. 145, from 4-32 meters, south of Tiburon Island, Jan.; D. & R.
2916, epiphytic on Sargassum, Kino, Nov.; D. 204, 289, from rock
pockets, lower littoral, Puerto Refugio, Jan. (dwarfed specimens) ; D.
169, in seine haul over sand just off south beach, Puerto Refugio, Jan.;
D. 400, abundant on lower littoral rocks, Pond Island, Feb.; D. 345,
dredged in 22 meters, Punta Penasco, Feb.

Griffithsia multiramosa (S. & G.) Taylor

Taylor, 1939, p. 14, pl. 2. Neomonospora multiramosa Setch. & Gard.,
1937, p. 87, pl. 4, fig. 10a-c.

This species is amply described and illustrated in the recent paper of
Taylor. The specimens from which his description is drawn were
dredged in 12-20 meters over sandy bottom off Punta Gorda, Schmitt
13, July 19, 1938. Those of Setchell and Gardner were dredged in 40
meters near by at San Jose del Cabo, August. Additional collections of
this plant: D. 624, dredged in 34-50 meters off Gorda Point, Feb.; D.
231, trawled in 4 meters at low tide, south shore of Puerto Refugio, Jan.;
D. 245, cast up on shore, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 270, dredged in
12-22 meters, Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

This is the most slender species in our territory, the ultimate branch-
lets being only 15-20 » diam., their cells 100-200 p long.

Genus CERAMIUM (Roth) Lyngbye

Ceramium sinicola S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 773, pl. 25, figs. 40, 41, pl. 75. Ceramium
bicorne S. & G., 1924, p. 773, pl. 28, fig. 64, pl. 74.

Fronds 1-2 cm. high, dichotomously branched, attached by a creeping

prostrate portion with rhizoids; the forcipate apices long, blunt, com-

316 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

pletely corticated above; internodes naked below but shorter than the
corticated zones at the nodes; corticating cells not arranged in any defi-
nite order; tetrasporangia completely immersed, irregularly placed in
the swollen, often once- or twice-forked terminal ramuli; tetrasporic
branches at maturity usually with one or two sharp points; cystocarps
sessile, surrounded by 6-8 ramuli; antheridia completely covering upper,
several-times-forked, somewhat swollen ramulli.

With more adequate material on hand it has been possible to interpret
the types of Ceramium sinicola and C. bicorne more fully. The compari-
sons show that the two sharp, apical points used in distinguishing C.
bicorne are not specific. There may be from one to three, quite at random
and depending upon certain features of the individual plant. In review-
ing the type of C. sinicola, the presence of tetraspores “in a single whorl
at the nodes” can be interpreted as such only in young branches. The
irregularity of placement is generally as great as in the type of C. bicorne.

These plants are epiphytic, commonly on Codium and Grateloupia.
Tetrasporic plants have been detected from collections made at various
seasons through the year.

D. 444, San Esteban Island, Feb.; D. 298c, Puerto Refugio, Jan.;
D. 389, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 162, 127, 134, 128, Turner’s Island,
Jan.; J. 67b, Ensenada Bay, April; J. 62a, Isla Partida, July; D. & R.
3231a, 3411a, Guaymas, Dec.

Ceramium sinicola var. interruptum (S. & G.) comb. nov.

Ceramium interruptum Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 775, pl. 26, fig. 47.

The Setchell and Gardner illustration does not satisfactorily interpret
the specimen from which it was drawn. The material of Marchant’s col-
lection is similar in all general respects to the specimens of C. sinicola
investigated. It differs in the marked interruption in cortication just above
the forkings. This character has been sought for through the specimens
of C. sinicola, and, though nowhere else so prominent, a more or less
strong tendency toward a cortical break in this region is present in most
of them. Marchant’s specimens appear, then, to be extreme types of this
complex and, lacking other well-defined points of distinction, should
better be considered as a variety of C. sinicola.

Epiphytic on other algae, M. 78, Eureka, May.

Ceramium sinicola var. Johnstonii (S. & G. ) comb. nov.
Ceramium Johnstonii Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 774, pls. 76, 77.

This is another form of the sinicola complex which is fundamentally
inseparable from the general assemblage. The type specimen is a robust

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA a7

one which shows freely dichotomous branching, complete cortication, and
tetrasporangia which create only a slight degree of swelling of the
ramuli. The arrangement of tetraspores, cystocarps, and antheridia as
well as the general structure of the plants does not suggest the advisa-
bility of maintaining specific distinction from C. sinicola.

Epiphytic on other algae, D. 434a, San Esteban Island, Feb.; D.
468a, same; J. 104, San Pedro Martir Island, April; J. 111, San Esteban
Island, April.

Ceramium caudatum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 776, pl. 27, figs. 55-57.

Cystocarps have recently been observed and may be described as fol-
lows: large, 500 » high; spherical mass of carpospores on a short stalk
surrounded by a whorl of 4-6 short branches; spores angular, measuring
35-50 p.

Epiphytic on other algae: M. 48b, Eureka, May; D. 45, Guaymas,
Jan.; D. 100a, Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. 129, Turner’s Island, Jan.;
D. 236a, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Ceramium affine S. & G.
Plate 51, Fig. 4

Setch. & Gard., 1925, p. 172.

The species was described without tetrasporangia, but, in looking over
the type specimen, these were discovered on part of it. They are wholly
exserted, single at the nodes, on one side of upper branches, naked except
for a hyaline envelope, 30-40 » in diam., not producing alteration of
cortex at nodes.

This species is closely related to Ceramium caudatum.

Mason 36 (type), Guadalupe Island, off outer coast of Lower Cali-
fornia, April; D. 286a, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Ceramium fimbriatum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 777, pl. 26, figs. 43, 44; 1937, p. 88, pl. 7, fig.
18.

To the original description the following observations should be
added: In addition to the short, thick, hair-cells arranged on the convex
surface of the younger branches, filamentous hairs also may be present,
arising secondarily from cells on all sides of the branches. When young
and bristlelike they are slightly bulbous at the tips.

318 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Epiphytic on other algae: D. 561b, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.; D. 413a,
Pond Island, Feb.; D. 753, Turner’s Island, July; D. 202, Puerto Re-
fugio, Jan.; D. 160, Tiburon Island, Jan.; D. 565b, Espiritu Santo
Island, Feb.; H. 618b, in 40 meters, San Jose del Cabo, Aug.; M. 87a,
Eureka, May.

Ceramium horridum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 777, pl. 26, figs. 49, 50, pl. 79.

This is one of the more easily distinguished Ceramium species in the
Gulf and may be identified by the figures of Setchell and Gardner. Be-
sides the several Gulf collections listed below, examples from the Galap-
agos Archipelago have been seen which correspond very well.

D. 143, dredged in 4-32 meters, off the south end of Tiburon Island,
Jan.; D. 256, dredged in Mejia channel in 12-22 meters, Puerto Refugio,
Jan.; D. 427, 430c, Pond Island, on shore, Feb.

Ceramium codicola J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1894, p. 23.

N. L. Gardner detected this species on Codium fragments dredged in
40 meters off San Jose del Cabo, H. 617, H. 644, August. Examples are
also on hand from San Bartolome Bay on the outer coast of Lower Cali-
fornia.

Ceramium serpens S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 775, pl. 27, fig. 58.

D. 199 and 201 on Laurencia, Puerto Refugio, January, correspond
in every way with the type specimen of this plant. The Setchell and
Gardner figures are well drawn and will serve with the description to
distinguish it.

Ceramium procumbens S$. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 772, pl. 27, figs. 51-54.

Growing on Gelidium, San Francisquito Bay, J. 27a, June; J. —, on
Grateloupia, Isla Partida, July.

This species has not again been collected. It seems to show many
features in common with C. serpens, and the distinctions between the two
are perhaps to be questioned. Additional comparative material will be
necessary, however.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 319

Ceramium paniculatum Okam.

Okamura, Icones Jap. Algae IV, p. 114, pl. 179, figs. 8-16.

D. & R. 3408 from Guaymas, December, though sterile, is not dis-
tinct in any particular from Ceramium paniculatum hitherto known only
from Japan. The occurrence of sharp, 2-3-celled points which form on
the convex sides of the forcipate branches and persist in older parts is an
outstanding character and marks this species as unique in the Gulf.

Ceramium gracillimum Griff. & Harv.

Griff. & Harv. in Harvey, 1846-1851, pl. 206. Ceramium byssoideum
Taylor, 1928, p. 190, pl. 27, figs. 20, 21. Ceramium transversale
Collins & Hervey, 1917, p. 145; Setch. & Gard., 1930, p. 170,
pl. 7, figs. 23, 24.

Taylor has recognized Ceramium transversale as a small form of C.
byssoideum ; Feldmann-Mazoyer places C. byssoideum as a variety of C.
gracillimum (1940) ; Bgrgesen, 1934, places both C. byssoideum and C.
transversale under C. gracillimum. Since our material from the Gulf
corresponds well with topotype examples of C. transversale as well as
European material, it seems best to place it under this name. Certain
differences are apparent, however, between our material and that of
other parts of the world, and distinctive characters perhaps will be found
when more ample material is available for minute study.

D. 169a, Turner’s Island, Jan.; H. 614c, 615, dredged in 40 meters,
San Jose del Cabo, Aug.

Ceramium Camouii sp. nov.
Plate 51, Figs. 2, 3

Frondes 3-4 mm. altae, laxe dichotomae, ramis secondariis per occasionem, 30-
40 w diam., tantum nodis corticatae, apicibus non forcipatis; zonis corticatis a
internodiis 100-150 longis separatis; tetrasporangiis verticilatis, nudis et curte
pedicellatis, involucris apertis, hemisphericis, corticalibus, plerumque 125 yu latis
circumdatis.

Fronds 3-4 mm. high, sparingly dichotomously branched, with occa-
sional secondary lateral branches, 30-40 diam., corticated only at the
nodes; apices not forcipate, with a conspicuous terminal cell which after
the first division cuts off cells immediately in several planes, with many
slender, early deciduous hairs; cortical zones separating early, only

320 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

slightly tumid, composed of 2-3 rows of cells separated by internodes
100-150 » long; tetrasporangia in whorls, shortly pedicellate and naked
but borne in open hemispherical, cortical involucres about 125 » broad;
cystocarps unknown.

Type: D. 737, among other minute algae scraped from littoral
rocks, Turner’s Island, July 18, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 55.

‘The tetrasporangial characters are distinctive in this species, which
is here proposed with some hesitation because of the scantiness of the
type material. It is believed, however, that further summer collections
in the Gulf will confirm its separation.

Ceramium equisetoides sp. nov.
Plate 51, Fig. 1

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 778, pl. 29, figs. 70, 71, as Ceramium sp.

Frondes 8-15 mm. altae, dichotomo aut monopodico ramosae, 80-100 w diam.,
tantum ad nodos corticatae; corticatione separata impensio in furcis superis per
elongationem internodiorum latiore usque ad circa 200 uw, non-tumida, in ordinibus
4-cellularum quibusque, superne inferneque truncata; tetrasporangiis in ramulis
terminalibus aut lateralibus, tumidis, plus minusve in toto corticatis, totaliter im-
mersis.

Fronds 8-15 mm. high, dichotomously or monopodially branched, 80-
100 p» in diam.; young sterile apices usually forcipate with conspicuous,
basally dividing terminal cells; older fertile apices nonforcipate ; cortica-
tions only at nodes, separated more and more widely in upper forks by
elongation of the internodal cells until a maximum of about 200 yp is
reached, nontumid, composed of about 4 rows of cells, truncate below
and above; tetraspores in swollen, more or less completely corticated
terminal or lateral ramuli, completely immersed, usually in a single
whorl at each node; tetrasporangial branches sometimes forked but us-
ually simple, the shorter ones resembling the sporiferous shoots (strobili)
of Equisetum; cystocarps unknown; antheridia completely covering ter-
minal ramuli.

Type: D. 479, rock-shingle beach and upper sublittoral, Puerto
San Carlos, Guaymas, Feb. Herb. AHF no. 56.

D. 389a, lower littoral, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 602b, shallow littoral
pools, San Gabriel Bay, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.; D. 42, growing on
Gigartina, Guaymas Harbor, Jan.; D. & R. 3309c, 3149, 3160, littoral,
Guaymas Bay, Dec.; M. 63a, growing on Eucheuma, Mazatlan, Mexico,
May.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 321

Genus CENTROCERAS Kitzing
Centroceras clavulatum (Ag.) Mont.

Montagne, 1846-47, p. 140; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 779.

This species has been found at lower littoral shore stations in all
parts of the Gulf and at various times of the year. It is evidently a com-
mon perennial there as it is in warm and temperate waters in many parts
of the world.

Centroceras bellum S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 779, pl. 26, fig. 48, pls. 40c, 78.
M. 85, cast ashore at Guaymas, June. Not again collected.

Family Delesseriaceae
Genus BRANCHIOGLOSSUM Kylin
Branchioglossum Woodii (J. Ag.) Kylin

Kylin, 1924, p. 8, fig. 2a. Branchioglossum MacDougalii Gardner, 1927,
p. 103, pl. 20, fig. 4, pls. 33, 34.

Comparison of Gulf specimens with examples of Branchioglossum
W oodii from the California coast shows hardly enough difference to dis-
tinguish the former as a separate species.

MacDougal, growing on Sargassum, Puerto Libertad, Nov., 1923;
D. 378, dredged in 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb.; D. 475e, dredged in
30-36 meters, Ensenada de San Francisco, near Guaymas, Feb.

Genus HYPOGLOSSUM Kiitzing
Hypoglossum attenuatum Gardner

Gardner, 1927, p. 104, pl. 20, fig. 3, pls. 35, 36.

MacDougal, epiphytic on Sargassum, Puerto Libertad, Nov., 1923;
D. 267, dredged in 12-22 meters, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 60, dredged
in 4-6 meters, Guaymas Bay, Jan.; D. 303, dredged in 60-80 meters,
Gonzaga Bay, Jan.

Genus SORELLA Hollenberg
Sorella pinnata Hollenberg
Plate 47, Figs. 3, 4
Hollenberg, 1943, p. 578, figs. 15, 16.

Plants 1-3 cm. high, semiprostrate in inferior parts where attached
to substratum; frond segments flat, lanceolate, .5-2 mm. broad, with
acute, obovate to lanceolate, irregularly arranged pinnae with an incon-
spicuous midrib and microscopic veins running into pinnae, monostro-
matic except at midrib and in lower parts; growth from an apical cell

322 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

at the point of each segment, the primary cell row with intercalary divi-
sions; margins minutely denticulate; antheridial sori single or in pairs
in apical portions of pinnae, superficial; cystocarps and tetraspores un-
known.

D. 194, lower littoral on the reef, Puerto Refugio, Jan. 27, 1940.

This species resembles Erythroglossum minimum Okam., but is
larger, has a midrib, and has more regular, more sharply acute pinnae.
Rhizoids from the fronds do not develop as in E. minimum.

Genus GRINNELLIA Harvey
Grinnellia lanceolata sp. nov.
Plate 47, Fig. 6

Frondes usque ad 2.5 cm. altae, laminis brevi stipitatis, lanceolatis adhesione
spongiose compositae; laminis costa delicata excepta monostromaticis, integribus,
nerviis lateralibus nullis, marginibus integribus, tantum undulatis, cellula apicali
indutis; ordinis cellularum primariae divisionibus nullis; soris tetrasporangiiferis
supra frondem sparsa 5-15 tetrasporas tripartitas producentibus.

Plants to 2.5 cm. high, of several short-stipitate, lanceolate blades
from a spongy holdfast ; blades monostromatic except at the delicate mid-
rib, undivided, without side nerves, with entire, only slightly undulate
margins; frond-apices blunt, with an apical cell; primary cell row of
midrib without intercalary divisions; tetrasporic sori scattered over the
frond on either side of midrib zone, producing 5-15 tripartite tetraspores ;
cystocarps scattered over frond (no cystocarpic leaflets on type), hemi-
spherical, with a small ostiole lacking rostrum.

Type: D. 626, dredged in 34-50 meters, off Gorda Point, Feb. 15,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 57.

The small size and narrow lanceolate fronds almost without margi-
nal undulations serve to distinguish this species from the large Atlantic
plant, Grinnellia americana, with which it seems most closely related.

Genus POLYNEURELLA gen. nov.

Frondes laminis latis, membranaceis inferne petiolatis semiteretibus, e disco
simplici orientibus compositae; laminis ovatis, juvenis monostromaticis, cellula
apicali crescentibus, costa nulla, venis microscopicis multis longitudinalibusque ;
tetrasporangiis tripartitis in soris rotundis parvisque, pustulatis e superficiebus
ambis frondium orientibus, regulariter sparsis.

Plants composed of broad, rose-colored, membranous blades and
branched, semiterete, petiolate parts arising from a simple discoid hold-
fast; blades ovate, monostromatic in younger parts, growing by means of

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 323

an apical cell, without a midrib but with many longitudinal microscopic
veins; tetrasporangia tripartite, arranged in small, round sori, regularly
spaced over the blades; sori arising as blisterlike swellings from both sides
of the frond, the tetrasporangia developing successively from the enclosed
sporiferous tissue and remaining in the enlarging sorus until maturity of
the tetrasporic fronds; cystocarps unknown.

Type: Polyneurella Hancockit.

The type species differs from any members of the closely related genus
Polyneura in the mode of branching from the basal axis system, in the
entire margins of the blades, and in the absence of a macroscopic midrib
in the multiple-vein system.

Polyneurella Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 47, Figs. 1, 2
Frondes usque ad 6.5 cm. altae, laminis curte stipitatis, integris, ovato-lanceo-
latis e disco parvo compositae; axibus semiteretibus copiose e disco prope com-
positis; laminis in partibus juvenis monostromaticis, cellula apicali provisis, eco-
statis, venis microscopicis multis.
Plants to 6.5 cm. high, composed of numerous short-stipitate, entire,

ovate-lanceolate blades 2.5 cm. wide, 5 cm. long when mature arising
from a small discoid holdfast; branching of the semiterete axis abundant
just above holdfast; blades monostromatic in younger parts, growing by
means of an apical cell, without a midrib but with many microscopic
nerves, some macroscopic in older fronds; tetrasporic sori scattered over
blades, each bearing 100 or more tetrasporangia; cystocarps unknown.

Type: D. 184, dredged in 22-44 meters, Puerto Refugio, Jan. 28,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 58.

Genus MYRIOGRAMME Kylin
Myriogramme divaricata sp. nov.
Plate 47, Fig. 5

Frondes usque ad 3 cm. altae, membranaceae, basim 1 mm. solido stipitatae,
per adhesionem parvam semirhizoideam affixae, tantum in partibus infimis pro-
liferatae, abrupte divaricatae, ecostatae, segmentis latis, curtis, avenosis, mono-
stromaticis; axillis segmentorum rotundis, non angularibus; marginibus apicalibus
multilobatis; crescentione e marginibus apicalibus, cellula apicali deunte; tetra-
sporangiis in soris parvis per partes medias et superas laminarum sparsis.

Plants to 3 cm. high, membranous, from a small, semirhizoidal hold-
fast below a solid, stipitate base 1 mm. or less in extent; fronds proliferous
only from lowest parts, abruptly divaricate, lacking a midrib, with broad,
short, veinless, monostromatic segments; axils of segments rounded, not

324 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

angular; apical margins multilobate, the lobes often appearing truncate;
growth from apical margins without a terminal cell; tetraspores in small
sori, scattered through middle and upper portions of the frond; cysto-
carps unknown.

Type: D. 181, dredged in 22-44 meters, Puerto Refugio, Jan. 28,
1940. Herb. AHF no. 59.

Similar to Myriogramme minuta Kylin (1924, p. 56, figs. 44-45)
but tetraspores not confined to apical segments. MM. carnea (Rodr.) Kylin
is another close relative from which it may be distinguished by the absence
of the marginal denticulations, the rounded rather than angular axils,
and by the shorter, more compact-appearing segments.

Genus TAENIOMA J. Agardh
Taenioma perpusillum J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1863, p. 1257; Okamura, Icones Jap. Alg. VI, p. 26, pl. 264,
figs. 17-19.

This species has recently been collected both in the Gulf of California
and in the Galapagos Archipelago. It was described from the west coast
of Mexico, being among Liebmann’s original collections from St. Augus-
tine. Its habit and morphology are so distinctive that it can scarcely be
confused with any other alga.

D. 325, lower littoral, Gonzaga Bay, Jan.; D. 392, Tepoca Bay,
Feb. ; D. 406b, Pond Island, Feb.; D. 540a, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.

Family Dasyaceae
Genus DASYA C. Agardh
Dasya pedicellata C. Ag.

C. Agardh, 1824, p. 211; Taylor, 1937, p. 355, pl. 54, figs. 1-4. Dasya
elegans, Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XIV, tab. 59; as D. elegans gen-
erally.

Several specimens are on hand of an attractive sublittoral Dasya
which seems best referred to the above species in our present limited
knowledge of the Mexican plants. Dasya pedicellata has been reported
in subtropical waters in widespread parts of the world—Mediterranean,
Japan, eastern United States, West Indies, etc. Our plants conform
rather well with the available figures of this species, especially with the
fine ones of Taylor (loc. cit.). Minute study and comparison of fresh
material with other species of this genus may, however, modify the status
of the Gulf plants.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 325

D. & R. 3303, cast ashore, near Guaymas, Dec.; D. 275, dredged in
12-22 meters, Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 228, dredged in
4 meters at low tide, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 475d, dredged in 30-36
meters, Ensenada de San Francisco, near Guaymas, Feb.; D. 504,
dredged in 16-28 meters, Puerto Escondido, Feb.

This species is apparently exclusively sublittoral in the Gulf, judging
from all collections to date. Both cystocarpic and tetrasporic plants were
found in January.

Genus JANTINELLA Kylin
Jantinella sinicola (S. & G.) Kylin

Kylin, 1941, p. 40. Colacodasya sinicola Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 770,
pl. 28, fig. 63.
Growing on Chondria acrorhizophora, M. 43a, Eureka, May. Not
again detected.

Genus HETEROSIPHONIA Montagne
Heterosiphonia sinicola S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 770, pl. 28, figs. 59, 60, pl. 47b.
Cast ashore, Eureka, M. 49, 65, May. Not again collected.

Family Rhodomelaceae
Genus CHONDRIA C. Agardh
Chondria californica (Collins) Kylin

Kylin, 1941, p. 41, pl. 12, fig. 35. Chondria tenuissima f. californica,
Collins, Holden & Setchell, Phyc. Bor. Amer. no. 636.

Specimens from one shore station show exceedingly close resemblance
in color, size, and branching with the specimens distributed in the P.B.A.
from La Jolla, California. Collins says, “very iridescent when growing,”
a conspicuous character which the Gulf plants possess.

The deep-water examples here listed are apparently of this species,
to judge from form and branching, though the iridescence has not been
observed.

D. 101, lower littoral rocky shore, north side of Turner’s Island,
Jan.; D. 146, dredged in 4-32 meters off south end of Tiburon Island;
D. 255, dredged in 12-22 meters, Mejia channel, Puerto Refugio, Jan.

Chondria dasyphylla (Woodw.) C. Ag.
C. Agardh, 1822, p. 350; Bgrgesen, 1918, p. 258, figs. 151, 152.

Several specimens of both winter and summer collections seem better

326 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

referable to this species than to any other. This plant has been recorded
from the warmer Atlantic coasts of Europe and America, the Mediter-
ranean, the West Indies, and Japan. It is not peculiar, therefore, that
it occurs in the Gulf of California.

The summer plants are the largest, up to 10 cm. high, and appear
to be the most mature and typical. All agree, however, in general form
of branching and in the sunken nature of the growing points.

D. & R. 3134e, on rocks along shore of Guaymas Harbor, Dec.;
D. 312, lower littoral, Willard’s Island, Gonzaga Bay, Jan.; D. 479b,
lower littoral in shallow bay, Puerto San Carlos, near Guaymas, Feb.;
D. 669, cast up at south channel mouth, Tiburon Island, July; D. 673,
cast up at Kino, July.

Genus DIGENIA C. Agardh
Digenia simplex (Wulf.) C. Ag.

C. Agardh, 1822, p. 389; Taylor, 1928, p. 175, pl. 24, fig. 20, pl. 33,
fig. 7; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 769; Okamura, 1936, fig. 393.

This species was first found in the Gulf as beach-drift specimens at
La Paz. Its wide distribution throughout the world’s subtropical seas was
markedly extended by that record and may now be further extended by
mention of specimens collected by Templeton Crocker on the Zaca Expe-
dition of 1936 on the shores of Costa Rica.

The occurrence in the Gulf has been made better known by recent
collections at several stations. It is apparently a lower-littoral plant on
rocky shores throughout the area, both in winter and summer, though
never very abundant.

D. 192, 298, lower littoral rocks, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 728,
Turner’s Island, July; D. & R. 3324, in intertidal pools, cove north of
Cabo Arco, Guaymas, Dec.; D. & R. 3400, Punta San Pedro, Guaymas,
Dec.

Genus LAURENCIA Lamouroux
Laurencia paniculata (Ag.) J. Ag.

J. Agardh, 1863, p. 755; Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 762; Yamada, 1931,
p. 197, pl. 3a.

Kylin (1941, p. 42, pl. 3, fig. 38) has described a new species of
Laurencia from the coast of California, L. pacifica. He cites the specimen
1092 in Phyc. Bot. Amer. sent out under the name L. paniculata as iden-
tical with his plant. An already difficult situation is made more compli-
cated, and yet we are hardly nearer any solution. A large collection of

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 327

Laurenciae of the general L. paniculata type has been examined in the
University of California Herbarium, and they suggest strongly that we
are dealing with a variable group of perhaps several closely related enti-
ties which will require very careful study in nature before they become
understood. For the present I am inclined to let the Gulf plants remain
under the old name rather than to identify them erroneously with cer-
tain of the species found along the coast of California.

Plants corresponding to Johnston’s specimen determined as L. panicu-
lata by Setchell and Gardner in 1924 are the most abundant of the
species in the Gulf. Winter collections predominate by far, but most of
these are immature, indicating, perhaps, maximum development in spring.

Plants here designated as L. paniculata are more robust than any
others except P. papillosa. They are easily distinguished from the latter
by obvious differences in the papillate branching.

J. 30b, lower littoral rocks, San Francisquito Bay, June; J. 69, Isla
Partida, June; D. 234, cast up at Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 442, lower
littoral rocks, San Esteban Island, Feb.

A number of other winter collections of immature plants which prob-
ably are of this species were made at Pond Island, Guaymas, Gonzaga,

Tiburon Island, and Agua Verde Bay.

Laurencia papillosa var. pacifica S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 765, pl. 23, fig. 18, pl. 24, fig. 34, pl. 43a-b,
pl. 54; Yamada, 1931, pl. 1.

Specimens from at least three localities agree with the earlier collec-
tions of Johnston, Marchant, and Brandegee from the Gulf. They are
easily distinguished from other species of the region by their closely
crowded, wartlike lateral branches. The species is apparently a summer
annual, no mature plants being known from winter collections. It seems
to reach its maximum development in the southern part of the Gulf.

J. 9, San Marcos Island, June; M. 38, Eureka, May; Brand., La
Paz; D. 663, rocky point 3 mi. north of Kino, July; D. 716, Turner’s
Island, July; D. 601, San Gabriel, Espiritu Santo Island, Feb.; D. & R.
3399, Punta San Pedro, Guaymas, Dec. (young).

Laurencia obtusiuscula S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 760, pl. 23, fig. 17, pl. 55. L. obtusiuscula var.
corymbifera S. & G., 1924, p. 761, pl. 23, figs. 15, 16, pl. 45b. L.
obtusiuscula var. laxa S. & G., 1924, p. 762, pl. 29, fig. 67, pl.
52b.

328 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

M. 40, 46, 67, cast ashore, Eureka, May; M. 41, Guaymas, May;
J. 18b, on rocks in lower littoral zone, Tortuga Island, June; D. 635,
middle littoral rocks, San Jose del Cabo, Feb.

The limited collections would seem to indicate a more or less tropical
distribution for this species in our area. A small specimen from Santa
Maria Bay on the outer coast resembles the type of var. Jaxa and sug-
gests a distribution extending up the southern outer coast of the peninsula.

For the sake of simplicity, the named varieties are here reduced to
synonymy in view of the absence of additional, and the inadequacy of
the original, material.

Laurencia Johnstonii S. & G.
Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 764, pls. 52a, 53.

Mature specimens of this plant, probably a near relative of Laurencia
obtusiuscula, are known from summer collections in the northern Gulf.
Its very dark color and relatively dense branching serve to distinguish it.

J. 30a, San Francisquito Bay, June; J. 127, on rocks in lower littoral,
San Marcos Island, June; D. 203, lower littoral rocks, reef at Turner’s
Island, January (young), D. 749, July (mature).

Laurencia sinicola S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 764, pl. 28, figs. 65, 66, pl. 50a.
M. 34, 37, growing on Sargassum, Eureka, May; J. 126, San Marcos
Island, June. Not again collected. Apparently a summer annual.

Laurencia estebaniana S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 763, pl. 24, fig. 33, pl. 45a.
J. 53c, growing on rocks at San Esteban Island, April; J. 89, Smith
Island, June. Not again collected.

Laurencia Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 50, Fig. 1

Frondes usque ad 2 cm. altae, siccitate atrae, cylindricae, prorsus graciles,
rhizinis laxis curtisque affixae, valde ramosae et e basi divergentes, axi percurrenti
deunte; ramelli circa 300 w crassis, corticibus palisadiformibus deuntibus, cellulis
omnibus diam. equalibus.

Plants to 2 cm. high, cylindrical, slender throughout, attached by
short, loose rhizoids, much branched and divergent from the base, form-

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 329

ing no main axis; ultimate branchlets longest in lower parts, to 2.5 mm.,
shorter toward ends of main branches, these often curved toward their
ends and the branchlets most abundant on the convex side, about 300 p
thick ; cross section without a palisade cortex, with all cells of about equal
diameter; radius of about 4 series; ultimate ramuli slightly constricted
at base, simple, slightly clavate, their cells isodiametrical, not protruding;
color black upon drying.

Type: D. 543a, lower littoral rock pockets, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.
12, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 60.

The very small size of this species distinguishes it readily from all
others of our region and from the outer coasts as well.

Genus POLYSIPHONIA Greville
Polysiphonia Marchantae S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 768, pl. 49a.

M. 52, 83, 84, Eureka, May; M. 66, La Paz, May; Brand. 12, La
Paz; M. 50, Guaymas?, May. Specimens corresponding to these ex-
amples have not appeared in any recent collections. It seems likely that
the Guaymas record is erroneous.

Polysiphonia Johnstonii S. & G.

Setch. & Gard., 1924, p. 767. Polysiphonia sinicola, S. & G., 1924, p.
769.

The following revised description has been drawn up by G. J. Hol-
lenberg after re-examination of the types and other Gulf specimens.

Fronds relatively rigid, 5-10 cm. high, up to 1 mm. diam. toward the
base, attached by numerous rhizoids cut off from the pericentral cells of
a limited prostrate base; segments in the main branches 1.5 diam. long
or less, with 5 or 6 pericentral cells, totally ecorticate; primary branches
several and distinct, repeatedly branched, the branches alternate, arising
at a moderately narrow angle; ultimate branchlets usually relatively close
and dense; trichoblasts once or twice forked, numerous, arising one per
segment in a left-hand spiral with one-fifth or one-sixth divergence, soon
deciduous, leaving persistent scar-cells; branches replacing trichoblasts
at irregular intervals; tetrasporangia 1- (2) per segment, 70-90 » diam. ;
cystocarps numerous, globular, 450-500 » diam., nearly sessile; anthe-
ridial branches arising as a primary branch of a trichoblast, 30-40 by 100-
140 p»; plants dull red to dark reddish brown, usually epiphytic.

330 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Besides the specimens of Johnston, Brandegee, and Marchant cited
in the 1924 publication, recent material has been taken from both lower
littoral and sublittoral collections at Puerto Refugio, D. 236, 258, 284,
in January. D. 284 is an example having two tetrasporangia per segment.

Polysiphonia Snyderae Kylin

Kylin, 1941, p. 35, pl. 12, fig. 34. Polysiphonia senticulosa, Collins,
Holden & Setchell, Phyc. Bor. Amer. no. 638.

This is the commonest species in the winter collections from the Gulf.
It is distinguished readily from other Gulf species except Polysiphonia
sonorensis by its slender proportions, its four pericentral cells, and its
elongated segments. It differs from P. sonorensis in color and habit. Kylin
has given a good habit figure and ample discussion of the plant’s nature
and relationships.

Examples have been found in the Gulf in various habitats and in all
parts of the region. It is particularly abundant and widespread in the
winter collections.

Polysiphonia sonorensis Hollenberg

Hollenberg, 1942, pp. 779-780, figs. 5, 20.

Plants forming dense tufts of a terra cotta color, 4-5 cm. high, from
prostrate creeping filaments; prostrate filaments 120-175 p diam., at-
tached by unicellular rhizoids which arise as outgrowths from the center
of the pericentral cells, from which they are not cut off by a cross wall;
erect branches assurgent and arising exogenously, or mostly endogenously
from the prostrate branches, 70-100 » diam., of segments mostly 1.5-2
diam. long; branching dense, the branches arising exogenously at irregu-
lar intervals (4)-10-20 or more segments apart, mostly at an acute angle
with the main axis, which is usually indistinct ; ultimate branches slender,
30-35 p diam., slightly narrowed at the base, of segments mostly 1 diam.
long or shorter; pericentral cells 4, ecorticate; trichoblasts abundant,
arising at irregular intervals, once or twice forked, delicate, to 1 mm.
long, deciduous, often leaving inconspicuous scar-cells ; branches not asso-
ciated with trichoblasts in origin; reproduction unknown; plants ad-
hering moderately well to paper from which they are readily removed.

Type: D. & R. 3426a, drifting along southeastern shore of bay,
Empalme, near Guaymas, Sonora, Dec. 23, 1939.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 331

Polysiphonia simplex Hollenberg
Hollenberg, 1942, pp. 782-783, fig. 18.

Plants saxicolous, forming dense mats often of considerable extent,
with creeping, tangled basal filaments 250-360 » diam., of segments
mostly less than one diameter long, attached by unicellular rhizoids with
lobed tips which are cut off by a curving wall from the proximal end of
the pericentral cells; prostrate filaments giving rise in an exogenous,
assurgent manner to erect branches 1-3-(7) cm. high and 160-250 p
diam., with main axes distinct and sparingly branched; branches exoge-
nous, arising on all sides; trichoblasts 1-3 times forked, one per segment,
arising in a left-hand spiral with a 14 divergence, soon deciduous, leaving
persistent scar-cells; branches replacing trichoblasts, not arising in con-
nection with them; first trichoblast on branch arising (1)-3-4 segments
from the branch-base; tetrasporangia to 70 p» diam., spirally arranged in
the somewhat bulging branch tips; cystocarps ovoid, sessile, 300-350 p
diam. ; antheridial branches arising from one fork of a trichoblast, meas-
uring 100-170 by 35-40 p», without a sterile tip; plants medium to dark
brown, drying nearly black, growing in the middle to upper littoral zones.

Type: from Laguna Beach, Orange County, California.

Several Gulf of California plants are tentatively to be placed here,
though the segments are much shorter than those in typical southern
California specimens.

D. 124, Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. 312, Gonzaga Bay, D. 402, Pond
Island, Feb.; D. 475k, from 30-36 meters, Ensenada de San Francisco,
near Guaymas, Feb.; D. 540b, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.; D. 652, rocky
point near Kino, July; D. 697, 724, Turner’s Island, July.

Polysiphonia Hancockii sp. nov.
Plate 50, Fig. 2

Frondes usque ad 1 cm. altae, axibus 1-paucis e disco basali parvo, in parte
rhizinarum corticarum e basi axis crassae orientium emergentibus; axi primaria
percurrente, inferne in partibus usque ad tota corticata, erecta, rigida, basim 500
. crassa, ramos multos laterales in incremento limitatos praebente et iis aspectum
excurrente arborescentem donatantibus.

Plants to 1 cm. high, 1-several axes from a small, discoid holdfast,
partly formed of cortical rhizoids arising from the base of the thick axis;
no prostrate portions present; main axis percurrent, partly to fully corti-
cated in lower parts, erect, rigid, stout, trunklike, 500 p thick at base,

332 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

bearing many lateral ramifications of limited growth, these several times
subdichotomously, multifariously branched with very short internodes,
giving a strongly excurrent, arborescent appearance; fronds with four
large pericentral cells per segment, becoming corticated in thicker parts
toward base; cortication beginning by appearance of small cells in longi-
tudinal rows between the pericentral cells, becoming complete only in
lowermost parts; segments equilateral or more often shorter than broad ;
apices provided with abundant, long, much-branched trichoblasts arising
exogenously, in 14 right-hand spiral divergence toward tip, early de-
ciduous and not present except in growing specimens; branches arising
independently, replacing trichoblasts; scar-cells left by deciduous tricho-
blasts ; tetrasporangia in single, spiral rows in somewhat swollen ultimate
branchlets.

Type: D. 629c, epiphytic on Sargassum leaves, cast up, San Jose
del Cabo, Feb. 16, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 61.

H. 610a, San Jose del Cabo, August, 1932 (hairs not present; an
old, sterile specimen).

The habit of this species is especially striking because of the strongly
excurrent development and the short rigid nature of the lateral branches.

Polysiphonia californica Harv.

Kylin, 1941, p. 36; Collins, Holden & Setchell, Phyc. Bor. Amer. no.
1142.

The nomenclature of these plants has been well reviewed and clari-
fied by Kylin. This may be distinguished from other Polysiphonia species
in the Gulf by its large number of pericentral cells, 9-10, or more.

It is not a common plant in the Gulf region, to judge from the two
known collections, both brought up in the dredge.

D. 52, growing epiphytically on membranous reds, dredged in 4-6
meters, Guaymas Bay, Jan.; D. 361, in 6-20 meters at high water,
Punta Pefiasco, Feb.

Genus LOPHOSIPHONIA Falkenb.
Lophosiphonia villum (J. Ag.) S. & G.
Plate 48, Figs. 1-6

Kylin, 1941, p. 40. Polysiphonia villum J. Agardh, 1863, p. 941 (not
P. villum Snyder in Collins, Holden & Setchell, Phyc. Bor. Amer.

no. 246).
Kylin has reinvestigated the type specimen of this species which was

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 333

collected by Liebmann on the tropical coast of America (probably cen-
tral Mexican coast) and has clarified the status of certain California
plants which have been referred to this species.

The writer has re-examined a considerable number of specimens from
both California and the Gulf in light of the description of Polysiphonia
villum given by J. Agardh and is convinced that they should be identified
with Liebmann’s Mexican plant. The distribution of this species can be
stated as embracing the coast of California, the Gulf of California, the
central Mexican coast, and perhaps the Galapagos Archipelago. One
specimen from the latter region seems to match some of the other ex-
amples very closely.

D. 291, lower littoral rocks, Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 430a, lower
littoral, Pond Island, Feb.; D. 113, reef rocks, urner’s Island, Jan.;
D. 737, 754, same locality, July.

Lophosiphonia mexicana sp. nov.
Plate 48, Figs. 7-10

Frondes caespitosae, 2 mm. altae, partibus prostratis per rhizinas copiosas
discis adhaerentibus deuntibus formantibus, cellulis pericentralibus plerumque 6,
vulgo 55 uw crassae, filis erectis 1-2 mm. longis, attenuatis sed non gracilibus, 70-80
uw diam., in partibus maximis basim usque ad 60-50 wu attenuatis cellulis in partibus
angustioribus pericentralibus 6, usque ad 12 in partibus latioribus divisis.

Plants caespitose, 2 mm. high, of prostrate rooting filaments giving
off erect filaments; prostrate parts forming abundant rhizoids without
attachment disks, these arising in groups, one from the middle of each
successive pericentral cell in a vertical row and showing conspicuous ab-
sence of breaks in the series; prostrate filaments with usually six peri-
central cells, about 55 » thick; erect filaments 1-2 mm. long, attenuated
but not slender, 70-80 » diam. in most portions, narrowing to 60-50 p
at base, with 6 pericentrals in narrower parts, these dividing to twelve
in wider parts; apices with a few hairs; tetrasporangia in a slightly ir-
regular row, 5-10 segments long in ends of erect branches.

Type: D. 430, scraped from lower littoral rocks with other minute
algae, Pond Island, at south end of Angel de la Guardia Island, Feb. 4,
1940.

H. 238a, Sulphur Bay, Clarion Island, Revillagigedo Group, March
24, 1932. Herb. AHF no. 62.

The most distinctive character of this species is the broadening of the
erect branches in their mid- and upper parts by the division of the peri-
central cells to 12 from the original 6. The result is usually a complanate

334 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

tendency to these broadened parts of the branches. The general char-
acters of the cellular structure are shown in Plate 48, Figs. 7-10.

Genus HERPOSIPHONIA Naegeli
Herposiphonia subdisticha Okamura
Plate 49, Fig. 2

Okamura, Icones Jap. Alg. III, p. 199, pl. 146, figs. 11-18.

Two collections of a very distinctive Herposiphonia have been found
to agree very completely with the Japanese species H. disticha. The
“langtriebe” alternate regularly after every third “kurztriebe.” ‘This,
together with the outstanding habit shown in the illustrations, distin-
guishes it from any other plant on our coasts.

D. 443a, 457, on Grateloupia, growing on rocky, lower littoral shore,
San Esteban Island, Feb.

Herposiphonia tenella (C. Ag.) Naeg.
Plate 49, Fig. 1

Naegeli, 1846, tab. VIII, fig. 2; Bérgesen, 1915-20, p. 286, figs. 287, 288 ;
p. 472, fig. 430.

Several sterile specimens of Herposiphonia are on hand which agree
essentially with the above species. Bérgesen’s account of H. tenella and
H. secunda emphasizes the importance of fertile material, especially an-
theridial, and, in view of our lack of it, it is best to place all of these
closely related specimens under this name by which they can readily be
recognized.

D. 135, on Sargassum, Turner’s Island, Jan.; D. 458, San Esteban
Island, Feb.; D. 543c, on Wurdemannia, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.; D.
546b, on Dicranema, Agua Verde Bay, Feb.; D. 602a, on other small
algae, San Gabriel Bay, Feb.; D. 656, scraped from middle littoral rocks,
near Kino, July; D. 709, 751, lower littoral rocky shore, ‘Turner’s Island,
July.

Genus PTEROSIPHONIA Falkenberg
Pterosiphonia pennata (Roth) Falk.

Falkenberg, 1901, p. 263, tab. 2, figs. 1, 2. Polysiphonia pennata Kitzing,
Tab. Phyc. XIII, tab. 23e-f.

A few small specimens have been compared with both European and

Californian specimens of this widespread species and found to agree in

all essential details. None of those examined compare well with Kylin’s

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 335

description of his Pterosiphonia californica (1941, p. 39), which is said
to be coarser, with a main axis 250-300 p thick, and with shorter and
thicker lateral branchlets. The Mexican plants do not measure over 150
pin thickness and have quite the same size and proportions as the Euro-
pean examples of P. pennata.

D. 372, dredged in 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb.

Pterosiphonia dendroidea (Mont.) Falk.

Falkenberg, 1901, p. 268; Taylor, 1939, p. 16. Polysiphonia dendroidea
Kiitzing, Tab. Phyc. XIII, tab. 25a-b.

A few fragments, apparently of young material of this species, occur
in recent Mexican collections, partly growing with Pterosiphonia
pennata.

Schmitt, from 12-20 meters, Punta Gorda, and from San Jose del
Cabo, July 19, 1938; D. 260, dredged in Mejia channel, 12-22 meters,
Puerto Refugio, Jan.; D. 372a, dredged in 22 meters, Tepoca Bay, Feb.

Genus VELEROA gen. nov.

Frondes graciles, minutae, sparse ramosae, axi polysiphoniacea, monopodica,
cellulis pericentralibus 4, ramos laterales, magnos, determinatos, persistentes, col-
oratos, monosiphonios in 14 spira instructos, emittente; tetrasporangiis in spira
singula ordinatis, uno per segmentum, in partes superas, leviter turgidas axium
primariarum; stichidiis propriis deuntibus.

Slender, minute, sparingly branched plants, consisting of a polysipho-
niaceous, monopodial axis of four pericentral cells bearing large, determi-
nate, persistent, colored, monosiphonous lateral branches in a \4 spiral;
tetrasporangia borne in a single spiral row, one per segment in slightly
swollen upper portions of main axis; no stichidial branches produced.

Type: Veleroa subulata.

This genus is nearest to Lophocladia in the subfamily Lophothaliae.
It differs in the occurrence of sporangia in the main axis without the de-
velopment of specialized stichidial branches.

Veleroa subulata sp. nov.
Plate 72, Fig. 2

Frondes 10-15 mm. altae; cellulis pericentralibus 50-70 diam.; ramellis
lateralibus 400-700 p longis, 25-40 p diam., subulatis, cellula apicali acuta.

Plants 10-15 mm. high, monopodial, with a sparingly branched, poly-
siphonous main axis and large, persistent monosiphonous, colored, lateral

336 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

branches; polysiphonous main axis with four pericentral cells, 50-70 p»
diam., the pericentrals about 2 diam. long; lateral branches 400-700 p
long, 25-40 mw diam. at base, arranged one to a segment in a 1% spiral,
simple or with 2-3 limbs from near the base, subulate, usually somewhat
curved upward, with a sharp-pointed terminal cell; tetrasporangia borne
in a single spiral row of 8-15, one per segment, in slightly swollen por-
tions of main axes a short distance below apices, about 50 » diam. when
mature.

Type: D. 381d, growing on a small hydroid, dredged in 22 meters,
Tepoca Bay, Feb. 4, 1940. Herb. AHF no. 63.

Genus BOSTRYCHIA Montagne
Bostrychia radicans Mont.
Plate 49, Figs. 3, 4

Montagne, Cryp. Guy., 1842, p. 419; Post. 1936, p. 13. Bostrychia rivu-
laris Harvey, 1852-1858, p. 57, pl. XIV D.

An ample collection of this species was made by Drouet & Richards
on the Sonora coast near Guaymas and may be expected widely on sub-
merged wood or Mangrove roots in the bays and lagoons of the more
southern regions of the Gulf. It was distinguished as B. rivularis by
Collins and Hervey from other known American Bostrychia species
(1917) by its ecorticate main axis. Post includes R. rivularis under B.
radicans, to which she attributes very wide world distribution. The pres-
ent specimens, however, are the first Pacific North American examples.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 337

GENERAL SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

Since the last report on the algal flora of the Gulf of California, the
number of species known from that region has been almost trebled (to
273 species). Thirty species previously described from or attributed to
the area have been reduced to synonymy, sixty-two more described as new.
The Gulf has proved to have not only a rich and varied marine flora
but one containing species of exceptional distribution.

The seasonal alternation of floras has been investigated for the first
time and has proved strongly marked in the northern regions of the
Gulf. A beginning has been made in ecologic investigation. The remarka-
ble temperature conditions have been recorded and related to the dis-
tribution of algae as far as the evidence allows. Corelation between oxy-
gen content of the water and the distribution of algae has been made
with very interesting results. The infrequency of temperature and oxygen
records, however, leaves much room for future investigation throughout
the Gulf. Before the ecology of the marine plants of the region can be
satisfactorily understood, complete series of data for all seasons will be
necessary. As yet seasonal alternation of floras has been observed at only
one station, Turner’s Island. The rich floras of Puerto Refugio, Pond
Island, San Esteban Island, Tepoca Bay, and the region of Guaymas are
inadequately known ecologically and should be investigated at various
times of year, particularly in spring and fall. The nature of development
of algae, particularly in summer, should be investigated on all shores of
the southern part of the Gulf where records now are infrequent or lack-
ing. The sublittoral flora is still scantily known, and further dredging
operations will undoubtedly be richly rewarded.

Most remarkable of the species now known from the Gulf are those
exhibiting widely discontinuous distribution between the eastern and
western sides of the Pacific Ocean such as Ishige foliacea, Lomentaria
catenata, Lomentaria hakodatensis, Ceramium paniculatum, and Herpo-
siphonia subdisticha. Further ecologic investigations of these and other
such plants will undoubtedly help to broaden our views on phytogeogra-
phy among the marine algae.

Cutleria Hancockii is perhaps the most unusual discovery for our
region. It is the first member of the essentially Mediterranean order
Cutleriales to be found on the Pacific American coasts. Other such
novelties awaiting discovery will further add significance to the excep-
tional marine flora of this remarkable body of water.

338 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

For material used in the preparation of this paper and for assistance
in the study and interpretation of it, expression of gratitude is due to
many.

For the opportunity of accompanying the Expedition of the Velero
III special thanks is due Captain Allan Hancock for his generosity.

For the facilities of his laboratory, collections, and slides, as well as
for financial assistance throughout the work, I am deeply indebted to
Professor William A. Setchell.

Grateful acknowledgement is due, for collections of specimens, to
Dr. Francis Drouet, Mr. E. F. Ricketts, Mr. Victor Johnson, and Mr.
John Poindexter; for help in the study and interpretation of specimens
and data, to Dr. W. A. Setchell, Dr. G. J. Hollenberg, Dr. G. M.
Smith, Dr. W. R. Taylor, and Dr. A. R. Davis; for reading and criti-
cizing the manuscript, to Dr. Lee Bonar, Dr. W. A. Setchell, Dr. Ralph
Emerson, Dr. A. R. Davis, and Dr. G. M. Smith; for assistance in the
preparation of the manuscripts, to Miss Maxine Christianson and Mr.
N. Christianson; for the loan of type specimens, to Miss Alice Eastwood
of the California Academy of Sciences and Dr. F. J. Seaver of the New
York Botanical Gardens.

Acknowledgement is due Dr. H. V. Sverdrup of the Scripps Institu-
tion of Oceanography of the University of California for the use of
oceanographical data from the Gulf of California, a part of which is
here reproduced.

Finally, I am especially indebted for the facilities afforded me in my
work by the Department of Botany of the University of California.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 339

TABLE I

E. W. Scripps—OcEANOGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS IN THE GULF OF
CaLirorniA, Fes. 13—Marcu 19, 1939

SVERDRUP AND STAFF

TEMPERATURE—°C.

DEPTH IN (METERS
25 50 75 100.) 150°» 200), 250) 300

19490 19:0 18:1 16.5. 144 >, 13,.6.12:3 11.6.) 10.9) 102
BUSOU 20 Di 20:8 (20:6) P58 005.0 133) | 1b. PP 2 10.5
PUTO C210 206.5 18.1 (17.65) 15.0) 512.6% 118) 112. 104
O72 19609 19.5) 917.6" | 15.0) 13.5) 12:0). 1E-Ty, 10:8: 9%6
19.4 19.1 184 149 13.5 12.0 11.0 101 9.3
POSE 20:28 8: 1820) 15.74 13.7) 1233) BZ iol DS) LOSS
BIO W209 KIS.3)h LAD WA 526) 3.3))) 12 3711S) 10:8
Aipss e 20 1G 189 .0.15.3) 13,3 02-4008 VED. LOS
2028 NOR 19 407.8 15.2' 013.4 442.6: 12.0), 11.5

BOF VAD 16.7) 14:6

VA) AGS BAG 20 14.5 013.10) 02.0) ET AES

1G6-S)\ P67) HIS:8 94.7 \13.2.0122 H1P6 pb 11-2) 10.6
PROM LRG WATS F147) WIB-78 123 e INS 110 Ot
V7.6 NUF2 9 16.2 914.6'013:3') 12.3 11.6 11-1, 206
£7 A S16 S: 8 15:3 ISO 423) 1085) PES 028) Oe
165: 163.996.) 1A IS S120 TLS tO nn:2
PFO 16.7 A NGG) 16.3) 0°15.3'4 13.0) 12:0) oe
16-7 AGG E.1G6:6 615.6 13.8) 912.7, 11.6) 010.9) 106
16.7): 99635. 164 SAGA 9 14.5 512.6.7: 12.0 Yt 10s
16:2 16:2) (160. 895.7, | 14.3 913.1 12-4 5 108
164 )'16.41016.2, (IS.1593:3 5125 5060110 104
PSF 14.98) 12.9) 12S 24 i A

16251; 1612) 916.0) 14. 50-13.0' 4 12.019) ES 0 10.6
16:3 Wi 16:53 105.2514, 0 83S 12.3) 5: O89) 10:3

i)
~
&

S
~~
S

5S 08! Sl Oe ee ee
—
2
Wn
ioe)

RO. (NO) NOs Deh a ee ee ee
A PRWNHNH KH DUO WAN AD WN K CO
meee tt ON
RS IR ee Le OA eS a ie cn cet eo
Gy 1G) (G1, 1G) °C) 160) SSNS, SS G0) "CO ST OF Oy)
nn a So SD) o> Uo oS On So oo

340

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

TABLE I (continued)

DEPTH IN METERS
10 25 50 75 100 = 150
LOS f6:3" Woe Ps ISAS
15.7)" 05.40" 19.3" 14.8 13:4 °12.6
15.3, soge19.2) 14.0 13.2 4 E26
LDSh, LGM sh ok Ded ink Oeao Qak
15.9 S:0°N 15.6 1G: Se
5.3 LG LAD ST) he] 229
1527 1516) 15.0) 1318: ESA ietG
Uo i Sy in WP Maa a Rh a 28
1558 H1S.7 4213.6 S32) 207
15.0) 925.0 14.8 14.2) SQ 12.6
15.3) 14.8 TO 138 9194) 02:6
15:05 "05:0 04:3 140 13:8 ZT
15.1, 14.9, 14.9 14.6 $14.0." 12.7
2 ASO) 132° ASO o 27 et
PAL AO ES2 IZ 12.6
14.6 14.2 14.0 13.4 13.0 12.1
PEG 914.3 13.8. 13.3 1229 P12
14.5 194.0 113-9 13:6: (+13.3 12.8
15.4 146 142 14.0 13.2
15.2146) (tO: 143) So) * LSet
14.6 14.4 °14.3 \ (13.9 113.7, 134
15.2) 14.3) S142 613.9 813.7 C1s.0
15.5).014.3) Pd ES
15.0) 914.2) 14.1. . 13.7
15.5 14.3 14.4
14.9 14.2 14.0
14.0 V1S.8) \IS.7 AS V1.3 SO
L435 140 VARS VISA VAS O19

200

11.6
122
12.2
ip Lee!
10.7
12.0
Lie
112
{3.1
Livy
12:2
11.8
11.8
17

11.7
12.0
12.4

12.4
12.6
12.4

12.5
12.5

250

10.8
11.8
11.8
113

9.8

11.0
10.2
112
tia
12.0
11.0
11.4
11.0

115
11.9

12.3

128

12:3
12.5

VOL. 3

300

10.3
1.1
TA
10.7

9.0

10.4

9.5
10.1
10.4
10.4
10.3
10.7
10.9

11.0
11.4

12.0

12.0

12.3
12.2

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 341

TABLE II

E. W. Scripps—OcEANOGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS IN THE GULF OF
CALIFORNIA, FEB. 13-Marcu 19, 1939

SVERDRUP AND STAFF

OXYGEN ml/L

DEPTH IN METERS
Sta. 0 10 25 50 75 100 <150 200 250 300 §8400

5D (00. Oh ee ee

Dh hb HY HB KH Ke FP ee eS eS eS
RERBSSSSHPAAaRBSNES

Beaiy 1008 $3289 (1.95) 0:72) 0:62) 10.22 0.11 5003" 10:01 *).0.03
5:60'/5.00) '5.00).5.13) \1.23 1.08 ‘0:40: 0.41 0.20. 20:10; 0.08
5.08 4.78 4.60 4.20 5.60 2.00 0.39 0.17 0.09 0.04 0.09
Deol) 5.80 19.03) 3.90 RO5> 11.20) 0:40: 0:02) ‘Of30 10:33

B2a0 Wade 15.12))3570)) 0:77 056. 0:18 * 0:22) 6:36 0.08) 0.04
Ht) 99.05) (5.25) 14-10) "1.32 (0.40 0.15 0.10 0:08 °0:06) 0.08
Bro PSG $3.35) 13:39) 1.90), 0.28 (OL17, 0:49! 0.44 OMS! 0.18
5.10 5.08 4.98 4.40 1.00 0.46 0.20 0.13 0.08 0.05 0.04
p20) $5.21" (4.95 93.00. 1:13 (0:50) 0.46 0.26 0.46

ola, 05.20 Yo.12 2.03" (1.32

5.10523 4.63) 4.35 0.78 (0.25) (0:05); 0.04. 0.09

5.20))5.15) 4.98) 44.15) °1-30) (0-30) (0:25. 0.14. 0.08. 0:12..0.20
792) 05:22 3.07 (4:38: (0:76 0:20) (0.57 10.13) 0.06. (0.04. 0:07
5.62 ),(05-41) 15.19).23.90)' 1.10 0:36. (0.08 0.20 0:13: 0.01) 0:04
3:62) 5-53" 15.31) 64.70) 10:70 0:22).0.10') 0107 0.06: 70:06) 0.12
D645 9.37)",9:7979.20 1.80 O28. 0.07 (O01. 0.07) S005) O02
3.35 05-40) F523 5.250452 «2041, 0400.19 0.13) 10:60), 0.06
SA0PUS-G8, 5 A2)5.201'2795) $1.20). O27 0.17) (OLE FOO 0:07
901 5.44° | 4.900 5.32): 534) 1.62 (0122. 016) (015. VOs12 0:07
5.360. 5.93) 39-39? 5.20) £96. 153" 0.70) .0.25) .OS10 10:06. -0L06
9069.40) * 525015: 200"-2.55. 0.95" 0.20) 01S: 10209; 2OL07)" 0:06
529811) 9.53" 113.50) (0:28) 0:15: 0120) (0:29) 40.25

PAS 5:23" 95:14. 152141220) 0:49 0.07 0:09: 0.10), 0:08

DEO S239 3:39) SS) 10.88 (0.62 0.26 0212 (0:70.09 : 0.06

342

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

DEPTH

25

5.26
4.87
5:26
5.03
5.25
4.30
D133
5.60
5.60
5.04
SA |
5.44
5.13
3:79
4.58
4.74
36
4.98
5.68
5.90
5.36
5.36
5.45
5.47
6.15
5.50
4.87
4.90

TABLE II (continued)

50

2.95
4.90
5.14
Sule,
5.20
3.00
4.30
4.80
4.68
4.87
4.25
4.12
S19
3.40
2.25
4.41
4.12
4.80
4.76
Sit3
4.60
4.91
4.91
5.32
5.70
4.87
4.58
4.27

75

1.35
3.50
1.63
5.01
5.00
2.10
123
2.20
3.84
3.30
3.12
3.79
4.60
3.04
1.30
S12
3.23
4.05
3.78
S.72
3.76
4.34
3.58
5.26

4.02
3.56

100

0.39
0.41
0.32
3.90
0.65
2.50
0.76
0.40
3.25
1.00
3.28
352
3.00
2.50
i227
225
2:59
3.47
2.04
2135
3.50
392

3.75
3:13

150

0.41
0.35
0.26
0.60
0.30
Ae52
2.05
0.25
2.45
1.87
deo |
0.76
1.36
1.56

1:52
1.61
2.83

1.28
2.15
2.65

3.08
2.74

IN METERS

200

0.13
0.20
0.16
0.33
0.08
0.30
0.19
0.13
215
1.56
2.18
0.47
0.56
0.85

1.51
L395
1.74

1.83

1.74

2:35
2.32

250

0.09
0.15
0.09
0.19
0.08

0.13
0.13
1.16
0.77
1.80
0.30
0.50
0.31

1.66
1.41

1.54

1.45

2.05
2.04

VOL. 3

300

0.07
0.10
0.14
0.12
0.20

0.09
0.11
0.32
0.45
0.04
0.18
0.28
0.28

1.40
1.30

1.10

1.14

2.00
2.02

400

0.06
0.11
0.04

0.05

0.14
0.06
0.07
0.19
0.22
0.12
0.30

1.43

1.05

1.58
1.64

no. 10

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

TABLE III

343

E. W. Scripps—OcEANOGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS IN THE GULF OF
CALIFORNIA, Fes. 13-Marcu 19, 1939

Ons er Se ee ee

[RO I OE Oe je Oa Oe er SSS Sa
SARARSGSPFS Sar AARREBANEAS

POSPELONS, OF

Ze
2a
Za.
23"
ne
23"
Zoe
23%
23°
23°
24°
23°
24°
24°
24°
24°
24°
25°
23e
ee
25°
ZG
ah
26°
26°
Zor
26°

527 N
54°N
56’ N
01’N
58’ N
01’N
05’N
10’N
10’N
10’N
46’ N
39°.N
32° N
ZN
20’ N
14’°N
09’ N
14’°N
18’ N
220
23° N
28’ N
33’ N
37’N
35’N
28’ N
20’N

Sie Awd TL OoNGs

109°
109°
109°
108°
108°
107°
107?
LOW
106°
106°
108°
108°
108°
109°
109°
109°
Log?
110°
110°
L102
109°
Loge
109°
110°
110°
110°
ris

46’ 2

27’ W
11’°W
40’ W
147° W
48’ W
23’ W
04’ W
51’W
37’ W
22’ W
24’ W
45’W
05’ W
11’°W
25’ W
38’ W
39’ W
27’ W
12’ W
57’W
45’ W
28’ W
02’ W
1S! W.
29’ W
46’ W

28.
29.
30.
oh:
32.
33:
34.
35.
36.
SH.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
Sis
a2:
53:

ZOr
26°
ahs
alps
ah

14’7N
10’N
14’°N
46’ N
307 IN
24’ N
07’N
02’N
40’N
54’N
07’N
a
22IN
06’ N
06’ N
09’°N
18’ N
bi
57’N
56’ N
42’N
52’N
14’N
14’7N
09’ N
46’ N

1-153

Pid?
ita
PUL
110°
PET?
AB ad
| le
Pile
2?
he2z°
12°
112°
1 43
22
Lise
113°
fis?
hS*
bS?
114°
114°
114°
Lis?
114°
13°
13°

01’W
13’ W
10’ W
56’ W
06’ W
17’W
30’ W
48’ W
19’ W
15’W
10’ W
06’ W
04’ W
38’ W
00’ W
02’ W
13’ W
32’ W
55’ W
11° W
22’ W
04’ W
40’ W
14° W
29’ W
08’ W

344 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

LITERATURE CITED

AcarpH, C. A.
1820-28. Species algarum rite cognitae cum synonymis, differentiis specificis
et descriptionibus succinctis. 1(1): 1-168. 1820; 1(2) : 169-531. 1822;
2(1): I-LXXVI; 1-189. 1828. Lund.
1824. Systema Algarum. XXXVIII+-312 pp. Lund.

AGARDH, J. G.

1847. Nya Alger fran Mexico. Oefvers. af Kongl. Vetensk.-Akad. Férhandl.
4: 5-17.

1851-76. Species genera et ordines Algarum. 2(1): I-XII and 1-351. 1851;
2(2): 337-720. 1852; 2(3): 701-1291. 1863; 3(1) (Epicrisis system-
atis floridearum) : I-VII and 1-724. 1876. Lund.

1873-90. ‘Till Algernas Systematik, Afd. 1. Lunds Univ. Arsskr. 9: 1-71.
1873; Afd. 2. Ibid., 17: 1-134. 1882; Afd. 3. Ibid., 19: 1-177. 1883;
Afd. 4. Ibid., 21: 1-117. 1885; Afd. 5. Ibid., 23: 1-174. 1887; Afd.
6. Ibid., 26: 1-125. 1890.

1889. Species Sargassorum Australiae, descriptae et dispositae, etc. Kongl.
Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. Handl. 23(3): 1-133, 31 pls. with text.
Stockholm.

1892-99. Analecta Algologica: observationes de speciebus minus cognitis
earumque dispositione. Actis Soc. Physiog. Lundensis 28: 1-182.
1892; Continuatio. [bid., 29: 1-144. 1894; Continuatio II. [bid., 30:
1-98. 1894; Continuatio III. Jbid. N.S., 7: 1-140. 1896; Continuatio
IV. Ibid. N.S., 8: 1-106. 1897; Continuatio V. Ibid. N.S., 10: 1-160.
1899.

ARDISSONE, F.

1883-86. Phycologia Mediterranea, I (Floridee): I-X, 1-516. 1883; II
(Oosporee, Zoosporee, Schizosporee) : 1-325. 1886. Varese.

Buip1no, C.

1928. Studien tiber die Florideenordnung Rhodymeniales. Lunds Univ.
Arsskr., N.F., Avd. 2, 24(3) : 4-74.

B@rGESEN, F.

1913-20. Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies, I. Dansk Bot. Arkiv
1(4): 1-160; 2(2): 1-68. 1913-14. Tbid., II. 3: 1-504. 1915-20.

1920. Marine Algae of Easter Island. Nat. Hist. of Juan Fernandez and
Easter Island (9) : 247-309. Upsala.

1934. Some Marine Algae from the Northern Part of the Arabian Sea, with
Remarks on Their Geographical Distribution. Det Kgl. Danske
Videnskab. Selsk. Biol. Medd. 11(6): 1-72.

1937. Contributions to a South Indian Marine Algal Flora III. Journ.
Indian Bot. Soc. 16(6) : 311-357.

Bornet, E., & G. THURET

1876-80. Notes Algologiques; recueil d’observation sur les algues. 1: 1-72,
pls. 1-25. 1876; 2: 73-196, pls. 26-50. 1880.

Bory DE SAINT VINCENT, J. B.

1826-29. Histoire naturelle botanique, Cryptogamie. In L. I. Duperrey,
Voyage autour du monde, éxecuté par ordre du Roi sur la Corvette
de sa Majesté, La Coquille, pendant les années 1822, 1823, 1824 et
1825. Pp. 1-96 (1827), 97-136 (1828), 137-300 (1829), Atlas, pls.
1-24 (plates dated individually) (1826-27). Paris.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 345

Couns, F. S.

1909-18. The Green Algae of North America. Tufts Coll. Stud. 2(3): 79-
480. 1909; First Suppl., zbid., 3(2): 91-109. 1912; Second Suppl.,
tbid., 4(7) : 1-106. 1918.

1909a. New Species of Cladophora. Rhodora 11: 17-20.

Cou.ins, F. S., & A. B. HERVEY
1917. The Algae of Bermuda. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci. 53: 3-195.

CoLuins, F. S., I. HoLpen, & W. A. SETCHELL
1895-1919. Phycotheca Boreali-Americana (Exsiccata). Fasc. I-XLVI, A-E.

Dawson, E. Y.

1941. Field Observations on the Algae of the Gulf of California. Allan
Hancock Pacific Exped. 3(7): 113-119.

1941a. A Review of the Genus Rhodymenia with Descriptions of New
Species. Ibid., 3(8) : 121-181.
DECAISNE, J.

1842. Essais sur une classification des Algues et des Polypiers calciféres
de Lamouroux. Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot. ii, 17: 297-380.

1842a. Mémoire sur les corallines ou polypieres calciféres. [bid., ii, 18:
96-128.

DerBES, A., ET A. J. J. SOLIER

1856. Mémoire sur quelques points de la physiologie des algues. C. R. Acad.
Sci., Suppl. 1: 1-120.

De Tonl, G. B.

1889-1924. Sylloge algarum omnium hucusque cognitarum. 1 (Sylloge
Chlorophycearum): 1-12, I-CKXXIX, 1-1315. 1889. 3 (Sylloge
Fucoidearum) : I-XVI, 1-638. 1895. 4 (Sylloge Floridearum) (1):
I-XX, I-LXI, 1-388. 1897; (2): 387-776. 1900; (3): 775-1525. 1903;
(4): 1523-1973. 1905. 6 (Sylloge Floridearum) (5, Additimenta) :
I-XI, 1-767. 1924. Patavii.

Drew, K. M.

1928. A Revision of the Genera Chantransia, Rhodochorton, and Acrochae-
tium, with Descriptions of the Marine Species of Rhodochorton
(Naeg.) Gen. Emend. on the Pacific Coast of North America. Univ.
Cal. Publ. Bot. 14(5) : 139-224.

ENGLER, A., AND K. PRANTL
1896. Die Natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien, I, 2: i-xii, 1-580.

FALKENBERG, P.

1901. Die Rhodomelaceen des Golfes von Neapel und der angrenzenden
Meeresabschnittes. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel 26:
1-754. Berlin.

Faritow, W. G.

1889. On Some New or Imperfectly Known Algae of the United States, I.
Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 16: 1-12.

1899. Three Undescribed California Algae. Erythea 7: 73-76.

FELDMANN, J.
1931. Remarques sur les genres Gelidium Lamour., Gelidiopsis Schmitz et

Echinocaulon (Kiitz.) emend. Rec. Trav. Cryptog. dédiés a L.
Mangin: 151-166. Paris.

346 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

FELDMANN, J., ET G. HAMEL
1934. Observations sur quelques Gelidiacées. Rev. Gén. Bot. 46: 528-549.
1936. Floridées de France, VII, Gelidiales. Rev. Algol. 9(1-2) : 85-140.

FELDMANN-MAZOYER, G.
1940. Recherches sur les Céramiacées de la Méditerranée occidentale. 510
pp., 191 figs., 4 pls. Algiers.
Fosuiz, M. H.
1895. New or Critical Lithothamnia. Kgl. Norske Vidensk. Selsk. Skrifter,
1895 (2): 1-10.
1897. On Some Lithothamnia. Ibid., 1897 (1): 1-20.
1898. List of Species of Lithothamnia. Ibid., 1898 (3): 1-11.
1899. Notes on Two Lithothamnia from Funafuti. Ibid., 1899 (2): 1-5.

1900. Revised Systematical Survey of the Melobesieae. Ibid., 1900 (5):
1-22.

1901. Bieten die Heydrich’shen Melobesien-Arbeiten einer sichere Grund-
lage? Ibid., 1901 (2): 1-28.

1905. New Lithothamnia and systematical remarks. Ibid., 1905 (5): 1-9.

1907. Algologiska Notiser IV. Ibid., 1907 (6): 1-30.

1909. Algologiska Notiser VI. Ibid., 1909 (2): 1-63.

1929. Contributions to a Monograph of the Lithothamnia. Edited by H.
Printz. 60 pp., 75 pls. Trondhjem.

Fos.ir, M. H., & M. A. Howe

1906. New American Coralline Algae. Bull. New York Bot. Gard. 4: 128-
136.

Garpner, N. L.

1927. New Rhodophyceae from the Pacific Coast of North America, II.
Univ. Cal. Pub. Bot. 13: 235-272. Ibid., III. 13: 333-368. Ibid., IV.
13: 373-402. Ibid., V. 13: 403-434. Ibid., VI. 14: 99-138.

Gee, H.

1932. Calcium Equilibrium in Sea Water. Bull. Scripps Inst. of Oceanogr.,
Tech. Ser., 3(7): 145-190.

GMELIN, S. G.

1768. Historia fucorum. [10]-++1-6+1-239 pp., pls. IA, B, IIA, B, III-
XXXIII. Petropoli.

GREVILLE, R. K.

1830. Algae Britannicae, or Descriptions of the Marine and Other Inar-
ticulated Plants of the British Islands, belonging to the Order Algae:
with Plates Illustrative of the Genera. Ixxxviii++218. Edinburgh.

HamMEL, A. et G.

1929. Sur l’heterogamie d’une Cladophoracée, Lola (nov. gen.) lubrica
(Setch. et Gard.). C. R. Acad. Sci. ii, 189: 1094-1096.

HaMEL, G.
1930-32. Chlorophycées des cétes frangaises. Rev. Algol. 5: 1-54, 381-430.
1930-31; zbid., 6: 9-73. 1931-32.
1931-39. Phaeophycées de France. Pp. I-XLVII (1939); Fasc. 1, pp. 1-80
(1931); Fasc. 2, pp. 81-176 (1935); Fasc. 3, pp. 177-240 (1937) ;
Fasc. 4, pp. 241-336 (1938); Fasc. 5, pp. 337-432 (1939). Paris.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 347

Harior, P.

1895. Algues du Golfe de Californie recueillies par M. Diguet. Journ. de
Bot. 9: 167-170.

Harvey, W. H.

1846-51. Phycologia Britannica: Or a History of British Seaweeds, Con-
taining Coloured Figures, Generic and Specific Characters, Syno-
nymes, and Descriptions of All the Species of Algae Inhabiting the
Shores of the British Islands. Pp. XLV-++VI (-++5), 360 pls. and text.
4 vol. London.

1852-58. Nereis Boreali-Americana. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowl-
edge. Part I, 1-150. 1852; Part II, 1-258. 1853 (designated also as
vol. 5 (5) of the Contributions) ; Part III, 1-140. 1858 (including
supplement).

1855. Some Account of the Marine Botany of the Colony of Western
Australia. Trans. Roy. Irish Acad. 22: 525-566.

1857. Algae. In A. Gray. List of Dried Plants Collected in Japan. In F. L.
Hawks, Narrative of the Expedition of an American Squadron to
the China Seas and Japan...in... 1852-54, under the command of
Commodore M. C. Perry 2: 303-332. Washington.

1858-63. Phycologia Australica: or a History of Australian Seaweeds; and
a Synopsis of All Known Australian Algae. 1: pl. 1-60. 1858; 2: pl.
61-120. 1859; 3: pl. 121-180. 1860; 4: pl. 181-240. 1862; 5: pl. 241-
300. 1863. London.

HEypricu, F.

1897. Corallinaceae insbesondere Melobesieae. Ber. der Deutschen Botan.
Gesellsch. 15: 340-370.

1901. Die Lithothamnien des Museum d’Histoire naturelle in Paris. Botan.
Jahrb. fiir syst. Botanik 28: 529-545.

HOLLENBERG, G. J.

1942. An Account of the Species of Polysiphonia of the Pacific Coast of
North America. Amer. Journ. Bot. 29: 772-785.

1943. New Marine Algae from Southern California. II. Amer. Journ. Bot.,
30: 571-579.

Homes, E. M.
1895. New Marine Algae from Japan. Linn. Soc. Journ., Bot. 31: 248-260.

Howe, M. A.

1905. Phycological Studies -II. New Chlorophyceae, New Rhodophyceae
and miscellaneous notes. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 32: 563-586.

1907. Phycological Studies -III. Further notes on Halimeda and Avrain-
villea. Ibid., 34: 491-516.

1911. Phycological Studies -V. Some Marine Algae of Lower California,
Mexico. Ibid., 38: 489-514.

1914. The Marine Algae of Peru. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 15: 1-185, pls. 1-
66.

1920. Algae, pp. 553-618. Iz N. L. Britton and C. F. Millspaugh, The
Bahama Flora, vii-+695 pp. New York.

1924. Chinese Marine Algae. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 51: 133-144.

PLUS bas As

1902. An Account of the Species of Porphyra Found on the Pacific Coast
of North America. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. iii, Bot. 2(6) : 173-240.

348 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Jounson, D., & H. York

1915. The Relation of Plants to Tide Levels. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Publ.
206: 1-161.

JOHNSTONE, J.
1928. An Introduction to Oceanography. 368 pp. Liverpool.

KJELLMAN, F. R.

1900. Om Floridé-slagtet Galaxaura, dess organographi och systematik.
Kongl. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. Handl. 33(1): 1-109, 20 pls.

Kiutzine, F. T.

1843. Phycologia generalis, oder Anatomie, Physiologie und systemkunde
der Tange. 458 pp., 80 pls. Leipzig.

1845-71. Tabulae Phycologicae oder Abbildungen der Tange. Vols. 1-20.
Nordhausen.

1849. Species algarum. 922 pp. Leipzig.

Kyun, H.
1924. Studien iiber die Delesseriaceen. Lunds Univ. Arsskr., N. F., Avd.
2, 20(6) : 1-111.
1925. The Marine Red Algae in the Vicinity of the Biological Station at
Friday Harbor, Washington. Ibid., 21(9) : 1-87.
1930. Uber die Entwicklungsgeschichte der Florideen. Ibid., 26(6): 1-103.
1932. Die Florideenordnung Gigartinales. [bid., 28(8) : 1-88.

1933. Uber die Entwicklungsgeschichte der Phaeophyceen. Ibid., 29(7): 1-
102.

1937. Anatomie der Rhodophyceen. Jz K. Linsbauer, Handbuch der Pflanz-
enanatomie, II, 2g: i-viii, 1-347, 252 figs. Berlin.

1937a. Uber eine Marine Porphyridium-Art. Kungl. Fysiogr. Sallsk. Lund
Forhandlingar, 7(10).

1940. Die Phaeophyceenordnung Chordariales. Lunds Univ. Arsskr., N. F.,
Avd. 2, 36(9) : 1-67.

1941. Californische Rhodophyceae. Ibid., 37(2): 1-51.

LAMouROUX, J. V.

1813. Essai sur les genres de la famille des thalassiophytes non articulées
Ann. Mus. d’Hist. Nat. 20: 21-47, 115-139, 267-293, pls. 7-13.

1816. Historie des Polypiers coralligénes flexibles, vulgairement nommés
Zoophytes. Ixxxiv-+559 pp., 19 pls. Caen.

1825. Gelidium, zz Dictionnaire classique d’Histoire naturelle 7.

Le Jouis, A.

1863. Liste des algues marines de Cherbourg. Mém. Soc. Imp. Sci. Nat. de
Cherbourg 10: 5-168.

LeMOINE, Mme. P.
1911. Structure anatomique des Mélobésiées. Application 4 la classification.
Ann. Inst. Oceanogr. (Monaco) 2(2): 1-213.
1929. Les Corallinacées de L’Archipel des Galapagos et du Golfe de Pan-
ama. Arch. Mus. d’Hist. Nat. vi, 4: 37-88.
Link, H. F.
1820. Epistola de algis aquaticis in genera disponendis. Pp. 1-8 im Nees,
Horae Physicae. Bonnae.

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 349

LINNAEUS, C.
1753. Species plantarum, exhibentes plantas rite cognitas, ad genera relatas,
cum differentiis specificis, nominibus trivialibus, synonymis selectis,
locis natalibus secundum systema sexuale digestas. Ed. 1. Stockholm.

Manza, A. V.

1940. A Revision of the Genera of Articulated Corallines. Philippine
Journ. Sci. 71: 239-316.

Martens, G. V.

1866. Die Tange. In, Die Preussische Exped. nach Ost-Asien, Botan. Theil.
152 pp., 8 pls. Berlin.

Mason, L. R.

1933. The Crustaceous Corallines of the Pacific Coast of North America.
Thesis manuscript in the Library of the University of California.

MonrTAGNE, C.

1842. Botanique—Plantes cellulaires. Vol. VIII (x+549 pp.) of Pt. II, and
Atlas II (Cryptogamie, 20 pls.) zm R. de La Sagra’s Histoire phys-
ique, politique et naturelle de l’ile de Cuba. Paris.

1846-47. Flore d’Algerie, Phyceae, im J. B. Bory de St. Vincent et Durieu
de Maissonneuve, Exploration scientifique de l’Algerie, Bot. 197 pp.,
16 pls. Paris.

1850. Note sur la station insolite de quelques Floridées dans les eaux
douces et courantes des reusseaux de la Guyana. C. R. Acad. Sci. i.,
30: 604-606.

1850a. Cryptogamia Guyanensis, seu plantarum cellularium in Guyana
gallica annis 1835-1849 a Cl. Leprieur collectarum enumeratio uni-
versalis. Ann. Sci. Nat. iii, Bot., 14: 283-310.

NAEGELI, C.

1846. Uber Polysiphonia und Herposiphonia. Zeitschr. Wiss. Bot. 4: 206-
256.

OKAMURA, K.
1907-37. Icones of Japanese Algae. 1: 1-22, pls. 1-50. 1907-1909. 2: 1-191,
pls. 51-100. 1909-1912. 3: 1-218, pls. 101-150. 1913-1915. 4: 1-205, pls.
151-200. 1916-1923. 5: 1-203, pls. 201-250. 1923-1928. 6: 1-96, pls.
251-300. 1929-1932. 7: 1-79, pls. 301-345. 1933-1937. Tokyo.
1936. Nippon Kaison Shi (Descriptions of Japanese Algae). Pp. 1-9-+-1-6
+1-964-++1-11. Tokyo.

Post, ERIKA

1936. Systematische und pflanzengeographische Notizen zur Bostrychia-
Caloglossa-Assoziation. Rev. Algol. 9: 1-84.

Poste.s, A., & F. RUPRECHT
1840. Illustrationes algarum in itinere circa orbem jussu imperatoris
Nicolai I atque auspiciis Navarchi Friderici Liitke annis 1826, 1827,
1828 et 1829, celose Seniavin exsecuto in Oceano Pacifico, imprimis
septemtrionali ad littora Rossica Asiatico-Americana collectarum.
40 pls. St. Petersburg.

ROSENVINGE, L. K.

1909-31. Marine Algae of Denmark, I. Rhodophyceae. Kongel. Danske
Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., vii, 7(1-4) : 1-627.

350 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

SAUNDERS, D. A.
1898. Phycological Memoirs. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. iii, Bot. 1(4) : 147-168.

SAUVAGEAU, M. C.

1899. Les Cutlériacées et leur alternace de générations. Ann. Sci. Nat. viii,
10: 265-362.

1900-14. Remarques sur les Sphacelariacées. Journ. de Bot. 14: 1-51. 1900;
15: 51-167. 1901; 16: 167-228. 1902; 17: 228-332. 1903; 18: 332-348.
1904; Reprint, pp. I-XII+-349-634. 1914. Bordeaux.

1927. Sur le Colpomenia sinuosa Derb. et Sol. Bull. Sta. Biol. d’Arcachon
24: 309-353.

ScumiITz, F.

1889. Systematische Ubersicht der bisher bekannten Gattungen der Flori-
deen. Flora 72: 435-456.

1895. Marine Florideen von Deutsch-Ostafrika. Botan. Jahrb. fiir syst.
Botanik 21: 137-177.

1896. Bangiaceae, iz A. Engler und K. Prantl, Die natiirlichen Pflanzen-
familien I, 2: 307-316.

SEGAWA, S.

1935. Marine Algae of Susake, Prov. Idzu and its vicinity. Sci. Papers
Inst. Algol. Res., Fac. of Sci., Hokkaido Imp. Univ. 1(1): 59-90.

SETCHELL, W. A.
1914. The Scinaia Assemblage. Univ. Cal. Pub. Bot. 6: 79-152.

1915. ‘The Law of Temperature Connected with the Distribution of the
Marine Algae. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 2: 287-305.

1920. ‘The Temperature Interval in the Geographical Distribution of the
Marine Algae. Science, n.s. 52: 187-190.

1920a. Stenothermy and Zone Invasion. Amer. Nat. 54: 385-389.

1922. Cape Cod in Its Relation to the Marine Flora of New England.
Rhodora 24: 1-11.

1924. American Samoa, Pt. I, Vegetation of Tutuila Island. Carnegie Inst.
Wash. Publ. 20 (341): 1-188.

1926. Phytogeographical Notes on Tahiti, II, Marine Vegetation. Univ.
Cal. Pub. Bot. 12: 241-290.

1937. Report on the Sargassums of the Templeton Crocker Expedition of
1932. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. iv, 22(5) : 127-158.

SETCHELL, W. A., & N. L. GARDNER

1920. The Marine Algae of the Pacific Coast of North America, Part 2,
Chlorophyceae. Univ. Cal. Pub. Bot. 8: 139-374.

1922. Phycological Contributions, II-VI. New Species of: II. Myrionema;
III. Compsonema; IV. Hecatonema; V. Pylaiella and Streblonema;
VI. Ectocarpus. Ibid., 7: 333-426.

1924. New Marine Algae from the Gulf of California. Proc. Cal. Acad.
Sci. iv, 12(29) : 695-949.

1924a. Phycological Contributions, VII. Univ. Cal. Pub. Bot. 13: 1-13.

1925. The Marine Algae of the Pacific Coast of North America. Part 3,
Melanophyceae. Ibid., 8: 383-898.

1930. Marine Algae of the Revillagigedo Islands Expedition of 1925. Proc.
Cal. Acad. Sci. iv, 19: 109-215.

1933. A Preliminary Survey of Gigartina, with Special Reference to Its
Pacific North American Species. Univ. Cal. Pub. Bot. 17: 255-340.

1937. A Preliminary Report on the Algae of the Templeton Crocker Expe-
dition in 1932. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. iv, 21(2) : 65-98.

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA S|

SHELFORD, V. E.

1929. The Penetration of Light in Puget Sound Waters as Measured with
Gas-filled Photoelectric Cells and Ray Filters. Publ. Puget Sound
Biol. Sta. 7: 151-168.

SOLANDER, D.

1786. In J. Ellis and D. Solander, The Natural History of Many Curious
and Uncommon Zoophytes. Pp. XII-+-208, 63 pls. London.

STACKHOUSE, J.

1795-1801. Nereis Britannica; continens species omnes Fucorum in insulis
Britannicis crescentium, Fasc. 1: i-viii. 1795; Fasc. 2: ix-xviii. 1797;
Fasc. 3: xix-xl+1-112 with appendix, pls. 1-17 and A-G. 1801. Bath.

SVERDRUP, H. U., & STAFF

1943. Oceanographic Observations of the Scripps Institution in 1939. Rec-
ords of Obs. Scripps Inst. Oceanogr. 1(2) : 65-160.

TANAKA, T.
1936. The Genus Galaxaura from Japan. Sci. Papers Inst. Algol. Res.,
Fac. of Sci., Hokkaido Imp. Univ. 1(2) : 141-173.
1941. The Genus Hypnea from Japan. Ibid., 2(2) : 227-230.

Taytor, W. R.

1928. The Marine Algae of Florida, with Special Reference to the Dry
Tortugas. Carnegie Inst. Wash., Publ. 379; Papers from the Tor-
tugas Laboratory, 25:i-v-+1-219, 3 figs., 27 pls.

1937. Marine Algae of the Northeastern Coast of North America. i-ix,
1-427, 60 pls. Ann Arbor.

1939. Algae from the Presidential Cruise of 1938. Smithsonian Contr.
Knowl., Miscell. Ser. 98 (9) : 1-18.

TuHuret, G., & E. BoRNET
1878. Etudes Phycologiques. 105 pp., 51 pls. Paris.

Vickers, A.

1908. Phycologia Barbadensis. Iconographie des algues marines récoltées a
l’Ile Barbade( Antilles) —(Chlorophycées et Pheophycées). (Text by
Mary H. Shaw.) Part I, Chlorophyceae, pp. 1-30, pl. 153; Part II,
Phaeophyceae, pp. 33-44, pls. 1-34. Paris.

WEBER-VAN Bosse, A.

1898. Monographie des Caulerpes. Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg 15: 243-401,
pls. 20-34.

1913-28. Liste des Algues du Siboga. Siboga-Expeditie Monogr. LIX, I.
Myxophyceae, Chlorophyceae, Phaeophyceae, avec le concours de
M. Th. Reinbold, pp. 1-186. 1913; II. Rhodophyceae, premiere partie,
Protoflorideae, Nemalionales, Cryptonemiales, pp. 185-310. 1921; III.
Rhodophyceae, seconde partie, Ceramiales, pp. 311-392. 1923; IV.
Rhodophyceae, troisieme partie, Gigartinales, Rhodymeniales, pp.
393-533. 1928.

WEBER-VAN Bosse, A., & M. Fosiie

1904. The Corallinaceae of the Siboga Expedition. Siboga-Expeditie
Monogr. LVI, pp. 1-110, pls. I-XIII. Leiden.

WHIPPLE, G. C., & M. C. WHIPPLE

1911. The Solubility of Oxygen in Sea Water. Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc.
33: 362-366.

352 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

YAMADA, Y.
1931. Notes on Laurencia, with Special Reference to the Japanese Species.
Univ. Cal. Pub. Bot. 16: 185-310.
YENDO, K.

1902. Corallinae verae of Port Renfew. Minnesota Bot. Stud. 2(40) :711-
720.

1902a. Corallinae verae Japonicae. Journ. Coll. Sci., Imp. Univ. Tokyo
16(2) : 1-36.

1907. Fucaceae of Japan. Ibid., 21(12): 1-174, pls. I-XVIII.

1920. Novae Algae Japonicae. Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 34: 1-12.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

0 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 353

ALGAL COLLECTION STATIONS
ALLAN Hancock ExpEpITION—1940

See Volume I, part 3, of this series for detailed charts of these stations.

1034-40. Outer Gorda Banks, Cape District, Lower California, Jan. 20, 1940.
Dredging in 118-140 meters on coralline sand bottom. Position: 23° 01’ N.
—109° 28’ W. Surface 22.7°C., bottom 16°C. D. 36.

1035-40. Inner Gorda Banks, Cape District, Lower California, Jan. 20, 1940.
Dredging in 140-150 meters on coralline sand bottom. Position: 23° 02’ N.
—109° 30’ W. Surface 22.7°C., bottom 16°C. D. 37.

1037-40. Boca de la Trinidad, Lower California, Jan. 21, 1940. Dredging in
about 100 meters over coralline sand bottom. Position: 23° 38’ N.—109° 29’
W. Surface 22.1°C., bottom 14°C. D. 38-39.

1038-40. Guaymas Bay, Sonora, Jan. 22, 1940. Dredging in 4-6 meters on
muddy bottom with little animal life. D. 49-61.

Dawson 7-40. Guaymas Bay, Sonora, Jan. 23, 1940. Shore collecting in
very shallow water at low tide along edges of lagoons adjacent to harbor.
Bottom of loose rocks, fine sand, and muck. Principal association: Entero-
morpha, Padina, Polysiphonia, and Sargassum in large masses. Codium
and Gracilaria occasional. Surface 17.5°-20.0°C. D. 62-81.

1039-40. Outside Guaymas Bay, Sonora, Jan. 23, 1940. Dredging in 12-20
meters over bottom of broken shell and mud. Scinaea latifrons most abun-
dant. D. 82-88.

1042-40. Turner’s Island off south shore of Tiburon Island, Gulf of Cali-
fornia, Jan. 24, 1940. Shore collecting at extreme low tide on reef along
north end of island. Algae very abundant in number as well as variety.
Sargassum, articulated corallines, Padina, Colpomenia, Gigartina, etc.,
most abundant. Surface at ship 15.6°-16°C. D. 89-135.

1044-40. Tiburon Island, Gulf of California, Jan. 25, 1940. Beam trawling
in 4-32 meters off south shore of island, adjacent to Turner’s Island. Sur-
face 15.5°-16°C. D. 136-155.

1045-40. Tiburon Island, Gulf of California, Jan. 25, 1940. Shore collecting
at low tide on south shore opposite Turner’s Island. Beach of rock shingle
covered principally by Padina Durvillaei and Sargassum asymmetricum.
Rock cover otherwise mostly of articulated corallines. Surface at ship 15.5°-
16°C. D. 156-166.

1046-40. Puerto Refugio, Angel de la Guardia Island, Gulf of California,
Jan. 26, 1940. Seine haul over sand just off the beach, south shore of bay.
Surface 15.5°C. D. 167-178.

1048-40. Same locality and date. Dredge haul in 22-44 meters. Mem-

branaceous reds conspicuous. Surface at ship 15.5°C., bottom in 38 meters,
14°C. D. 179-188.

1049-40. Same locality and date. Shore collecting at low tide on rocky shore
and benches, west side of bay. Algae very abundant in number and variety.
No outstanding dominances, however. Surface at ship 15.5°C. D. 189-227.

354 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Sta. 1050-40. Same locality, Jan. 27, 1940. Trawl haul in 4 meters at low tide,
south shore of bay. Surface at ship 15.5°C. D. 228-233.

Sta. Dawson 16-40. Same locality and date. Cast up at high tide on beach,
north side of bay. A great quantity of Ulva predominated, covering the
sand completely. Surface at ship 15.5°C. D. 234-246.

Sta. 1051-40. Same locality and date. Dredge haul in 42 meters, west side of
bay, shell bottom. Surface 15°C., bottom in 38 meters 14°C. D. 247-252.

Sta. 1056-40. Same locality and date. Dredging in 12-22 meters, in channel be-
tween Mejia Island and main body of Angel de la Guardia. Sand and
coralline bottom. Surface 15°C., bottom in 38 meters 14°C. D. 253-281.

Sta. 1053-40. Same locality, Jan. 28, 1940. Shore collecting at low tide, same
place as 1049-40. Most of material scraped from surface of large rocks in
middle littoral. Surface 15°C. D. 282-298.

Sta. 1061-40. Gonzaga, Lower California, at Willard’s Point, Jan. 30, 1940.
Dredge and trawl haul in 60-80 meters over muddy bottom. Surface
17.8°C. D. 299-305.

Sta. 1063-40. Same locality and date. Shore collecting on rocky shore at low tide.
Algae not abundant and most rocks bare or covered with Enteromorpha.
Sargassum short and young; Padina and Rosenvingea frequent. The lo-
cality was in general mucky and with little sand. Surface 17.7°-18°C. D.

306-334.

Sta. 1066-40. Consag Rock, Gulf of California, Jan. 31, 1940. Shore collecting
on small rocky reef at low tide. Rocks and water fouled by seal excrement.
Nothing visible but bits of short Ulva. Surface 15°C. D. 335.

Sta. 1071-40. San Felipe Bay, Lower California, Feb. 2, 1940. Dredge haul over
sandy bottom near rocky shore, 5 meters. Few species evidently because of
silty water and muddy bottoms. Surface 14.5°C. D. 336-339.

Sta. 1072-40. Rock Point (Punta Pefiasco), Sonora, Feb. 2, 1940. Dredging in
22 meters, sand and silt bottom, hydroids, bryozoans, etc. Surface 17.7°C.
D. 340-349.

Sta. 1073-40. Same locality, Feb. 3, 1940. Dredging near shore in 6-20 meters at
high water, sand bottom. Sargassum sinicola abundant. Surface 17.7°C.
D. 350-364.

Sta. 1075-40. Georges Island, Gulf of California, Feb. 3, 1940. On shore at high
water with Ulva and Enteromorpha predominating. Surface 17.7°C. D.
365.

Sta. 1078-40. Tepoca Bay, Sonora, Feb. 4, 1940. Dredging from the ship in 22
meters plus, sandy bottom with abundant worm-tubes, molluscs, etc. Sur-
face 17.7°C. D. 366-382.

Sta. 1076-40. Same locality and date. Shore collecting at low tide on rocky reef.
Richest collecting was in tide pools where articulated corallines were
abundant and some Sargassum maturing. Elsewhere algae scarce and very
short. Surface 17.7°C. D. 383-398.

NO.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

Sta.

10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 355

1079-40. Pond Island at south end of Angel de la Guardia Island, Gulf of
California, Feb. 4, 1940. Shore collecting at medium low tide (middle to
upper littoral). Rocky shore collecting done on the outside of Pond Island
toward the south; lagoon collecting along borders of the “pond” inside.
Surface 16°C. D. 399-430.

1080-40. 4 miles off Pond Island, south of Angel de la Guardia Island, Gulf
of California, Feb. 5, 1940. Dredging in 124-152 meters on coarse sand
bottom. Algae present but probably brought from shallower depths. Surface
16.5°C. D. 431-432.

1081-40. Two miles north of Isla Partida, Gulf of California, Feb. 5, 1940.
Dredging in 110-116 meters. Rock bottom. The algae were taken from the
surface of the rocks although they had been broken loose and were worn
by the action of the net. Surface 17.2°C. D. 433.

1083-40. San Esteban Island, Gulf of California, Feb. 5, 1940. Shore col-
lecting on south shore among rocks and boulders. Sargassum abundant in
lower littoral. Rocks mostly covered in upper and middle littoral with
Herposiphonia. Gigartina abundant, also Ulva and Rhodoglossum. Sur-
face 18.2°C. D. 434-468.

1087-40. Ensenada de San Francisco, near Guaymas, Sonora, Feb. 7, 1940.
Dredge haul in 30-36 meters. Surface 18.9°C. D. 469-475.

1091-40. Puerto San Carlos, just north of Guaymas, Sonora, Feb. 8, 1940.
In 3-8 feet of water near rock-shingle beach. Quiet water of shallow bay.
Surface 18.9°C. D. 476-479.

Dawson 25-40. Same locality and date. Mangrove swamp near small fresh-
water stream mouth. Shallow tidal channels. D. 480-481.

Dawson 26-40. Same locality and date. Stagnant pools from fresh-water
streamlets near bay. One below Titas de Cabra peak, the other above
Mangrove swamp. D. 482-483.

1092-40. Just outside Guaymas Harbor, Catalina, Feb. 9, 1940. Partly on
sandy beach of the lagoon, partly on reef rocks. Surface 17.7°C. Ulva and
Hypnea exceedingly common on the sand. Padina forms almost a pure
stand over many yards of more rocky bottom. Sargassum not present except
as immature stages on the reef. Only middle littoral exposed, however. D.
484-502.

1093-40. Puerto Escondido, Lower California, Feb. 10, 1940. Dredging in
16-28 meters over sand bottom. Surface 19-19.5°C. D. 503-515.

1096-40. Same locality, Feb. 11, 1940. Dredging in 28-40 meters over sand
bottom. D. 516-525.

1104-40. Agua Verde Bay, Lower California, Feb. 12, 1940. Rocky shore at
low tide. Most of collecting from small “rock pockets.’ Algae in general
scanty and nowhere luxuriant. No mature examples of larger species. Sur-
face 19.2°C. D. 526-551.

1100-40. Same locality, Feb. 12, 1940. Dredging in 20-40 meters. D. 552-561.

356 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS vous

Sta. 1106-40. 3 miles off San Francisco Island, Gulf of California, Feb. 13, 1940.
Dredging in 88 meters over coralline and broken shell bottom. Bottom
17 ©) \Di'562.

Sta. 1108-40. San Gabriel, Espiritu Santo Island, Gulf of California, Feb. 13,
1940. Shore collecting at medium tide. Most specimens taken from 5-8 feet
of water by raking for coral and coralline clumps. Only conspicuous sea-
weed on the sand bottom was Caulerpa sertularioides. Beach rocks barren.
Very few conspicuous species; almost pure sandy bottom except for coral
clumps. Surface 21°C. D. 563-573.

Sta. 1107-40. San Lorenzo Channel, between Espiritu Santo Island and mainland
of Lower California, Feb. 14, 1940. Dredging in 12-26 meters over sand
and coralline bottom. D. 574-593.

Sta. 1110-40. San Gabriel, Espiritu Santo Island, Gulf of California, Feb. 14,
1940. Specimens taken by breaking coral clumps which are collected on
bottom of sandy lagoon in 4-8 feet of water. D. 594-598.

Sta. 1112-40. Same locality and date. Collecting in shallow lagoon and aban-
doned oyster-culture ponds where water is very warm and inhabited by
abundant corals and tide-pool fish. Some material from rock shingle over-
flow from lagoon into bay. Surface at ship 21°C. D. 599-620.

Sta. 1113-40. East of Espiritu Santo Island, Gulf of California, Feb. 15, 1940.
Dredging in 104-116 meters over sand bottom. Very few corallines. Same
deep-water form as at Station 1034-1035. D. 621.

Sta. 1117-40. Off Gorda Point, Cape District, Lower California, Feb. 16, 1940.
Dredging in 34-50 meters over fine gray sand. D. 622-627.

Sta. 1115-40. San Jose del Cabo, Lower California, Feb. 16, 1940. Shore collect-
ing at medium low tide on rocky reefs. Algae in general not abundant.
D. 628-647.

ALGAL COLLECTION STATIONS
Dawson — Juty, 1940

Sta. Dawson 50. Rocky point just north of Kino, Sonora, July 16, 1940. Littoral
rocks at medium tide. No large algae visible, only a greenish to reddish
rock cover of Ulva, Centroceras, and other small species. D. 648-666.

Sta. Dawson 51. South channel mouth, between Tiburon Island and the main-
land of Sonora, July 16, 1940. Beach stones at nearly high tide, apparently
cast up and held in sand. D. 667-670.

Sta. Dawson 52. Kino, Sonora, July 14, 1940. Shore collecting along the sandy
beach. Specimens all cast up. D. 671-676.

Sta. Dawson 53. Tiburon Island, Gulf of California, 3 miles southwest of south
channel mouth, July 17, 1940. Collecting in lower littoral on cobblestone
beach. Dictyota-Ishige-Sargassum-Padina association. D. 677-686.

Sta. Dawson 55. Turner’s Island off south end of Tiburon Island, Gulf of Cali-
fornia, July 18, 1940. Same locality as Station 1042-40, Jan. 24, 1940. Col-
lecting on rocky reef at extreme low tide. Surface temp. 31°C. D. 688-758.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA 357

THE PriIncipAL ALGAE FOUND AT TURNER’S ISLAND IN
JANuARY, 1940

Amphiroa pusilla Gigartina Eatoniana
Amphiroa rigida Gymnogongrus sinicola
Botryocladia pseudodichotoma Gymnogongrus divaricatus
var. datilensis Herposiphonia tenella
Ceramium caudatum Hypnea Esperi
Ceramium gracillimum Hypnea Johnstonii
Ceramium sinicola Jania rubens
Chondria californica Laurencia papillosa var.
Codium anastomosans pacifica (young)
Codium simulans Laurencia Johnstonii
Colpomenia sinuosa f. (young)
tuberculata Lophosiphonia villum
Cladophora tiburonensis Lomentaria catenata
Cutleria Hancockii Padina Durvillaei
Dictyota Johnstonii Polysiphonia Snyderae
Ectocarpus Hancockii Polysiphonia simplex
Erythrotrichia carnea Ralfsia californica
Eucheuma uncinatum Sargassum sinicola
Gelidium Johnstonii Ulva rigida
Gelidium pusillum Valoniopsis pachynema

Gigartina Johnstonii

THE PrincipAL ALGAE FOUND AT TURNER’S ISLAND IN

Jury, 1940

Amphiroa pusilla Hildenbrandtia rosea
Amphiroa zonata Hypnea pannosa
Bryopsis plumosa Hypnea nidulans

var. pennata Jania rubens
Ceramium Camouii Laurencia Johnstonii
Ceramium fimbriatum Laurencia papillosa
Chaetomorpha antennina var. pacifica
Champia parvula Lophosiphonia villum
Chondria acrorhizophora Padina Durvillaei
Cladophora graminea Padina mexicana
Corallina pilulifera Polysiphonia simplex
Dictyota hesperia Polysiphonia Snyderae
Dictyota Johnstonii Prionitis kinoensis
Digenia simplex Prionitis Sternbergii
Ectocarpus confervoides Ralfsia pacifica

f. variabilis Rhodochorton sinicola
Erythrocladia irregularis Rhodochorton microscopicum
Gelidium Johnstonii Sargassum lapazeanum (young)
Gelidium microphysa Sargassum sinicola (young)
Goniotrichum elegans Sphacelaria Hancockii
Gracilaria crispata Valoniopsis pachynema

Herposiphonia tenella

358

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

List or NEw NAMES AND COMBINATIONS

Valoniopsis Hancockii sp. nov.
Cladophora tiburonensis sp. nov.
Codium MacDougalii sp. nov.
Ectocarpus sonorensis sp. nov.
Ectocarpus Hancockii sp. nov.
Ralfsia Hancockii sp. nov.
Ralfsia pacifica sp. nov.
Hollenberg ms.
Sphacelaria Hancockii sp. nov.
Desmarestia filamentosa sp. nov.
Desmarestia mexicana sp. nov.
Cutleria Hancockii sp. nov.
Padina mexicana sp. nov.
Sargassum Camouii sp. nov.
Sargassum MacDougalii sp. nov.
Sargassum asymmetricum sp. noy.
Porphyra Thuretii nom. nov.
Setchell & Dawson
Rhodochorton Hancockii sp. nov.
Rhodochorton siniccla sp. nov.
Gelidiella Hancockii sp. nov.
Gelidiella mexicana sp. nov.
Gelidiella ? refugiensis sp. nov.
Lithophyllum Hancockii sp. nov.
Lithophyllum veleroae sp. nov.
Porolithon sonorensis sp. nov.
Dermatolithon veleroae sp. nov.
Litholepis sonorensis sp. nov.
Heteroderma corallinicola sp. nov.
Halymenia ? abyssicola sp. nov.
Halymenia ? refugiensis sp. nov.
Grateloupia Hancockii sp. nov.
Prionitis mexicana sp. nov.
Prionitis guaymasensis sp. nov.
Prionitis kinoensis sp. nov.
Callymenia veleroae sp. nov.
Callymenia guaymasensis sp. nov.
Agardhiella mexicana sp. nov.
Sarcodiotheca elongata comb. nov.

Sarcodiotheca dichotoma comb. nov.

Gracilaria veleroae sp. nov.

Gracilaria Hancockii sp. nov.
Gracilaria guaymasensis sp. nov.
Gymnogongrus sinicola sp. nov.
Gymnogongrus Hancockii sp. nov.
Gigartina Johnstonii nom. nov.
Gigartina pectinata sp. nov.
Gigartina MacDougalii sp. nov.
Rhodoglossum Hancockii sp. nov.
Rhodymenia ? tepocensis sp. nov.
Botryocladia pseudodichotoma var.
datilensis var. nov.
Botryocladia Hancockii sp. nov.
Botryocladia uvarioides sp. nov.
Rhodymenia divaricata sp. nov.
(published 1941)
Rhodymenia rosea sp. nov.
(published 1941)
Rhodymenia Hancockii sp. nov.
(published 1941)
Lomentaria Drouetii sp. nov.
Champia disticha sp. nov.
Champia caespitosa sp. nov.
Callithamnion veleroae sp. nov.
Platythamnion tepocensis sp. nov.
Ceramium sinicola var.
interruptum comb. nov.
Ceramium sinicola var.
Johnstonii comb. nov.
Ceramium equisetoides sp. nov.
Ceramium Camouii sp. nov.
Sorella pinnata sp. nov.
Hollenberg ms.
Grinnellia lanceolata sp. nov.
POLYNEURELLA gen. nov.
Polyneurella Hancockii sp. nov.
Myriogramme divaricata sp. nov.
Laurencia Hancockii sp. nov.
Polysiphonia Hancockii sp. nov.
Lophosiphonia mexicana sp. nov.
VELEROA gen. nov.
Veleroa subulata sp. nov.

VOL. 3

EXPLANATION
OF
PLATES

360 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 31

Fig. 1. Cladophora tiburonensis, habit, x 30.
Fig. 2. Cladophora tiburonensis, tip of a sterile branch, x 250.

Fig. 3. Cladophora tiburonensis, tip of a branch bearing zoospo-
rangia, x 250.

Fig. 4. Ectocarpus Hancockii, portion of a filament of the type
bearing a plurilocular sporangium, x 325.

Fig. 5. Ectocarpus sonorensis, portion of a filament of the type
bearing a plurilocular sporangium, x 225.

Figs. 6-7. Ralfsia Hancockii, a paraphysis and a unilocular spo-
rangium from the type, x 500.

Fig. 8. Sphacelaria Hancockii, portion of a filament of the type
with a propagulum, x 130.

Fig. 9. Valoniopsis Hancockii, portion of the type specimen to
show method of branching, x 10.

PL. 31

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

no. 10

362 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 32
Sargassum Johnstonii, variation in leaves, vesicles, and inflorescences, x 3.75.

Figs. 1-4. Dawson 555, oogonial tips.
Figs. 5-7. Drouet & Richards 2914.
Figs. 8-9. Dawson 476.

Fig. 10-12. Drouet & Richards 2914.
Fig. 13. Dawson 357a.

Figs. 14-15. Antheridial and oogonial “inflorescences” from a single
plant, but sexes not mixed in receptacles.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PROSE

364

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

PLATE 33

VOL. 3

Sargassum Johnstonii and form gracile, variation in leaves, vesicles,

Figs.
Figs.
Figs.
Figs.
Figs.
Figs.
Figs.

and “infiorescences,” x 3.75.

1-2. Dawson 355.

3-5. Form gracile, Dawson 340.
6-8. Form gracile, Marchant 28.
9-13. Form gracile, Dawson 63.
14-16. Form gracile, Marchant 28a.
17-19. Dawson 476.

20-22.

Immature, Dawson 314a.

no. 10

DAWSON :

MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

PL. 33

366 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 34

Sargassum lapazeanum, variation in leaves, vesicles, and “inflores-
cences,” x 3.75.

Figs. 1-8. Johnston 11.
Figs. 9-14. Johnston 10,
Figs. 15-18. Bryant 5.

Figs. 19-25. Marchant 24.
Figs. 26-30. Johnston 20.
Figs. 31-34. Marchant 21.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 34

//

368 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Figs. 1-6.

Figs. 7-8.

Fig. 9.

Fig. 10.

Figs. 11-13.

PLATE 35

Sargassum MacDougalii, Drouet & Richards 3342,
showing variation in leaves and vesicles, x 3.75.

Sargassum MacDougalii, MacDougal, Dec. 1923, two
leaf-types, x 3.75.

Sargassum Camouii, Johnston’s specimen from near
Guaymas, detail of basal holdfast disk, x 1.25.

Sargassum sinicola, Marchant 31, basal holdfast of
small disk and short, massed rhizoids, x 1.25.

Sargassum Camouii, Durham’s specimen from near
Guaymas, showing typical leaf and vesicle form, x 2.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 35

370 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 36
Variation in leaves, vesicles, and “inflorescences,” x 3.75.
Figs. 1-5. Sargassum MacDougalii, Drouet & Richards 3311.
Figs. 6-7. Sargassum MacDougaliit, Drouet & Richards 3287.
Figs. 8-12. Sargassum asymmetricum, Dawson 221 (immature).

Figs. 13-18. Sargassum asymmetricum, Dawson 156.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 36

a2 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 37
Variation in leaves, vesicles, and “inflorescences,” x 3.75.
Figs. 1-7. Sargassum acinacifolium, Marchant 19.
Figs. 8-16. Sargassum acinacifolium, Johnston 75.
Figs. 17-26. Sargassum acinacifolium, Brandegee 2.

Figs. 27-30. Sargassum MacDougalit, Dawson 383 (immature).

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 37

a7

Rg

374

Fig.
Figs
Figs
Figs
Figs

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

PLATE 38

Variation in leaves, vesicles, and “inflorescences,” x 2.12.

1.

. 2-4.

. 5-6.

. 7-9.

. 10-11.

Sargassum horridum, Marchant 22.
Sargassum horridum, Marchant 17.
Sargassum sinicola, Marchant 27
Sargassum sinicola, Brandegee 27.

Sargassum sinicola, Drouet & Richards 3141.

VOL. 3

38

PL.

MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

DAWSON

No. 10

376

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

Sargassum sinicola, variation in leaves, vesicles, and “inflorescences,”

Figs. 1-2.
Figs 3:

Figs. 4-5.
Figs. 6-7.
Figs. 8-11.

PLATE 39

x 2.12.
Marchant 11, oogonial.
Marchant 20, oogonial tips.
Dawson 357, oogonial.
Dawson 357x, intersex.

Variations in receptacles of several plants.

VOL. 3

PL. 39

378 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 40
Variation in leaves, vesicles, and “inflorescences,” x 2.12.

Figs. 1-7. Sargassum herporhizum, Johnston 72.
Figs. 8-12. Sargassum herporhizum, Johnston 55.
Figs. 13-19. Sargassum Brandegeet, Dawson 462.
Figs. 20-21. Sargassum Brandegeei, Dawson 141.
Figs. 22a-22b. Sargassum Brandegeei, Dawson 157.
Figs. 23-25. Sargassum Brandegeet, MacDougal, Dec. 1923.
Fig. 26. Sargassum Brandegeei, Dawson 383.

80

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 41
Rhodochorton sinicola, habit, showing enlarged basal cell
and method of attachment to host, x 175.

Rhodochorton sinicola, portion of a branch bearing a mono-
sporangium, x 400.

Rhodochorton microscopicum, habit on Polysiphonia.
Rhodochorton Hancockii, habit, x 90.

Rhodochorton Hancockii, portion of a filament bearing mono-
sporangia, x 500.

Rhodochorton Hancockit, basal part of a filament showing
simple attachment to host cells, x 500.

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 41

no. 10

382

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 42
Gelidium pusillum, variations in habit, x 7.

A specimen from Costa Rica collected by Dodge.
A smaller form from Costa Rica, Howell 779a.

A Gulf of California form, Drouet & Richards 3299 from
Guaymas.

A depauperate form from Clarion Island, Howell 569b.
A broad-bladed form from Clarion Island, Howell 211.

The same form from the Galapagos Archipelago, Howell
297.

384

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.

Pine eS

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 43

Gelidiella Hancockti, habit of cotype specimen, x 5.
Gelidiella Hancockii, a tetrasporic branchlet, x 35.
Gelidiella mexicana, habit of type specimen, x 7.5.
Gelidiella ? refugiensis, habit of part of type material, x 6.5.

Gelidiella ? refugiensis, tip of sporangial branch showing
openings through cortex, x 50.

Gelidiella ? refugiensis, a single monospore as shed, x 800.

PL. 43

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

no. 10

386

Fig. 1.
Fig. 2.
Fig. 3.
Fig. 4.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

PLATE 44

Gracilaria sp., Dawson 200, habit, x 1.

Halymenia ? refugiensis, habit of the type, x 1.

Halymenia ? refugiensis, cross section of frond, x 250.

Callophyllis sp., Dawson 198, habit, x 1.

VOL. 3

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 44

no. 10

388

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

ee PaaS

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 45

Callymenia veleroae, habit of the type, x 4.
Botryocladia Hancockii, habit of the type, x 3.
Botryocladia Hancockii, superficial view of a cystocarp, x 11.

Botryocladia Hancockii, surface view of the vesicle wall
showing the position of the three layers of cells, x 175.

Botryocladia Hancockii, a single large inner cell from the
vesicle wall bearing gland cells, x 350.

Botryocladia pseudodichotoma, a group of gland cells, x 175.

Botryocladia pseudodichotoma var. datilensis, a group of
gland cells, x 260.

Botryocladia uvarioides, a group of gland cells, x 425.
Botryocladia uvartoides, solitary gland cells, x 425.

Botrycladia uvarioides, gland cells borne on peculiar stel-
late bases, x 650.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 45

390

Fig. 1.
Fig. 2.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 46

Lomentaria Drouetii, terminal portion of a frond, x 4.

Lomentaria Drouetii, cross section of a portion of hollow
frond, showing palisade cortex and the inner fibers, some of
which are somewhat displaced, x 225.

Champia caespitosa, habit of portion of the type, x 7.
Champia caespitosa, cross section of hollow frond, x 42.5.

Champia disticha, habit of complete, individual plant from
the type collection, x 7.5.

Gastroclonium clavatum, cross section of a portion of the
wall of a Mediterranean plant, x 92.

Gastroclonium clavatum, cross section of a portion of the
wall of Dawson 440, x 92.

The same of Dawson 68, x 92.

No. 10

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 46

PAS S0206001 00>
eben!

Cie
FOIE?

= podaaeIaaAD
@
BO IES:

892

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Rar mee els

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 47

Polyneurella Hancockii, habit of the type, x 1.
Polyneurella Hancockii, detail of apical cell, x 450.
Sorella pinnata, branching habit, x 11.

Sorella pinnata, detail of frond apex to show apical cell di-
visions, x 300.

Myriogramme divaricata, portion of a tetrasporic frond of
the type, x 2.

Grinnellia lanceolata, habit of a specimen of the type col-
lection, x 4.5.

;
;
]
|

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 47

no. 10

394

10:

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 48

Lophosiphonia villum, habit of Dawson 737, x 33.

Lophosiphonia villum, basal portion to show creeping fila-
ment and attachment organs, x 57.

Lophosiphonia villum, a tetrasporic branch with a rela-
tively short row of tetraspores, x 92.

Lophosiphonia villum, growing point of a young, vigorous-
ly growing branch, x 400.

Lophosiphonia villum, growing point at tip of an old
branch with slowing growth, showing typical development
of hairs, x 400.

Lophosiphonia villum, detail of cellular arrangement in
median optical view, x 225.

Lophosiphonia mexicana, detail of base and rhizoidal hold-
fasts of the type, x 58.

Lophosiphonia mexicana, detail of growing point, x 400.

Lophosiphonia mexicana, superficial view of cell structure
to show paired appearance, x 175.

Lophosiphonia mexicana, apical portion of tetrasporic branch
from a specimen from Clarion Island, x 250.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 48

Dag

0
m

in
i

=

»)

96

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 49

Herposiphonia tenella, portion of a main creeping axis to
show general branching habit of “langtriebe” and “kurz-
triebe,” x 45.

Herposiphonia subdisticha, portion of a main axis to show
branching habit of “langtriebe” and “kurztriebe,” x 93.

Bostrychia radicans, a tetrasporic lateral branch, x 54.

Bostrychia radicans, portion of tip of a sterile lateral branch,
x 150.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 49

IE em
MWpygaz=

My

[ ii
it 7 pas ty
Beir ft S\ fig
= BESS

(Sie,
=O

398 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 50

Fig. 1. Laurencia Hancockii, portion of an upper branch of the
type, D. 543a, x 11.

Fig. 2. Polysiphonia Hancockii, a single, branched, lateral ramulus
of the type, D. 629c, x 108.

Fig. 3. Callithamnion veleroae, habit of a portion of the type, D.
381f, x 45.

Fig. 4. Callithamnion veleroae, portion of an antheridial frond, x
100.

Fig. 5. Callithamnion veleroae, portion of a cystocarpic frond, x 125.

ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 50

DAWSON : MARINE

No. 10

400

Fig. 1.
Fig. 2.
Fig. 3.

Fig. 4.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

PLATE 51

Ceramium equisetoides, a short tetrasporangial branch, x 200.
Ceramium Camouit, tip of a sterile branch of the type, x 300.

Ceramium Camouii, portion of a tetrasporangial branch
showing cortical involucre, x 300.

Ceramium affine, a branch of a specimen from the type col-
lection bearing tetrasporangia, x 240.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. St

402 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 52

Fig. 1. Rosenvingea intricata, Dawson 306.

Fig. 2. Padina mexicana, photograph of several examples of the
type collection.

No: 10

~
‘¢

aT E

=
<
=
Pee

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

404 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PEATE. 53

Fig. 1. Codium MacDougalu, photograph of the type specimens.

Fig. 2. Ishige foliacea, photograph of narrow summer examples
above, and broad winter examples below, all from the Gulf.

PIS

MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

DAWSON

no. 10

of
tel
fa
jo
4
|
a

406 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOENS

PLATE 54
Fig. 1. Cutleria Hancocku, photograph of type specimens, gameto-
phytic, right, and sporophytic, left.

Ralfsia Hancockti, photomicrograph of a cross section of the
type, x 400.

Fig.

i)

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

no. 10

408

rs)

WwW

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

BIeAGT

55

E
All Figures 74 Natural Size

Lithophyllum
Lithophyllum
Lithophyllum
Lithophyllum

Lithophyllum
son 593.

FHancockiu, the type specimen, Dawson, 619a.
? trichotomum, Dawson 425.
lithophyllotdes, Dawson 513.

pallescens, Dawson 572.

veleroae form, old, weathered specimen, Daw-

VOL.

wo. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA Pino)

410 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

PLATE 56

All Figures Natural Size

Figs. 1-4. Lithophyllum veleroae, Dawson 592.
Figs. 5-8 Lithothamnion australe £. americana, Dawson 61.

Figs. 9-10. Lithothamnion australe, various forms all occurring in
the same collection, Dawson 593a.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

Figs. 11-16

Figs. 17-18.
Fig. 19.
Fig. 20.

PAC AUI Sy
All Figures Natural Size

Lithothamnion australe, various forms all occurring in
the same collection, Dawson 593a.

Porolithon sonorensis, sterile examples, Dawson 226a.
Porolithon sonorensis, tetrasporic example, Dawson 465.

Lithophyllum decipiens, Dawson 479.

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

414 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOlNS

PIPAG Ee S8

All Figures Natural Size

Fig. 1. Lithophyllum ? trichotomum, an example of the type
collection.

1 Biifees, 7, Lithophyllum lithophyllotdes, an example of the type
collection called by Heydrich form bracchiata.

Fig. 3. Lithophyllum lithophylloides, an example of the type
collection called by Heydrich form phyllotdes.

Fig. 4. Lithophyllum ? trichotomum, Dawson 619.

Figs. 5-6. Lithophyllum ? trichotomum, Dawson 226.

Fig. 7. Lithophyllum lithophylloides forms, Dawson 250.

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

416 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PEATE 59
All Figures Natural Size

Figs. 8,11-15. Lithophyllum Digueti, Dawson 591.

Fig. 9. Lithophyllum lithophylloides, Dawson 278.
Fig. 10. Lithophyllum lithophylloides forms, Dawson 250.
Fig. 16. Lithophyllum Digueti, an example from the type col-

lection.

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

418 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL.

PLATE 60

Lithophyllum ? trichotomum, photomicrograph of a longitudinal sec-
tion of an old, fertile branch, showing large empty con-
ceptacles, Dawson 226, x 70.

‘Dey MY \
‘, Me ee
or

. >
, As
AG iow
22, 1%

*

ae S$.
see?

rpc heg

oe es

ries

aN
4 sey
et st,

Ca
é

420 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PIPAGuE ow

Fig. 1. Lithophyllum lithophylloides, photomicrograph of a section
of a tetrasporic crust, Dawson 250, x 50.

Fig. 2. Porolithon sonorensis, photomicrograph of a section of a
tetrasporic crust of the type, Drouet & Richards 3383, x 120.

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 61

1 TRA

42? ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

RAE 62

Fig. 1. Lithophyllum Hancockit, photomicrograph of a_tetraspor-
angial conceptacle in a portion of Dawson 619a, x 120.

=
Q
bd

Dermatolithon veleroae, photomicrograph of a section of a
tetrasporic conceptacle from the type material, Dawson 550,
x 220;

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 62

424 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 65

Fig. 1. Litholepis sonorensis, photomicrograph of a tetrasporic con-
ceptacle of the type specimen, Dawson 290, x 330.

Fig. 2. Heteroderma corallinicola, photomicrograph of an empty
cystocarpic conceptacle of an example from the type collec-
tion, Drouet & Richards 3328a, x 240.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 63

Bae "a
ee .

426 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 64
Fig. 1. Gigartina pectinata, photograph of a specimen of the type
collection, Dawson 239.

Fig. 2. Gigartina MacDougali, photograph of two examples of the
type collection.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 64

428 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

BVA ERG

Fig. 1. Rhodymenia ? tepocensis, two examples of the type collection.

Fig. 2. Gracilaria Hancockit, a specimen of the type collection (be-
low) Dawson 149, and (above) Dawson 177, x 34.

——

No. 10

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

PL. 65

430 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 66

Figs. 1 and 2. Prionitis guaymasensis, examples of several collec-
tions to show variation in size and branching.

No. 10

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

{
MILLIMETER.

PL.

66

432 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PLATE 67

Fig. 1. Prionitis kinoensis, photograph of specimens of the type col-
lection, Dawson 648.

Fig. 2. Prionitis mexicana, photograph of specimens of the type col-
lection, Dawson 628.

PLaoy

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

no. 10

we
}
\
4
\
mae ee

434 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PIA E 6S
Fig. 1. Callymenia angustata, photograph of several examples of
Dawson 369.

Fig. 2. Callymenia guaymasensis, photograph of two specimens of
the type collection, Dawson 49.

ili

MILLIMETE

MILLIME

436 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PEALE 69

Fig. 1. Agardhiella mexicana, photograph of two examples of the
type collection, Dawson 233.

Fig. 2. Grateloupia Hancocki, photograph of several examples of
the type collection, Dawson 650.

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PL. 69

438

—
.

to

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

JPL ANIDIS, 7)
(left) Gelidiopsis variabilis, part of Drouet and Richards
3395.
(right) Gelidiopsis tenuis, an example of Drouet and Rich-
ards 3134c.
(lett) Gracilaria veleroae, an example of the type collec-
tion, Dawson 141la.
(right) Gracilaria guaymasensis, an example of the type
collection, Drouet and Richards 3401.

at

440 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

AACSB ait

Fig. 1. Rhodoglossum Hancock, photograph of a tetrasporic speci-
men of the type collection, Dawson 437.

Fig. 2. (upper left) Gymnogongrus Hancocku, an example of the
type collection, Dawson 649.
Fig. 2. (lower left) Gymnogongrus sinicola, examples of the type

collection preserved in liquid, Dawson 447.

Fig. 2. (right) Gymnogongrus divaricatus, several examples ot
Dawson 94.

no. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA Bia

yeaa ere
: ay

442 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOL. 3

PALIN, V2

Fig. 1. Platythamnion tepocensis, photomicrograph of a portion of
the type specimen, Dawson 379.

a
a9
bo

Veleroa subulata, photomicrograph of upper portion of a
tetrasporic example from the type collection, Dawson 381d.

Pew 2

eae
Bee

pray ay Cee

aoe
tlhe
Wem omoeer”

a

eS £
SS Ge? Gee.
aN 8g OS) ag oe gu
» >)
< eg,
yu

<

teat
sk: Pe 4

/
os

“
i

‘

\

\

MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

DAWSON

no. 10

fewer aN

~
‘

~~.

~L
a

Y

mA SOS,

mat

444

iesyegs 113

Fig. 2.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

Ss

PAG Eas

Botryocladia pseudodichotoma var. datilensis, two examples
of the type collection, Dawson 116. ;

Gastroclonium clavatum, examples of two Gulf collections
to show extremes of variation in size,

No. 10

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

“I

Go

446 ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS VOU: 3

PLATE 74

Fig. 1. Lomentaria catenata, a specimen from Dawson 100.

Fig. 2. Lomentaria Drouetii, a photograph of the type specimen,
Drouet and Richards 3135.

PL. /+

MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

DAWSON

no. 10

448

Fig. 1.

Fig. 2.

ALLAN HANCOCK PACIFIC EXPEDITIONS

PLATE 75

Botryocladia uvarioides, a specimen from the type collection,
Howell 598.

Lomentaria hakodatensis, a typical example of the species
as it occurs in the Gulf.

VOL. 3

No. 10

DAWSON:

MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

bite: 1: ee

ala ala TTT TUCO LLU CLE PLU) LOL) CO LO VO CL Ge Ce
: al | - sh al S|

poe A PLATE 76 eek

Desmarestia filamentosa, photograph of a specimen of the type
tion, x %.

No. 10

DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA

PL. /6

1 Me nee ia Mas) gf ia PIA RE NT
ie : Desmarestia mexicana, photograph of a specimen of the type co
PEIN ton, pA ale he late

No. 10 DAWSON : MARINE ALGAE, GULF OF CALIFORNIA PE?

INDEX

Allan Hancock Foundation Publications of The University of Southern California,
Volume 3. Titles of papers and plate illustrations are in bold face.

Acanthocarpicae, 237
Acarospora, 38
nigromarginata, 38
peltastica, 38
Acarosporaceae, 38
Achlya, 102
Achnanthes, 53, 71
Acrocarpus crinalis, 259
Acropeltis australis, 139
Acroporium pungens, 9
Actinoptychus undulatus, 53, 71
Agardhiella, 288, 436
mexicana, 288, 358, 436
tenera, 288
Aglaozonia, 227
melanoidea, 227
Alectoria sarmentosa, 40
Allomyces, 102
anomala, 102
arbuscula, 102, 107
javanicus, 102, 107
moniliformis, 102
Amphiroa, 199, 231, 232, 276, 277, 311
pusilla, 276, 357
rigida, 276, 357
rigida var. antillana, 276, 277
zonata, 276, 357
Anaptychia, 45
podocarpa, 45
Anatheca, 290
dichotoma, 290
elongata, 289
Anthracothecium canellae-albae, 184
Antithamnion, 313
pacificum, 313
sublittorale, 313
A Review of Genus Rhodymenia with
Descriptions of New Species, 123
Arthoniaceae, 184
Arthothelium
macrothecum, 184
spectabile, 184
Asparagopsis, 257
Sanfordiana, 257
Sanfordiana f. amplissima, 257
Asterionella japonica, 53, 67, 70, 98
Asteromphalus heptactis, 53, 69, 76
Bacteriastrum, 53, 71
elongatum, 65, 69, 71, 84
Bangiaceae, 251
Barbula, 5
Ehrenbergii var. mexicana, 5, 12
replicata, 6
Taylorii, 1, 4, 6, 12

Bartramiaceae, 6
Biddulphia, 71
aurita, 70, 71, 94
mobiliensis, 53
Blastocladiales, 102
Blastocladiella, 108
simplex, 102
variablis, 107
Bonnemaisoniaceae, 257
Bostrychia, 336
radicans, 336, 396
rivularis, 336
Botryocladia, 305
Hancockii, 305, 358, 388
leptopoda, 307
occidentalis, 306, 307
pseudodichotoma, 388
pseudodichotoma var. datilensis,
305, 357, 358, 388, 440
uvaria, 306
uvarioides, 306, 358, 388, 448
Branchioglossum, 321
MacDougailii, 321
Woodii, 321
Bryaceae, 6
Bryopsidaceae, 212
Bryopsis, 212
pachynema, 206
pennata, 212
plumosa var. pennata, 212, 357
Bryum argentium, 6
Buellia, 43
montevidensis, 43
parasema, 186
umbrina, 43
xanthinula, 43, 186
Buelliaceae, 42, 186
Calliblepharis, 123
Callicostella pallida, 5, 9
Callithamnion, 312, 313
endovaginum, 312
microscopicum, 254
veleroae, 312, 358, 398
Callophyllis, 287, 386
Johnstonii, 287
Callymenia, 285
angustata, 285, 286, 434
guaymasensis, 286, 358, 434
pertusa, 287
veleroae, 285, 358, 388
Callymeniaceae, 285
Caloplaca, 42
brachysporum, 41
diphocia phaea, 186

[ 455 ]

SMITHSONIAN warn g 4 1960

SNSTETUT iON

456

dissimilis, 42
elegans, 42, 186
Fernandezianum, 42
Malmeana, 41, 186
Muelleri, 36, 42
murorum, 186
rugulosa, 42
species, 42
Caloplacaceae, 41, 186
Calothrix, 21
dura, 21
pilosa, 16, 21, 26, 30
Calymperaceae, +
Calymperes, 4
Disciforme, 4
Donnellii, 4
Campylopus introflexus, 3, 6
Caulerpa, 198, 212
pinnata f. pectinata, 213
plumaris, 213
racemosa, 198
racemosa var. chemnitzia, 213
racemosa var. uvifera, 213, 214
sertularioides, 198, 213, 356
sertularioides f. longiseta, 214
van Bosseae, 212
Caulerpaceae, 212
Centroceras, 199, 311, 321, 356
bellum, 321
clavulatum, 321
Ceramiaceae, 312
Ceramium, 226, 315, 318, 320
affine, 317, 400
bicorne, 315, 316
byssoideum, 319
Camouii, 319, 357, 358, 400
caudatum, 317, 357
codicola, 318
equisetoides, 320, 358, 400
fimbriatum, 317, 357
gracillimum, 319, 357
horridum, 318
interruptum, 316
Johnstonii, 316
paniculatum, 319, 337
procumbens, 318
serpens, 318
sinicola, 315, 316, 317, 357
sinicola var. interruptum, 316, 358
sinicola var. Johnstonii, 316, 358
transversale, 319
Cerataulina bergonii, 53, 64, 70, 94
Ceratodictyon, 264
Chaetangiaceae, 257
Chaetoceros, 63, 64, 65, 68, 71
affinis, 53, 70, 88
approximatus, 70, 72
atlanticus, 53, 69, 84
coarctatus, 53, 71
compressus, 53, 63, 64, 65, 67, 68,
70, 73, 86

INDEX

concavicornis, 53, 70, 84
constrictus, 53, 64, 65, 70, 88
costatus, 68, 69, 70, 72, 88
curvisetus, 53, 64, 65, 67, 68, 70, 90
danicus, 53, 71
debilis, 53, 64, 65, 67, 70, 73, 90
decipiens, 53, 65, 69
didymus, 53, 64, 65, 70, 86
eibenii, 53
laciniosus, 53, 70
laeve, 53
lorenzianus, 53, 70, 86
messanensis, 53
peruvianus, 53, 69
radicans, 53, 63, 64, 67, 68, 69, 70,
73, 92
simplex, 53, 70
socialis, 53, 63, 67, 70, 73, 92
subsecundus, 70, 72
tetrastichon, 53
Chaetomorpha, 207
aerea, 208
aerea forma Linum, 208
antennina, 205, 207, 357
Chaetophoraceae, 204
Champia, 310, 311
caespitosa, 311, 358, 390
disticha, 310, 358, 390
parvula, 310, 311, 357
Champiaceae, 308
Chantransiaceae, 254
Chiodecton sanguineum, 34
Chiodectonaceae, 34, 184
Chlorophyceae, 201
Chnoospora, 234, 235
pacifica, 234
Chnoosporaceae, 234, 235
Chondria, 325
acrorhizophora, 325, 357
californica, 325, 357
dasyphylla, 325
tenuissima f. californica, 325
Chroococcaceae, 15
Chroococcus turgidus, 15, 30
Chroococcus turgidus var. submarinus,
16
Chrysymenia Enteromorpha, 306
Chylocladia parvula, 310
Chytridiales, 102
Cladophora, 209, 226
albida, 209
delicatula, 210
graminea, 210, 212, 357
hesperia, 211
MacDougalii, 211
microcladioides, 209, 210
ovoidea, 211
Rudolphiana, 209
Rudolphiana f. eramosa, 209
tiburonensis, 211, 357, 358, 360
trichotoma, 210

Cladophoraceae, 207
Cladophoropsis, 206
robusta, 206
Clinophora, 124, 127, 131, 137, 138,
143
Codiaceae, 214
Codium, 118, 204, 214, 216, 217, 316,
318, 353
amplivesiculatum, 215, 216, 217
anastomosans, 215, 216, 218, 357
Brandegeei, 215, 216, 217
cervicorne, 215, 216, 217
conjunctum, 217, 218
contractum, 219
cuneatum, 218, 221
fragile, 204
longiramosum, 215, 217
MacDougalii, 204, 218, 358, 404
reductum, 218
simulans, 199, 204, 215, 216, 217,
218, 221, 357
sinicola, 216
tomentosum, 216
unilaterale, 215, 216
Coelarthrum Albertisii, 306
Coenogoniaceae, 36, 185
Coenogonium
linkii, 185
subvirescens, 36
Colacodasya sinicola, 325
Collemaceae, 36, 185
Colpomenia, 118, 199, 229, 232, 353
sinuosa, 232
sinuosa f. deformans, 222, 233
sinuosa f. expansissima, 233
sinuosa f. tuberculata, 233, 357
sinuosa f. typica, 233
Compsonema, 222
immixtum, 222
Conferva aerea, 208
Corallina, 199, 272, 273, 275, 311
marginata, 258
pilulifera, 275, 357
sororia, 275
Corallinaceae, 266
Corallopsis excavata, 308
Cordylecladia, 295
lemanaeformis, 295
Corethron
criophilum, 54, 71
hystrix, 69, 72, 78
Coscinodiscus, 54, 71
Cruoriaceae, 266
Cutleria, 226, 227
adspersa, 227
Hancockii, 226, 337, 357, 358, 406
Cutleriaceae, 226
Cutleriales, 119
Zanardinia prototypus, 119

INDEX 457

Cyanothrix
primaria, 16, 17, 19
Willei, 16, 17, 19
Cyclodictyon albicans, 9
Cystoseira, 199, 256
Dactyliosolen, 54, 71
mediterraneus, 70, 72
Dasya, 324
elegans, 324
pedicellata, 324
Dasyaceae, 324
Dellesseriaceae, 321
Dendrymenia, 124, 128, 140, 141,
143, 144, 146, 149
flabellifolia, 143, 144, 145, 147, 149
Dendrymeniae, 124, 128, 135, 143, 146
Dermatocarpaceae, 34
Dermatolithon, 274
veleroae, 274, 358, 422
Desmarestia, 236, 237
compressa, 236
filamentosa, 236, 358, 450
media, 236
mexicana, 236, 358, 452
Desmarestiaceae, 236
Dichothrix seriata, 21
Dicranaceae, 3
Dicranema, 299, 334
rosaliae, 299
Dicranemaceae, 299
Dictyonema sericeum, 33
Dictyosphaeria, 198, 205
Versluysii, 205
Dictyota, 118, 228, 251, 256, 272, 356
crenulata, 228
hesperia, 228, 357
Johnstonii, 200, 228, 229, 235, 357
Vivesii, 229
Dictyotaceae, 228
Digenia, 311, 326
simplex, 326, 357
Ditylum brightwellii, 54, 70, 72, 94
Echinocaulon
ramulliferum, 261
rigidum, 261
spinellum, 261
Ectocarpaceae, 220
Ectocarpus, 220, 226
Bryantii, 220
confervoides f. variabilis, 220, 357
gonodioides, 220, 221
Hancockii, 222, 357, 358, 360
Mitchellae, 220
mucronatus, 220
pusillus, 221
sonorensis, 221, 358, 360
Elachista pulvinata, 224
Elachistaceae, 224
Encoelium intricatum, 233

458

Enteromorpha, 202, 353, 354
acanthophora, 202, 203
compressa, 202, 203
intestinalis, 202, 203
Marchantae, 202, 203, 204
prolifera, 202, 203, 204
tubulosa, 202, 203, 204

Entocladia, 204
cingens, 205
codicola, 204, 205
condensata, 204
mexicana, 205
Polysiphoniae, 205

Erythrocladia, 251, 252
irregularis, 251, 357
subintegra, 251

Erythroglossum minimum, 322

Erythropeltis, 251, 252
discigera, 252

Erythrotrichia, 252
californica, 252
carnea, 252, 357
discigera, 252
Kylinii, 252
polymorpha, 251, 252
pulvinata, 252

Estebania conjuncta, 281

Eucampia zoodiacus, 54, 65, 70, 94

Eucheuma, 288, 320
Johnstonii, 288
uncinatum, 288, 357

Euheteroderma, 273

Eurhodymenia, 125, 129, 140

Eusargassum, 237

Fauchea, 304
Gardneri, 133
mollis, 304
Mortensenii, 133
Sefferi, 304

Field Observations on the Algae of
the Gulf of California, 115

Fissidens, 1
Hancockiana, 1, 2, 12
mollis, 1

Fissidens (Semilimbidium)
Hancockiana, 2

Fissidentaceae, 1

Fryella Gardneri, 133

Fucus, 199
caespitosus, 258
palmetta, 134
pusillus, 258
sertularioides, 213

Galaxaura, 258
fastigiata, 258
marginata, 258

Gastroclonium, 312
clavatum, 312, 390, 444

Gelidiaceae, 258, 264

INDEX

Gelidiella, 198, 263
acerosa, 261
Hancockii, 261, 358, 384
mexicana, 262, 358, 384
refugiensis, 262, 358, 384
Gelidiopsis, 264
rigida, 261
tenuis, 264, 438
variabilis, 264, 265, 438
Gelidium, 199, 255, 258, 318
crinale, 259, 260
decompositum, 260
Johnstonii, 260, 357
microphysa, 260, 357
miniatum, 263
pusillum, 258, 357, 382
variabile, 265
Gigartina, 118, 123, 199, 229, 301, 320,
353,355
Chauvinii, 302
Eatoniana, 301, 357
Johnstonii, 302, 357, 358
leptorhynchus, 303
MacDougalii, 302, 303, 358, 426
pectinata, 302, 358, 426
Teedii, 301
Gigartinaceae, 301
Ginannia undulata, 257
Gomphosphaeria aponina, 16, 30
Goniolithon, 268
(Cladolithon) elegans, 267
frutescens, 268
pallescens, 266
strictum, 268
strictum var. nana, 268
Goniotrichum, 251
Alsidii, 251
elegans, 251, 357
Gonodia, 221, 224
(Myriactis), 221
Johnstonii, 224
Marchantae, 224
moniliformis, 224
pulvinata, 224
Gracilaria, 123, 199, 209, 256, 293, 295,
299, 353, 386
compressa, 199, 296
confervoides, 295, 296
crispata, 294, 357
guaymasensis, 298, 358, 438
Hancockii, 297, 358, 428
Johnstonii, 293, 297, 299
lacerata, 293, 294
lichenoides, 296
pachydermatica, 294
pinnata, 294
secundata, 298
sinicola, 293
Sjostedii, 295, 296

subsecundata, 294
veleroae, 297, 358, 438
Vivesii, 293, 297, 299
vivipara, 293
Gracilariaceae, 293
Graphidaceae, 34, 184
Graphis scripta, 184
Grateloupia, 279, 280, 281, 312, 316,
318, 334
acroidalea, 281
denticulata, 281
filicina, 279
Hancockii, 280, 358, 436
Howeii, 281
Johnstonii, 281
prolongata, 279
squarrulosa, 281
Sternbergii var. versicolor, 282
versicolor, 282
Grateloupiaceae, 277
Griffithsia, 314
multiramosa, 315
pacifica, 314
tenuis, 315
Grinnellia, 322
americana, 322
lanceolata, 322, 358, 392
Guinardia flaccida, 54, 70, 78
Gymnogongrus, 299, 300
carnosus, 299
divaricatus, 301, 357, 440
Hancockii, 300, 358, 440
sinicola, 300, 357, 358, 440
Haematomma punicea, 38
Halidrys, 199
Halimeda, 116, 214
discoidea, 214
Halymenia, 277, 278, 279
abyssicola, 278, 358
actinophysa, 277
cinnabarina, 143
refugiensis, 278, 358, 386
Helicophyllaceae, 7
Helicophyllum torquatum, 7
Hemiaulus hauckii, 54, 69
Herposiphonia, 334, 355
secunda, 334
subdisticha, 334, 337, 396
tenella, 334, 357, 396
Heteroderma, 272
corallinicola, 272, 273, 358, 424
Gibbsii, 272, 273
Heterosiphonia, 325
sinicola, 325
Hildenbrandtia, 265
rosea, 265, 357
Hookeriacea, 9
Hookeriopsis diffusa, 9
Hooperia Baileyana, 308, 309

INDEX

459

Hydroclathrus, 198, 234
cancellatus, 234
clathratus, 234

Hydrocoleum, 23, 24
cantharidosmum, 24, 28
comoides, 23, 26, 28

Hymenostomum, 6

Hypnea, 199, 290, 291, 355
Esperi, 292, 357
Johnstonii, 292, 357
Marchantae, 290, 291
nidifica, 290, 291
nidulans, 291, 357
pannosa, 291, 292, 357

Hypneaceae, 10, 290

Hypoglossum, 321
attenuatum, 321

Inquirendae, 142

Iridophycus, 304

Ishige, 119, 234, 235, 256
foliacea, 119, 229, 234, 235, 337, 404
Okamurae, 119
Okamurai, 235

Ishigeaceae, 234

Jania, 198, 231, 232, 277

Jania rubens, 277, 357

Jantinella, 325
sinicola, 325

Johannesbaptistia, 16
Gardneri, 16
primaria, 16, 17, 20, 28
Willei, 16

Kallymenia, 123

Laminariaceae, 237

Lauderia andulata, 78

Lauderia borealis, 70, 72, 78

Laurencia, 199, 205, 318, 326
estabaniana, 328
Hancockii, 328, 358, 398
Johnstonii, 328, 357
obtusiuscula, 327, 328
obtusiuscula var. corymbifera, 327
obtusiuscula var. laxa, 327, 328
pacifica, 326
paniculata, 326, 327
papillosa, 327
papillosa var. pacifica, 326, 357
sinicola, 328

Lecanora varia, 185

Lecanoraceae, 38, 185

Lepidopilum flexifolium, 9

Leptocylindrus danicus, 54, 64, 70, 78

Leptogium, 36
azureum, 36
denticulatum, 36, 185
marginellum, 37

Leptotrema, 36
mastoideum, 36

Leucobryaceae, 3

460

Leucobryum Martianum, 3
Lichens of the G. Allan Hancock
Expedition of 1934, Collected by
Wm. R. Taylor, 33
Licmophora, 71, 72
abbreviata, 71, 72
Linum, 208
Lithodesmium undulatum, 54, 70, 94
Litholepis, 275
sonorensis, 275, 358, 424
Lithophyllum, 199, 266
bracciata, 269, 414
bracciatum, 269
californiense, 266
complanata, 267
decipiens, 270, 412
dentatum, 270
dentatum f. dilatata, 270
Digueti, 269, 416
Diguetii, 269
elegans, 267
frutescens, 267, 268
Hancockii, 268, 358, 408, 422
lithophylloides, 269, 408, 414
416, 420
Lithophylloides f. bracciata, 269,
414
Oe aaa f. phylloides, 269,
4

Margaritae, 266, 267
Okamurae, 266
pallescens, 266, 408
racemus, 269
trichotomum, 267, 268, 408, 414,
418
veleroae, 270, 358, 408, 410
Lithothamnion, 267, 271
australe, 271, 410, 412
australe f. americana, 271, 410
bracchiata, 271
bracchiata f. tualensis, 271
bracchiata f. ubiana, 271
corraloides f. australis, 271, 410
dentatum, 269
Digueti, 269
elegans, 267
elegans f. angulata, 267
elegans f. complanata, 267
(Lepidomorphum) pallescens, 266
Margaritae, 266
mesomorphum var. ornatum, 274
montereyicum, 271
pallescens, 266
racemus, 266, 269
trichotomum, 267
Lithothamnium, 119
Lola, 208
lubrica, 208
Lomentaria, 199, 308, 310
Baileyana, 309
catenata, 308, 337, 357, 446
Drouetii, 309, 358, 390, 446

INDEX

hakodatensis, 308, 309, 337, 448

parvula, 310

sinensis, 308
Lophocladia, 335
Lophosiphonia, 332

mexicana, 333, 358, 394

villum, 332, 357, 394
Lyngbya

aestuarii, 23

epiphytica, 24, 25, 28

gracilis, 25, 26, 28

gracilis f. monilis, 25, 28

Menegheniana, 25

semiplena, 26, 28, 30

versicolor, 26, 28
Macrocystis, 237

pyrifera, 237
Macromitrium mucronifolium, 7
Malacocarpicae, 237
Marine Algae of the Gulf of

California, 189
Melobesia, 272

farinosa, 272

Gibbsii, 272

tenuis, 272
Meneghiniella Brandegeei, 190, 232
Merismopedia

Gardneri, 16

glauca, 16, 28

glauca f. mediterranea, 16, 28
Meteoriaceae, 8
Meteoriopsis

Anderssonii, 8

patula, 8
Microcoleus tenerrimus, 24, 30
Micromitrium fragile, 7
Minksia

caesiella, 185

candida, 185

irregularis, 185

saxicola, 183, 184, 185
Monoblastia

lutescens, 183, 184

palmicola, 184
Monoblepharella, 103, 104

Taylori, 101, 103, 107, 110, 112
Monoblepharidales, 103
Monoblephariopsis, 104
Monoblepharis, 103, 104, 105, 107

ovigera, 104

regignens, 104

sphaerica, 105

Taylori, 103, 104, 107
Mosses of the G. Allan Hancock

Expedition of 1934 Collected by

Wm. R. Taylor, 1
Myriactis, 221

Sargassi, 224
Myriogramme, 323

carnea, 324

divaricata, 323, 358, 392

minuta, 324

Myrionemataceae, 222
Myxophyceae of G. Allan Hancock
Expeditions of 1934 Collected by
Wm. R. Taylor, 15
Navicula, 54, 71
Neckeraceae, 8
Neckeropsis
disticha, 8
undulata, 8
Nemacystus, 232
Brandegeei, 232
Nemastomaceae, 287
Neomonospora multiramosa, 315
Neurocarpus, 229
zonarioides, 229, 230
Nitzschia
longissima, 54, 70
pungens var. atlantica, 70, 72, 98
seriata, 54, 64, 65, 67, 68, 70, 98
Nodularia fusca, 16, 17, 19
Octoblepharum
albidum, 4
pulvinatum, 4
Olpidium, 107
Orthostichopsis tetragona, 7
Orthotrichaceae, 7
Oscillatoria laetevirens, 26, 28
Oscillatoriaceae, 22
Padina, 118, 229, 230, 272, 353, 354,
355, 356
Durvillaei, 199, 229, 230, 231,
241, 353, 357
mexicana, 231, 357, 358, 402
Vickersii, 231
Palmaria, 124, 131
Palmer, Edward, 189
Palmettae, 124, 126, 127, 133, 134, 136,
138, 143
Parmelia
crinita, 39
cristifera, 39
latissima, 39, 185
Soyauxii, 39
sulphurata, 186
tinctorum, 39
Parmeliaceae, 39, 185
Pelvetia, 199
Pertusae, 124, 125, 129
Pertusaria, 38
Pertusariaceae, 38
Petrocelis, 266
Phaeophyceae, 201, 220
Philonotis tenella, 6
Phormidium monile, 25, 26
Phycomycetes Recovered from Soil
Samples Collected by W. R.
Taylor on the Allan Hancock
1939 Expedition, 101
Phyllophora cuneifolia, 128, 130
intricata, 138

INDEX

Phyllophoraceae, 299
Physcia
adglutinata, 44
aegilata, 44, 186
alba, 44, 186
minor, 44
picta, 44
sorediosa, 44
Physciaceae, 43, 186
Pilotrichaceae, 8
Pilotrichum, 8
Amazonum, 8
bipinnatum, 9
Plankton Diatoms of the Gulf of
California Obtained by the G.
Allan Hancock Expedition of
1936, 47
Plankton Diatoms of the Gulf of
California Obtained by Allan
Hancock Pacific Expedition of
1937, 61
Planktoniella sol, 53, 54, 70, 76
Platythamnion tepocensis, 314, 358, 442
Pleurosigma, 54, 71
Pliostroma, 273
Polyneurella, 322, 358
Hancockii, 323, 358, 392
Polyopes, 282
sinicola, 282
Polya touts 251, 2555329, 55 s5555

californica, 332
dendroidea, 335
Hancockii, 331, 358, 398
Johnstonii, 329
Marchantae, 205, 329
pennata, 334
senticulosa, 330
simplex, 331, 357
sinicola, 329
Snyderae, 330, 357
sonorensis, 330
villum, 332, 333
Porolithon, 273, 274
sonorensis, 273, 274, 358, 412, 420
Porphyridaceae, 251
Porphyra, 253
leucosticta, 253, 254
perforata, 253
perforata f. segregata, 253
pertusa, 129
Thuretii, 253, 254, 358
Pottiaceae, 4

barbula (hydrogonium) Taylorii, 4

Pringsheimia, 205
Marchantae, 205

Prionitis, 282, 283, 284
abbreviata, 282, 283, 284
filiformis, 283
guaymasensis, 283, 358, 430

461

462

kinoensis, 284, 357, 358, 432
mexicana, 283, 358, 432
Sternbergii, 282, 283, 284, 357
Sternbergii var. versicolor, 282
Pseudocyphellaria
aurata, 38
xantholoma, 37
Pseudoeunotia doliolus, 54, 67, 70, 98
Psorogloena subensis, 34
Pterobryoceae, 7
Pterosiphonia, 334
californica, 335
dendroidea, 335
pennata, 334, 335
Pyllophora cunifolia, 128
Pyrenulaceae, 183
Pyxine brachyloba, 43
Ralfsia, 220, 222
californica, 223, 357
Hancockii, 223, 358, 360, 406
pacifica, 222, 357, 358
verrucosa, 222
Ralfsiaceae, 222
Ramalina, 41
alludens, 39
complanata, 40, 186
dasypoga, 40
interponens, 41
Puiggarii, 41
subasperata, 40
subcalicaris, 40
subfraxinea, 40
Usnea, 40, 41, 186
Usnea var. Usneoidella, 41
Rhacopilaceae, 7
Rhacopilopsis trinitensis, 10, 12
Rhacopilum tomentosum, 7
Rhizidiomyces bivellatus, 108
Rhizoclonium lubricum, 208
Rhizophidium carpophilum, 102
Rhizosolenia, 71
acuminata, 70, 72, 82
alata, 54, 69, 72, 82
alata f. indica, 69, 72, 82
bergonii, 69, 72, 80
calcar avis, 54, 70, 71, 82
delicatula, 54, 71, 80
fragillisima, 54, 70
imbricata, 70, 72, 80

imbricata var. shrubsolei, 70, 72, 80

semispina, 54, 71

setigera, 53, 54, 70, 80
stolterfothii, 54, 65, 70, 80
styliformis, 54, 69, 71, 72, 80

styliformis var. longispina, 69, 72,
80

Rhodochorton, 254, 256
arcuatum, 255
Hancockii, 255, 256, 358, 380

INDEX

microscopicum, 254, 357, 380
sinicola, 256, 357, 358, 380
variabile, 256
Rhodoglossum, 304, 355
Hancockii, 304, 358, 440
Rhodomelaceae, 325
Rhodomenia, 123
Rhodophyceae, 190, 201, 251
Rhodymenia, 123, 124, 130, 133, 134,
142, 146, 148, 297, 308
arborescens, 129, 148, 149, 160, 180
adnata, 128, 142
anastomosans, 128, 143
attenuata, 127, 139, 158, 168
australis, 127, 139, 156
californica, 126, 135, 136, 140, 141,
160
capensis, 127, 138
cinnabarina, 128, 143
coacta, 126, 132
corallicola, 126, 134
corallina, 123, 129, 135, 140, 146,
147, 148, 149, 160, 162, 170, 178
cuneifolia, 125, 128, 130
dichotoma, 128, 142
divaricata, 128, 141, 166, 307, 385
epimenioides, 128, 143
erythraea, 125, 131
eurhodymenia, 125
flabellifolia, 128, 143, 145, 146, 147,
162
foliifera, 127, 136
georgica, 132
Hancockii, 128, 146, 160, 172, 307,
358
Howeana, 126, 135, 158
indica, 125, 132
intricata, 127, 138
javanica, 128, 143
lanceolata, 125, 130
leptophylla, 128, 143, 144
leptophylloides, 128, 144, 160, 174
ligulata, 126, 134, 136
linearis, 127, 137, 143
liniformis, 126, 136
lobata, 129, 147, 158, 176, 307
lobulifera, 127, 137, 170
mamnillaris, 128, 143
novazelandica, 127, 136, 164
occidentalis, 128, 142
pacifica, 128, 142, 160
palmata, 123, 126, 130, 131, 132,
133, 156
palmatiformis, 126, 132, 133
palmetta, 125, 126, 132, 134, 136,
140, 156
palmettiformis, 128, 140, 141, 164
palmipedata, 129, 149, 160, 168
pertusa, 124, 125, 129, 130, 156

INDEX 463

peruviana, 125, 130
prolificans, 127, 138
punctata, 126, 132
rhizoides, 128, 146, 147, 160, 172
rhizoidifera, 128, 143
rosea, 128, 141, 166, 307, 358
sanguinea, 125, 130
Schmittii, 127, 139
Setchellii, 126, 133
Skottsbergii, 128, 143, 144, 145, 146,
162, 174
spinulosa, 126, 132
stenoglossa, 127, 138
stipitata, 125, 130
tepocensis, 307, 358, 428

Rhodymeniaceae, 304

Rivulariaceae, 21

Roccella, 36
Babingtonii, 34, 36, 185
dicipiens, 35
difficilis, 35
portentosa, 35

Roccellaceae, 34, 185

Rosenvingea, 354, 402
intricata, 233, 402

Sarcodiotheca, 289
dichotoma, 290, 358
elongata, 289, 358
linearis, 289

Sargassaceae, 237

Sargassum, 115, 117, 118, 189, 198, 199,
220; 224, 225,'229; 232,237,238)
272, 315, 321, 334, 353, 354, 355, 356
acinacifolium, 238, 242, 244, 372
asymmetricum, 238, 242, 244, 353,
358, 370
Brandegeei, 239, 249, 378
Bryantii, 242, 243
californicum, 246, 248
Camouii, 224, 238, 246, 247, 248,
358, 368
cylindrocarpum, 246, 247
guardiense, 240
herporhizum, 239, 249, 378
horridum, 224, 239, 245, 247, 374
insulare, 242, 243
Johnstonii, 238, 239, 240, 362
Johnstonii f. gracile, 240, 241, 364
Johnstonii f. laxius, 240, 241
lapazeanum, 224, 238, 241, 242, 243,
357, 366
Liebmanni, 250
MacDougalii, 238, 241, 242, 243,
245, 358, 368, 370, 372
Marchantae, 245, 247
paniculatum, 246, 248
polyacanthum f. americanum, 246,
248
sinicola, 199, 239, 245, 246, 247,
354, 357, 368, 374, 376

Schizothrix Hancockii, 22, 23, 30
Schizothrix f. submersa, 23
Schizymenia, 119, 287
Johnstonii, 287
violacea, 287
Schréderella delicatula, 71, 72
Scinaia, 257
furcellata var. undulata, 257
Johnstoniae, 257, 258
latifrons, 258
Scytonema fuliginosa, 21
Scytosiphon, 233
Scytosiphonaceae, 232
Sematophyllaceae, 9
Sematophyllum caespitosum, 10
Skeletonema costatum, 54, 65, 67, 70, 73,
76
Solieriaceae, 288
Some Lichens from the American
Tropics Collected by Wm. R.
Taylor, 183
Sorella, 321
pinnata, 321, 358, 392
Sphaerococcus, 123
corallinus, 128, 148
flabellifolius, 144, 147
ligulatus, 134
linearis, 137
palmettoides, 135
Sternbergii, 282
Sphacelaria, 224, 252, 255
brevicorne, 225
cornuta, 225
furcigera, 224
Hancockii, 225, 357, 358, 360
novae-caledoniae, 226
Sphacelariaceae, 224
Spirogyra, 208
Spirulina
socialis, 27
subtilissima, 27
tenerrima, 27, 30
Sporochnaceae, 232
Squamariaceae, 265
Stephanopyxis, 54
turris, 71, 72, 76
Sticta
aurigera, 37
mougeotiana, 37
mougeotiana var. xantholoma, 37
Stictaceae, 37
Stictina
Weigelii, 38
Weigelii var. beauvoisii, 38
Surirella, 71, 72
Synchytrium, 107
Syrrhopodon incompletus, 4
Taenioma, 324
perpusillum, 324
Taxithelium planum, 9, 10

464

Teloschistaceae, 42
Teloschistes
exilis, 42
flavicans, 43
Thalassionema nitzschioides, 54, 64,
65, 68, 70, 96
Thalassiosira
condensata, 54, 71
decipiens, 54, 70, 76
rotula, 54, 71, 76
Thalassiothrix
acuta, 54
frauenfeldii, 54, 69, 96
heteromorpha, 54, 55, 65
longissima, 54, 69, 96
mediterranea, 71
Thelotremaceae, 36
The Marine Algae of the Gulf of
California, 189
Tildenia, 21
Triceratium, 71, 72
Trypetheliaceae, 184
Trypethelium aeneum, 184
Ulva, 201, 275, 354, 355, 356
angustata, 201

INDEX

dactylifera, 201
lactuca, 202
rigida, 202, 357
teniata, 201
Ulvaceae, 201
Usnea, 40, 41
Usneaceae, 39, 186
Valonia confervoides, 206
Valoniaceae, 205
Valoniopsis, 206, 207
Hancockii, 207, 358, 360
pachynema, 206, 207, 357
Velero III, 117, 123, 191, 195
Veleroa, 335, 358
subulata, 335, 358, 442
Vesicularia amphibola, 10
Wurdemannia, 198, 263, 264, 265, 334
miniata, 189, 263, 264, 265
setacea, 263
Zaca, 61, 190, 195, 201, 326
Zanardinia, 119, 227
collaris, 119, 227
prototypus, 119, 227
Zygocarpicae, 237

ays
ie

ut
ai oe

1
‘

a *
tot dee

ees

L ~ ¥ me Por
! j he Wes S
, - : i rte. c ‘4
4 hs ras } v4) . 2 ah
‘ ;
if 5 a FP
a 2 i 1 ines : *
aoe f “ ny r
; ef Mrs
7 j > |
S .
5 oy
j
i
‘ , +
{ S pe
. wv,
4 z \ ‘ S.
ae J
x A, "5
{ , Pte
r ?
"a ;
j
, 7; -y
fh
j
a d pws,
ft yikes 4 ‘
L el
= p )
i ; a van
} ; a a5
f
5 le
: ’
t } } -
7 ef eee ne Yi
\ eae! a
~y ' y , ¢
g ‘ 4 th
: ;
, Pr 4 it » ay
~ ;

ty
he

y 4
,
O.

SO,
Wasi

SI Nase

RARIES SMITHSONIAN

RGR oro 7
Neos

INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YY!

NOI.

Nino .

NOI,
NOI

INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION

INSTITUTION

LNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS

S3INVUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITL

os

a

RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYV

SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLINS SJIuyvVuaIT L
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUSIT LIB

SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN

” 3 Sl
<” i Ws
= “Ss = 4 AWN =
<5 = < = BR <
oc cx RQ om
faa) 5 co = _ NN co
ie i 2 cer z ee
LNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYsgIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTIT
edhe Ss iT = i im
wo ae = ow _ ow
Pe) Yy = 70 = Pe)
5 URE a F see
= Ws : 3° :
m SS 2 m n* m

RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31uVve

wn ” z n
= 2 < z= g
=f 4 z =
Ne 5 i © aE
INS wo wo GANT) n
NN SS oO (@) a O
. ‘ . > aie a
oar z i 2
LNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS

saiuvydiy LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITU

NOILNLILSNI

RARIES_ SMITHSONIAN

55

NVINOSHLIWS S3IUVe

NOLLNLILSNI
NOLLALILSNI

INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI

SaINYVHUSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN

INSTITUTION
NS
SAS
SS
INSTITUTION

INSTITUTION

ti

IALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUEIT LIBRARIES

NVINOSHLINS S3!1u¥vVeaITI_LIBRARIES

SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
SMETFHSONIAN
Le
SMITHSONIAN

NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS S31UW

SMITHSONIAN _ INSTITUTION

<AHSOW,
sat Ja -« * VSI

GES
SN
FES

LES

TSM
(> are

SN

SUSONT I.
Sn tA,

attr 1 SAAS

= % Wy » EP | a gi Sn, CTU oe FF ray =, ee.
Sy S > ‘ on Nase ro) as’ fe ve 2 ro) S/Nosw) se
J ae a) = -
ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3INVYUaIT
5 ie 5 2 ae = a
= a = 2 E a
a ” = ”
z | o z w ite V
JILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3SIYVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
Zz 2) = ee: ” Ss Y
3 = Le en < :
Seen a ees wW 4 a =
a oO rc. D NM * = Oo z
7) 7) n WN 7) a U
= O 4 ae oO ac re
L, nd = sas z FE 2
Ss > ; = : > S >
n 2 n ig Zz ” 2
ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS E
3 a 2 # z xs Fe z
a a” = wn RS a Y
<5, = os C < pe C
; a . oc =
: = i 5 MA f= :
= Gp O = O Ace C
as = al ad bi ze z
LILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
a = e z ne z
ow = = Yh ; ow =
: - z - GY: :
= é -.4/ Ae 2 ;
: z H Z a Z

NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVYgIT

7) 2
z z z < = <
= z om = = Z
\ z é i: a: zs 5
IAN Oo = Gs pats e) J
S SE E Zz EF Zz :
ie 2S Ss 5 g
LILSNI NVINOSHLIWS S3SIYVYNE!IT LIBRARIES INSTITUTION
tif G 2 m 2 (
7) ad n lu = u
= o = = a a
a3 * <
S oc S zs = ao
2 Bik =i Zz ay Zz ‘s
ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUYSiIT
Zz ee ce
= e 5 Be =
See Po) == >] — a
D = o on D :
aati z D ee }
pS NVINGSHIING oa lyvud ryt BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION |
ie: < A er Gre
z = z i Z AYN; =
3 ae He z 9 GS 3
=e BEC 29 a (oe) st \ C
& = = = = ‘ae
= > = > Ss >
” 2 79) — ” P

» SMITHSONIAN NOILMLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1uvUaII

Z B 5 = ” :
. Gh, Ua YN aa rr SS W VoSLRN 7
- ~¢ 4°42 BMW - Gem 2 SS — Gem